Contents

Copyright

Praise for Ash and Sand

Map of the Ascom

Map of Pyu

Summary of Book Two: Kings of Ash

Prologue

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31

Chapter 32

Chapter 33

Chapter 34

Chapter 35

Chapter 36

Chapter 37

Chapter 38

Chapter 39

Chapter 40

Chapter 41

Chapter 42

Chapter 43

Epilogue

Where to find more

Acknowledgements

About the Author

Kings of Heaven

Ash and Sand, Book Three

Author: Richard Nell

Email: email@richardnell.com

Website:http://www.richardnell.com

All material contained within copyright Richard Nell, 2020. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission from the author.

The following is a book of fiction. Names, characters, places, and events are either the product of the author's imagination, or used in a fictitious manner. Any resemblance to actual persons, living or dead, or actual events, is purely coincidental.

Cover art by Derek Murphy

Praise for Ash and Sand

"Kings of Heaven has carved Ash and Sand as one of the best fantasy trilogies I've ever read."

Novel Notions

"No other character has captured my attention like Nell's creation."

Fantasy Book Review

"Ruka is probably my favorite character in fantasy."

The Nerd Book Review

"Emotional, heartbreaking, and bloody. The story is unpredictable and addictive, proving Ash and Sand will be a series of surpassing excellence."

The Grimmedian

"If you're looking for epic high fantasy that's vivid and grand, you will cherish this series."

Kreativejoose

"A spectacular culmination to the Ash and Sand trilogy. As a whole, the series is a masterpiece."

Fantasy Book Critic

Summary of Book Two: Kings of Ash

Note from the Author

Below is a very brief summary of the important plot points and happenings of Book 2, Kings of Ash. With such a large book, many things will of course be left out. Due to the chronological leap that takes place, I'll break it down by the events of 'the present', and 'the past' (the past being approximately fifteen years before the events of 'the present').

The Past

Ruka, son of Beyla, having sailed out North from the Ascom, discovers the island kingdoms of Pyu. There he is taken prisoner in Halin city, and placed in the barbaric slave-pits of the island's monarch, King Trung. He is tortured and forced to fight, but is broken out of prison by a Batonian ex-monk and pirate named Arun, then taken to King Farahi and his sister, Kikay.

In Sri Kon's palace, Ruka helps fend off an attempted assassination, saves Arun's life, and begins an island education under Farahi's supervision. He learns a great deal about the world, helps build new projects, and eventually befriends the island king. With Farahi's help, Ruka returns home with a promise of aid and friendship, and a plan to destroy King Trung.

In the land of ash, Ruka begins making allies. He re-unites with the mighty Chief Aiden and his former retainers, and the skald Egil. He makes a pact with Dala, now a High Priestess, and 'the nightman' Chief Birmun, together recruiting a force not only to fulfill Ruka's plot, but to take their people to a new world.

Once ready, they sail to Halin, destroy Trung and most of his family, and take a large group of female prisoners home to the land of ash. True to his word, Farahi opens secret trade, and begins sending supplies and expertise to help Ruka and his people prepare for the new world. With Dala's help, Ruka convinces the chiefs, matrons, and priestesses they must unite to this dream of paradise. They prepare to deal with the many obstacles Farahi sees in his visions, including betrayal from island lords, disease, and the threat of the Naranian empire. To transform the Ascom, build a great fleet, and stockpile enough weapons and armor, it takes over a decade.

The Present

Ruka and his first wave arrive as 'conquerers' in a ruse with Farahi. They occupy Sri Kon, attempt to control the many illnesses swapped between their people, and to deal with anyone Farahi says will betray.

Meanwhile, Kale Alaku is poisoned in Mesan by his friend Osco's father, and forced to save himself with magic. Osco strips his father of his title as patriarch and takes it for himself, leaving his wife in charge before taking his house's elite troops with Kale. They make a long, difficult march to Tong, forced to fight Naranian troops along the way. They also find the ricelands ravaged by drought, and Kale offers to intervene in return for King Kapule's help. After some difficulty, he manages to bring the monsoon, and crosses the King's Sea with a fleet and an army to re-take his homeland.

After a debate with Farahi, Ruka and the men of ash meet them. They charge the army with cavalry before Kale's magic forces them to withdraw, and on seeing the great power of Kale with his own eyes, Ruka considers surrender. But Kale pursues, flying over the city to the palace with his magic, ripping apart his father's fortress to face Ruka. Most of his power is absorbed somehow by Ruka's alter-ego Bukayag, and Kale withdraws, but not before Farahi is killed in the battle.

Ruka decides to wipe Kale and his army off the island. He attacks with all his men, and in the chaos of the battle, strikes at Kale, and kills him. His army destroys or routs the islanders, with only Osco and his Mesanite square standing their ground. Ruka spares them, sending them back to Tong to pass a message of peace, and alliance.

In his Grove, Ruka digs Kale a grave. But he soon realizes, the sorcerer-prince is not like his other corpses…

Prologue

"Brother! Brother!" A young monk scrambled over worn steps, leading to a private meditation square. "Brother," he arrived breathing hard and sweaty, prostrating himself in respect. "I… apologize, for this intrusion…" he took a few ragged breaths.

Lonakarak of the Junisita tribe, ex-master of the Ching, did his best to focus old, rheumy eyes, and exhaled what remained of his serenity.

"Out with it boy, I'm too near death for pleasantries."

The Batonian initiate glanced to ensure they were alone.

"The spirit of light, Master. He awakens."

Master Lo froze as a shiver raced down his curving spine. He pushed to his feet and the boy helped him descend towards the ancient monastery.

"Don't wait for me, boy, run ahead. Wake Brother Anzan, and Brother Genyo, they'll know what to do."

"I did that first, Master."

"Good lad. Have the lists brought, and a child from every promising bloodline." Afternoon light peaked over the mountains, and Lo nearly tripped as another thought occurred to him. "The physical rituals…were they completed?"

"Yes, Master," the boy's eyes showed his pride. "We collected the clippings, oils, and other secretions with the usual methods. The spirit will awaken clean and refreshed."

Lo's old heart regained some luster, and he patted the boy's arm. Still, it was far too soon. The spirit wasn't supposed to wake for at least a month, which meant he had been disturbed by a dream, or would have some demand. That someone or something would have awoken him was inconceivable, so Lo didn't bother asking if it was so.

With the boy's help, he limped to his room and fetched ceremonial robes and oils. It was vital that the spirit roused to familiar surroundings, faces and scents, or else he might become confused, or…agitated.

To keep from the prying eyes of the uninitiated, Lo and his guide took the secret passage from the old wing, through tunneled rock to the base of the mountains. As they emerged they found the other masters in haphazard dress, surrounded by panicked initiates arranging bowls of food, water, and alcohol. Half a dozen blindfolded women waited with crying infants doing their best to feed or otherwise soothe them.

"Brother Lo," Brother Genyo came forward with obvious relief. "Excuse our disarray, but I assure you nearly everything is arranged. If you require anything, we are here to support you."

Lo smiled politely and bowed. Genyo would indeed do anything Lo asked, though not out of loyalty or kindness. He was an ambitious snake who'd waited several decades for Lo to die, but in this moment he knew Lo held the lives of all in his hands.

"Thank you for your unwavering support. Please have the hopefuls ready near the spirit's home."

"Of course, brother."

Lo limped up the holy path. It was a fair climb up the volcano, and custom dictated it must be made without assistance. The steps at least were well worn over the centuries, littered with decorative holy relics, plaques and pools. Lo wondered for a moment how many times he had ascended, but quickly gave up, having long ago lost count.

Halfway he noticed it was rather quiet in his mind, and chuckled. "Nothing to say this afternoon?"

"I prepare for death," hissed his shadow, "as should you."

"Perish the thought," Lo mumbled. "I'd miss your sunny disposition."

They walked on in silence until they reached the holy cave, and the plateau. The spirit was thankfully still half alert, his skin glowing with light as he basked in the sun, warmth radiating from him in the renewal. Lo knelt and waited patiently.

It could take all day to be noticed, but it was better to be uncomfortable than to speak and risk disturbing the spirit before he was ready. Lo meditated and recited several chanted prayers in his mind to occupy the time. At one hundred and eighty seven years old, Lonakarak was very good at waiting.

"Good morning, child."

Lo smiled at his master's voice. That it was not morning was irrelevant—when the spirit woke he preferred to think it was, and so Lo blinked and rose, repeating the words spoken since before the first island king.

"Good morning, Exalted. On behalf of all your worshipers, I thank you for your presence."

The island god Ando smiled, and Lo withheld a sigh of relief. It was risky but overall better to direct the conversation, if he could manage it, and this initial success made him confident enough to try.

"You have woken earlier than expected, Exalted. Is anything amiss? Can I serve you in some way?"

Ando blinked as if confused, then looked at the sun. "I had a dream," he said, eyes still unfocused.

"Another battle, Exalted?"

The spirit's neck turned, his eyes squinting dangerously.

"How did you know that?"

Lo winced, and considered his words. Describing the dream usually pleased the spirit.

"I…did not know, Exalted, merely surmised. You have had such dreams before."

Lo released a breath as the spirit's eyes became less dangerous. Ando muttered something incomprehensible as he looked away, lids drooping again in exhaustion.

After this near-disaster, Lo decided it safest to wait and let the spirit decide if and when to speak again. The sun dipped beneath a canopy of grey cloud and lit the world in red and orange before Ando stood. He walked to Lo and bowed, his eyes largely cleared.

"Nothing is amiss. Since I am awake I will see your hopefuls, now, if they are ready."

Lo worried his ancient knees might not unlock, but managed to stand.

"Of course, Exalted. Thank you very much. They await your inspection."

Together they walked from the plateau to the bottom of the cave, where the other monks had now gathered. All were experienced and knew the protocols, save for one customary new initiate. They came forward with the infants, some of whom already wailed from the prolonged wait. Ando approached, and as usual when near him the babies silenced, staring with wide eyes. He smiled and walked to each, touching and inspecting, letting some grope his fingers.

"They have been measured, Exalted," Lo said at his side. "Their heads are correct, their skin is flawless. The mothers are from lines tracing back to the original kingdoms."

Ando nodded and put his hands in his cuffs.

"Thank you, children, you may take them away now."

Lo gestured and the monks hurried away, pushing the blindfolded women along the path. Sometimes, Ando invited the monks to meditate with him, but it seemed not today. The disappointment in the initiate was palpable, and that he had not managed to hide this even from Lo was so offensive he would never be allowed in Ando's presence again. Thankfully, the spirit seemed not to notice.

He turned back to the plateau and sat on the cliff, Lo puffing behind him. They sat in silence but Lo felt he must not waste the opportunity, since the spirit might rest now for months if left alone.

"I'm sorry to disturb you, Exalted, but there is ill news from the isles. More of the foreigners from across the sea have come. Disease is spreading. Some Alakus have been killed."

Ando seemed not to hear, but finally mumbled. "It's not important."

"But…" Lo withheld the very foolish scoff that tickled his throat. "The Alakus have ruled a hundred years, Exalted, and the peace is threatened. The isles are in turmoil."

"Is their bloodline secure here on Bato, child?"

"Of course, Exalted."

"That is all that matters. Sickness and violence will not come to this holy place. How the animals rule themselves is irrelevant."

Lo knew he should leave it alone, but he had done so much work. He licked his lips and lowered his head.

"Exalted, considering you graced both Farahi and his son, I…just thought, their deaths would be more of a concern…that…"

Ando's head turned ever so slightly, and Lo dropped and trembled on the stone.

"I have seen hundreds of kings rise and fall," the spirit said pleasantly. "Did I not tell you your project was doomed?" His voice changed, rising with darkness. "You are insects until ascension. How many times must I tell you? Your 'hopefuls' are unsuitable again. They are hollow shells which I indulge to give your brothers something to do. Their ojas is always death, all your pairings with island lords a useless diversion. Only the bloodlines I have approved have meaning."

Lo huddled his face to the ground, feeling heat assault his skin in waves.

"I told you," hissed his shadow. "This is the day. This is how we die."

The heat slowly faded. Ando inhaled loudly then crossed the precipice to help Lo to his feet.

"Sit with me, child. Let us clear our minds and be at peace."

Lo nearly wept in gratitude. He took his position and they drifted for a time in the warm breeze.

"Sometimes," Ando smiled much later, "I forget you are Vishan. Such a pity not to know the bliss of traveling beyond the self, to roam the heavens. How long have you served me, Lo?"

"A hundred and forty years, Exalted."

"So few. Yet to you it must feel much different."

"Yes, Exalted." Lo held his breath, feeling his shadow was at last correct. Not death, maybe, but at least replacement. Finally the snake Genyo would get what he wanted, and Lo would be set aside, his rivals at last able to ignore and punish him for his enduring tenure as the spirit's messenger, until he crumbled at last to dust.

"I chose you for a reason, child." Ando smiled. "I spoke in anger, but the sentiment was correct. Dispose of the hopefuls. You may continue to breed your masters with the islanders, for I know men have desires and seek diversion. The results, however, should be discarded. I have foreseen the correct lines in another generation, until then we only waste our efforts. Thank you, child. You may go."

Lo bowed deep, his concern washing away. Their conversation had ended this way many times. Lo would have the specific children drowned as ordered, then continue his work with the breeding lines. He would continue making deals with the island lords, for the spirit paid little attention to such things.

And in the end, Lo would prove himself. He would show his efforts were not in vain—that the immortal spark could be found elsewhere. He was sure of it. Absolutely certain. For though the spirit did not know, Lo himself was a bastard breed.

Chapter 1

442 G.E. (Galdric Era), immediately after the battle for Sri Kon

Ruka watched the gentle, corpse-filled waves as they stained his island paradise with blood. His men waded through the murky water lifting the dead like gulls snatching prey. Mostly these were islanders. But many sons of ash, too, floated in the 'king's sea.'

It had all gone so horribly wrong.

Not even a seer, it seemed, could plan for a young son with the power of a god. Kale had returned to make his own claim on the future, not knowing or caring the dreams and toil of his forebear. Ruka did not blame him, but with his actions, he had undone all his father's careful plans.

After Ruka had killed all of Farahi's enemies, the sorcerer-king intended to 're-surface' and become Ruka's 'reluctant' ally. Together, they had meant to protect the seas as before, unite the islands formally under the kingship of Sri Kon, re-forge their alliance with Nong Ming Tong, and from this position of power, build new coastal allies. Together they were to resist Naran—to forge peace through strength, and build a new world.

But without Farahi, this was impossible.

Ruka still had Farahi's other sons, of course. He could put Tane on the throne—except only Farahi had known their secret plans. Tane would assume what he could see was the truth, just as Kale had—that Ruka and his people were conquerors, that they had brought an army to his home, and taken it by force.

Tane did not have the magic of foresight. He didn't have a lifetime of subterfuge and cunning, nor the relationships with admirals and foreign kings. The death of the Alaku patriarch would shake faith in the family line. Tane would have to prove himself.

Arun—the king's spymaster now known as 'Eka'—knew at least some of the truth. But would Tane believe him? Would it not be more logical to assume he had switched allegiance to save his skin?

Without Farahi, the remnants of Sri Kon's navy were likely now forever Ruka's enemy, rather than his future servants and allies. If Tane could be convinced, and trusted, perhaps he could bring them back to the fold. But perhaps not.

Ruka sighed, and listened to the waves. The weather did not reflect his misery, or the brutal deeds of the battlefield. A bright island sun shone high beneath only the wisps of gentle cloud, and the sea lapped at the beach in its endless war, uncaring at the failures of man.

There were just so many ifs. The final and greatest—if Farahi was right, which he usually was, Ruka had little time.

"There is a way," whispered Bukayag—Ruka's brother, or perhaps just the darkest depths of his mind. "We can purge the islanders," he said, voice flat, excitement pitifully concealed. "We owed Farahi, brother. But we don't owe them. It wasn't these mediocre men who brought the grain ships—not they who held out their hand. It was Farahi, only him. And Farahi is dead."

Ruka's jaw clenched. He didn't want to argue. For more than a decade—since the Ascom had united—Ruka's 'brother' had been almost silent. But in the conflict with Kale he had awoken and saved Ruka from destruction. His words, as usual, while horrible, held at least a grain of truth.

"And what of Naran," Ruka couldn't help but say. "What's your plan without Sri Kon's navy? Who will ally with us once we've begun slaughtering men and children all over Pyu?"

"We have our own ships," Bukayag answered, "we don't need them."

"Our ships are mostly transports. We don't have enough warships or expertise to fight the islanders, nor do we know these dangerous waters very well. They will stop us."

"We don't fight at sea," Bukayag growled. "We land an army on weak, unguarded shores. We force their surrender. Then, when we're ready, we go to the continent. Perhaps the sickness will spread and do much of our work."

Ruka snorted in disgust, and Bukayag's tone harshened.

"Peace without death is a dream, brother. Their empire is strong and ours is weak, so they will come. We must make a river of blood to rival Bray's tears, stretching from Naran to the dead king's sea. Only then will they leave us alone."

Ruka said nothing more, still watching the floating corpses. He knew his brother might be right about Naran, or at least not entirely wrong. But still, he would not need to slaughter the islanders. He would need only a truce and maybe even a sort of negotiation was possible. First he could cancel the sham marriage to Lani, turn Tane to his side, and try to continue his alliance with the Tong.

But he had other problems. The land of ash required efforts, too. He had to tell Dala and the matrons that he needed more men, more weapons, more horses. On the flat plain of Naran, horses would be his key. He would try to wield the tribesmen of the steppes—warriors who had for a thousand years raided their agrarian neighbors and worshipped their own gods. This too could fail.

With a final sigh, Ruka walked away from the beach, towards the palace of his dead friend and ally. His many followers and servants waited there for instruction, no doubt confused by all the waiting and gentle treatment of the islanders. There was so much to do, and without Farahi, only him to do it.

Several retainers and bodyguards followed in his wake. In their quiet loyalty he felt at least some strength. The future was on his shoulders now. Farahi was dead. But Ruka was not truly alone.

All around him stood strong, brave men who would fight and die for their descendants. They had followed him from a frozen hell; they had crossed an uncrossable sea, and gone further than their fathers or their grandfathers could have dreamed. For them, if nothing else, Ruka knew he must be strong.

"So be it," he whispered, or maybe his brother did. A man fails in only two ways, Beyla told him. He quits, or he dies.

If Farahi was wrong, and Naran hesitated, Ruka would strike first and hard. Like Imler he'd gather an army of Ascomi horseman and sweep across the plain with bow and spear. On the endless lands of the great continent, they would raid and burn until the enemy knew to fear the giants across the sea.

If Farahi was right, and Naran attacked, he would stop them with Vol's iron champions, unbreakable on foreign walls, and crack the spirit of 'heaven's son.'

Perhaps he could no longer form the future he had dreamed, but peace could be made in other ways. Ruka could still burn his people's would-be conquerers to dust. In the ruins of Naran, the people of ash and sand would be safe. At least for a time.

He turned to his retainers, feeling his brother swelling his limbs with renewed strength. The men saw his eyes, then looked to each other, almost hunching as if for the chase.

Ruka felt his mind and spirit wrapping in armor greater than any Ascomi steel—stronger than reason or faith, hatred or love. He still had what he had always known, the only thing he'd ever needed. He still had purpose.

"Come, cousins," he growled. "We have much to do."

* * *

Kale touched the cool, blood-stained flesh beneath his robe, and remembered dying. Already he forgot the pain. The feeling or perhaps knowledge that his body would not recover should have made him gasp for air in panic. Yet the loss seemed far away.

He stumbled on a tuft of grass and almost fell. Being dead didn't stop him from walking, apparently.

The stalks bent and he could feel them beneath his sandals. Step after surreal step he wandered the mists of his murderer's mind, or perhaps the underworld, or some mirage built from the dream of a foreign heaven or hell.

Memories of his life soon assaulted him. With them came rage and grief mixed and mingled inseparably, stopped only by clenching his fists and picturing a dark night and a warm fire. He quickened his pace.

The air here had no taste, and the fog held no moisture. But then his body was numb and dull and he wondered if maybe he simply couldn't feel anymore. In the same thought he sensed a growing grief of his own loss—the knowledge that he would never touch or love again.

No wetness touched his eyes. It was all wrong, this life after life. It was a living nightmare, a horror steeped inside a tragedy. He knew he should be terrified and panicked but he felt only a need for revenge. It built slowly, starting as a refusal to accept what had happened, and a desire to change it.

In truth he didn't understand how he'd died, or the man who had killed him. Before his death, Kale had never felt more powerful. He had seen through the very fabric of the world, plucking so many threads from the building blocks of the earth they'd felt tied to him as the new center of their power. So how could he possibly have failed?

Reality itself had come apart in his hands. Only days before, he had plunged his arms into sky and sea and brought the monsoon. Before that he had tricked 'Master' Lo; he had survived Nanzu, and Mesan, and brought his army across the width of an enemy empire with a thousand foes at his heels.

And then, just as suddenly, it was over.

Who was this Ruka? This monster with jagged teeth and golden eyes? What were these pale giants who attacked his people and killed his friends, who had raped women and murdered children in cruel and foreign rituals?

Kale's mind felt as foggy as this foreign hell, and he tried to remember the beach, the flight over Sri Kon, and all he had seen. He knew he'd been angry, beyond angry—a cloud of righteous rage blurring his vision, filling him with heat and strength like a flagon of rum. Death hadn't changed this much.

It wasn't how his return home was supposed to be. He had meant to help. He had come at first with humility—with the belief he could help at least someone, to teach meditation, to bring his power to the world gently.

Yet as he searched the memories of his last day in Sri Kon, he saw only death. Somewhere between Nanzu and his homeland he had become a soldier like Osco—a soldier with the power of a god, tearing his enemies asunder without reserve. And even still, he had lost.

Kale's sandals almost slipped on the grass as he stopped. He clenched his fists and his broken jaw. Through the fog, he could see golden eyes.

The giant was stooped, shirtless and sweating to repair Kale's destruction. He gathered broken tools into piles, removing shattered stone and dead plants from walkway and field. Dead men toiled all around him in silence.

Kale had tried to undo this man, and he had failed. In his heart he knew it was this fact more than anything that galled him. He knew it was pride—that he should be above it. But he had been right.

The twisted agony of it brought him to his knees in the grass, hating himself, hating reality. He turned away—to fail had been enough. He didn't wish to confront the man and be mocked for it.

Instead he returned to the mists. He passed other corpses and they stared at him—some as if frightened, others perhaps confused. As time passed he began to think they were right to be afraid, or think him different. Even now Kale felt power all around him, waiting, as if to be called.

Threads like spider's silk attached to everything. They were so tight and orderly they looked like a builder's frame, nothing like the chaos of the living world. Kale had the urge to take the uniform lines and tangle them. He reached out briefly with his dulled senses but the strands resisted his touch, strong as metal bars. All he could do was strum his fingers across to make a little sound.

"Damn you," he tried to shout, which instead echoed in a disembodied voice, sweeping as wind across the grass. Dead men scattered and panicked all around him.

He tried to close his eyes and focus but he had no breath to focus on. After another impotent fit of rage, he summoned another black canvass of night in his mind, sitting by a warm fire on the beach with his brothers. They smiled at him, their faces almost blurry now, imperfect in his fading memory. He listened to the non-existent popping of the fire for a time, regaining control of his emotions.

I am a spirit in an imaginary land, he almost laughed, imagining a fire in an imaginary world.

He wondered if there was even a word for such a thing. Did the dead dream? Could they create? Or could they only live through memory?

Kale found his thoughts unstoppable and surrendered for a time. He had never been patient in life, but perhaps death had given him another chance. Perhaps for the first time, this place gave him time to practice without the changes life brought—here, maybe, he had time to understand his killer's secrets, and the failures of his final moments.

And maybe, he thought, knowing the hope swelling in his breast likely foolish, maybe with enough time, like Rupi, I can trick death itself.

Kale startled from his thoughts as he swore he heard nearby voices. He stood very still, turning his head back and forth, wondering even how he 'heard' anything in this place. The faint sound repeated, and he ran towards it.

The short, well-groomed grass became a path of cobblestone along a river. It snaked to the outskirts of cleared land and became a forest that seemed all but untouched, still wild with strange and mottled life. Kale moved through the trees until he came upon another clearing, and a huge, dark pool.

The pool became a lake—the water spreading beyond sight with liquid too dark and deep to see beneath. Kale walked closer because he felt something like warmth for the first time—as if a beam of light somehow escaped the depths, a sun trapped like an egg in coconut soup. He stepped along the gravel and mud of the bank until he found bits of white sand. The sight of it felt unnatural, even here—as if this place warred with itself, two different things fighting to exist.

Huge footprints covered the mud, and a length of rotten rope lead into the water. Kale lifted it and pulled, but the rope seemed tied to some kind of anchor. He heard more voices from beneath.

Only his blurred reflection looked back at him, but he focused his eyes, and tried to look deeper. Every blink seemed to lose more and more peripheral vision, until the darkness of the lake became his world. Ruka's underworld seemed to shrink in importance until Kale could see into another place—a world of warmth and sunlight.

If he'd had a heartbeat, it would have raced. His vision swam and distorted as it once had in Nanzu when he'd first practiced spirit walking. But he realized as he blinked and tried to see, he was already through.

Beyond him lay a great, yellow warmth, a moving breeze and the muffled sounds of living things. He smelled something familiar—fruit maybe, with a touch of vanilla.

A shape materialized in the light, long haired, brown and beautiful, with green eyes. It stared back at him with a face he recognized, but an expression he had never seen.

Somehow, he could see. He could see and he was looking at Lani.

Kale's lifeless heart felt heavy in his chest. Somehow, he could see her, the real her, with his own eyes. And he could hear her voice.

I'm here, he tried to cry, not understanding but wanting only to be seen. He tried to touch her but had no arms, nor legs—in this water-world he was only a disembodied spirit without threads of power. He had only sight. And a voice? Yes! There! He heard himself speak.

His voice was strange, and also familiar—sonorous, and deep. The sound snapped his attention and longing for Lani back to reality.

"Hello, Princess," it said.

His voice wasn't his at all. It was Ruka's.

Chapter 2

"First things first," Ruka muttered, stopping with his hand over the brass-handled latch of the guest-room door. He closed it into a fist, annoyed with the hesitation and fear of what some girl would say and how she would look at him. With a deep breath, he knocked.

The door soon creaked and he bowed awkwardly in the Pyu fashion. He had expected a servant to answer.

"Loa, Princess. I hope you and your child are well."

He stood tall and met her eyes because powerful men were expected to do so in these lands. The princess' eyes blazed, as if some cruel retort lay trapped behind a guarded tongue.

"We are. Thank you."

Ruka waited in the silence and as ever despised the weakness of words. His hesitation faded.

"I prefer harshness to falsity. I have come because both our people's futures are at stake, and because you and I may have the power to shape it. Will you walk with me?"

Lani blinked, then glanced back into the room. Ruka realized she was looking at her son. Kale's son.

But she nodded, and followed him, wearing only the silk shift or maybe dress that women of ash would consider an undergarment.

They walked in silence. Eshen and some of Ruka's other men scrambled ahead as bodyguard, checking every corridor and stairwell, occasionally glancing back so Ruka could point the right direction from the maze.

It took considerable will to stop from looking at the Tong princess. She was very small and beautiful, and standing next to her made Ruka feel clumsy and more monstrous than ever. Her few glances in his direction held only a disciplined appraisal, which no doubt hid her hatred. But Ruka was no stranger to scorn. He spoke when they had walked enough to cool their heads.

"I wish an alliance with your family." They'd reached a flat-stone path of the inner courtyard, surrounded now only by the beauty of the gardens and hedgerows. The corpses and blood had been cleaned. Lani blinked and furrowed her thin, plucked brow.

"Marriage is the traditional method. I thought you understood this. However since my husband is apparently alive and in your prison, the arrangement might be a bit…awkward."

It was Farahi who suggested the marriage, saying his son preferred men exclusively and would never be a father. But he also said Lani was the key to Kapule's trust.

Ruka didn't want to argue or try to explain so much complexity. He didn't want to mince words or continue the sham or engage in island or continental politics. He had read all their books and knew all their words, but he didn't understand their ways, nor did he care for the games of men.

"We have no time for this," he said, louder than intended. "Previous deception is irrelevant. Here are truths: your father and people will soon be attacked by the Naranian empire. Without my help, they will be destroyed. Naran will then hold Pyu ransom with grain. There will be civil war and suffering, fueled by Naranian gifts and promises to royal families, until your husband and his people are forced to surrender or starve. I wish to prevent this—to protect both people. I require assistance."

Lani stared, and Ruka found her impossible to read. His hands fidgeted in the pause, but at last she spoke.

"Protect us? You mean you intend to secure the riches and islands for yourself?"

Ruka turned away. He had no conception of how to explain fifteen years as Farahi's brother. 'Yes, protect, because a great man saved my people,' he wanted to say, 'and because the world is harsh and cruel and perhaps together we can withstand it.'

Instead he turned to sell a lesser truth because it seemed easier to accept.

"Yes. I need your father's harvests, but I will buy them. His trade is required to keep my people alive. Farahi has been the broker for a decade. I need…"

"So why did you destroy him?"

Ruka clenched a fist at the injustice. "I didn't. But you won't believe that, or understand why." She said nothing and stared, so Ruka took a breath. "It was deception. Farahi has always been my friend and ally. He brought us here to destroy his many enemies in the isles. If he lived, he would have emerged as the hero of Pyu and 'made peace' with my people. Together, we intended to resist Naran and begin a new era for these islands. But…his son…"

"You mean my childhood friend, and my husband's brother, whom you murdered."

Ruka's mouth snapped shut. Regret and rage and so many things he could not afford or handle sat just beneath the surface, but he did not know what to do.

"Yes," he answered, "and the father of your child. I know. You loved him, and I killed him. But my people would not simply bow to his army. We were enemies. He butchered my men with the power of a god, he…"

Ruka blinked at the sound of thunder. He glanced at the blue, cloudless sky before he realized the sound had not come from the world of the living.

In his Grove, he had been clearing debris from his training ground. Now he glanced to see the mist swirling above, strong winds rattling tables of arms and armor, some of the dead near Ruka's forges scrambling for shelter. Ruka hesitated, almost frightened to see what he knew would be there.

"Don't speak to her," whispered the wind, as Kale's dead face stared. "Don't touch her. Don't even look at her, or I swear to every spirit and god I'll rip this place apart."

The prince's disembodied voice was already louder than the gentle gust Ruka had heard first at his grave. He stared at the strangeness of this sorcerer, still unsure.

"He what?" Lani snapped in the land of the living. "Disrupted your careful, murderous plans? Perhaps you shouldn't have occupied his homeland, or held his son a hostage. Even if what you say is true, perhaps Farahi could have tried trusting his sons instead of…"

Ruka raised a hand to try and regain control. He felt as if he were losing in both worlds, and wondered if he should simply call the prince's bluff. What did you say to a man you'd killed, and whose previous life you now interfered with?

"Listen to me." Ruka dropped to a knee to look the young woman in the eye. "I am a monster, as you say. But my purpose is honorable, and I am bound to it. I will make any oath, do anything you ask, but understand—my purpose is to protect these people, both yours and mine. To do this I must land on the continent with an army. There my men will bleed to protect you. Do you understand? They are the greatest warriors in this world, and they will fight and die on your behalf. That is my goal. But you must help me convince your father to accept that help, else all is lost."

She stared at him for a long time before she spoke.

"So you say."

Ruka looked at the beautiful, trimmed grass, spotting a weed needing to be plucked. He had never been very skilled at Farahi's ways—in negotiation, in bargaining. How could a people who did not believe in honor ever know trust? From what he had seen, they did not. They had only fear of law, and even then only when Farahi proved those laws to be real. But Farahi was dead.

Ruka's mind moved beyond the princess and the agreement of the Tong. He could land his transports and take the palace, which stood largely unguarded from the coast. Once he had the king in his possession he could force the Tong to work with him and defend their walls. It would be riskier, and more costly, maybe…

"Free the Alakus." Lani had begun to pace on the pathway, and now stopped to meet his eyes again. "Help Tane secure his position as rightful king of Sri Kon. Allow him and my father to pass judgment on you, which you will swear to accept. Do that, and I will do all I can to help you."

Bukayag almost gnashed their teeth, trying to rise up and seize the girl to choke the life from her tiny neck as they screamed. "Who are you to bargain with me, insect. You pitiful nothing!"

"You ask me to risk all on the decision of an angry, untried boy." Ruka tried not to hiss his words. "What do you think will happen if Tane tells my people to leave? The men of ash are warriors, harsh men. They have struggled and suffered for this new land of sun. Do you think they'll just go?"

Lani's face hardened. "You said you would swear any oath, do anything. My father will not accept your word. Even if you make Tane king, my father will assume he is your puppet. You'll need to show him. Trust requires trust."

Ruka stood and turned away, a desire to leave her and maybe the garden and the whole damn island. But he knew she was right. "Look to a man's deeds," said the book of Galdra, and so began every trial in the Ascom since time immemorial. A man's actions showed his nature, yes, that was true.

Freeing Farahi's sons was one thing. Freeing Kikay something else entirely. He knew he should kill her now, and Bukayag almost crooned at the thought.

But he couldn't, or else become a tyrant. And if he wished an alliance he must show weakness first.

"So be it." He found her expression the same unreadable, general disapproval, and could hardly believe he was agreeing. "I'll release the Alakus, and reinstate them."

Here Ruka met the eyes of the island prince still blustering in his Grove, throwing bits and pieces of debris further and further as he smiled at Ruka with a menacing glare.

"But know this, princess. I expect hatred and betrayal. One Alaku prince has already all but destroyed us. Perhaps this one will finish the task."

* * *

Lani left her son with the nursing maid, meeting the Alaku's and the 'servant' Eka in the throne room.

The giants left them alone with food and water, and as soon as the door closed, Lani ran to her husband's arms.

"Are you alright?" he whispered. "Have they mistreated you?" Tane wrapped himself around her then held her at arm's length. Lani smiled and nodded against his shoulder.

"I was going to ask you the same."

He smiled, and she returned it. They had never tried to become lovers—Tane had made his aversion clear—but still they shared a childhood, a chaste bed, and a crown. Their circumstances had brought them close.

Tane looked healthy, if perhaps more tired than he had outside the palace throneroom when Farahi died. A dull bruise had formed under both red veined eyes, but Tane had never slept much, seeming filled with a boundless energy.

She nodded to the other brothers, then Eka, then embraced Kikay politely. They sat around the table more formally, and Lani cleared her throat before she spoke.

"Their leader has agreed to support Tane as king of Sri Kon."

The Alakus stared as if they couldn't understand. Tane nodded first and released a breath.

"He wants a puppet, then. Good enough."

"What the hell is good about it?" Kikay snapped, shifting in her chair. "He'll keep us all a single stroke from death. You'll get your 'suggestions', which will be orders. Move falsely and he'll have us all killed."

Tane shrugged. "It gives us far more power and influence than a jail cell, Aunty. Right now we don't know anything. What are the other islands doing? Where's the rest of our navy? The army? I don't even bloody know how long I've been imprisoned. I lost track of the days."

Kikay and Eka exchanged a meaningful look before she spoke. "We know more than you might think."

Tane's eyes narrowed and Kikay shrugged.

"The situation is complex. Bukayag…was working with Farahi."

Lani kept her jaw from dangling, and Tane's eyes withdrew behind a mask, so much like his father. He nearly whispered.

"What did you say?

Kikay clearly recognized the change, and her tone matched the hush. "It's a long story, nephew. I don't know all of it. This Bukayag's real name is Ruka, and your father and I have known of him for 15 years. You even saw him as a child, but were too young to remember."

She looked to the widely feared Alaku spymaster, who spoke in his perpetually calm, almost monk-like manner. "It's true, my prince. I brought him to your aunt and father. It was how we met."

Tane said nothing for a long, awkward stretch, and his tired expression lent well to the darkness clear in his eyes. "We are going to have a very long, and very frank conversation."

Kikay shifted in her seat. "I counseled your father against his…friendship since the moment I met this man. Ruka is a monster. He always was. Whatever he's planning, we can't trust him. He must be destroyed."

Eka looked less sure, but said nothing. Lani felt as surprised as Tane, but she hid it as best she could. She was inclined to trust Kikay at least in spirit if not in specific words. But all the information of the last day was so insane and strange she felt a bit lost. After a moment she remembered why she was here.

"He says he wants an alliance with my father," she said as neutrally as she could. "He says the empire of Naran will soon destroy the Tong, the isles next, and that he wants to prevent this. He said his people will fight to defend the Tong."

Kikay's snort sprayed a few drops of spittle. "He wants our land, and probably our women." She shook her head. "And spirits know what else. There's no end to the man's ambition."

Lani did not respond or change her expression, and Tane gave no indication. Kikay threw her hands and carried on.

"Naran could have destroyed the Tong long ago and hasn't. So why should they now? They're trading partners. Naran is already huge. Why should they want more problems?"

Tane's face puckered as he glanced at Eka. "Father expected it. He always made it clear he feared Naran. He said only the Tong and our trading partners kept them at bay. Maybe that has changed. I don't need to tell you, Aunty, Farahi had a long habit of being right."

The crown-prince or maybe king glanced around the room for support, but only Lani nodded.

"My family has expected war with Naran for two generations," she said. "Probably more. It is often in my father's mind."

Kikay's smile was tight lipped. "With respect, you haven't been home since you were a girl. And you've only been playing the games of kings for a short time."

Lani let the comment pass. She felt disappointment at Kikay's disapproval, but then the 'queen' of Sri Kon was the kind of woman who attacked anyone she disagreed with out of habit. Kikay looked to the king, voice softening.

"I loved your father, nephew, and I served him all my life. But he was wrong more often than you accept." She turned her eyes to the table, and they rimmed with wetness. "He didn't think his son would rip his palace apart with magic powers. And he didn't think he would kill him."

Lani felt her gut flip and her jaw flex, and she looked away. Tane did too, the anger in his eyes fading with a blank kind of sadness. He sunk back in his chair.

"What do you suggest we do?"

Kikay breathed, and looked out an open window. "You're right. Being a puppet is better than a prisoner. We accept, and see if Ruka is truly so stupid as to crown an Alaku. If he is, we hold formal court and bring whatever lords we can. We assemble the army and navy. We get our advisors and spies and everything running again." She smiled weakly and looked to him. "You're right, Tane. This is the most hope we've had, even if he intends to betray his word. We might do a great deal of damage before he intervenes. Who knows what else might happen."

Tane nodded, and Kikay put her hand on his.

"Eka and I will help you. We have advised your father for many years."

Lani watched the mysterious Eka close, but his face betrayed nothing. Tane smiled gratefully and pat his aunt's hand.

"Thank you, Kikay. Of course I welcome your counsel. I'll ask you both to join me when I meet with our 'new friend'."

Kikay managed a weak laugh. "He won't like that, nephew. It should be perfect."

Lani watched the faces of her adopted family very closely. She felt an uneasiness in their confidence and their manner. Only Eka's eyes held a note of something more—maybe disappointment, or maybe fear. She stared until he met her eyes, then at the others until they noticed and quieted.

"This is your home, and your people," she said. "But I remind you, husband—your brother came here with half your navy, with my father's help and other allies, as well as incredible magic powers. Still he failed. You must be very careful. My people too may be at stake, if not from Naran, then from these barbarians."

Kikay smiled again with that same indulgence. Tane met her eyes and nodded as if he listened and understood. Neither gesture brought Lani much comfort.

Chapter 3

Kale stalked the banks of the mysterious, green lake in Ruka's private hell. His mind felt as muddled and roiling as the endless fog. Death, he'd thought, was supposed to be peaceful.

Amongst the mostly cool, sloppy mud and grit-filled dirt he found patches of white-sand. There were weapons—particularly throwing spears—lodged in the earth as if forgotten or abandoned; swords, and shields, often stained with old blood, and other strange contraptions of wood and different metals lay rusted beside them.

Everything about the lake felt wrong, and dangerous. Kale was dead. Yes he knew that. Still he feared to touch the water, twice stooping to the still, fetid liquid to extend a hand, both times his gut tingling as if he stood at the edge of a cliff.

"Not yet," he told himself, then turned to explore more of his prison.

When he tired of the lake, he walked through the mists, touching alien flora with his hands and dully smelling their scent. His other senses worked well, at least. He found floating power in the air, then sought flaws in the tight-weaved strands of magical bars—anything he could use, or disrupt. But the weave beneath him was flawless and in perfect order, so different than the natural world.

Kale walked past the river he had crossed his first time in this place, past the beautiful garden and quiet house, moving closer to a loud collection of strange metallic ringing, and the hum of work. It sounded like a city without voices.

Looms, forges, furnaces and tanners emerged from the fog, arrayed in straight lines surrounded by neatly stacked supplies. Half-loaded carts sat on long metal bars like in a mineshaft, wrapped in ropes as if they might be pulled along the tracks. Walking corpses toiled over everything.

These dead didn't even notice Kale. Smoke rose above them and scrap fell around their feet. Nails, leather, cloth, coins, and metal shaped in a hundred ways left their hands to fill the carts in wordless toil. Kale watched for a time, enthralled, until he noticed huge walls behind them that left his broken jaw agape.

The stone was oddly familiar, a pale coral that reminded him of home—and there before them, in perfect detail, sat the green feet of the traveler. Beyond, a small palace—nearly a replica of Sri Kon.

Kale turned away, following a road of flowers set out with great care, matching the colors around them. These disappeared, replaced by rows of statues—mostly men staring at the sky, or resting as if lost in thought. Beneath them there were plaques with symbols Kale couldn't read, others engraved on benches and walls. As the natural, sloping flora of the river became the straight angles of stone pillars and wooden beams, a building emerged from the fog.

It was huge, multi-leveled and made from solid granite. Dead men sat outside around tables, scribbling with stacks of papers and books. These noticed Kale, and some scattered as if afraid, but they didn't approach or move to interfere, so he walked inside.

It looked much like the temple on Bato. In fact, he realized, it almost was the temple, with everything removed and replaced with shelf space. Thousands of books cluttered rectangular storage that lined the walls like an animal's stripes, twice the size at least of Farahi's library. The same foreign symbols marked the ledges, as well as some of the books, rooms and staircases.

"What is this place?"

Kale's voice carried through the halls before he'd intended to use it. The remaining dead scattered, and Kale sighed, then climbed the spiral stairs.

Were he in Bato, he would have found several more rooms, only a few of which he'd ever seen. There were no doors here, however, only open portals, and Kale could see every single one of them held thousands more books.

He wandered inside the closest, even more surprised when he found a sign he could read in his native tongue.

'Books of the Pyu', it read, then again below in Naranian characters, and perhaps again in the same foreign symbols.

Kale wandered the aisles, finding many of the books he had read—or was supposed to have read—as a child. There were religious writings, ancient myths, histories and mathematics—even specifications of the island navy. He took this from the shelf and sat in one of many empty chairs, flipping it open to find what seemed a perfect copy of the book he had read as a marine.

He replaced it and walked on, feeling both a familiarity and a strangeness here he couldn't shake. He walked through more rooms with more shelves until the familiarity focused, and he knew exactly where he was.

A balcony extended from a room covered in symbols—symbols that now sparked his memory. It was the testing room in Bato—the place he had danced the Ching with Master Tamo, and walked through a wall with his spirit. This time, though, the symbols had translations in Naranian and island common.

'We are the Vishan', Kale read. 'We are the divine blood, children of the gods. We are all that remains of a butchered people. We few are they who go across the sea. This is our story.'

He read on, unsure how he felt, sensing beyond every line a looming threat he'd rather not see. And then it came. The cause of the injustice, it read, a butcher, a traveler, an enlightened.

A deep voice spoke softly behind.

"I have not managed to translate every rune."

Kale stilled, and his jaw tightened. Ruka stepped beside him, seeming not to notice his discomfort.

"There is never enough time," he sighed. "I am forced to solve more practical problems. The dead have many uses, but translation is not one of them."

Kale turned only enough to stare at his murderer. Again Ruka seemed not to care, and turned to the other side of the room, gesturing at a huge map Kale had failed to notice.

"I had expected death when I found your people. This was incredible enough. But to read familiar words on a foreign temple? Even now it's hard to believe."

Kale turned to study the map with balled fists. He had seen various versions in the palace and in Nanzu, but never one with the foreigner's land. It looked like a gnarled claw pointing at the isles, impossibly large in scale. Kale looked again at the words surrounding him, the story of a foreign people who claimed the isles as their homeland with the most casual tone.

"Why should I believe any of it?" his voice hissed through the corridor.

Ruka blinked, as if surprised. "Reality requires no advocate. My people's ancestors—the Vishan—fled war in Pyu. Perhaps they lived only on Bato, though that seems unlikely. Regardless, they sailed South to what my people call the land of ash. From both our people's texts, I think a thousand years ago at least."

Kale shook his head, not sure what to make of it or say or even if he cared. It seemed more like philosophy than reality. Though he did wonder, if it was true, where did his own people come from? And why did they leave?

Ruka paced with his head lowered in thought. "Once I blamed you islanders for the past. I was wrong. No man is guilty for the deeds of his father." When Kale said nothing, he glared. "Nor should he accept his father's gifts without a hint of moral burden." His tone softened again. "We are all only observers of the past. Not one line can be changed, no glory reproduced." He gestured at the stone around them. "This is a hall of knowledge. Here on its shelves is good and evil, great and small. I will pass it on before the end, and let those with the desire draw what wisdom they can."

"Tell me," Kale at last felt inspired to speak. "Where are your misdeeds written? Or is Bukayag to be remembered only as a valiant, conquering hero?"

Ruka turned to the door. "They are this way, prince."

Kale flexed his fists and broken jaw, but followed. The giant's steps echoed on the stone walls to a room at the far end of the corridor. There were fewer books here, though the shelves had more space. A beautiful island girl dressed in silks sat at one of the tables.

"Here you will find every lie I have uttered; every man, woman and child I have killed, or whose death I am likely responsible for. There is a list of the animals I have killed and for what purpose. I try to re-visit such things more clearly on occasion, but there is never enough time. I wrote them in your words because they are more suitable than runes for such things. Read them all, if you wish."

Kale rarely knew what to say to this creature, and now was no exception. He looked at the many pages devoted apparently to this one life, and the empty shelves ready for more.

"Are you sure it's enough to cover such a storied man?"

Ruka took a breath. "I have wronged you," he said, in a tone implying regret. "I have wronged many. For these deeds I expect to burn until the stain is wiped clean. But I cannot know. Perhaps there are no gods, nor true meaning to words like justice, or righteousness. I go on as if there is."

With that he turned to leave, stopping at the door. "The girl will help you. She knows your language, and the place and contents of every book. I do not know her name. Like the others she cannot speak, but if you ask her for topics, she can assist you."

The girl stood, her blue silk dress swishing about her feet. Kale inspected her closely, noticing a strange scarf worn rarely in the isles. Without a word, he strode to her and seized it, pulling it away to reveal a deeply bruised neck beneath.

"Tell me, mighty warlord," Kale's voice whipped through the temple with the venom he felt. "If you don't even know this girl's name, why did you strangle the life from her?"

Ruka's face lost expression, his golden eyes blazed. He spoke with low, quiet menace.

"Give it back."

Kale frowned, seeing now a kind of embarrassed horror on the girl's face. She had covered her neck with her hands and looked between them with frantic eyes. Kale paused, but handed it back. She wrapped it around her flesh with expert precision and downcast eyes. Ruka's manner calmed.

He walked to the girl, putting a hand to her face. She looked at him and smiled sadly.

"I killed her for pride," he whispered, then turned away. "I have killed for much less."

Kale stood in silence as the sound of Ruka's footsteps echoed down the corridor and the spiral staircase. Then he was alone with a dead girl who had no name, and felt ashamed for the scarf, then angry at the shame.

"This is all madness," he shook his head and sighed. Though he felt silly, he half-bowed in the Pyu fashion. "I apologize for grabbing you. I won't do it again."

The girl returned the bow.

Kale sighed as he sat in an ornate wooden chair. He had never been a studious man. But then, he supposed, he was dead, and surely with this advantage a man might change his ways. He seized the first book of his murderer's autobiography.

* * *

The reason for the vast number of pages soon became apparent. Every 'book' was more like a journal, written from Bukayag's perspective, sometimes moment by moment, with painful, impossible, exhaustive detail.

As one random exploration of the man's days—always listed by approximate date— Kale found an image of a rabbit drawn so perfectly it looked real, its body ripped apart, the pieces labeled.

The animal's torso had been pinned open, the organs removed, the bones meticulously listed. Kale found it all disturbing and saw little point, though there was several references to other books that seemed a collection of similarly butchered things. The man obsessed over everything. He often listed every sensory detail, every animal and natural force, and took almost none of it as understood.

Like his 'Grove' and the threads that bound it, there was a certain orderly perfection—an irresistible consistency that felt immense, and profound, as if the man considered his subject matter so complex and daunting he didn't expect to ever understand. It didn't seem arrogant, or self-important. Quite the opposite. It seemed Ruka thought little of himself—just less of mankind.

After tolerating all he could, Kale looked up to find the girl staring. He cleared his throat.

"Can you write?" he asked in his strange voice. The girl's brow furrowed. "I mean, you're from the isles, yes? Can you communicate with me by writing?"

She shook her head.

"I would like to see the beginning, please," Kale sighed. "I want to understand. I want to start wherever this starts."

She smiled and nodded happily, and began gathering books.

Kale sat in his chair, wishing he had some kind of distraction but couldn't imagine what. He was never very patient in life. But as he sat waiting for the dead girl to collect him a growing stack of veritable tomes, he considered his complete lack of other options, and thought it might be easier here. There was no purpose to his study save his own curiosity, and perhaps revenge. There were no tutors waiting to test his knowledge, nor any brothers to compare themselves to. Kale took the books as they were offered—a luxury he had—and began to read.

Bukayag's, or rather, Ruka's life, was documented from the womb.

For now Kale chose not to question this. It seemed no more ridiculous than some of the other realities on display, so he moved on without the natural feeling of rejection that rose within like the tide.

The writing was as blunt as the man, utterly without embellishment, far more focused on details than thought or emotion. It was filled with asides—questions about objects or things, often notated to other work that came later. How do birds fly? He noted a brief study on the animal's wings and bones. Are any of the animals of Pyu and the Ascom related? Several notes of further study.

Ruka had apparently created wide-sweeping comparisons of animals, plants—particularly crops—and the many races of men, including their customs and languages. He documented their habits, their sounds, food, age, size, birthing and dying.

Kale learned of Ruka's mother, Beyla, and a childhood of lonely education. Though the foreign giant said little of his own emotion, Kale couldn't help but feel a kind of empathy in that isolation. He learned with amazement of Ruka's part in taming the Kubi, of designing new iron, ships and buildings—things Kale had known all his life and never questioned, a quiet transformation he hadn't perceived.

When he could focus no longer he thanked the girl and wandered the Grove again. He watched the world through Ruka's senses, though he could only stomach this for so long—a painful reminder of what he'd lost.

Seeing 'reality' was also bizarre, and unworldly, as if he'd already grown accustomed to this quiet place of mist and darkness. The real world had become too bright, too chaotic.

Ruka seemed ever-busy. In a single day he met with Tane, oversaw the repair of ships destroyed in the battle, and dealt with island problems through a never-ending line of messengers. As the sun dipped, Kale watched in a growing fear as Ruka walked towards the military district—the place Kale had found the mass grave of children.

He gathered a mixture of tools first—potions, herbs, and a bag much like a physician. Then with a nod to his warriors guarding the doors, he ducked into a shrouded barracks filled with islanders on mats.

"What are you doing to them," Kale couldn't help but whisper. For a moment he wondered if the man would cut them open as he had with rabbits and birds.

Ruka jerked and blinked in the gloom, and Kale winced as he realized he'd given himself away.

"You can see me? Even here?"

"Yes. Now explain yourself."

Ruka snorted, muttering before he spoke again.

"Our people exchange illness. What your people call Breakbone fever, or Spotted Cough, we also have, though sometimes they come in different ways. Others are unique. These effects are worse, especially for your people. I don't know why. One of our sicknesses kills islanders who are already weak. Often the old. But sometimes children."

Kale felt his face growing warm. As with the books he wasn't sure if he believed, exactly. "So you gather them up and, what, rape them, kill them, bury them in the sand? That is your strategy?"

Ruka's nostrils flared. "I help them islander. I have spent many years trying."

"Why. These aren't your people. What's your goal?"

Ruka's voice dripped with contempt. "Farahi knew more than you can imagine, yet feared always he was wrong. The son so different than the father." With this he marched into the barracks, where many islanders lay on army cots attended by priests and monks. Kale snorted.

"Priests? Did you pay them, threaten them? Why should a servant of the enlightened help you in any way?"

"Because they are good spirits made flesh. Some have already died. If justice exists they will soar through the heavens for a lifetime of peace. They are nothing like you and me."

Kale wanted to retort and describe the many corrupt priests his father had dealt with over the years, but one approached Ruka with a pale, drawn face and yellow eyes.

"Ah, shaman. I'm sorry to bother you, I'm sure you're busy, but, there's a girl from the fisheries…very clever for her age, but she…" the man shrugged round shoulders, and looked away.

"I have time, brother. Tell me what you have tried."

Ruka followed the monk to the edges of a room guarded by warriors of ash, who nodded low with respect as he approached.

"We have tried every remedy, shaman. For a child over six without the pustules it should have sufficed. But she…lost her mother, and sister, and her father died years ago. She eats almost nothing, and now she's too weak. I thought you might…" here he shrugged again, and said no more. Ruka put a hand to his shoulder.

"I will look." He paused. "Her name? And will my presence…?"

"Tula. And…I don't believe so."

Ruka nodded and walked inside. The girl was skeletally thin, thick hair cascading off the cot like a dark waterfall. Ruka put his ear to her back, then began inspecting until she woke and cringed away. He knelt and met her eyes.

"Do not fear me, child. I am here to help you. Rest now."

The girl's hands clung to a stuffed doll, tears forming in her eyes.

"It hurts."

Kale felt his throat tighten at the child's tone, but Ruka didn't waver.

"Pain means you are alive, Tula. Do not fear. Drink and eat and soon the pain will fade."

He gave her water, which she retched, then lay back down and ignored him. Her breathing weakened and rasped, and Ruka mixed some concoction and tried to force it down her throat, which also failed. The priest entered as he was lifting a blade.

"The throat can be pierced," he explained. "We might force liquid into her and keep the tube for breathing open, but I…"

The priest shook his head, and put a hand to Ruka's. "We must return her body to her uncles. It can't be…damaged, in such ways, or else more rumors will spread."

Ruka's jaw tightened, but he nodded. They sat with the girl until the rasps of her breaths faded to nothing, and the shaman left the room without another word. In his 'Grove' he walked to the graveyard and dug a child's grave, carving 'Tula' in island letters on a stake. He sat beside it when finished, and Kale stood nearby with emotions he couldn't possibly untangle.

"You cannot force a thing to live," Ruka whispered. "Suffering is a thief of the spirit, and even a child must choose." He removed a notebook and scratched some detail or thought before handing it to a walking corpse. "I would be alone now," he said, and Kale turned away.

He wandered the mists, for a moment letting himself think it all some elaborate ruse. His mind returned to the last hours of his life—the violence and rage, believing the very worst of Ruka and his people because he had wanted to. He had assumed his family was killed, his people enslaved and tortured—then the attack on the beach had killed his friend, and he'd listened to a hysterical woman who had just lost her granddaughter. But he could have been wrong.

He stumbled away from the giant and his workers, wanting only a dark beach and a fire and his brothers. In his life he had suffered many things, including exile and loss and violence. But as he considered his own mistakes and uncertainties, wandering the prison of a complex mind, it was the worst walk of his life.

Chapter 4

Osco of House Magda stepped off a ship for what he hoped was the last time. The apparent leader of the islanders' remaining forces—Admiral Mahen, walked in tight-lipped silence at his side. The rest of the islanders stared.

They had arrived safely back to the Tong coast, and the merchants, soldiers and peasants there watched as Osco's men marched. Most were wounded; all were soaked in blood and gore, but still in formation. Osco turned and called to them in their native tongue.

"Look lively, brothers. We could be betrayed. If so, fight to the death. For Mesan, and the blue city."

In one voice the men growled. Even after the sickness of the sea and the brutal combat before, they sounded eager to face their doom. Osco swelled with pride, and the sudden shout startled the waiting Tong. Many put hands to blades or spears, but this didn't give Osco pause. He marched his men forward until a civilian in thick dark cloth came forward and bowed, several sweating bodyguards nearby.

"Mighty ally…" he began, in sloppy, nearly offensive Mesanic.

"We are not your allies," Osco snapped in Tong, and the man's face reddened. "Nor are we your enemies. We will speak with your king, then return home. Don't interfere."

The messenger's smile didn't touch his eyes. "I am here precisely to escort you, General. You are tired from battle, I understand, but…"

"Do you."

Osco ignored the soft-handed noble and marched forward. He would need to summon more politeness when he dealt with the king, but for the moment, his frustration, injuries and sea-sickness left him no patience to mince words with fat messengers or tedious men of state. In fact he preferred to fight to the death.

The messenger and his bodyguards stepped aside, and the Mesanites dripped mud, blood and vomit as they clacked down the long docks onto white-sand. Again, Osco thought: hopefully for the last time.

* * *

"General Osco of the Magda, prince of Malvey," announced the courtier at the rice-king's hall.

Malvey, of course, had no princes, and Osco nearly said so. Instead he stepped through with Mahen and Carth, his Second, beside him. He was still armed because he'd refused to give up his sword, which nearly led to violence. In compromise, the king's bodyguard and his men stood in a line—a barrier of flesh between the two Mesanites and the Tong king.

"I am most pleased to see you all alive," spoke the king's disembodied voice from his throne. "I understand the battle was not a victory."

Admiral Mahen shifted but said nothing, and Osco's patience remained thin. He wanted only to do what he promised, then go home—or, if these men preferred, to fight and die.

"Your allies are destroyed," he said blankly. "King Farahi is dead. Prince Ratama is dead. The warlord who killed them is a sorcerer who speaks several tongues eloquently, and fought with rudimentary tactics. He is surrounded by huge, fearless warriors, armed with weapons and armor better than anything I have ever seen. No infantry in the world could have stood against my men as his did."

Kapule's silence stretched and Osco heard whispering, probably with advisors, before he spoke more loudly. "Who is he? What are these men? Where do they come from?"

Osco shrugged. "His name is Bukayag. He spared us to deliver a message. It is as follows: Bukayag offers to marry one of your daughters, maintain your alliance with the isles, and enforce Farahi's laws as king. He awaits your answer on Sri Kon."

Again the quiet whispering. Then Kapule spoke as if there hadn't been a delay.

"Extraordinary! Marry my daughter? Can he possibly control the isles?"

Here Mahen at last interjected. "His fleet is currently burning off the coast of Sri Kon. So, no, his words are hollow. And before my king's fleet crumbles and turns to piracy, I intend to make it my business to sink whatever he has left."

Osco ignored this because he didn't care. "I was honor-bound to deliver a message, my lords. I've done so. I'll take my leave."

"Wait, wait, my friend!" The king emerged partially from his barrier of flesh. "The monsoon persists. The roads and fields are all mud. Surely, crossing the emperor's land for a second time now will not be possible."

Osco winced and said nothing because he expected that was true. He was planning to leave his men to go alone, but decided it would better to be 'convinced' by the king.

"Listen," Kapule licked thick lips, "you've fought these invaders. The emperor is your enemy. I know your people are honorable and worthy of trust. Surely this makes you valuable, and me your ally. Why not stay here with my army? You and your men will want for nothing. I am one of the the wealthiest kings in the world."

Osco paused as if he considered. "Our loyalty is to Mesan, my lord. But, you are correct. For now my men can't cross Naran. If you wish, they will stay here as your personal guard in return for your hospitality. But a single man is not so easily found. I will therefore cross Naran alone to Malvey and speak to the rulers. Carth," he gestured, "will stay and command in my stead."

The king quirked a brow. "Perhaps the barbarians will attack. Don't you wish a chance at revenge?"

Osco squelched the guttural laugh of contempt. An image of the giant's huge hand wrapped around his throat came uncalled—the impossible strength held at bay only by Kale's power. He saw the fearless warriors who walked through that same terrible magic even as it ripped them to shreds, their courage undaunted. Not for all the rice in Tongland, he thought, would I fight those men again. Not unless they stood at the gates of my city, baying for my children's blood.

"My place is in Malvey," he said. "But since you were the ally of my friend, may I offer you some counsel before I go? As a warrior?"

Kapule smiled, almost indulgently. "Of course, it would be most welcome."

Osco nodded, wondering how much bluntness the man could tolerate, and why he should offer it anyway. With a resigned sigh, he supposed, it was what Kale would have wanted him to do.

"The barbarian is correct. With chaos in the isles, Naran will invade. Their standing army is over a hundred thousand, and at its front will be ten thousand of my countrymen, who alone would defeat your army on the battlefield."

The king glanced back towards his advisors, then nodded with a minimum of respect. "Thank you for the information, but that is not exactly counsel."

"I suggest you marry your daughter to this Bukayag," Osco said. "In fact, marry twenty, to him and all his captains. Employ Mahen." He pointed. "Unite as many ships of the isles as possible, and bring these killers to your shore. Bribe him, my lord. Flatter. Beg, if you must. And pray he and his monsters fight your enemies."

At this most men in the room covered contempt or embarrassment, but Kapule kept his expression even.

"Assuming I feared Naran, and assuming I did as you suggest—tell me, what is to stop this Bukayag from accepting an offer from the emperor instead, and turning on me in the heat of battle?"

Osco considered this, thinking the pudgy king more cunning than his manner and appearance would indicate. He rejected instantly the idea of a betrayal, though he had to take a moment to wonder why. Perhaps it was the barbarian's face on Farahi's death, or the manner of his men at the Mesanites defeat. He shrugged, and turned for the door.

"There is nothing to prevent it lord," he said, "save for honor."

Chapter 5

For the second time in his life, Ruka stood outside Farahi's court. Though he supposed it was now Tane's. For a moment he re-watched ancient memories, entering as Hemi's 'apprentice' royal builder to collect his reward for taming the Kubi. How utterly things had changed.

Many men had died between that memory and this. With Ruka's help and the wealth of the new world, the land of ash had transformed. With some annoyance and perhaps shame, Ruka decided things had not ultimately improved for the islanders. Their greatest king was dead. Their nobles were again in disarray. They were suffering and weaker than ever.

But still there was hope.

Tane Alaku sat in his father's chair dressed in the blue and silver of his house. He wore the gold amulet of his station, rings and other jewelry all draped perfectly over his handsome frame and features. He looked very much like a young, powerful king, unconcerned as he met the many curious eyes in his court.

In the end, Ruka had given the boy full authority. He let him send messengers throughout Sri Kon, telling all a peace had been reached. Farahi was dead, informed the letters, Tane had been crowned, and things would return to normal soon. So far it seemed true enough.

Telling the men of ash had been more difficult.

Magnus—a great chief of Orhus from Valdaya's line—had blinked. "But we've won, shaman. These people are weak and scattered. Why not just take the islands for ourselves? Their endless infighting is a blessing not a curse. Who cares about some dead man's son?"

Ruka had bristled at 'some dead man' but kept himself in check.

"These people have kings, you know this. Their kings care about blood through a father's line. And as I have told you, a far greater enemy comes from the continent."

"So let's go and kill them!" the older man almost snarled.

"We can't fight the islanders and the empire. We must have peace with one."

Magnus had exhaled and shrugged because he didn't truly understand, though he perhaps trusted Ruka's judgment. Folvar, chief of Kormet, and one of Ruka's oldest followers, spoke next.

"Will we deal with the islanders later? My children would like it here."

Ruka had taken a deep breath at that. He had to be careful.

"We will do what honor allows."

Other chiefs had more practical questions.

"When will we bring women and children? And how do we decide where to live and divvy land between us?"

"Later," Ruka had answered. "The matrons, priestesses, and farmers must help us decide. But there is fighting to be done first."

"Yes. What of island land? Will we be allowed to choose it and will the ships be divided between the chiefs when we're finished?"

Ruka wanted to tell them the truth—that he did not care how his people divided the spoils of their labors, only that they turned their skill and competence to breaking untamed lands and building new lives for their people. He had smiled and soothed as best he could. To rule seemed such an odious thing—attractive lies from faces more comforting than his.

For now, at least, his people trusted him. But he did not know what Tane and Kapule would do. If they denied the men of ash the rewards Ruka promised, he knew no matter the history, no matter his powers or what bargains he had made, the furious chiefs would come for their prize.

"My lords." Back in the present, Tane stood and held out his arms—the picture of confident command. "You are most welcome."

Ruka blinked away from his memories to focus on the gathering court.

A genuine seeming smile spread across the king's face, and he took the time to look out and nod to many of the men in the crowd. Nearly all were ambassadors and lesser family, rather than royalty or their nearest kin. All stared at Ruka and his guards with shifting, terrified eyes, sweat dripping and beading on faces and under armpits. Ruka did not blame them.

For months, he and his men had purged nobles, merchants and pirates on Farahi's orders. He could only imagine the stories and rumors, the fear and hatred sewn. Now here the killers stood, fully armed and in the flesh, staring in the sweltering heat of the mid-day sun.

The diplomats spoke to each other almost frantically—no doubt swapping rarely spread and desperately sought news from around the islands. The king's servants walked amongst them handing out lemon-scented water and collecting requests, though it seemed none were yet brave or interested enough to attempt it.

Tane waited with a friendly patience until the ambassadors settled and gained some measure of composure in his calm. Kikay sat to his right, his remaining brothers arranged to his left. Priests and monks were gathered and sat in the same place they always had for Farahi, though the speaker was nowhere to be seen. The new king wore a navy uniform rather than the robes of his father, and seemed entirely at ease. At last when the noise had reached a reasonable level, he spoke with authority.

"My friends, we have much to discuss. Forgive me if I skip the formalities."

The noise died entirely now, the attention of the men turning rapt. Ruka and Tane had discussed what would happen, but what exactly he would say Ruka couldn't be sure. His knowledge of Tane was only what Farahi had told him—that he had an easy manner but a shrewd mind; that he was diligent, disinterested in women, and therefore unlikely to produce an heir. Ruka still did not understand this obsession amongst the island monarchists, but accepted it as a cultural difference.

The eldest Alaku son stood when his father would have remained seated. He smiled and paced across the dais as if lost in thought, speaking loudly and with assurance when his father would have all but whispered.

"Grieve with me. My father and our king, is dead." Here he paused but the crowd didn't so much as stir. Indeed their only surprise was likely that Tane and the rest of the family hadn't joined him, and that despite everything, an Alaku yet sat on the throne, and Sri Kon wasn't a bloody ruin. Tane gestured at Ruka.

"King Farahi was defeated in battle by a mighty foe—a foe many of you no doubt recognize—a foreign power from across the sea."

At this signal, Ruka stepped forward to the foot of the dais, which put him approximately at Tane's height. He was supposed to 'look especially fierce', but had simply worn his armor, and made no extra effort.

"Over the last few months," continued the king, "the people of Ash and Sri Kon have fought a bitter war for possession of these islands. Many lives have been lost. Many kin on both sides lie dead. It seemed the fighting would go on forever until my brother Ratama came to our shores with his own army and the support of our ally, King Kapule. There he took the Northern beach in the greatest battle these islands has ever seen." Tane's breath caught with emotion, ever so slightly, though Ruka did not know if it was genuine. "My brother died there. But he won the respect of the enemy's leader. Lord Bukayag saw the mettle and bravery of our people, and came to me. We spoke at length of loss, and of the future and his people's intentions. Now we have decided to make peace."

Finally the ambassadors showed some life, and the whispers began. The mostly careful faces revealed little enough, but a few men hid the hints of sneers behind hands. Tane waited until someone felt the urge to speak.

"On behalf of my lord, we are very happy there's going to be peace," spoke a man in colors Ruka didn't know. "I am certain I would be instructed to ask—how will our new friend pay for all the damage he's caused? He has destroyed many ships, disrupted trade, and killed fathers and sons all over Pyu. Tell me, lord, who is going to pay reparations?"

Agreement rippled across the crowd. Ruka had known payment would be a concern. Men were ruled by vengeance and anger and all manner of terrible things, but in the recency of such death and destruction, and now in the urgent need for unity, he hadn't expected greed to be first.

The man's words seemed to break a dam. Many others stood to voice their own complaints and losses while the king held his hands aloft for calm. Ruka listened as long as he could tolerate, then growled as he stepped forward, causing several nearby ambassadors to rise as if to run.

"You speak of loss," Ruka growled in the island common tongue. "But where were your soldiers? Where were your fleets to defend Sri Kon, island lords?" He paused in the following silence and saw no shame, nor even understanding. In that moment he knew how right Farahi had been—how helpless and divided and weak these people truly were. "You fools," he shook his head. "How many in Pyu could have risen against us? A hundred thousand? More?" He knew he was off script but couldn't help the rising bile. He waved a hand towards Tane.

"I have learned to respect the Alakus, that is true. I accept Farahi's son as my ally and will treat his people as my own." Here he spoke without the slightest need for deceit, and looked to the ambassadors. "Advise your lords to unite behind the Alakus, islanders, for only their banner will protect you."

His words quieted the room until an ambassador in Halin colors spoke with equal menace. "It seems your ally is threatening us, my king. Will you allow this? Is that the new arrangement?"

Tane frowned but waited for Ruka to finish his lines. Or at least the spirit of them.

"If I wanted your head I'd have it," Ruka said with rising venom. "There are other killers who would carve your fat limbs and take your wealth while you bicker. All around you wolves of the continent call for your blood. Do you not hear them?" He took a calming breath, angry that his brother's re-awakening had stirred old, wild emotions he struggled to control. "Be ready, sons of paradise. Your king has protected you for many years. But your king is dead. Look to his son."

Ruka turned and strode from the hall with his guards in pursuit. The soothing, convincing and diplomacy were Tane's job and Ruka hoped he was well-suited. The lords would believe he could control these men of ash or not; they would fear the continent or not; they would rally behind Tane and together muster a new fleet and army, or not. Ruka had little choice but to wait and see.

His heavy leather boots clacked through the hall as he marched towards the coast. Eshen and some of his other bodyguards followed, wary as ever in this place.

First he needed to prepare a ship and decide the crew, which he knew must be light. Then he would risk betrayal and the sea for yet more words with kings and their advisors because circumstance had changed again. That he expected to have to convince them to defend their own children, city, and way of life galled him. But he had to stomach it.

He had once asked the men of ash to choose their future. Tane would in theory ask the islanders. Now, Ruka must ask the Tong.

His brother squirmed at the notion, twisting like a caged animal in Ruka's mind. "We owe them nothing," he hissed through the stone hall. "They are weak farmers and merchants who survive by fortune and little else. Why should we ask them anything? Why should we protect them at all?"

Ruka said nothing. He no longer tried to convince his brother with words. For such a thing as Bukayag, there was only ever a firm hand and spiral of chains.

Instead he focused on the sound of his footsteps, and the future—permitting only memories of island builders and smiths, navy men and the monks whom he had learned to admire. Still, the faces of nobles and pirates, of soft-handed men of books who had never known hardship intruded before his eyes.

"Every man has his use." He whispered the words like a prayer. "Every man should have a choice."

From the hall behind him he heard the drone of the court arguing—the tone and whining pitch of greed and entitlement. The useless words followed him down rich marble corridors built by greater men, and he ground his teeth.

He truly hoped he did not have to bury more islanders. But if he did, he knew exactly where he'd start.

* * *

"Well, that went rather well, I thought." Tane smiled politely.

Ruka stood in the 'secret' meeting room in the Eastern wing. The key to Farahi's palace, he had learned long ago, was a simple subterfuge—a covering of doorways with a thin mat that looked precisely as the rough stone behind, so that it seemed the rooms moved. Of course, they did not, and Ruka had since memorized every piece of the palace.

"As you say," he answered, and hoped the 'urgent meeting' would be short.

Kikay sat beside the king, failing to cover her hatred with disinterest. Lani dismissed several servants and whisked into the room in a pattern of multi-colored silk before doing the same. Ruka did his best not to watch her.

"I'm going to have spend considerable coin on bribes," Tane said vaguely in the tone of a scolding father. "And we'll need to make our presence known one by one on every island to truly assure the lords we have a fleet."

Ruka ignored the tone and nodded, glancing towards the door.

"I leave it to you, ally. But I require some protection to sail to Tong. Most of my ships are destroyed."

Tane blinked, then enhanced his forced smile, while Kikay simmered on her throne.

"I have few enough ships myself, Bukayag. You won't require protection to sail to the coast. And in any case perhaps you should simply send a messenger."

Ruka missed Farahi even more than most days.

"The Tong king must be convinced." He gestured in Lani's direction. "I should bring his daughter and grandson as a token of goodwill."

Even Tane seemed surprised by this, his politeness dimming as he edged forward in his seat.

"My wife and heir will not be leaving Sri Kon in this crucial moment. I don't think you grasp the peril and treachery we face in the coming days. Once again Alaku power seems at its weakest since…"

"He's right," Lani touched her husband's arm. "My father is practical but stubborn. My presence will go a great length to assuring him of the shaman's words." She turned to Ruka without waiting for any kind of approval. "I will go. I should like to see my family again. And my words may be useful."

Ruka half-bowed to the Tong princess. He wasn't sure if he trusted her, but as with most things in the past decade, he had little choice. The look of disbelief and maybe helplessness on the king's face, at least, was amusing.

"We can spare a few ships as protection," he said, "for the queen. But you should take as many of your own men as you can."

"My men will remain on Sri Kon," Ruka answered. "They are the best guards for the sickness and know what to do. Most of my youngest men have been taught your words. They are not eloquent, but you can speak to them, if required."

All three royals seemed surprised at this but said nothing. Tane shifted in his seat.

"You dismissed reparations in court. I fear they must be discussed."

Bukayag swelled in Ruka's breast like a flood, threatening to drown him.

"Were I you," he said quietly, "I would not tally the cost of history. One never knows where that might end."

Tane frowned. "I do not discuss history. The families of the slain are still alive; their murderers walk our shores. Something must be paid."

"Perhaps instead we should be thanked, son of paradise," Ruka snarled, "that we have not finished what we started."

Ruka uncurled his hands and forced himself to step back. He watched the island royals and knew his tone had been too harsh, too uncontrolled. Kikay seemed almost to smile at him from beneath her mask of scorn.

"We will leave the issue for now," Tane said, as if undisturbed. "Good luck in Tong. And please understand, ally, if my wife or heir is harmed, I will hold you responsible."

Ruka nodded for he dare not speak, and turned from the room. He felt chaos growing all around him, testing his plans for weakness, mocking him with their power. He thought of Dala, and Aiden, hoping the great chief was home now and starting to make progress. He knew he may need the men of the steppe before this was over. He just hoped they didn't turn on him, too.

Chapter 6

Dala shifted on the uncomfortable throne meant to symbolize the holy rock, and gestured to her attendants to proceed. The minor priestesses escorted her visitors inside and gestured where they should stand. The arbman knelt. But the skald—Aiden's true messenger—only bowed.

"Holy Matriarch," said Egil, often now called 'The Godtongue's Herald', smiling as he rose. His face was tanned by the sun, wind-burnt and older, but no less handsome for that. His posture and tone were bold, but he correctly refrained from meeting Dala's eyes. He smiled as he spoke. "It's good to see you again."

Dala returned the polite tone. "And you, Egil. I hope you come with good news, and perhaps supplies."

"Only news, I'm afraid. I come before Aiden, returned now from Tegrin's Promise."

'Tegrin's Promise' was what the men of ash called the Northern islands. It was an old idea that existed before the book of Galdra, and meant more or less 'paradise on earth'.

Dala was filled with questions and perhaps would ask some in private later. But she had to be careful, even with her attendants. Managing information from the New World had become increasingly political and difficult. Priestesses and sailors gossiped, chiefs complained about their lack of input and the endless waiting and toil without reward. Some had even tried to reach it on their own.

"And why should Aiden require a messenger, Egil? Surely he can land and speak with me himself."

The skald inclined his head and produced a letter from his cloak, holding it out for Dala's attendants. "I carry a message directly from Bukayag. No doubt it says much for your eyes alone, but he asks me to tell you he wishes Aiden declared 'First Chief' of the Ascom—for all other chiefs to look to him for instruction. He says you will know how best to prepare such a thing. Once you have, Aiden will come ashore."

Dala stared until she felt the skald's discomfort. Were it any other man of ash who simply declared such a thing, Dala would have had his messenger delivered back to him in pieces.

"He wishes it? Tell me Egil," she put a little anger in her voice, "did your master say who then would be First Mother of the entirety of the Ascom?" The skald's mouth opened, then closed, and he shrugged. Dala shook her head. "Aiden has had the same matron now for many years, has he not? Since the battle of Husavik."

"Yes Mistress," Egil answered. "Ida, daughter of…."

"Of Indra," Dala finished with as much contempt as it deserved. "Well, Egil, by declaring Aiden First Chief we are in fact declaring the Ascom a single town. This town must obviously have a First Mother. Do you think the Valdaya would agree the most powerful matron alive should belong to a mostly meaningless, poor family from the South?"

By Egil's expression it was clear he understood. "We…didn't think…"

"No you did not." Dala blinked and kept herself from snatching the message with frantic hands. In practice she had been managing the chiefs, the matrons, and the priestesses for nearly a decade.

'First Chief!' she thought. At least the bloody man didn't say king!

But then 'king' would in any case be obvious. And regardless of the actual responsibilities, such an announcement may awaken several hundred years of fear of a male tyrant to Dala's world. She glanced at the faces of her attendants to see their reactions. They were from good families, of course, and well-trained to betray nothing.

Ruka had almost always seen the logic of Dala's perspective. Why should he send a blunt instrument like Aiden to take charge? And why now? Dala shrugged as if unconcerned.

"The matrons will decide. But this will all take time. I'll have to meet with the Valdaya, and several other prominent families."

"Mistress," Egil licked his lips. "Please excuse me, but, the shaman and by extension Aiden is very eager to move things quickly. There is little time for meetings and discussions…"

"Thank you, Egil, for your message." Dala stood. "I will read the shaman's letter, and send for you when required. I assure you, I will proceed as quickly as possible." She paused, and stared hard at the skald. "Will Aiden accept a new matron, and give up his children?"

Egil froze like a rabbit in a predator's sight. His eyes drooped with something akin to sadness, his voice subdued. "I believe so, Mistress, if he must."

Dala nodded, her mind moving on. "Tell him a Valdaya is almost inevitable. Now I expect Juchi and the children miss you sorely. You should go to them."

Egil's face lifted slightly at the thought. He thanked her and bowed as he left with the proper etiquette, limping as he pulled the Arbman.

"Leave me until mid-day."

Dala's attendants scurried from the room, and she took the letter and waited until she was alone. Her hands trembled as they cracked the seal, running her fingers over the vellum, desperate to hear the news, and yes maybe the shaman's voice as she read the words. She sipped a weakened aniseed liquor from her stand, and braced herself.

The shaman's words were typically blunt to the point of violence. Over the years however she had learned to read the subtleties.

"Mighty daughter of ash," it began, and Dala smiled. It referred to an argument they had before he'd left, in which he had 'admitted defeat', saying only the mightiest daughter of the Ascom could humble him so. It had been a sort of joke, of course, but she had cherished the way he could say such things to her when they were alone. The rest of the letter was classic Ruka.

"My chief ally is dead. Supplies will come slowly or not at all. Begin rationing. I require more warriors along with as many horses, arms and armor as can be gathered. Rally the chiefs, old and young, promising blood and glory. I guarantee both. Aiden's rise should assist with the men. Please deal with the women. If we fail, our great dream of paradise will be lost for a generation, and maybe forever. If we share a god as you believe, we will need her now. You must not fail."

Dala took a deep breath and rubbed a thumb over the first sentence. Oh, Ruka, she thought, knowing much of this 'Farahee'—their benefactor from across the waves. Of course mostly she knew his supply ships were reliable, and his power immense. But she also knew Ruka respected him, indeed, maybe loved him. She had many questions of how and why and what it meant and she cursed the size of the damn world and how slow everything moved. It could take a month just to make the crossing.

Please deal with the women!

Five little words, just like that. Dala would have laughed if the thought didn't exhaust her. For Ruka, including 'please' was practically begging, and this at least gave her some strength. She wished she still had Valda to assist her, but the woman's daughter and new Valdaya great matron had substantial power and would be swayed if she could choose Aiden's matron. What else she might want, only the goddess would know. Dala expected she would have to make many promises for Ruka to keep in the new world. But so be it— he had been clear: you must not fail.

Dala leaned in her chair and tried not to let her burdens crush her. Bukayag 'Godtongue', as the Southerners now called him, did not speak idly. If he said these things then he believed them to be true. And as she considered the difficulty of a new fleet of men and arms, she understood the need for Aiden.

She could rally the men herself, but already many whispered of the endless toil without result—chiefs fighting over the shaman's 'orders', given as if he were their king. Many believed they should pursue the new world individually, if they wished, rather than so unified. It wasn't right, argued the boldest, and often the richest—we should be able to do as we see fit to grow our matron's property!

Now they would be asked to give more, suffer more, all to go and serve the shaman. Some might outright refuse. But as 'First Chief', and here in the Ascom, Aiden would challenge them all directly. Suddenly it would be a matter of honor—immediate life and death. The chiefs would be forced to renew their loyalty, or to engage in war.

Dala considered which chiefs were likely to choose which, and which matrons were most likely to spur them on. She would have to bring them all together, but it couldn't be a simple feast. They needed something…austere, and official, to keep them from harsh words and violence. Something religious.

This was never easy with Ruka's most loyal retainers. The shaman himself had never publicly sworn loyalty to Galdra. Dala had left it alone, for she didn't think much of the prophet in any case, who no doubt had done and said what she had to in her time.

But times had changed. In the end only the goddess mattered. If Nanot was not acknowledged as the greatest god by Ruka and his retainers—she was at least worthy of respect. It had always served well enough, and should be able to bring North and South beneath a single ritual.

Dala realized she was pacing and chewing her lip, trudging in the damned heavy and awkward robes of her station. She forced herself to relax and remember where she was, then consider which Valdaya had no mate, or which might abandon one with little consequence. The answer was almost none.

Could Aiden be taken as a second mate, she wondered?

No. He was still a Southerner at heart. He would cut down any man who shared his matron's bed out of 'honor', and likely start a war. With no solution forthcoming Dala ignored this for now. What symbol should they use to mark him as First Chief? A damn crown? Perhaps an elaborate earring would suffice, or some kind of ring. But then who should present it? Her? His new matron?

She realized she'd wandered from the room and nearly into the priestesses's quarters. Frantic-looking young women flit around her lifting the train of her robe, preparing chairs and water and vellum in case she asked for something. For a moment she remembered life as a dirt-poor daughter of Noss, being dragged to her doom by a man too poor to feed his children.

And look at me now, she thought, terrifying priestesses everywhere I go.

"Sisters," she pulled at the hated fabric around her neck as she plopped on an offered chair. "Get my damned servant's skirt"—this was what she called her plainer, if still overly elaborate matriarchal uniform—"and call a meeting of every High Priestess or higher in New Orhus. We have a great deal to do."

* * *

Priestesses of every age, rank and manner swirled about the Order's holiest place, dressing in their best clothes, and assembling into a kind of procession.

"Where's the damn peat?" Dala struggled just to sit properly in her chair, then noticed several items missing from her tray. She tugged at the hated, stiff cloth stretching from her chin to ankles, making her body almost sexless and impossible to move.

"It's here, Mistress," one of her attendants lifted something from another table, too far to see from Dala's limited view.

"And you've added something fresh?" she said, straining to see the box. "It hasn't been used in fifteen years. I don't want it smoking with no fire like one of the shaman's bloody 'chimney's'."

"Stop fretting."

Juchi appeared in her own formal dress. She shooed the no-doubt thankful attendant away as she slid the cluster of holy items into Dala's view.

"I've seen to the food, which is all very good and done by reliable women. And I've been to the site which is…adequate, and at least what you asked for. Everything else is ready. The Order guard are here. The townsfolk are mostly gathered. Amira is with the Valdaya."

Dala tried a deep breath. In fact the occasion wouldn't overly involve the priestesses. It was the chiefs and matrons being honored, Aiden and his new matron who would speak. If all went well, Dala need only sit and nod with approval while the events carried on. She looked at Juchi fussing over her robe, and smiled.

"What ever happened to that meek little apprentice? You are a wonder, sister. What would I do without you?"

Juchi grinned but kept fussing. "Send a few more priestesses away in tears, I expect."

Dala laughed but put a hand to the woman's cheek. "I don't rely on you too much, do I? I know your children need you. Now your mate has returned. I know you mentor new apprentices and no doubt do other things."

Juchi met her eyes and frowned. "If I couldn't or didn't want to help you, sister, I would say so."

Dala swallowed the lump, and smiled. She'd never been very good with women. If it hadn't been for Amira—who had been her ally since her recruitment as an acolyte those many years before—and for Juchi, she feared she'd have been mostly alone in her time as head of the Order. And she likely would have had to use more than words to tame her critics.

"Time to go."

Dala blinked and found Juchi waiting. She sighed. "Take my arm, sister," she grunted as she rose. "This robe is ridiculous."

They walked arm in arm to the head of the growing column of priestesses, then out to the now straight streets of New Orhus. Unlike the original city composed of circular blocks—often in haphazard clusters—the new roads were perfect lines through the city. Signposts with simple labeled runes denoting numbers or letters hung over every turn, all the way to the sea.

Dala shivered. The weather already turned and soon winter would come. Lumber was already being stacked outside every house, warehouses stocked by the great chiefs. Food was going to be a concern without supplies from the isles. But Dala put this from her mind—a problem for another day.

The procession's destination was the oldest section of the city—some of the only parts of Orhus left untouched. Statues of the gods stood along the streets, most of which had been revitalized by Ruka and his men. The roads ended and became circular patches of gravel-floored markets, surrounded by clusters of gods in all their glory. People waited everywhere.

The mood seemed high. Men stood with sons on their shoulders, matrons clacking tongues as the youngest children raced around stranger's legs. Many eyes turned to Dala and her priestesses, and those nearby bowed or nodded in respect as they passed.

The procession followed Dala and Juchi all the way to the docks, which now stretched all along the coast of the city, and included significant warehousing, dry-docks, and houses. Here the great chiefs and the important families waited and gossiped, also dressed in their richest clothes and jewels.

Dala looked over the chiefs and was reminded again of her last argument with Ruka. He had wanted to take every last one of his most loyal warrior to Pyu. She had said this was a mistake.

His golden eyes had narrowed and he'd frowned as he sat. "You think the chiefs will betray. Even now, with paradise so close?"

Dala had sighed and sat across. Still, after so many years, his naivete in such things could amaze her, but also remind her why he was so special.

"You are a man of vision, so you cannot understand. Small minds rarely look beyond their grasp. Yes, Ruka, they will betray."

He had met her eyes, earnest disappointment writ large across his face. And Dala had again been struck at the sensitive thing trapped inside the greatest weapon of god. As ever she'd felt the complex urge to protect, save, use, and seduce him. But she had put the latter at least away, knowing it would result in failure as it had every time before.

Reality returned as the crowd stilled, then cheered. Old women clapped politely, young shrilled with ululating tongues as the men roared. In his now famous runic breastplate, shining beneath the afternoon sun, Aiden Shieldbreaker stepped from his ship.

A new touch of grey stained his beard; his tanned, slightly wrinkled face contrasted with hard limbs as thick as the statue of Vol. Men followed him with chests of plunder, sacks and crates of maybe grain or salted meat. Dala stood at the end of the dock, and announced for the crowd—though few could likely hear her.

"Welcome, Great Chief, hero of Tegrin's Promise."

Aiden's men waited, and he bowed.

"Thank you, Holy Mother."

His words came as subdued as ever. He had the same unbroken eyes, as if bored with the world around him. He had survived perhaps forty winters—more than most who lived by the sword, yet looked strong and healthy. He towered over Dala, though she was not short. His callused hand rested on the pommel of his rune-blade. His armor rested like comfortable cloth across his chest. Dala did not know what a king looked like, but decided Aiden must be close.

"The greatest chiefs are gathered," she spoke more quietly, just for him. "Several Great Mothers and Vishan will crown you as First Chief of the Ascom. One will Choose you as her mate and become First Matron. What will you do once they have?"

Aiden nodded. "I am their servant. The shaman believes we need the horse tribes in our war for Tegrin's Promise, Matriarch. When this is finished, I intend to take my men and speak with them."

Dala stared, and forced herself to blink. Ruka had left that part out of his message.

As her anger rose she knew it was because if she had known, she would almost certainly not have agreed, nor helped, and probably would have sabotaged the effort. That sneaky, manipulative, Noss-touched bastard!

She cleared her throat.

"Are you sure that's…wise, Great Chief? The raids have lessened since we abandoned the borders and built walls. The horse tribes need little encouragement to attack again."

"The Godtongue was clear," he said, as if this ended all possibility of debate.

Dala forced herself to smile. Aiden was fanatically loyal to the old gods and their prophet. Many of the young men of the 'Galdric Generation' were the same, and thought of Ruka as a demi-god. No doubt if he asked them to leap into the volcano, they would only ask if the gods preferred head or feet first.

"Well," she said, resigned. "Let's not waste time. I expect much private grumbling, but the chiefs will accept your appointment. Land is already managed through the Guild of Farmers. The chiefs oversee craftsmen, builders, and enforce our laws. That is where your authority will lie. Though there is much to discuss."

Aiden nodded as if unconcerned. His manner was as impatient and brusque as anyone could expect from a man about to be crowned 'king'. But Dala did not consider chastising him. Great men and their bloody pride, she thought.

It would in any case be unhelpful to confront him. This was a great honor, and since it could no longer be stopped it was far better to cement Aiden's future loyalty with support when it mattered. Dala smiled genuinely for him, and put a hand to his arm.

"No man is more deserving. Your name will last forever as First Chief of the Ascom. I will support you as best I can."

The Southern chief seemed at least slightly caught by surprise, and half-bowed. "Thank you, Matriarch. Your support is welcome."

Dala returned to her seat at the edge of the inner circle. The Valdaya and Great Mothers from several prominent families greeted Aiden next, but Dala could not hear their pleasantries. As with most conversation involving Aiden it was over quickly, and the elite of Orhus took their places amongst the circled statues of the old gods.

Dala considered speaking, but today was not her day. It was Aiden's triumph—but also the Valdaya's. The greatest family of ash would become the first family officially, as they had always been unofficially. It would be them who spoke, for it was they who owned the land, and who chose the chief. Valda's niece—now an old woman herself—walked to the center of the circle and stood on the rock.

"What words to address this mighty gathering?" she shrugged, as if hers would have to suffice. "Sisters, chiefs, and the sons of Imler—in support of the great journey to the New World, we matrons and mothers have declared all good earth in the land of ash to belong to a single tribe. It must therefore have a First Mother—and the great matrons have chosen. Sasha, daughter of the Valdaya, will carry that burden."

The women in attendance clapped politely, the men standing in silence.

"Where there is a Mother," the old matron went on, "so too must there be a Father. Today we gather to see Sasha, daughter of the Valdaya, choose a mate to seed her womb, protect her children, and work her lands."

This too was mere ceremony. The grey-haired Sasha had survived more than forty winters, born ten children, and lived with a powerful chief as her mate. She walked to the rock and bowed to the gathering. "Thank you, sisters. But as you can see, I am old, my womb nearly dried. I offer the privelege to my daughter, Misha, who is young and strong. She has the strength to lead my kin with her elder's counsel."

A dark skinned and haired beauty rose from the Valdaya ranks dressed in the now fashionable mix of cloth and colorful island silks. She bowed to her kin and to the gathering before she turned her attention to Aiden.

"Many worthy men stand before me," she called in a strong voice. "But I choose Aiden of Husavik. That is, if he has the strength to see my kin and land made safe."

Aiden stepped forward as the men at last roared their approval.

"You honor me, mistress. But the men must have their say. It is the sons of Imler who work and protect the lands of their kin." He turned to the men's side of the circle and swept his gaze from the sea to the iron bridge. "If any will not serve me, or deems himself more worthy, let him come now. Here, in the presence of the gods, we will see who Vol favors."

Dala almost snorted in the silence. Aiden's prowess was legendary, nevermind his age. Rune-armor and blades hung from him like ornaments at spring festival. No man in his right mind would challenge.

Still—out of custom—they waited for what seemed a reasonable delay. Misha smiled and stepped to Aiden's side, hand raised as she spoke.

"Then, let us…"

"I challenge."

A gruff voice rose from far behind the greatest chiefs, and every eye scanned the crowd. A small clearing opened and became a path, and the crowd stared as a single man emerged. He wore clothes more like soiled rags, his beard unkempt, his hair dark and shaggy.

Dala's suddenly racing heart beat many times before she truly accepted: the man was Birmun.

This knowledge did not assist her calm. She had not known if her former lover was alive or dead, only that he had become a drunk in truth rather than as a charade. He had in years past been spotted wandering Orhus, usually silent, but sometimes aggressive with shop owners or even warriors.

She had tried once or twice to go to him. His welcome was always unkind and demanding. He wanted her in his bed, then later once the rage died down, for them to live together and have children. Eventually she had stayed away from him, hoping he might move on and find another mate. It seemed he hadn't.

The crowd seemed too surprised to mock or support him. They stared in a kind of disbelief as he stepped into the ring of statues.

"I'm still a chief, am I not?" he slurred, noticing the mood. "I challenge you, Southern dog." He pointed at Aiden. "You don't frighten me, you or your…women."

The Valdaya began to look annoyed. Many powerful chiefs—even their mates and sons—seemed mostly amused, though others hid their emotion. Aiden looked neither embarrassed nor flustered. He inspected Birmun with something like pity in his eyes.

"You are drunk, brother. You've served the gods well in the past. There's no honor in killing you. Go and rest."

"Don't mock me, you arrogant shit." Birmun fumbled dirty hands beneath his clothes, drawing a long object sheathed in rags. He uncovered it, and it seemed almost impossible due to the length, but it was a long, rune-covered sword. "I am the nightman chief," Birmun yelled, "The Godtongue himself gave me this blade. Does any man deny it?"

Aiden's gaze lingered with an almost reverence on the famous sword. "No, Birmun. You have been honored. You are a man of deeds."

Birmun seemed surprised to be so quickly accepted. He nearly fell as he turned, showing the strangely immaculate sword to the crowd. "I have as much right as any man," he called. "And I accept no 'First Chief' appointed by women, bloodless." He looked at Aiden as if he'd landed some kind of blow, smirking as he leaned. "Tell me, great chieftain of Husavik. Is that how you win your glory? Is it given to you?"

Aiden stared, no sign of concern. "If it's death you want, brother, you will find it here. Come in the morning. Come sober. And perhaps Vol will claim you."

Still the crowd mostly watched in silence, caught in the drama of the exchange. Birmun looked away from Aiden and laughed hard, wiping tears from his eyes. "Now there is a man. Unlike the rest of you whipped dogs. Good. Ha! Good! I'll see you at dawn, hero."

With this Birmun stumbled away, waving his sword at the crowd until they cleared him a path. Dala knew her face had flushed with blood and tried in vain to fight it.

The crowd swept with gossip and laughter—excitement, no doubt, for the violence to come. Most of the chiefs still looked amused, some others whispering with their matrons. None looked at Dala, though she felt as if they did. None likely considered her involved nor culpable. Why would the Order and it's matriarch be involved with some drunken fool, in some circles still mocked as the 'slayer of Bukayag'?

But Dala knew. And in this moment, as Aiden's grey eyes flicked just a fraction too high, finding Dala's before they turned away, she knew he did, too.

Can I go to him, she thought, standing with the other priestesses.

If she did not, Birmun would die tomorrow, humbled and alone, the laughing stock of Aiden's story in the tale to come.

He had been the only ally and comfort once for a lost and frightened Southern girl. She had loved him then, and in a way still did. That her love had changed was not his fault. His choices had brought him to this, and she was not responsible for him. But, she knew, she owed him more than nothing. And perhaps she could stop it. She had to try.

* * *

That night, Dala left her guards and servants, sneaking from her home in a simple woman's clothes for the first time in years.

She tried to remember the last time she and Birmun had spoken, but couldn't. She knew they hadn't ended in some torrential spat of words, but rather in a slow, awkward death.

She had gone to him less and less, turned him away more and more, until finally he no longer asked, and she never sought him out. She took no pleasure in it, and had never meant to hurt him. There were simply too many important things to do, and she couldn't be caught laying with him.

Later she sent a young, pretty priestess to Choose him, but he had turned her down. The insult to the girl had been immense and damaging and Dala had to smooth it over. That was when she'd finished with him in truth. For what more could she do? The girl had been mortified, and if they hadn't done it quietly her male kin probably would have killed Birmun.

Dala followed an almost familiar path, though things had changed, the nightman's hall remained where it was. Somehow she knew it was where he'd be. As the first time she'd gone she again found herself slightly lost, wandering in a strange section of the city. She followed the new signs, and eventually found her way.

The nightman's hall was almost identical to those years ago. The foundation had shifted slightly, wooden beams old and slightly rotten but still strong enough. The roof had been replaced, perhaps, in bits and pieces over the years.

Dala crept around looking for an open window, realizing even if Birmin was inside he might be too drunk to reason. In a way she hoped he was—maybe he would sleep through the morning, or maybe even forget he'd made the challenge. At the door, she saw a shadow pass and flicker, light peaking from the bottom of the warped wood. She took a deep breath, and knocked with the ring.

"I knew you'd come." Birmun opened it almost instantly, then turned away.

Dala forced herself to step inside. There was a small fire burning and the hall stunk like sweat and rum, but it seemed Birmun was alone.

"That's an unusual welcome for the matriarch." She stepped inside and Birmun gestured to a filthy wooden chair.

"I can clean it, if it's not good enough for you anymore."

Dala smoothed her dress and sat.

"Do you hate me so much?"

"I wish I did." He walked to the fire and scooped something from the cauldron, placing the cup before her. "It took me two years, you know, to accept the truth."

She warmed her hands on the wood and thought it might be cider. "What truth is that?"

He sat and met her eyes. "That when I die I'll burn in the mountain for what I did."

"You speak of dark days fifteen years ago? Still?"

He snorted. "Do you know how many we killed? Do you even care? Many were boys. I killed women, and girls, too, and an infant.

Dala shook her head. "I never asked you to…"

"You did," Birmun snapped. "You found a boy choking on rage. You loved me, and you asked for blood. I'd have given you anything. You owned me body and soul, Dala. You unleashed a wolf in a chicken coup and now you say you only wanted one dead chicken?"

Dala said nothing, knowing it wouldn't help. Birmun sipped from his cup and seemed to calm. "I'm a fool, I suppose. I thought you loved me."

"I did," she said without hesitation.

Birmun shook his head. He threw the contents of his cup into the fire and paced before he set his hands on the table, his back to her. "I want you in my bed, tonight. Or else tomorrow I'm going to kill your precious First Chief, and destroy all this madness you've built."

Dala blinked, truly surprised. In some small place in her mind she'd imagined this was what he'd demand, perhaps, but didn't believe it.

"You arrogant fool," she whispered. "Aiden will cut you to pieces."

Birmun's voice was quiet, too.

"I've been underestimated before."

"This is Aiden Shieldbreaker, Birmun, not some arrogant chief. He has never lost a duel."

"No man loses until he does," said Birmun.

"He will come in armor made by Bukayag."

"Don't say his name."

"I've told you," Dala snapped, "I never lay with him. It was never about that, I never…"

"Stop. Just stop talking." Birmun turned and his stare was fierce. "Who said I'd kill Aiden in a duel, Matriarch? Am I not the Nightman Chief? A silent killer in the dark? Maybe I'll slit his throat." He crossed the room in huge strides, seizing her arms and pulling her from her chair. "Do you think I'm the only man who feels abandoned by you, Dala?"

She met his gaze but didn't fight him, though his grip was hurting her. "I'm not some pampered daughter of Orhus, Birmun. I carry many scars."

His gaze flicked back and forth between her eyes, and the mark on her cheek. "You aren't afraid, I know, but you should be. For what danger is left to a man destined to the mountain?"

"There's no need for this," she tried a more soothing tone. "I'll help you, as I offered before. I'll arrange a mate. Ascomi, even islander, if you wish. I will take you to paradise. We're not enemies. I can ensure…"

"I've told you what I want." Birmun let her go and stepped away. "Not just tonight. Whenever I call."

Dala knew she could accept at least tonight and ease the danger for a day. It would be no great hardship—she had lain with him before, and many cold nights she longed for the touch of any man's flesh. She knew she should accept.

"No."

Birmun nodded. "Then there's nothing left to say. Perhaps tomorrow you'll change your mind."

Dala breathed, knowing pride was so often the weakness of great men and she mustn't make the same mistake. "Please," she said, "don't do this. I don't want you to die, not like this, not after everything you've done. I'll take no pleasure in your death. I truly won't. Aiden has far too many warriors, he'll butcher you."

"Get out," Birmun said as if exhausted, his hands loosening. "This hall is for broken men. You aren't welcome anymore."

Dala shook her head and put a hand to the heavy iron ring on the hall's entrance. "Don't you care?" she looked back at him. "Do you want to die?"

Birmun laughed, and met her eyes. "We get away with nothing in this life. Not one misdeed, not one word unspoken. Not any of us. Not in the end."

Dala looked away. She found even the sight of this man now brought her a kind of sadness, and turned back into the cool night.

Chapter 7

Ruka waited off the coast of Nong Ming Tong, his hands gripping the rail of his flagship. The city's defences, he decided, were pitiful.

Their harbor was entirely open. There were no sea walls, no ships patrolling, no sign even of warriors prepared for a landing force. It had been built purely for trade, safe under Farahi's watchful eye for decades. Ruka and his men could have landed and razed half the city in an afternoon.

He examined the outline of Ketsra's buildings, the tall palm trees, the construction of the floating docks, and the few fishing boats at their work. He knew a great deal from books and Pyu sailors, but it was his first look at the continent.

Now for his first trip he would step into a foreign city, and ask a king he had never met for permission to die on his behalf. Bukayag snorted in contempt.

"Weak things will always perish," his brother hissed. "We can't protect a whole race of farmers and merchants forever. Why should we try?"

They have been feeding us for a decade, brother.

"They didn't know, nor care. We paid for every grain of rice and the day we couldn't is the day we'd starve."

Ruka said nothing because this was true. But Farahi had known; Farahi had cared.

"Farahi, Farahi, Farahi," Bukayag wrapped his hands around the rail and ripped off a chunk of wood. "I'm sick of that name. I'm glad he's dead. He uses us. He knew these people were helpless, his own people weak and vulnerable. So here we are, a well-trained beast of war."

Enough. Be silent.

Bukayag laughed in his face.

"You don't like truth now, brother? As you wish. I'm sure if you pretend very hard, reality will change. Isn't that what you think we do?"

"Who are you talking to?"

Ruka flinched and turned, finding no one near him on the deck. He blinked his attention to his Grove, and realized Kale was watching him. Ruka didn't wish to speak of Bukayag, and felt the urge to deceive, but remembered where he was. He did not lie in his Grove.

"I…it is my brother." He shrugged, embarrassed. "Or perhaps some other version of me. It's…difficult to explain."

A slow smile spread across the islander's broken jaw, and Ruka turned away. Kale's voice followed him, unstoppable, limitless.

"You don't know," laughed the prince. "All your careful attention, all your truth. You don't even know what you are."

Ruka tried to ignore him, seizing a piece of lumber and setting it in a vice before he scraped dirt from its sides.

"There is no room for another voice in my mind," he muttered.

Still Kale laughed, his voice circling in the air. "I have seen your 'brother' before, Ruka, in other places. I saw shadows with red eyes and claws. Perhaps that's what you are. A demon sent from hell. A life-eating reflection of shadow."

"You know nothing." Ruka attacked the wood, scraping more than dirt and ruining the piece, then tossing it in annoyance. In his memory he saw the eyes of his kin after his birth, arguing with Beyla, and heard their words. Cursed. A son of Noss. Devil-born.

Somehow the islander's presence seeped into his memories, as if the perfect prince were standing there, laughing at him as a boy.

"I can see him," Kale whispered on the wind. "He hides inside you. I saw him plain on the battlefield—a creature made of darkness. Without him, my magic would have torn you apart."

"Enough." Ruka tried to blink away the images and words from years ago. "You have every reason to deceive me. There is only me. The darkness is mine. I am no more a demon than you."

He looked to find Kale less exultant than he'd expected at the feeble defence. The young man's humor had faded, and he seemed sincere.

"There is an old monk named Lo on Bato. He had a shadow like yours. I had meant one day to return there and explore what it meant, and to understand my own beginnings. Perhaps you should leave this war and all the violence you intend. Go and ask him. Perhaps we'll learn more."

Ruka tried not to flinch in recognition at Lo's name, but in his Grove he had long hid nothing, and Kale's notice was clear. He shook his head, as if disappointed.

"You're so interested in myths Ruka, or so say your books. Now tell me—what would your 'skalds' say about a man with a demon inside his flesh? Or a man who kept the spirits of his victims as slaves? What would they say?"

"They are not slaves," Ruka's face flushed with anger. "I honor them. They live here, just as I do. It was all I could do for them. You know nothing."

A small smile spread again across Kale's face, infuriating, arrogant. "Tell me," he said, "since I am not a slave, nor a prisoner. How do I leave? What if I tire of this life between life, and should like it to end?"

Ruka scoffed, thinking of the graves he had broken in the past, and the dead who had disappeared. It had been many years since he had done such a thing, and it felt wrong, not his place. It was the dead who managed their homes.

"I don't know," he said. "Fly away, if you wish. You did it once. Do it again."

Kale's hand was on his chin, as if he hadn't heard. "And it's not as if the dead can speak, can they? So how would you know? Perhaps every moment for them is suffering. Perhaps with every breath they can't take they would beg for release."

"I…" Ruka shook his head, knowing it was wrong. "I would know. It's not real. This place. I created it from nothing, without me it…"

"Oh it's real, Ruka, as real as any other place. And no, you wouldn't know. You don't want to know. That is the truth."

"I would know!"

In the world of the living, Ruka ripped the wooden railing entirely from its supports, flinging it into the sea. He turned to find Eshen staring with wide, almost panicked eyes. He made the mark of Bray.

"Godtongue…I apologize. A boat comes to meet us, a smaller craft. The princess is inside."

Ruka took deep breaths as he tried to control himself. It was hard enough with just his memories and Bukayag to worry about. He didn't have the attention to deal with Kale. But he nodded, and his retainer waited awkwardly at his side.

Lani soon stepped to the prow of the smaller scouting vessel, seizing a rope as she pulled herself to his ship without assistance. The spray of the sea wettened her silks, and Ruka nearly groaned at yet another thing that felt like distraction and impossible to ignore—another strengthening of Bukayag, and weakening of him.

"My father has agreed to speak with you," she called from the rail. "But only with you. The rest of your men must stay on the ship for now."

"What does she say, shaman?" Eshen asked. He and the others spoke only bits of Pyu common, and the princess spoke quickly. Ruka sighed.

"She says just me."

His bodyguard spit over the rail. Several other men now gathering behind him grunted their approval, already arming themselves with blades and iron rings.

"Let us go quietly tonight, shaman," Eshen offered. "We'll drag this king to you in chains."

"I agree, Godtongue," said one of the Galdric youth. "You will be betrayed. Let us land in force."

Ruka smiled, wishing he could thank them for their concern. But 'Bukayag Godtongue' was a vessel of the divine, and had no fear.

"The gods protect me," he said, then looked at Lani, very carefully, studying her face and eyes and matching them against the memory of every liar he had ever known. He could see no deception, but then, the father could have lied to her, too.

As was his fate, it seemed, he had little choice. He couldn't defend the Tong if the Tong said no. He glanced back at Eshen, and put a hand to his shoulder. "But even a king should learn to make concessions."

* * *

Lani frowned but said nothing as Ruka and his well-armed guard boarded the smaller ship.

Unlike the Alakus, her father had no 'royal port' for his own use, and they soon docked at the common harbor with every other merchant and fisherman. As she looked at the ships and the rising outline of Ketsra's buildings, it still did not feel like home.

She glanced at Bukayag, whose sharp, golden eyes squinted against the sun, frowning as he inspected the city.

"Is the continent not as great as you'd hoped?"

Bukayag's angled brow furrowed. "Where are the defences, princess? The soldiers? Your people's naval ally has been conquered, yet it seems they've done nothing. Your city is at our mercy."

Lani considered this and found she agreed. She wondered what Kikay or Tane or even her father would say, wondering if this man were truly their enemy.

"Looks can be deceiving," she said, trying not to show her feelings.

Bukayag only grunted. They rowed to the dock and found several soldiers waiting, with some space cleared for them, but otherwise business moved as usual. They were stared at by merchants and sailors, a small crowd even gathering on the beach just to point and gossip.

Lani expected to get off first and perhaps make introductions, but the shaman leapt to the dock like a born sailor, and offered her his hand.

The Tong ambassador watched them in some amazement, but she took it and did her best not to yelp as he lifted her like a child to the swaying dock. Her father's soldiers stared at the hugeness of the shaman, eyes widening as hands went instinctively to bronze swords and wooden spears.

The foreigner half-bowed with the minimum of respect, but correctly in the Tong fashion.

"This is Bukayag," Lani stepped beside him and smiled. "He is the leader of these warriors, and a spiritual advisor to his people." Lani spoke the words in Tong, then gestured to her father's Chief Bodyguard and spoke in Pyu common. "This is Lilo, shaman. He is my cousin, and will escort you to the palace."

"Your father commanded alone," said Lilo in Tong, his tone far more hostile than seemed wise.

Bukayag's men tensed at the sound, and stepped forward. The shaman himself looked only amused. Lani raised her tone to match her cousin's.

"I agreed to two bodyguards, which seemed more than reasonable. Surely you can manage three men."

Lilo stared longer than was polite, but nodded. "Tell the barbarians to follow me."

Bukayag smirked and stepped forward without instruction, and Lani had no idea if he understood Tong. Assuming he did seemed wise, and insulting him most foolish.

They walked down the swaying docks together, as a growing, unrepentant crowd of eyes inspected them. Lani kept her head high and tried to walk like a princess. She knew she was nearly as much a spectacle as the men of ash: the returned Tong princess, raised with the sorcerer king as an islander.

Her earlier trip to her father had gone smoothly enough. She'd left her son with her mother, but had to argue to go back and bring the men of ash herself.

"They trust me, Father. You must be careful with this man, and extend every courtesy."

She'd stood in his court surrounded by men of state and bodyguards, their gazes inspecting her island silks with judgment. She'd been dismissed, more or less, but had stood her ground and made her case. It was not how she'd envisioned reuniting with her father, now a stranger.

But he alone had not ignored her—as he might have done—and smiled politely.

"Do the Alaku's trust him, daughter?"

She was aware in that moment she was the only woman in the room. But then she had lived all her life beneath the scrutiny of Farahi and Kikay Alaku. The sycophants and farmer-barons of her father's court hardly frightened her.

"He is cunning, my king, and dangerous. I watched him survive power that ripped a stone palace apart."

"You haven't answered my question," said her father. She nodded. She thought of Kikay and Tane and their distrust and enmity.

"I don't know, lord. He has re-instated Tane as king. And why should he? He wants alliance and friendship, as he says, or he wants something beyond my understanding."

The look in Kapule's eyes seemed as if he focused more on Lani's lack of understanding rather than her words. He smiled politely again and looked away, as if in dismissal. The court returned to their whispering and Lani had to speak over them.

"Father." The men silenced again, and Lani thought of her conversations with the foreigner, his words about Farahi. She knew Tane was wrong. And Kikay was wrong. "This man and his warriors—he knows we couldn't stop him. Yet he asks for trade, and to protect our lands. Why should he wait on Sri Kon? We have two threats now, one to the North, and one to the South. So tell me, Father, what does Naran offer except submission?"

The pause had been long and awkward. Her father had smiled again and without addressing her words had approved her returning to fetch Bukayag. She had left the room with ears reddening though she believed what she'd said.

Now on reflection she was glad she'd said it. She could have parroted Tane's words, or stayed silent as her mother or aunts would have done. But it was her people, her life, and truth always mattered.

She returned her attention to reality, watching Bukayag's strange and furtive eyes examine everything. He was unlike any man she'd ever met, so focused yet distant, strong yet vulnerable, a walking contradiction. She became so lost in these thoughts she failed to notice the small crowd of watchers had begun to grow. It seemed a veritable mob of Tong clustered around the harbor and the city, their expressions strange.

Lilo and his men were already pushing some away. "Make way for the king's guard," he shouted, seeming nearly as surprised as Lani at the blockade. The crowd didn't move.

"Murderers," someone called.

A wad of spit sailed from the street to the final stretch of beach, and for a moment Lani couldn't understand. Her people were the Pyu's allies, but often it felt more like rivalry, and little love was lost between them.

"You killed my brother!" shouted another voice. "That's them!" from just behind.

Lilo looked increasingly agitated, and his men were raising clubs as they lurched and waved their weapons at the crowd.

"They killed the rainmaker!" came another voice. "They killed the prince!"

Lani's heart raced as she repeated the words, again and again. The rainmaker. They killed the prince.

She knew they meant Kale—the beautiful island boy who had come through Ketsra to save his people, apparently winning many hearts and minds, and taking many Tong sons on his doomed voyage.

"Back!" Lilo shouted, striking a young man and knocking him aside. "Make way for the king's men!"

The guards were pushing now and the crowd twisted away. Lani lost track of the angry faces and curses, and began to feel a coiled panic in her gut. She wanted to scream, or run at them clawing, like an animal being forced into a cage. She kept her face down and hands clutched tight to the guard in front of her. They were moving, and her father's power in Ketsra was strong. The crowd would not attack the king's men in force no matter how they felt about his guests.

A deep snarl pierced the din. Lani twisted to see Bukayag, and recognized a familiar panic in his eyes. The hugeness and strangeness of the men of ash was suddenly obvious. They stood next to the crowd of her people with wide eyes and fierce expressions.

Guards were clubbing now, striking any who pushed against them. A few young men fell with bloodied brows, and the mob roared in protest. A young woman met Lani's eyes, and sneered.

"Savage whore."

Wetness struck Lani's face. A rock sailed past her head, and she cried out as another hit her arm. The shaman ducked as more flew at him, his deep snarl becoming the roar of some raging beast.

Bukayag barked a command to his bodyguard in his guttural tongue. They both lifted their shields, and drew their swords. Flame erupted as if from nothing. A long, wicked rod of grey metal formed in the shaman's hand. Lani gasped and pulled away as the light flared and roared, and the shaman's body hissed with heat.

"Get back to the boats!" shouted Lilo, still fighting desperately against the crowd. The shaman's voice growled in Pyu common.

"No. Stay between us, princess. I go to the king."

A crack pierced the already tempestuous sounds of the street. The shaman had spun his club with impossible speed, and hammered the first man from his feet.

* * *

A very bad start, Ruka thought.

He tried to determine how far to the palace, how many people blocked the road, but he couldn't really see. There were side roads but he didn't know this city. He had seen no maps and expected none existed. Getting lost didn't seem wise.

'Lilo' was right—going back was the safest choice. But Farahi had been clear: Ruka had no time.

Every moment of delay increased the chance that his world, and indeed the Tong's world, would come to an end. If he fled to his ship, perhaps the king would decide not to meet with this hated foreigner at all. Ruka could perhaps sneak in with darkness, but then, he may not be welcome in secret.

No, he thought, as ever—now was the moment for deed. He had been invited, and so he must arrive. Ruka would not fail, even if it meant breaking a thousand men in his path.

"Try not to kill them," he shouted, then again more quietly for Bukayag. Much of his armory was still scattered and ruined from his clash with Kale. The racks of weapons and armor had largely been broken, the gale of the prince's power scattering all from river to woods. But he'd found a blacksmithing rod beside the forge, gauntlets and a metal plate for a shield. They would have to do.

Ruka roared as he struck the first man. The nearest tried to run but couldn't move in the press of bodies, and Ruka crushed another man's nose with a mailed fist. Eshen and his men threw their weight behind their shields, battered the smaller men aside as they trampled ahead.

"Follow," Ruka growled in Pyuish, shattering limbs as others tried to fill the gap.

The king's men were still wavering, but obeyed, seeing no easy path behind them. Ruka and his guard led the way.

In the land of the dead, wind erupted uncalled from above. Ruka squinted and shielded his face as the fog scattered, and Kale flew or maybe jumped across the field. He landed before Ruka like some hero from a myth.

"Get Lani back to the ships," the wind growled with his voice. "What the hell are you doing putting her in danger?"

I'm a little busy, islander.

Ruka smashed another young man from his feet, then glanced back to check on the princess. She was lodged between her father's guard and looked safe enough, if frightened. He didn't blame her. In the Ascom, to directly harm a woman of even low-status sent a man to the mountain. In his homeland she would be the only one of them relatively safe; here, she was the most vulnerable.

"If she's harmed, Ruka, by the spirits I swear…" Kale shook his head, as if unwilling or unable to express his rage. "You will regret it."

Ruka turned as his blood rose. "Is everything my fault? Do you think I mean her harm? Why don't you do something?"

In the land of the living, he bellowed and struck a man too hard, and knew he would need to build another grave. Many in the crowd were panicking now. They had not come to fight armed giants, and those at the front tried to flee. Those at the back still pushed, and many were falling to disappear amongst the horde of careless feet. Ruka wondered if killing a few with a sword and spraying blood may actually save lives, but he held back. With his men and the king's guard pushing at his side, he clubbed his way forward to the main road.

After a few more broken limbs and men thrown aside with shields, the front of the mob began to thin. Ruka waited and helped pull the guardsmen out from behind, swiping his iron to keep the citizens back. Once clear of the crowd, the group of them turned and ran.

A bit of blood ran from a harsh bruise on Lani's arm, but otherwise she seemed unharmed. Despite her fear her eyes were sharp and active, searching the streets for danger. The bottom of her dress had been ripped off entirely, and Ruka decided she had done it herself to help her run. Despite everything, and the guilt for what he had done to the Tong, he smiled in approval.

Without violence pressing in on them, and the king's men still shouting to disperse, they soon reached Kapule's outer gate. The many soldiers there ushered them inside, and the guards collapsed or dropped forward with hands on knees, blinking away the terror and gasping for breath, relief flooding over their expressions.

Ruka and his men stood upright but panted too. He knew he could still be betrayed inside, and if he was, it would not be unarmed peasants.

"Another warm welcome in paradise," said Eshen, leaning against the wall. To the bewildered, and perhaps hostile glares of the Tong, the younger Ascomi laughed without reservation. Ruka supposed it was a cultural difference.

Chapter 8

The Tong palace was wildly different than Farahi's, or even the old tyrant Trung. Far more open space allowed men to mingle, for a start, and the walls themselves were integrated into the city. A major street ran straight through, common people walking the grounds without interference from the guards. The stone was old and crumbling, the open gates doing little. Any army could knock it down or scale the walls with a few moments effort. Ruka felt his brother twist with contempt.

There were soldiers, at least, and these ushered them inside to the inner palace. Their escort brought them to a large circular hall filled with richly garbed merchants and maybe dignitaries from other lands. Most stopped and stared at the bloody, disheveled party, their eyes sticking especially to Ruka and his men.

"They must all leave their weapons here," said Lilo in Tong, turning to stand before thick wooden doors to what was likely the courtroom.

"Are you blind?" Lani snapped in the same tongue. "Did you not see him on the street, Captain? He can't be disarmed. I've seen enough stupidity and I can't take anymore." She turned to Ruka and spoke more politely in Pyu. "Please follow me, shaman."

She stormed past the guards without another word, and the men looked to their captain with a kind of panic. From what Ruka knew of the Tong, they were no doubt unaccustomed to royal princesses disobeying orders. Ruka followed in her wake with hands raised in a gesture of peace, and none tried to stop him.

The door creaked as Lani jerked it open without waiting. Inside lay an opulent throneroom of maybe marble, rectangular and huge. Rich tapestries hung from the many windows, marked with symbols of House Kapule, Ketsra, and the Tong. Stalks of wheat and rice made from a kind of crystal or maybe glass sprouted from vases and furniture on tables. And the room smelled…of flour.

Soldiers stood in a line of bronze before a squat, fat king on a mountain of pillows.

Bukayag's eyes roamed the room along with Ruka's, his mouth watering at the weakness. He saw 'elite' guards sagging with the unfamiliar weight of armor; the trembling of fearful hands. He felt his brother's urge to rip them all apart, grip the weak thing before him, and tear chunks with bared teeth.

The guards before him held short and flimsy spears, sweat beading on many foreheads. More circled, and Ruka saw yet more men with bows further away, arrows notched and ready.

He took a breath, and tried to control his contempt. He summoned his 'patient voice', and prepared to follow Farahi's way—giving men what they wanted, when he could. Farahi respected this man, he told himself, surely there was a reason.

So he bowed low with respect in the Pyu fashion, feeling some of the deadly tension, at least, ease.

"Welcome," said a sweaty man next to the king in the island tongue. "To the court of King Kapule."

* * *

Kawa Kapule shifted impatiently on his throne, fingering the opened letter in his hands.

He had spent every effort to prepare for the barbarian lord. A bounty of food produced throughout the Tonglands was arrayed, every dignitary summoned to show how many attended him. Everything was cleaned and polished, and he had ensured the palace guard were fully equipped. When he'd looked on his preparations, he had felt confident the meeting would start well.

Then the riot started. This possibility had not occurred to him. After the rains, the chaotic mood of the city had cooled, or so he thought. Apparently the tension was not entirely gone.

With his guards he had watched helplessly from palace windows, mostly trying to see his daughter. Go back to the damn boats you fools, he'd thought.

Instead they'd charged and cleared the mob, and Kapule wasn't sure if he was impressed or annoyed. Either way there would be consequences. He'd told his steward to go down and collect the names of the dead or wounded, and later he would decide if some deserved compensation.

Mostly he had worried about his daughter. She survived fifteen years with a foreign power, and though Kapule was not a man prone to revenge or fits of anger, the thought of her surviving just to die at the hands of his own people, and in his own damn harbor…

He realized the letter was half crumpled in his hand, and tried to relax.

Earlier, when she'd first arrived at the palace after a lifetime of absence, his impulse was to send her down to his sisters and wives, surround her with guards, and keep her out of danger forever. By all accounts she had honored him in Sri Kon. His spies told him she was dutiful, excelled in her studies, impressing the island lords as she became as part of the Alaku family.

Why Farahi had asked for her specifically those years ago he still didn't know. He supposed she had been the right age for Tane, and had assumed it just a display of knowing the names of all Kapule's children. But after so many years of alliance and knowledge of the man, he was no longer sure. Farahi always had plans within plans, and inscrutable reasons for everything.

The thought made Kapule sad even now as he thought of his old friend and rival. There should have been a great funeral, he thought, filled with island lords to celebrate the man who enriched them all.

Certainly, that is what the Tong would have done. At the death of such a man, people should have gathered from all over the world to pay their respects to one of the few peacemakers to hold the reins of power. Kawa sighed, and supposed it didn't matter.

Lani was home.

When he had seen her, he knew it was one more thing he owed the island lord—raising his daughter, who returned to him a strong and beautiful woman. She was dressed as an islander—sheer silks that went far beyond immodest in Ketsra, but she didn't seem self-conscious at all. She looked like her mother, but where the mother was quiet and subdued, Lani marched with her head held high, looking the men of state in the eyes.

"My king," she'd bowed low and correctly, his grandson and heir to the isles in her arms. Only the spirits knew how she'd convinced her husband to bring the boy, but as he saw her, all thoughts of hiding her away with his other daughters vanished. Instead he had felt the urge to stand.

"Daughter," he'd said, smiling as he touched the boy's hair. Then, with a mischievous grin. "Thank the spirits, he looks like his mother, and not one of those square-faced Alakus." She'd smiled and embraced him, and he whispered. "You're safe now, child. You're home."

Her eyes had grown bright with water but not enough to escape. "We have much to discuss, Father. I bring word from my husband and his…new ally. He is here to meet you."

Kapule had sent the boy to his grandmother before re-summoning his advisors. In the end he had agreed, and now the moment had arrived.

The sounds of the men outside could be heard through the door, and after the herald announced them, his daughter and this strange barbarian would hopefully enter unravaged by the crowd.

Still, he'd had physicians ready, as well as a number of other guards in case his guest's blood was up. Kapule was not a military man and had never fought in any battles, but he understood violence well enough. It had a way of spreading like illness, passed between kin and strangers like rot.

So he waited, fingering Farahi's letter, so old now the paper had yellowed and stained despite being locked away. He had been told not to open it, which of course he did, then feared Farahi had known he would open it, and had accounted for that, too.

Now here he was, feeling trapped and afraid, as if braced to weather a storm beyond his control, just as he suffered droughts and fires and great waves. The doors pushed open, and Lani came first.

Blood stained one of her slender arms. Her dress was torn and spattered, her silk and flesh clammy with sweat. The giant entered behind her.

"Father," she bowed low in respect, stopping at the line of guards. He nodded as if not noticing her appearance, or disturbed by the breach of protocol. She stepped aside with a hand extended.

"I introduce Bukayag, warlord and spiritual leader to the men of ash. Please excuse his appearance—we were attacked in the street, and he was forced to protect us."

Kawa smiled politely. "I saw from my window. I'm glad you've made it safely."

"Thank you, great king," the giant answered in nearly flawless Tong. "If my accent does not offend you, we may speak in your language."

His voice was deep and strong, as if he'd been trained on an actor's stage. His 'accent' was almost non-existent, his words nearly perfect. Kawa did his best not to display his shock, but felt he heard the ill-concealed gasps of several advisors.

"No," he said, "I would be honored. I am curious to know how you've learned our tongue, but perhaps that is a conversation for another time."

The giant made no response, not even a twitch of one his strange, yellow eyes. His skin was incredibly pale as the stories said, so white he appeared a corpse. His head was shaved and beardless. He stood still, towering like a statue over the men around him. Kawa shifted on his cushions, finding them more uncomfortable by the moment.

"My daughter has told me many things about you. Should I assume they are true?"

The giant didn't flinch. "A man should trust those who are worthy."

"And are you worthy, Bukayag?"

"Only my deeds can say."

"Your deeds are not much celebrated here. As you can see. You killed the man who brought my people the monsoon. You killed some of their sons, brothers and fathers. You attacked my ally. Whether or not you killed him, surely your deeds led to his death. Do you deny any of this?"

"No, king. All of that is true."

Bukayag's expression was hard to read, but Kawa thought the man took little pleasure in the admission. Kawa gestured to his servants, who brought a large, sturdy chair made for his fattest guests.

"Please, sit. There are physicians if you require assistance."

Servants brought two trays of lemon-water, bread and sweetened rice, setting them beside the giant. He ignored them.

"I am unharmed. Has the queen told you why I've come?"

The queen, Kawa thought, a little startled by the title.

Of course he was right—Lani was now queen of the isles. Behind the barbarian, she sat and gestured for a physician to clean and dress her wound, and Kawa tried to ignore the anger he felt at the injury.

"My daughter has told me you wish an alliance with my family and people. Has she spoken true?"

"Yes, King Kapule. I wish to protect you from Naran. I will marry one of your daughters, if that is your custom, or make any pact your people respect."

Kawa felt his flesh redden at the man's manner. He wielded words like clubs, even with a king! Still, Kawa shifted his weight and kept his tone light.

"Protect us? Naran is our trading partner. We have no conflict with Naran."

Bukayag's expression darkened, if that were possible. One yellow eye twitched as he looked over the faces of Kapule's advisors.

"We have no time for nonsense. Your partner attacks any caravan that leaves your lands by road; they attempt to kill your generals and officers in their beds, bribe your allies, and gather their soldiers from every corner of their empire. Soon they will attack in force. Before the next dry season, if my information is correct."

Kawa again tried not to react, though he knew his long stretch of silence was telling enough. "You are very well informed," he said, as if unconcerned, "if any of that is true."

"It is true, my lord. Farahi informed me. We were allies."

"If you were allies," Kawa withheld his scoff, "why did you attack his island?"

"Our occupation was a ruse. I destroyed his enemies so he could unite the isles beneath a single kingdom. Perhaps we should discuss it privately."

Despite the ridiculousness of this claim, Kapule sensed some truth in it. If any man would do such a thing, it was the Alaku patriarch. He had never been able to dispel the hatred of his family name, or bind his raucous lords to a larger banner. During the 'occupation', Kapule's spies told him many of the Alaku's most bitter rivals had died in 'raids', while the loyal lords were untouched.

"I'm afraid you're too dangerous to speak to privately, Lord Bukayag."

The barbarian's chest moved with what appeared his first deep breath, or maybe sigh. "That danger is the same, king, with or without your guards."

It was said so plainly, Kawa's bodyguard bristled and lifted spears and daggers, their feet braced to charge on command. Now it was Kawa's turn to sigh. He looked at the men around him before meeting the barbarian's eyes.

"Will it help if I allow you to bind me?" said Bukayag.

Kawa frowned and found he was sweating. Prince Ratama had thrown armed men from their feet with nothing but a thought. If the stories were true, he had died at this man's hands. That reality nearly defeated Kawa on its own, but he felt his hand curl around Farahi's letter, a lone piece of driftwood in a stormy sea.

"I believe it will," he answered. "Bring chains and rope." He gestured to his servants.

Lani's expression took on a kind of horror, but she said nothing. Kapule's bodyguards and advisors waited in silence as trembling servants returned and bound the barbarian to the chair in several loops, ties and manacles. Lilo checked it all and nodded.

"Thank you, my lords." Kapule turned to his advisors. "Leave us, but please remain in the palace. I will consult with all of you again this evening."

Some looked surprised, others offended. One or two voiced quiet complaints in Kapule's ear, but one by one he thanked them again and maintained the command until they removed themselves. Lani bowed and left, as did his guard, save for Lilo.

"You too, nephew," Kawa said. The boy who was like a son twisted as a dog on a leash, eyes locked on the barbarian in a mix of wary dislike. Kapule patted his hand. "It will be alright. You can wait outside the door. If I need you, I will ring the bell."

With one last threatening glare, Lilo left, and Kawa rose to fetch himself a stiff drink.

"Nevermind him. His father died young and I raised him as my own. A good lad, and a fine warrior." He dragged a chair opposite and sat, undoing a part of his outfit. "My councilors would have me torture you until I have the truth of everything. Oh I'm sorry, would you like a drink?"

Bukayag shook his head. If he was afraid at the prospect of torture, he did not show it.

"Ask, and I will answer."

Kapule put Farahi's letter in his pocket, unsure if he were ready for this moment, feeling almost as if it were a dream. He looked into his guest's strange eyes.

"Tell me, what is your real name, Bukayag? Who are you truly?"

The barbarian's pupils rove back and forth across Kapule's as if surprised. His jaw tightened as he blinked, then his expression softened.

"My name is Ruka, son of Beyla. I was born deformed and made an outcast. My people believe I speak for the gods. I do not."

Kawa sat and remembered to breathe, then leaned heavily against his chair. He looked at the barbarian's strangeness again and shook his head, for it all seemed so implausible, indeed impossible.

Could it be a ruse so many years in the making?

"I often thought Farahi was a madman," Kapule said. He considered, but only for a moment, then stood and began to unclasp and untie the shaman's bindings as he spoke. "He offered me advice on crop timing for years—as if he could predict the damn rain. Then he would tell me one of my servants or advisors had been bought by the emperor. He never said 'maybe' or 'possibly', though he never offered proof or reasons. He was always right. It took years until I listened, of course. I never did understand, though I suppose I grew to accept it. Is he truly dead?"

The giant nodded, his eyes losing some of their luster.

Kawa shook his head and drank island rum, sitting heavily again in his chair. He took the letter from his pocket and handed it to the barbarian.

"He told me, years ago—one day a strange foreigner would come seeking my friendship. This was a decade ago at least. You understand? When it happened he said I should ask directly for the foreigner's real name. And that if he said his name was Ruka, son of Beyla, I should trust him with my life, and the lives of all my people. Here you are. And so I've asked."

The giant's eyes roamed the letter, his thick fingers tracing the faded ink. "And if I said something else?" he asked, without looking up.

"Pray," Kawa quoted, "and kill him, if you can."

Ruka snorted and returned the letter. Kawa couldn't help but stare at the huge, callused hands that made his own look like a child's. The barbarian smiled, which seemed strange and almost boyish on his face.

"I never beat him once in Chahen," he said. "He was a very annoying man."

Kapule paused, then the laugh came most naturally.

"We played once or twice. I swore never again, though I practiced secretly for years. The god-cursed bastard."

Ruka's smile widened until he showed jagged teeth. Kapule found he was no longer frightened, and for a strange moment king and barbarian shared a laugh at the expense of a dead island sorcerer.

"How did he die?" Kapule asked when the moment ended. Ruka looked at the dim light of the whale-oil lanterns, as if he could see the moment in the flame.

"An accident." He looked away, as if he didn't wish to discuss it. "A death of misfortune."

Kawa squinted, a bit surprised at the cryptic answer. He wanted to say he didn't believe—that in so many years Farahi had avoided 'accidents' of every kind. The giant seemed to read his thoughts, and spoke on, his voice subdued.

"Even a seer is mortal, with all the weaknesses of men." He shifted his weight. "It was…sickness, disease."

Kawa took a deep breath, and decided to change the subject. "It seems a seer's son is mortal, too. I saw his power with my own eyes, yet you defeated him. Tell me how."

"I have my own power, king." The golden eyes flicked back to Kawa's.

"And your people? Do they have this power, too?"

"No. And though I wield it, in truth I don't understand it."

"You can appreciate that is a deeply unsatisfying answer. Will this same power let you stop the emperor? Can you destroy his armies?"

"No, king. I am not a god. I cannot fly or destroy men as Kale did. But I have a great many weapons, and true warriors to wield them. Farahi gave me a decade to prepare for this war. I have not been idle."

'This war,' Kawa thought, as if it were already inevitable and real. He was terrified by the thought. Whether this was because he knew too much of his enemy, or not enough of war, he was not certain. No doubt it was both.

"We should discuss strategy," he said. "I have generals and other men of state who should be present. Perhaps there are still tactics to avoid…the worst conclusion."

Ruka nodded, if slowly. For the first time he seemed to consider his words, rather than simply bludgeon with them. He spoke quietly.

"No good man would wish to accept what comes next, king. But I know you have seen the signs. And in all your years, did you ever know Farahi to be wrong?"

Kawa reclined and drank his rum. He looked out the window, missing his friend and rival, ally and brother in law, who had once sent a letter asking to bind their people into a great empire without war. We seemed so close to that future, he thought. Perhaps we still are.

He looked to the blood-stained barbarian near breaking his chair. The eyes, though strange, seemed in a way so familiar—another great man, maybe, waiting on Kawa to catch up. He finished his rum and sighed.

"I'd best go get my generals."

Chapter 9

Osco turned his blurring eyes forcefully from the horizon. He was thirsty, but his last waterskin had nearly dried. To fill it required finding and boiling water from the mostly parched ricelands of Western Naran, but he couldn't risk a fire. Even if he could he knew after a proper drink and rest his body would tremble, his mind would whisper 'just a small sleep, just a little while'. If he allowed that small betrayal he knew the rest would come.

So Osco marched.

For five days and nights he had crossed the Tonglands and the provinces of the empire. Guards and scouts lurked everywhere. Farmhouses and sheds were shuttered and locked as if for imminent raid. Sometimes Osco walked, other times he jogged. At least going the other direction there'd been companionship and other men to think of. Alone, his mind was left to wander.

Often, it found Liga. This he blocked behind a wall of will building since childhood. Memories of his father, brothers and uncles were more pernicious—too old and deep, like ancient wounds that ached in a frost.

"Get up, assemble," his uncle barked in one. It had been a cold fall morning in the midst of harvest, and Osco and his brothers and cousins trudged from their beds to the yard to hold spears and shields made for men. They had blinked away sleep and held back their yawns.

"Do you think the enemy cares that you're tired?" Uncle Timas snapped.

"No, Uncle," they answered together.

"Do you think he'll wait for your bladders or your breakfasts?"

"No, Uncle."

"Shield-wall, right angle. Mark."

The boys moved instantly to obey. Most had been training for years already and could adopt every stance required in the army.

"Double line. Rotate."

They'd moved together, the timing perfect. He'd drilled them until the sun reached its peak, and beyond.

'Skirmish-screen. Mark. Single line. Mark.'

The commands became the muffled sounds of a dream, or maybe nightmare. Even Uncle Timas who just stood there yelling dripped with sweat by late afternoon. Osco was the first to fall.

He'd been the youngest, no older than ten, his limbs trembling for ages before he simply couldn't stand. As he fell he leapt from formation so as not to interfere with the others. Tears of shame stained his cheeks as he waited in the dirt, knowing he would not be allowed to rejoin the formation. To break it in battle was to die.

Uncle Timas said nothing. He kept barking commands, not even looking. He'd finished one more drill then knelt before Osco and taken off his helmet, and rubbed his shaved head. "You did all you could, soldier, and fell aside for your brothers. I'm proud of you."

His brothers and cousins had lifted him up, though all nearing collapse themselves, then stumbled to a waiting feast with winking, cheering men, where they were even allowed to drink wine. It had been a good day.

Osco blinked against the harsh wind of a treeless field. He repeated an old soldier's marching song like a prayer, over and over until it consumed his mind. Wind blows; sun bakes; rain falls; I remain.

But the thoughts always returned. Osco remembered Kale's poisoning for the thousandth time—watching Uncle Timas, mute in the Magda hall with all the others. They'd hardly met his eyes as he stripped power from his father. Though the memory had faded to dull images and sounds, what Osco truly remembered was the shame in their eyes. Whether it was for themselves, or for him, he did not know.

The sun fell. The sun rose. Osco had marched through the night, and now slouched against a rocky cliff to drink the last of his water. He was close now and could feel it in the dryness of the air, the hardness of the soil. Grass grew sparse in thin clusters of stronger breeds; the Naranian hills dropped and rose at steeper angles. Osco at last crossed what most other men would call a small desert, but what his own called a valley, forcing himself not to lick cracked lips.

When the blue rooftops of Malvey entered his view, he allowed himself at last to consider Liga.

It was possible she had succeeded. With her family and luck she could have managed to tame the Magda and seize control of the city. But it was unlikely. Her own house the Hirtri may not have had the strength or the will to act quickly enough. If not, Osco's kin would have taken her and torn the signed documents to shreds. Now she would be locked in a dungeon cell, sent back to the temple. Or, he forced himself to accept, sent to Naran as a slave.

Osco nearly tumbled down the last Eastern hill and knew his pace was too quick, his legs too weak. He felt as if the world were shaping all around him and unless he moved faster he would miss his one chance to change it.

He crossed the stream his people called a river that flowed on the Western side of the walls. His sense of coming home was strong, despite the possibility of it not being safe. In the last five years he had been in Malvey only a few days—sent to Naran because he was a second son, and because he had a gift for language.

"Keep your eyes open," his father had told him. "Learn their ways and tell us of their plans."

Osco hadn't questioned it then. He'd gone with pride, happy to be useful and help his people. Now he wondered if he'd been sent because he was a nuisance. Since he was a boy, even his brothers thought of him as…overly zealous. 'Obsessed with tradition', they said, vitriolic of Naran.

'Little Devoted', they'd called him, at first with amusement, then in annoyance as the years grew on. He had given up drinking, gambling and wealth, wearing only the plain cloth of the warrior-priests. He had trained in the temple and the academy and with the army, every moment of every day, until in his eighteenth year he'd been invited to the Sacred Order of the Devoted, as young as any could remember.

These things he had done for a simple reason—Osco had always despised Naran. Since the first day he'd seen a 'recruiter', he had hated them, the emotion festering every year they returned for the young men of Malvey 'requesting' their 'token of friendship' with two-faced smiles and soft, greasy palms. He'd hated their clothes, their hairbuns, their make-up and jewelry and loud voices and sycophantic sniveling lies.

Naranians protested endlessly their own selfish natures and desires, yet spent every moment in pursuit of them. Deep in their soul Osco had always seen the will to conquer and enslave, without even the decency to speak of it. For that arrogance, for that hypocrisy, yes—Osco hated them.

He entered his home through the main gate in darkness. He intended to watch his family's estate from a distance, knowing many places to climb and spy through windows. The city was very dark and quiet, lit softly by a pale sliver of moon.

He knew he should wait—that he was exhausted beyond wisdom, senses dulled and maybe twisted from dehydration. But he had no time.

He walked along sandstone buildings and cringed at the sound of his steps. Two guards leaned lazily on the Magda gates, so Osco climbed a wall on the East side where they grew apple and apricots. He climbed down the fruit trees as he had done a thousand times, then snuck across the wild grass. He waited and watched the manor, which was larger than most but mostly stood unguarded. When he was sure, he climbed the wall beneath his room.

Using old, familiar hand-holds he strained with trembling limbs to the cut-stone opening and propped on his forearms. A woman slept in his bed. Even in the poor light he could see his wife's long, dark hair. There were no bars, no glass, nothing. He crawled inside and moved to her side.

"Liga. Liga, wake. It's me."

She opened her eyes and blinked, and Osco froze.

It was Liga's sister, Opala.

"I'm sorry," she whispered.

Men leapt from behind curtains and cots hidden with blankets along the walls. Osco roared and kicked the first man who came, then cried out as something hard struck his shoulder and elbow.

Osco fought his doom in the dark. They had to cudgel him nearly unconscious before he stopped and let them drag him bloody across the tiles. He heard feet stepping from doorways, lanterns held in familiar hands as his kin watched him dragged down childhood hallways. Harcas was waiting.

"Of course it failed," said his father in a dungeon built for foreign prisoners. "The Hirtri know we have the emperor's backing. They betrayed Liga instantly. Your idealism has made you a fool."

Osco swayed to a sit, his arms and legs already shackled, and spit blood to the drain built in the center of the cold stone. Harcas shook his head.

"You should be pleased. Were it up to me, you'd already be dead."

Osco latched on to what seemed a throw-away phrase, and laughed.

"But it isn't. It will never be up to you again. You submit to your master at the mere threat of the lash."

Harcas said nothing, his face impassive as the rock of the cell. Osco lay down and may have slept, or passed out. He woke to a kick in his ribs and hands dragging him up. Two Naranians with top-buns and oily faces grunted as they lifted.

"You coward," Osco shouted for his father, "you blind traitor. You give away your own right to judge your son?"

The men growled and fought him, struggling to drag him from his cell. He found Harcas in the corridor watching alone.

"You didn't even think to kill me and lie?" Osco laughed, knowing he sounded a madman, and perhaps he was. He expected Harcas to ignore him, but his voice cracked like a whip, his only form of anger.

"The emperor has spies. It would have failed."

Still, Osco laughed, even as they dragged him down to the escape tunnel which lead to the back of the manor. "Would it," Osco cried between the gasps. "Already, already you think like a slave!"

One of the men slapped him hard as if to silence him, but the weakness of the blow only made him laugh the harder.

"Where is my wife, Harcas? Where is she?"

But the man who was once his father said nothing, and the Naranians wrapped Osco's mouth with dirty cloth, and covered his head in darkness.

You should have killed me yourself, Harcas, and been sure.

He repeated it again and again in his mind, a chant to shield himself against reality.

You should have killed me.

* * *

Osco woke hanging over the edge of a cart.

"Ahh, there he is. Welcome back, mighty prince!"

Mesan has no princes, Osco thought, then licked bloody lips and tried but failed to move. He could only look, and smell, his captors—who seemed as if they hadn't changed, bathed or shaved longer than Osco, though most Naranians were fastidious. The younger of the two men moved to the cart, and began to unravel Osco's binding.

"Get off," he said, then kicked the cart.

Osco grunted and obeyed. "Water," he croaked. Both scouts snorted.

"These bloody people," the older scout said in Naranian. "This shit-skinned prick makes us sit in that hellhole of a goat-mucking city for…two weeks? Now I drag his filthy arse across a desert, and the first thing he says? No, orders. And in his ugly goat tongue."

The other man chuckled throughout. Osco swayed but kept his feet. He felt as if fog clouded his mind, black spots tickling the edges of his vision. From dehydration training he knew he had perhaps a day before lasting damage, and death.

The scout snorted, and spoke in poor Mesanic. "You carry cart far as me, neh? Then you get water."

Osco glanced back towards his city. He suspected they'd gone no further than a morning's march, so he knelt at the cart, lifting the pommels as he braced the straps over his shoulder, and pulled.

"Ha!" The older scout laughed. "Look! He's not a goat, he's a donkey! Straight to it he goes!

The younger man laughed, but Osco ignored them. He knew most of the Naranian military hated his people. Mesanite heavy infantry were something like myth to the young soldiers of the empire. The old men who had maybe fought them were gone; the academy's history described them as 'lucky', or 'treacherous', to explain a simple and confidence shaking fact—Mesanite heavy infantry had never lost on any battlefield.

The failures of Naran against them was a blemish on an otherwise never-ending story of success. No doubt it hurt a soldier's pride, and became a weakness to exploit. But not here—not as an unarmed captive without a friend or ally in the world.

Osco did what his people did better than any other, he grit his teeth, and marched.

They went all afternoon in silence. The cart wasn't heavy, though the knowledge that water jostled inside was galling. In his weaker moments, Osco considered throwing it down, leaping on one of the guards, and drinking as much water as he could before they beat him senseless.

But they had clearly not sent ameteurs to retrieve him. Both men held themselves like warriors, no doubt veterans of skirmish campaigns. The older man made a show of being oblivious, but his hand never strayed far from the knife hidden at his back. Osco suspected it was actually why they'd untied him—they wanted him to try and escape, so they could give him a righteous beating, or worse. But the thought made him smile. That they desired a pretext meant they had orders not to. So he kept pulling.

A few hours into the march, the older man withdrew a flask from his belt.

"Thirsty?" he smiled. Osco nodded and stopped, but the man slapped him hard on the back. "Only curious, donkey. Keep walking." The younger man shook his head and laughed.

"Look how proud he walks," said the same scout later in his own language. "Never seen a proud goat. But donkeys are quite noble creatures. Are you a donkey, Malvee? By Ru, such arrogant pricks these bastards!"

"Aye I noticed," admitted the younger scout. "Straight, like an arrow. Got a rod rammed up his arse."

Osco stopped listening to the words. Water was all that mattered. He swayed as the black dots moved closer to his gaze, clearing his throat again and again without effect. He walked on but nearly lost his balance, the cart wheels whining as they drifted off the path.

"Alright," said the younger man, "that's enough, Sergeant, we'd better give him some."

The 'sergeant' scoffed, but took out his flask. "Alright, donkey, the corporal here is scared he'll have to pull the cart next. So we'll stop and you can drink."

The younger man threw down his pack and knelt to start a fire. Osco realized they meant to camp and almost laughed. A Mesanite army with wounded, sickness, and no supplies would have gone further.

But then, he didn't much want to reach his destination, and slumped without a word. To survive and reach his enemy likely meant slavery, maybe in a mine, or fought in a cage like a dog for some lord's amusement.

They gave him a little rice and water, and tied him up for the night. In the morning they let him up to piss, and he lifted his cart without instruction. The men laughed.

"My God he'll make a good slave, this one. Better donkey than a donkey, neh?"

Osco met the man's eyes, still not sure if he'd prefer to be killed before he arrived. He spoke in Naranian.

"At least I'm not an illiterate peasant who'll soon die from rotten teeth."

The young scout snorted his water, and the older looked from his comrade to Osco with something like disbelief. He dropped his lips to cover his teeth, stepped forward and cuffed Osco hard in the back of the head.

"Hear that, Corporal? A talking donkey!"

They did nothing else, and Osco knew for certain he wasn't to be harmed. They marched due East towards Naran, the sergeant giving him water but no more food, making a point of eating in front of him with grunts of pleasure.

Their incompetent attempts at disturbing him only increased his contempt. He watched them pick at their food daintily, sleep with padded bedrolls and a cushion, and eat dried ration without even an attempt to hunt.

Another day passed. The third was cloudless, the hot sun rising waves of heat off dry grass. The men stole glances at Osco throughout, expecting him perhaps to drop in exhaustion. He did not.

His stomach grumbled but soon quieted with acceptance. He followed foot after foot and watched his captors sweat, their arrogant smiles fading as it became clear they wanted to stop.

"He might drop," said the Corporal, licking sweat from his lips. "Better rest him awhile."

Osco laughed. His hands were stiff and clamped on the wooden pommels, but he dropped the cart.

"Far enough," snapped the older scout. They drank deep from their flasks and gave Osco a little, then tied him down before they dropped to the dirt and slept. Osco lay awake staring at the stars. When the sun rose the older scout kicked him though he was awake, and they marched at last from the edge of the desert and barren hills, until all trace of Mesan was gone.

After lush grass and row after row of square field, the capital of the empire entered view. The imperial city, which was indeed known only as 'the city' in Naranian, had no walls save between rich and poor. The outskirts housed laborers and farm-hands in makeshift homes with little more than wooden beams and cobbled planks for roofs. Directly beside them behind stone walls lay estates sprawled over good, rich soil.

The scouts took Osco down a special road for imperial business. It had several 'lanes' for different rankings, but regardless was mostly clear. The peasant road nearby was clogged with men and animals, but it was clear none tried to break the rules.

By the time they'd gone through the outskirts, then the city proper—past every possible class, people, and layer of wealth classified by men—Osco was ready to collapse. The houses became stone palaces and buildings of state, temples and fortresses surrounded by marble, sculptures and gold. The men dragged him to the side entrance of one just like all the others, and spoke to men in imperial garb.

A tall, older man in robes emerged—his hair perfectly coifed in the classic Naranian top-bun, his face oiled, creamed and powdered. He did not bow, and the scouts nearly dropped to their knees while he inspected. His voice was high pitched and lilting.

"He looks…sickly."

The older scout raised enough to grin.

"We had him carry the cart, lord. He'll be a good slave, this one."

The older man blinked, no amusement reflected in his eyes. He stared so long the scout's face dropped, some sweat leaking down his temple.

"Were those the orders?" came the high pitched answer.

The sergeant licked his lips before he answered. "Malvee dog said this one's a traitor, lord—said he'd be a slave, or executed. Your man said not to hurt him, so we didn't. Just a little fun is all, lord, didn't mean no harm."

Again the long pause, which seemed to pucker the scouts like eggs in a jar of vinegar.

"What were your orders."

"Retrieve Osco Magda," said the younger scout. "Bring him alive and unharmed to the Summer Palace."

"Did the orders say tie him, force march him, and bring him weak and sickly?"

"No, lord," both men snapped together. The high pitched whine became a shriek.

"He is an honored guest of the Son of Heaven, you stupid fools."

The men dropped to their knees in supplication, hands before them and faces in the dirt. The old bureaucrat transformed, face curling in forced pleasure as he bowed to Osco and spoke in flawless Mesanic.

"Please accept my eternal apologies. It seems you have been mishandled in a manner…beyond all reasonable tolerance. I offer my most humble apology, and assure you the men responsible will be punished so severely their descendants will feel the shame and agony for a hundred years."

Osco nodded, surprised, but neither pleased nor alarmed. It was always impossible to tell if Naranians meant a thing, whether it was verbal nonsense, or what they'd do next. Directness was rude, but he decided to clarify.

"Will they be executed?"

"Oh very yes," the old man didn't seem bothered to say. "And punished first, I can guarantee it."

Osco looked at the doomed men groveling at his feet, and sighed.

"Would you spare them, if I asked you? As an honored guest?"

The politician frowned, and shrugged his delicate shoulders. "If you wished, yes of course, unless the emperor disagreed."

The young corporal risked turning his face to meet Osco's, a look of amazement and pitiful hope in his eyes.

"I was only curious. Please do what you wish…?"

"Ambassador Yeng," the man smiled and bowed, and Osco returned it. "Please follow me and I hope you can forget this unpleasantness, it will certainly be dealt with most judiciously." He gestured down a perfectly clean, oil-scented corridor with a soft rug and paintings along the walls. Many servants waited in attendance with heads and eyes lowered. Osco stepped over his 'captors' and returned the bow.

"I am very pleased to make your acquaintance, Ambassador Yeng. And I assure you, the incident is already forgotten."

The man smiled with false pleasure, sighing in dramatic relief as he led him onward.

"I should not be surprised, since you are a royal guest," he said, "but may I say your manner and words are most correct and worthy of praise."

"Thank you," Osco bowed again as he walked, "but you are overly kind, my words are adequate at best."

The ambassador smiled perfunctorily, but it was clear the ritual had relaxed him.

Two down, Osco thought, entering the heart of his enemy's power, still not knowing why. A few million more to go.

Chapter 10

Slaves in fine, tailored uniforms washed the days of grime from Osco's body. He sipped water flavored with lemon, cooled with ice from the mountains. Young men cut his nails and trimmed his hair, and he felt himself drowse once or twice. He sat in water warmed then poured in a bronze tub, his arms leaning off the edges as the servants worked.

Guards blocked every doorway. Osco had tried to map the streets and buildings in his mind, but knew already he couldn't re-trace his path from the hills to this palace. In fact he didn't even know if it was a palace, or maybe a fort, or a high building of three, maybe four floors. The servants said nothing save mumble greetings, apologies, or platitudes, which in Naran counted as conversation.

"I suppose a chicken is plucked before it's eaten," he said in an exhausted daze, mostly to himself. The servants ignored him and he supposed he'd spoken in Mesanic. It didn't matter. Nothing really did. They needn't have guarded him, for if a man had no homeland, he had no future—and nowhere to go if he ran.

When they'd finished cleaning they brought him his very own slave-suit in imperial colors. A white-haired, squinty-eyed man from maybe a Northern province bowed and dressed him, explaining slowly and in basic Naranian that Osco would be brought before the imperial court.

So, he thought, there's a feast after all. Am I the main course, or an appetizer?

When he was properly scrubbed, oiled, and clothed, the young men bowed and left him, and a familiar face stepped into Osco's sight.

"Greetings, honored guest." Li-yen—the young imperial servant who had certainly been a spy, and perhaps a lover of the island prince—stood in the doorway to his padded cell. "I am to escort you to the emperor," she explained, her eyes downcast, face unreadable. Osco snorted.

"I'm surprised to see you."

Her plucked brow furrowed with concern. "Apologies, lord. The emperor knew we were friends. He thought my presence would be comforting."

Osco let a silence stretch between them, then realized she hadn't understood. "I meant I thought you'd be dead, buried in a mass grave of nameless slaves. You failed to capture the prince for your master."

The girl's slender jaw twitched, but her tone was well controlled. "I cared for Kale, honored lord. I never asked him for anything, and I did not betray him."

Again Osco snorted, no longer interested. "Take me to your master, honorable Li-yen. Perhaps you can be useful, as you say—any tips on being a slave?"

At last the girl met his eyes, the polite mask of her culture nearly shattered by Osco's incredible rudeness. "I am an imperial servant," she said with a bit more force. "But here is your advice, and please take it—be more polite to the emperor."

"Or what," he spit.

"Or you will lose things you never knew you had, lord. Please follow me. The son of heaven is waiting."

Osco released a deep breath, and followed. Together they descended carpeted stairs that creaked with every step. Osco saw no other guests, nor even a sign of servants save for spear-armed guards at every door and hallway. The spiral stairs became stone corridors with portraits of Naranian nobility, or an artists rendering of great battles and men achieving spiritual awakening, surrounded always by bright shafts of sunlight.

They crossed into a warm, moist evening, and Osco realized there had been no windows in the 'palace', which he decided now was a kind of polite prison. They crossed a courtyard that rivaled the beauty of Sri Kon's palace—shrubs and flowers, bush rows and walking paths, colorful and immaculate. Osco noted, too, the high walls of stone without ramparts.

Guards approached at the closed gate and apologized before blindfolding him, escorting him on both sides long enough he could hear their deepened breaths before it was removed.

"Do not look at the son of heaven." Li-yen stood before him beside an ornate metal door. It was inscribed with the first emperor bathed in light, his arms outstretched in a classic pose. "Speak only when directed to, or asked a question," she went on. "Stand beside me, then remain prostrate on the floor."

She lowered herself to demonstrate, but Osco knew very well. He felt a disgust at what life had brought him to, and for a moment considered attacking the nearest guards until they were forced to kill him.

Li-yen rose and met his eyes. Her expression was strange—almost frightened. "Please, lord. I know for you it is hard, but there is no shame intended, and the moment will soon pass. I am responsible for you. If you are not brought before the emperor correctly, and you do not behave correctly, it will be me who is punished."

Osco knew Naranian ways and was not surprised. He leaned forward until his mouth was very close to the girl's ear. "Then you are doomed, for I am a man only waiting for death."

The girl's gaze flit back and forth as she watched his eyes.

"For pity, then, please wait a little longer. I do not wish to die today."

Osco did not react, and Li-yen took him to the beautiful, guarded door. They waited as the sound of locks and bars were removed on the other side, even this side entrance like a gateway to a fortress. They were not announced, nor could Osco hear any sign of conversation on the other side.

As he entered he saw only a raised dais covered by a curtain, and many guards and slaves or maybe nobles lined along the walls. Osco's pulse quickened, standing at last before the enemy of his people.

He walked at the same pace as Li-yen and prostrated himself, hating how easy it seemed, but curious enough to speak before he died. A pleasant voice came from behind the curtain.

"Greetings, servant Li-yen, and Osco Magda of Malvey. I hope your day is proceeding well."

The emperor—if indeed it was him—spoke no differently than any Naranian aristocrat. Osco couldn't see much with his forehead on the tile, but he did notice two priests in his peripheral vision clutching something in their hands. These men watched him closely, and he realized some of the guards, too, had hands tensed on knives or spears, as if he were a threat. It took him only a moment to realize why, and he nearly laughed. They think Kale may have taught me his magic.

In that moment, he wished it were true. At least he knew now why he was an 'honored guest'.

"I understand your journey was harrowing," said the emperor. "Are you healthy of body and mind enough to answer some questions?"

Osco cleared his throat quietly.

"Yes, emperor."

"Very good. Now please tell me, how did the Pyu prince Ratama Alaku die?"

Osco blinked tired eyes and tried to force his mind to quicken. Would lying help him? He doubted it. The emperor's spies were legendary. Though only a handful of men had truly seen the battle, it was possible he knew only vague details. That was useful, but what to do with it?

The emperor grunted, and a loud crack sounded, followed by Li-yen's sharp cry of pain.

"My apologies," said another voice beside the dais. "You are a foreigner so you may not understand. When the son of heaven asks you a question, you answer without hesitation. Remember that it is as if god himself has asked you. Therefore, the answer does not require careful consideration. True words outrun the fastest lies. So please answer as quickly as you are capable. Now please describe the death of Ratama Alaku."

"He was killed in battle, emperor," Osco said instantly. "A foreign warrior and perhaps sorcerer who called himself Bukayag stabbed him through the heart."

"Good," the rustle of fabric moved from the emperor's direction. "Thank you. Tell me, before you were outcast and made a slave, were you married, Osco?"

"Yes, lord."

Another crack and cry from Li-yen.

"You may refer to the son of heaven as 'divinity', 'divine lord', or 'emperor', but answers without titles are acceptable."

"Do you wish to know what has become of your wife?" asked the emperor as if annoyed.

"Yes." Osco felt his pulse hammering now, and feared Li-yen was far more correct than he wanted to accept.

Paper shuffled and the emperor cleared his throat. "Liga of the Hirtri, and her daughter, have been sent to a pagan temple in your capital. She is to become a priestess again, but the child will remain with her. I understand this is a disciplined but comfortable life." Here he paused, and Osco repeated the words again and again. And her daughter. "Children are very important to common men, yes?" asked the emperor.

Osco blinked, confused by the question.

"Yes," he answered quickly.

"That is my understanding as well. Since all Naranians are my children, I feel no need to sire my own. Though I am sure I have! They are no different than the rest. So many unruly children already, neh? Haha! What would I do with more?"

Osco assumed this to be rhetorical and said nothing, feeling each moment pass and wondering if he would soon hear another crack and a cry from Li-yen.

The emperor grunted. "Please tell me about the warrior who killed Ratama Alaku. The prince's gods made him a powerful sorcerer, yes? So. How is this possible, I wonder? Were such stories exaggerations?"

"No, divine lord. The stories were not exaggerated. The prince killed hundreds of men with his magic. But this Bukayag is also a sorcerer, and seemed immune to his powers."

"Ha!" Fabric ruffled as the emperor seemed to move. "Extraordinary. What a time to be alive. Only a year ago there were no sorcerers, and now there are two. Excuse me, there is one again. I can't keep up. I understand you and your men fought with this sorcerer's army. Please tell me about their men, tactics, animals and weapons."

Osco hesitated, surprised at the knowledge implicit in the man's questions. He was unsure how to proceed, but tried not to think too long before speaking. "The men are very tall, pale, with mostly dark hair but some lighter in color, like those peoples of the far North. They carry weapons and armor of formidable metal, likely iron, but made as if by master craftsmen. They fight fearlessly, and with some basic discipline, in what my people would describe as heavy infantry. Their animals are some giant breed of donkey, very fast and aggressive in battle. The sorcerer's animal itself killed or badly injured three of my men without its rider."

Now it was the emperor's turn to pause, and Osco waited in the silence. "Thank you," came the voice at last, no different than before. "This was an enjoyable conversation. Now I wish to address some awkwardness. I know you have been betrayed by your family. I know you crossed my empire with hundred of men and killed many of my scouts, who spoke of your exploits with great admiration. I know this moment is difficult for you. Life has disappointed you, neh? But may I tell you a story?"

Osco was uncertain if this too was rhetorical. He was off balance at the sudden bluntness, and said, "Yes, please emperor," hoping it was correct.

"Thank you. I know a stranger's attempt at wisdom can be tedious. In my country, it is well known my grandfather was a farmer. He lived in Hansen province and was very proud of his land, which his family had owned since the Common Law change of Ru's forty-fifth son. But in his infinite wisdom, the previous son of heaven decided too much land had been purchased in this way, and demanded all land from the Red to the Black river be given back to god. This included the entirety of my grandfather's inheritance. So! He went to the palace to complain. He was heard, very respectfully. As a solution to his shame and anger, the son of heaven suggested he join his ancestors, which he did, immediately. However, his sons—including my father—believed only a false son of heaven would have treated such an honorable man in this way. And so, they and like-minded men decided to engage in unlawful revolt. This act brought shame to their family name forever."

Here the emperor sighed.

"Because you are a foreigner, I must explain the gravity. We too believe strongly in kin. Very yes. A man has responsibility for his kin. If he betrays, it is the law his kin are killed for three generations. Two up, and one down. So you see? He must be very sure. We can't have every peasant revolting. Only those who are very sure. Only a man who would destroy his own family, in success or in defeat—only a man willing to risk and lose everything he loves. Only a man who can break free from the human trappings of fear and guilt and shame can succeed. This is elegant, and very wise, for that is what is required to rule. Is it not?"

Two up, one down, Osco thought. It would nearly obliterate every living member of Osco's house.

"Yes," he said, "very elegant."

"And so," continued the emperor, "though my family took precautions, the fighting was chaotic. While my father and uncle were forced to withdraw through the Southern swamp—a now legendary event—the false son of heaven caught and obliterated my family from elder to babe, for three generations. It was not until much later that my father and uncles prevailed and the revolution became legal. They then accepted the name Luwei, for their previous family name was destroyed, forever tarnished by insurrection." Here he paused, and by his voice, probably smiled. "So you see, like your own people, mine too believe in greatness. Only our vision is wider. We believe the emperor must be the best and most worthy in his time, whatever that might require—or else God will replace him. And if he does, than it is just and righteous. Who knows? One day our emperor could be the ex-priestess daughter of a fallen Mesanite." He laughed, the sound practiced, and hollow. "If Ru willed it so. Thank you for listening, you may go and rest now. As a neophyte imperial servant you will not be guarded or imprisoned. But please know, Li-yen has been made responsible for you, just as you are responsible for your wife and daughter, and all your kin. Do you understand?"

Osco closed his eyes, but nodded into the floor. Two up, he thought, and one down.

"Yes, Emperor. I understand."

"Very good. Thank you again Osco, newly honored servant. I hope we will speak again soon."

Osco rose enough to back away with eyes lowered.

To his surprise he found he did not blame or hate this emperor. In a way, he respected the force of his presence. There was a charisma and intelligence there that intimidated the room. But he also knew now for certain he had been right those years ago—that his hatred of this empire remained as pure and correct as any belief he'd ever held.

Without chains or bars they had shackled him as their slave, as they had long shackled their own people. This did not require torture, or suffering. Yet he could see even a man of his will, and his education, could be held by such a dispassionate threat—the complete destruction of all that he loved.

When he stood outside that courtroom and looked into Li-yen eyes, he saw not relief, nor contempt, anger nor sadness. He saw only understanding. He nodded respectfully, and followed her to his cell.

Chapter 11

As Osco stepped from the imperial palace, he lifted his face to the sun, and found little pleasure in its warmth. For a moment he stood transfixed, unsure why he should do anything at all.

"So Kale is truly dead?" Li-yen was looking at him, maybe on the verge of tears. He wasn't interested in the deception.

"We're not going to be friends," Osco said quietly. "I am not a lonely island prince. Don't waste my time with your nonsense."

Her face hardened, the moment of understanding they'd shared gone. "Life is complicated, Osco. I cared for him."

"Life is simple." He turned to her, knowing it was unfair but he had no one else to release his hate upon. "Let's be clear. Your life is worth nothing to me. If my actions result in your death I will forget you and sleep soundly. But I won't sacrifice my wife without purpose. Understood?"

"Your wife and child, you mean."

"Another Naranian lie," Osco looked away. He wanted to walk away from her but he had nowhere to go. She seemed to understand his dilemma.

"You are to go to the imperial training grounds. That is where you will serve."

Osco narrowed his eyes and didn't move.

"The emperor knows you are a Mesanite commander," she said calmly. "He says as long as you are here, he would please like you to observe Naranian training and offer suggestions. He will speak to you later about it. I suggest you have something to say."

Osco watched her eyes as he considered, then snorted with contempt. "Why in the name of your ridiculous god would I do that."

"You still act like a dead man," Li-yen snapped. "Yet you live. For whatever reason, the emperor has decided to give you a chance to gain his favor."

"I don't want it."

The look she gave him would have impressed mothers and wives the world over. "The son of heaven cares far less about Mesan than you do. He cares only about her soldiers. He doesn't care who sits on the throne, or how they rule their city."

Osco frowned, not sure he followed. Whatever their fancy words, he was a slave. The fate of cities and soldiers seemed far beyond his reach. How useful and renowned a slave he was did not interest him.

"Your prejudice clouds your judgment. You are not the emperor's enemy. You are his servant. Impress him, and it is of course in his power to reward you. He could promote you high into the Naranian army, and with that comes wealth and power." When Osco said nothing she released a forceful breath and tried again. "He could remove your father at a whim. He could put you as head of your family, as head of your city, whatever you wanted. As long as you are loyal, and useful, who knows? He has few skilled military men."

Osco understood, of course, he just didn't believe. He was not Naranian. He had not agreed to serve the emperor. He had been dragged here in chains.

"I know you're not a fool," said Li-yen. "Whatever you want, even if it's secretly rebellion, surely it's better to be alive, and influential. What do you have left to lose?"

They stared at each other, and Osco calculated. He knew the girl served the emperor utterly, and that she was no doubt told to plant all such thoughts in Osco's mind. For now, at least, there was no harm in playing along. She was right, after all, he had little to lose, and nothing else to do.

"Forgive me," he said with as much meaning as a Naranian would. "I haven't grown accustomed to life as a slave." He hoped 'unlike you', was understood. "The gifts from my benevolent master still feel unnatural. I'll think on what you've said." He bowed in the simpering manner of his enemy. "I will serve. Please show me to the soldiers."

Through the girl's careful politeness he could see her rage at the insults, and smiled. Slapping me would do you good, he thought. But then her culture would never allow that. She turned on a booted heel, and led him through the courtyard.

* * *

A breeze offset the afternoon sun as Osco looked out on gravel fields. Beside them, tents of good cloth, what looked like an armory, and open-air mess halls ringed the grounds with precise construction. They had everything an army could need, Osco thought, except walls, and actual soldiers.

Instead he saw farmers and merchants with sticks and cloth gambesons, prancing in formation. Soft looking boys held 'weapons' like dancers with batons, moving together to form some kind of shieldless spear wall his Mesanites would obliterate in moments.

"Very organized, are they not?" Li-yen said at his side. He could tell she was just trying to make conversation, and renew a bit of civility.

"Sheep often flee in the same direction," he said.

She sighed and turned on him with a forceful bow. "I shall leave you here. Please report to Captain Biyu." She pointed at a greasy-haired, immaculate officer, as effeminate as the rest. "And please think on what I've said. And try to be polite."

Osco bowed with the minimum of respect before he strode across the field. He had of course already witnessed much of Naranian martial training in Nanzu, as well as seen their scouts on the battlefield.

But he had not seen their real infantry in formation. Already he expected to be unimpressed. He walked along the perfect line of the grass, the good, new tents pegged to the earth with polished bronze nails. No doubt this was all meant to be impressive, but to Osco the entire camp seemed what a merchant must imagine soldiering was.

The officers all turned and stared, and Osco understood by their faces they'd known he was coming. They seemed almost frightened, which baffled him. Sweat gleamed on the younger officers, and they jerk-stepped before their men, red and shouting in ways that seemed to surprise the watchers.

Osco was reminded of his wedding night. Liga had faked pleasure for his benefit, but his wife at least had done it to preserve his honor—the Naranians their own pride. In both cases, he preferred a proper recognition of incompetence.

Captain Biyu bowed and greeted him, and Osco reciprocated. He was invited by gesture to sit in a nearby, cushioned chair. Once he'd bowed again and sat, the officers began.

In a series of commands, two blocks of infantry moved in an almost dazzling display of training. They twirled across the field with great speed and vigor, forming various lines and spearwalls, in several rows and columns. Osco watched it all very carefully. He felt the eyes of the Captain and the senior officers, no doubt looking for any clue.

The soldiers even began to shout, or rather bark like puffed up puppies, as they heaved weapons at some invisible enemy. Their top-buns bounced and jiggled. They leapt like dancers in their almost non-existent armor, and Osco wondered if a single one of them had ever harmed anything.

When it was over, the 'soldiers' stilled, the officers snapped to attention, and the Captain turned and bowed again. Osco had no idea what to do. He stood and returned the bow, then clapped politely.

Captain Biyu spoke to a man beside him in whispered, hurried words, and the young man approached and spoke in broken Mesanic. "Speak words, soldier?"

Osco smiled politely. "Yes, I speak Naranian. Thank you for the display, Captain. Your men are very well trained."

A flash of maybe pleasure flickered on the man's face, but quickly vanished.

"Thank you, Honored Guest. Please allow me to show you the rest of the demonstration."

Osco bowed and followed, inwardly groaning. He wondered mostly what the hell he was going to tell the emperor when confronted, and if the truth would mean his instant death.

Should he offer advice to the emperor of the world? Frankly he wouldn't know where to start. The entire army required an utter shift in perspective and world-view—an understanding that war was not a craft to be practiced in isolation. War required an enemy, who sought your death, for war was blood-soaked murderers in squalid pits, with nothing except the need to kill. Once you understood that, you could start to organize.

Captain Biyu took Osco next to an archery range, where the men struck unarmored, unmoving targets at defined ranges. He was shown large, unwieldy bolt-throwers, already constructed on flat ground as they skewered even larger, immobile targets. Finally, he was shown a group of men storming an undefended wall, climbing long and flimsy ladders to open a simple wooden gate.

At each display he smiled and bowed. At each display the commanders stared as if his face were composed of floating tea leaves, and if inspected enough might foretell the future. "Thank you, very good," he said each time, and with every display the officers around him seemed to relax.

Osco watched everything in the army camp, and not just the display. He saw an incredible number of units, standards, colors and regalia. The officers with him had hundreds of medals and badges, and the more they had the more deference the others seemed to show. It seemed vitally important that protocol and maybe class be recognized. With every step and conversation, the officers seemed to reiterate who was who and how important they were. None of them paid attention to their soldiers.

When the madness had ended, and the sun dipped, Li-yen returned as if she had known precisely how long it would take. She bowed and thanked the officers, and said the Honored Guest was required.

Osco was tired, and hungry. With growing concern he realized he would not have an evening to think of his response. Li-yen was practically vibrating at his side as they left the training grounds.

"The son of heaven has asked for you immediately." She met his eyes. "Please, if it is not too much trouble—what are you going to say?"

Osc said nothing, because he had no idea, and wouldn't tell her anyway. They walked a block through the compound, the surrounding city still bustling as the sun fell.

"It would be best to be positive," said Li-yen through an increasingly strained politeness. "Criticism is of course…acceptable, but please, oh please try to be respectful, and…"

"The emperor has more than enough slaves," Osco snapped. He thought of the fear he'd seen in the soldiers and knew this was about far more than the opinion of one Mesanite noble. He sighed. "I will tell your son of heaven exactly what I think."

Li-yen looked away, and bit her lip. "It might be acceptable. You are a soldier and a commander of soldiers. But please do not insult anyone. And if the emperor is overly polite, you must be very, very careful."

From what the little information he'd learned of this emperor, he knew this to be wise, and nodded in thanks.

They entered the palace as before, but this time at least five military officers stood in a half-circle before the emperor. Their chests and sleeves and even hair were filled with medals, pins and broaches, enough that Osco knew they were the most senior members of the Naranian military. Their eyes looked rife with fear.

Osco took his place beside Li-yen, and prostrated himself on the tile. Twice in one day, he thought, quite sure he had sworn never in his life to do it once.

"My most humble apologies," said the emperor, "I'm sure you are very tired." Osco swore he heard Li-yen groan at the emperor's tone. "I am however very eager to hear your thoughts while they are fresh. Please tell me what you think of the empire's training. If it is useful knowledge, the soldiers you saw have been preparing for three months, and are considered slightly above average."

Osco had already decided to risk his life, which he thought might be disposable without endangering his family if he caused the minimum amount of offence. He did not hesitate.

"Thank you, emperor, for valuing my opinion. I humbly apologize, but—your army is composed of play-actors with poor equipment. The soldiers I witnessed have learned little more than a useless dance routine. They should be returned to their shops and farms where they belong. In battle, they would be massacred by proper soldiers."

Osco lifted his head slightly to bow it to the tiles. He swore he could hear Li-yen's heart beating, assisted by the complete silence in the court.

The emperor laughed. The sound was different than before, to Osco's ear—more genuine. It went on for many beats of Osco's heart before an audible sigh signaled the end.

"Yes. My people are very good at working and praying, but not very good at fighting. I would like to improve the army. Only when Naran has an unbeatable army will there truly be peace in this world. Wouldn't you agree?"

For a moment Osco had hoped this was rhetorical, but the silence grew and he licked his lips. He had chosen his path, he wouldn't deviate now. "Only when all the men, beasts, and plants in this world are dead, mighty emperor, will the barren rock be peaceful."

The emperor chuckled, and silk rustled as he moved.

"I like you, Osco Magda, though I'm uncertain why. Perhaps in time Ru will grant me that wisdom. In the meantime, I wish for you to assist my army." He cleared his throat. "Commander Fu, please take your place next to my guest."

"Yes, emperor." Hard leather sandals clacked on the tile as a man knelt then prostrated next to Osco.

"I have few competent men of war," said the emperor sadly. "I do not blame my children. They have basked too long perhaps in the safe, warm glow of Ru's love. That is to your benefit, Osco of the Magda. You will be temporarily promoted to Commander, as of today in charge of all training in the peasant armies of the lower region." Fabric rustled as the emperor turned. "I do not require two such officers. Thank you for your service, Commander Fu, please join your ancestors. Go with my eternal thanks and jealousy that you join our father so soon."

Metal clacked on the stone as a servant slid what must have been a knife before the man at Osco's side.

"Income and other benefits will accompany your new title, Osco. But please forgive me, it will take a day for Fu's family and belongings to be removed from the property. Is that acceptable? I can accelerate the process."

Osco could hear the increased breathing of the doomed man as he lifted the knife.

"No, thank you emperor."

"Well." Yiren maybe slapped the armrest of his chair. "Please begin tomorrow. And none of your Mesanite tricks! Not like Nanzu. I expect complete focus and loyalty." He forced a laugh. "So take charge. Show my children a proper soldier. Perhaps your future might be very different, neh? You have been a very naughty rebel, and for that you have lost your family and station. That is right and good, for Ru is the fire of justice. But what is life but water? Family and station can be returned. Mesan must bend, and you with it. Perhaps together we can shape a new future for your people. Do my words please you?"

Yes, Osco thought, hating that truth, as well as the man, despite feeling a growing respect.

Osco thought of the boy he had been, and knew now that boy must die. He had little choice but to agree. In his heart he still believed he would be betrayed and killed long before he could accomplish anything. But he must make it to tomorrow. For maybe tomorrow things might look different, and there would be a chance.

His people's only resistance had been never to train the Naranian army, their one source of pride, but Osco knew it didn't matter. Training and culture were not things you could simply impart in a few months. It took a complete change in perspective. In the meantime, perhaps with a little effort and obedience he could earn enough influence to harm Naran properly. He had to hope so.

"Thank you for your favor, and your words, emperor. Of course I will serve."

He put his forehead to the floor as he heard his predecessor shove the blade into his gut. With at least a small moment of comfort, he couldn't help but think—one more down.

Chapter 12

Dala slept fitfully and rose with the sun. A man she had once loved would die today.

After her talk with Birmun, she had gone to Aiden to warn him of possible subterfuge. A servant had answered the door of his hall rubbing at bleary eyes, then paled when she saw who it was.

"Holy mother…Galdra keep you…Aiden…the chief is not here, Mistress. He went to sleep in his ship."

Dala had thanked her and walked to the docks. She found the chieftain's ship surrounded by armed warriors who bristled as Dala approached with her bodyguards. Aiden himself stepped from the cabin wearing most of his armor, which she knew took time to don.

"Mistress," he'd bowed, eyes scanning the dark. She'd felt suddenly rather silly telling him to be wary of danger, and even more convinced he would triumph. Aiden of Husavik stood like a demi-god on the prow of Ruka's marvel. He was no longer a young man, but no less terrifying for that. His expression was not one of arrogant challenge, as if daring the world to test him—it was pure, unshakable confidence.

"I've come to wish you luck," she said, and he nodded in recognition. She was tempted to sit with him for a drink or take a bit of bread, perhaps to steady her nerves in his company. But this was not the way of her people. She could sit with the shaman or a skald because they were outside the order of things, but not even a matriarch could sit and speak socially with a chief without whispers. "Well," she said, and smiled. "You seem well prepared and ready. Get some rest, mighty chief. I will prepare for after the duel."

"There is no after, Mistress." Aiden spoke without criticism, as if merely stating fact. "There is only the duel. If I survive, there will be more."

Dala blinked, her gut fluttering at his words. "If you survive? Surely, a drunken fool is of little threat to Aiden Shieldbreaker."

The future lord of ash nodded. "Many dead men have thought the same. This drunk carries a sword from the gods. He is Chosen, Mistress. Do not underestimate him."

Dala nearly snorted in disbelief, angry—and not for the first time—at the man's devotion to ancient beliefs. "So are you, Aiden, and not just by Vol, but Nanot, who towers over these lands. I have no concern for there is no doubt of tomorrow's outcome."

Aiden frowned. He spoke as ever in his soft voice. "Noss cares nothing for Nanot's laws, and has his champions, too. It is not for men to say the will of the gods in violence."

Dala saw little use in a theological debate in the middle of the night, mere hours before the man was to fight to the death. She bowed in respect.

"I'll leave you to your rest, Chief. Until the morning."

"Until the morning, Mistress."

Dala returned to the Order's hall with an unsettled feeling. For a long moment she looked at her guards and wondered if she should return to Birmun with ten armed Galdric Warriors, and have him killed. She knew in that moment she would have, if she could.

But Aiden would be furious. The chiefs would blame him and call him murderer and coward and worse. So Dala sat in her favorite chair and sipped aniseed liquor before she went to her bed, alone as usual.

Her last thought before she slept was of Ruka—wishing he were here, Nanot's true champion, to break every rule and law that bound other men and do what must be done. She knew he would solve this in an afternoon, and Dala would have no fear of the result. She thought of him across the sea dealing with her people's real enemies, and took some comfort in that.

* * *

Half of Orhus, it seemed, came to watch the duel. Priestesses and matrons, chiefs and their sons, and a huge crowd of common men surrounded the statues and snaked to the old iron bridge. How most of them even hoped to see the duel, Dala had no idea.

She sat on a raised wooden chair next to the statue of Galdra, close enough to signal her importance, but a respectable distance away. Such things were not the domain of priestesses, or matrons—nor really women at all.

Aiden stood near the 'cluster' of the oldest gods. Some had been replaced over the past decade, but others were now cracked and worn by weather and the games of children. Aiden was next to Vol, so still it was hard to tell him apart from the stone. His men surrounded him in a wall of flesh and iron, some watching the crowd, most with heads lowered as if in prayer.

Dala's gut had not much improved. She was tired from a restless night, her nerves on edge with so many people and voices and sounds. She looked at the sun now cleared of the horizon, and she thought perhaps Birmun wouldn't come at all.

But voices soon raised from the common path. Murmuring raced up and down the crowd as the men sensed the mood shift. A warrior walked the low street with a pack of men behind him, and for a long moment Dala had not realized who it was.

Birmun's beard was shaved, his soiled clothing gone. He looked ten years younger than the broken down drunk slurring his words in the nightman's hall. A gleaming cuirass guarded his chest, a rich man's shield of iron on his arm. Dala could hardly believe the change, and slowly accepted the truth: he had tricked her, just as he had tricked the men who killed his father. Now here he stood, armed and prepared, the cords of his muscled frame no longer hidden by thick wool.

Aiden spoke, too softly for even Dala to hear, and Egil the skald moved to his side and yelled to the crowd.

"Aiden says Birmun, son of Canit, is not some coward with rebellion in his heart. He comes for a duel in sight of the gods—he comes for Aiden, and him alone. Keep your hands from your blades!"

Birmun walked to the clearing and nodded to his opponent, gesturing for the men behind him to withdraw. These seemed mixture of warriors and common men, dressed in a motley arrangement of furs, cloth and armor, so as to be almost impossible to tell as Northener, Southerner or Midlander. Dala recognized none of them.

Aiden stepped into the dueling circle and drew his rune-sword—a long, heavy blade barely wieldable in one hand by a lesser man. Dala's heart raced as Birmun followed.

She could hardly believe this was happening. There was no possibility of victory here—two great warriors of ash killing one another when the enemy was across the sea. She wanted to rise up and say so, to shout how they were all insane. But this was not her place. Men and their chiefs reigned in the domain of violence, that was as true now as it had been in Galdra's era. She could only sit and watch.

Birmun dropped his shield and unsheathed his rune-sword, so massive even Aiden would have wielded it with two hands. The darker iron looked almost black in contrast—the famous nightman blade gifted personally by Bukayag. He called out in a sure, strong voice.

"Is this a contest between gods, Aiden, or men? In this holy place, we should fight as our ancestors did—one good sword, three wooden shields. No more." He threw down his blade, and began removing his armor.

Aiden snorted. A rare smile crossed his face, and he too threw down his sword. The crowd watched in frozen silence as the warriors removed their armor and even the leather and cloth beneath, until they both stood shirtless in the cool morning air.

Aiden was like a living god—carved as if from the same stone as the statues beside, freakishly tall and long limbed like Ruka. But to Dala's amazement, Birmun was near as impressive. She had seen him naked many times a decade ago, but he seemed more muscled and sinewy than ever, as if he had been preparing for this moment. He was younger than Aiden. Dala closed her eyes and shifted in her seat, not certain if that truly mattered and if it did than how much. No, she told herself. Aiden is a legend, and the shaman chose him. He will not fail.

The men were cheering now. All around the circle they called for blood and roared their approval. You fools, Dala wanted to scream. Can't you see how fragile peace is? Can't you see that if Aiden dies, the great chiefs will tear our world apart? What should I do, she thought? What can I do?

The warriors stepped forward. The duelists circle was small, and they had little room to move. The men were crowding and Dala stood, moving along the platform closer to see. She saw Birmun's face twist as he growled.

"Remember Dag?"

Aiden's eyes narrowed but he said nothing.

"He was my father's retainer," Birmun hissed, "then mine. He died in your camp to some fool, and you did nothing. Do you remember, great chief?"

Aiden nodded now as if he remembered, and Birmun sneered.

"When you see him, tell him I've cared for his children."

Dala jumped as both chiefs charged.

The sounds of their shields clashing pierced the din of male voices. Both fighters sprang away and their blades rang as each swung a massive blow. Dala had never seen Birmun fight. In a way, she had always thought of him as a digger, not a warrior—a man thrust from common life to chiefly duties untrained. But there was no sign of that digger now.

Birmun hacked and weaved, parrying and matching every blow from the world's greatest warrior. Splinters flew from both men's shields as the iron shivered and broke the rims surrounding the metal boss.

Aiden was larger, and older. If he could not kill his opponent, would Birmun outlast him? Dala withheld the swear, furious with her own ignorance of such things. Stop them she wanted to scream at the men. Where are you Ruka? Why must this be?

But the men howled with joy, mesmerized like children listening to a skald's tale. The two warriors soon dripped with sweat, their eyes focused on nothing but their enemy, faces strained in concentration. Birmun's shield broke first, and Aiden withdrew without a word, throwing his own mostly smashed shield away.

They seemed to change stance and charged again, circling each other like dogs, less aggressive now, looking for any opening. They clashed again, roaring as each hacked at the other with ringing blows. Soon the second shields broke.

Both looked increasingly tired. They circled again, as if not to waste energy, or perhaps to protect their final shields. Birmun attacked first, once, twice, landing hard hammering slashes on Aiden's shield.

The chieftain of Husavik withdrew, and Dala saw the surprise of the men as he wiped an arm over his sweating brow. Birmun seemed to sense the same weakness, and charged again.

Aiden threw down his shield, rose up as if he'd been waiting, and hammered a stroke straight into Birmun's sword. The force of it knocked the blade from Birmun's grip. He stumbled back, but Aiden bore down on him, smashing at the shield with his sword even as he loomed closer and extended a hand. He seized Birmun's shield and pulled it away. For a moment Birmun stood before him unarmed, so close the men could reach out and strike the other with a fist. Birmun reached a hand to his waist.

Dala almost screamed as her former lover pulled the knife, leaping headlong at the larger man inside the reach of his sword. Aiden moved with impossible speed. He pulled back as the blade flashed across his face instead of into his neck, stumbling away as Birmun chased stabbing. With his other hand, the chieftain of Husavik seized Birmun's arm, and at last held his ground.

They stood locking arms, staring into each other's eyes, as blood dripped from Aiden's face. The appearance of equality lasted only a moment. Aiden twisted and rose, dropping Birmun to his knees. He lashed out with a massive fist, once, twice, the third smashing Birmun to the dirt.

Aiden stepped away with the knife, inspecting it before tossing it from the circle, and lifting his sword. Blood leaked from the shallow wound on his cheek, and the men of the crowd roared his name, stomping and slapping the shoulders and backs of their fellow watchers, as if they themselves had landed the blows.

Aiden spoke, and the noise died to a whisper. "Enough," he said, for the second or maybe third time before Dala could hear. He looked to Birmun, who struggled to rise from the sand, his face bloodied. "You wanted to duel me as a man," said Aiden. "So be it. Despite your treachery, you have lost." He looked to the discarded runeblade next to the circle.

He looked to the gathering, and raised his arms. "Who else will challenge? Let him come and join his blood to this holy soil."

When the elite of Orhus said nothing, Aiden nodded, and turned back to Birmun. "Then as First Chief, I strip you of all titles, and make you outcast in these lands. Take him, brothers, put him on a ship. He goes North to the new world."

"Kill me," said Birmun slumped on his knees. The desperate sound of his voice sent a shudder through Dala's heart, and she fought the tears.

Aiden's face was hard, and pitiless. "No. You belong to Noss while the Godtongue lives. Only he will decide your fate." He gestured to his men, who seized Birmun by the arms and began to drag him away. Aiden stared down the now former retainers, as if he would gladly charge them all alone. They watched, but did nothing. Aiden stepped away from the circle without another word.

Many in the crowd turned to each other with clear disappointment—no doubt waiting on a speech that was certainly not coming. Egil—who had stood with Aiden's men throughout—cleared his throat and stepped onto the largest speaking rock. His usually affable smile seemed forced, but he raised his arms and yelled with a powerful voice that echoed all the way to the iron bridge.

"Brothers, join me and raise your voices so the gods might hear—Aiden, Shieldbreaker. Champion of Vol. The First Chief of Ash!"

Aiden's men roared, and most of the warriors seemed caught in the moment, whistling and stomping as they raised their voices in salute, or lifted sons on their shoulders. Across the road, with forced smiles, the priestesses and great matrons clapped politely.

Chapter 13

Dala waited in her least impractical dress, legs crossed and uncomfortable, as a priestess stitched Aiden's face.

She wanted to scream at him for his stupid, reckless pride letting him fight armorless. Then maybe to hug him for sparing Birmun. But she pushed it all down and spoke calmly, so as not to antagonize the most important man in the Ascom.

"Keep them small," she instructed the veteran healer. "A few scars are fine but we can't have our First Chief looking too much the brute." Then, at Aiden, attempting a jest: "you couldn't have taken the wound somewhere a little less…intimidating?"

Aiden sat in silence with eyes turned down, as he had since entering. He seemed oblivious to the stitching.

Dala withheld the sigh, not understanding the man in any way except as a fanatic, and never comfortable in his presence. "Stripping a chief of position is of course your decision," she said more reproachfully. "But I wasn't aware we'd given you authority to declare men outlaws."

Aiden blinked, his already hooded eyes narrowing. "A hidden knife in a duel is dishonorable."

"That is not the point. Birmun should have had a trial like anyone else, with a speaker and witnesses at a law circle."

"There were a thousand witnesses. I don't require a priestess to describe what my eyes see."

Dala grit her teeth, reminding herself she dealt with an illiterate warrior who had never lived in Orhus. "I understand. But there are rules. If you wish, I can grant you the power to act in Nanot's name—with men only, and as it concerns acts of violence only. You must inform the Order of all such instances, however. Is that acceptable?"

Aiden nodded, and the priestess clicked her tongue in chastisement, nearly jabbing him with the needle.

Dala released a breath she felt she'd been holding since the duel began. The worst danger was over, at least for now. "So. Next you still intend to go to the steppe. How will you proceed?"

The First Chief carefully shrugged his broad shoulders. "Their men are much like ours. They share some of our gods. I will fight their chiefs one by one if necessary."

Dala ground her teeth, angry at her own surprise more than anything. Is that your only answer to every problem, she wanted to shout, to subdue and butcher men into obedience? She shifted in her seat.

"I'm not so sure that's wise. What will you do if the horse-born, village raiding murderers are disinclined to duel you in honorable combat on foot, First Chief?"

Aiden's gaze came close to Dala's. "I have killed mounted men before, Mistress."

"Killing them is not the same as recruiting them, First Chief."

Aiden looked away, returning to his passive, far-away stare, as if only tolerating the world around him. After a pause, he said quietly. "The Godtongue said you may have…suggestions."

Dala almost laughed aloud. She pictured Ruka saying it, then shook her head in wonder. As usual, it seemed he knew how things would happen. For a long moment she wondered about Birmun and his rune-sword—had the shaman known one day of the man's betrayal? Had he given him that weapon to spare him from Aiden? Could such a thing be possible?

"Yes," she said, putting the thought away. "I have a few."

* * *

Egil crossed the square of Orhus with his walking stick, scowling to try and ward off well-wishers and do-gooders. But as usual, a rich merchant with enough courage noticed him and called out.

"Great skald! Please, take a seat in my cart. I'll take you anywhere in the city!"

Egil waved him away and nodded as politely as possible. The men of Orhus treated him much like an ancient matriarch who might collapse into dust at the next step. And every friendly gesture ended in an invitation to play or speak to a house or hall full of kin.

He sighed as he made the second last turn towards his family's house of nearly a decade. God cursed shamans, he thought, "and god cursed chiefs and priestesses," he muttered aloud, seizing the handle to yank open the wooden door.

"Family gathering!" he shouted, ignoring the various calls of greeting from his children. He blinked in the dim light and spotted the oldest twins eating at the table. The youngest were in the alcove above the hearth, playing or wrestling or only the gods knew what. "Everyone. Right now!" he said, looking for Juchi, expecting she was behind the house in the garden. "Go on, be useful and fetch your mother," he waved his stick at his eldest, who rolled her eyes and stood.

Egil sagged into his chair and stared grumpily at another daughter, maybe fifteen winters now—Zaya. She matched it with pure affection, then an unintimidated eyebrow raised in challenge.

It took all Egil's will to prevent the smile and from scooping the girl in his arms. She was his favorite, that was the truth, and every time he saw her he feared she would change, but every time she only became more loving and beautiful and wise.

"Have you been practicing your lyre?" he managed, gesturing at the old instrument he'd given her when she was four.

"Yes, father." She lifted it from the chair. "Shall I play you something? I've been practicing Dalia's Song."

'Dalia's song' was a common children's rhyme about a daughter pining for her father to return home. Egil looked on Zaya's knowing smile and felt already he were being out-flanked.

"No you shall not." He shifted, knowing she probably had mastered it, and later he would want nothing more than to hear her play. "Go get some more of that bread, I'm hungry."

"Yes, father." The girl rose, whistling the chorus of Dalia's Song as she curtsied dramatically, then turned for the cupboard. Egil fought the grin as he waited.

Juchi and their other children entered loudly and happily, shouting about who had filled the most pails. Egil looked at them and felt heavy with burden. He wanted nothing more than to stay home and listen to Zaya play her songs, to drink cider and laugh and wrestle with his boys, and lay down in his matron's arms, never to leave again. Juchi was laughing with the children but met his eyes and grew more serious as she settled opposite in her place.

"So," she sighed, "you're to go with Aiden."

Egil's mouth opened and closed. He leaned back in his chair and threw up his hands.

"How often do I get to make grand pronouncements? I called this meeting. And you just…"

"You always make grand pronouncements," called Zaya from the larder. Even the young twins nodded. "It's true, Father," said the eldest. "Every time you come home there is some grand news of the world. Or at least the season. Or there's something miraculous at the market and we must go."

"Well…I'm a bloody skald!" Egil roared.

His family rolled their eyes. In fact he was not at all pleased with the facts of his life in the near future, and he knew the growing irritation was a mask for his fear. Juchi rose.

"I'd assumed as much. We've already discussed it. I'm coming with you, and so are the girls."

Egil blinked and felt blood rise to his face. "The girls? What the hell do you mean? We're going to the steppes."

Juchi glared and said nothing because she obviously knew that, too.

"We want to come!" said the boys in unison. Juchi shook her head as Egil pushed back his seat and glared.

"Am I to bring my entire family to children-slaughtering raiders?" The aforementioned family rose as if the meeting were over. "Are you all mad?" Egil grabbed his matron's arm. "These people are the reason every town is surrounded by wooden spikes. You think I want to go? I am summoned, but not you!"

"You'll need protection." Juchi ignored his hand and walked to a chest of old armor from older days. She lifted a good iron blade she'd kept since her time at Alverel.

Egil knew his eyes were wide with incredulity, his tone close to a whine. "I'll be with Aiden for god's sake, and most of the greatest killers on earth. Why by Galdra's tits should you need that?"

"Watch your tongue." Juchi turned to her daughters. "Girls, get your things."

They obeyed, going outside to the side of the house, which meant they retrieved their bows and maybe even spears. Juchi had taught all her daughters to fight. Egil had never questioned it since in the South it was not so unusual, and his role was the boys in any case. Still, the situation seemed insane. For a few moments he watched them collecting supplies, until he could hold back no more.

"Are you not listening? I'll be back in a week, maybe two. I expect we'll fail and the endless riding will be misery, but the horse-tribes will all just run away from us and nothing will be accomplished. They won't fight Aiden and his killers, and if they do…well, they'll all die."

"And what will Aiden do about the women?"

Egil threw his hands. "What women?"

"The horse-tribe crones, my love. They ride with the men, and they kill. So what will our great and honorable Aiden do when old women start putting arrows in your eyes?"

"I'm sure he'll…" Egil scoffed, "the what?"

"The crones. Why do you think my mentor taught me to fight? Her mother was a tribesman. She left the steppes with a preaching priestess as a girl. She said the horse-mothers train to ride and shoot their whole lives. When their wombs dry they raid with the men. So tell me, will the mighty, honorable, Aiden Shieldbreaker, Champion of Vol, cut down an old woman, even if she's killing you?"

Egil blinked and scoffed, utterly confused. "Even if you're right. What will you and our daughters do?"

"We'll shoot back and maybe scare them off. Tell me skald, when's the last time anyone went into the steppe and came out alive? Any great stories to tell?"

Egil sat back in his chair because he knew he'd already lost. "The godtongue," he said, with maybe a little petulance. "You act like I'm helpless." He looked away, feeling rather pitiful. "I crossed the Ascom alone, South to North, East to West, more times than I can count. How many times have I crossed the endless sea? So don't tell me about the world. Not even horse-tribesman would kill a skald."

"No," Juchi said, sitting beside him. "They'd capture and enslave him. I'm sorry my love, but you don't know anything about these people. I've asked Priestess Amira to come with us. She speaks their tongue, and Aiden wouldn't have thought of that, would he? Can you even speak with the tribesmen?"

Egil frowned. He had a gift for tongues and spoke many of the words across the Ascom. "A little. Aiden will bring some Arbmen to translate, of course…"

"You mean the men these tribesfolk consider traitors? Men they will likely kill on sight?"

Egil sighed, and Juchi put her hand over his.

"The girls are near grown, and I'm tired of sitting around this house. Dala will be there too and she may need me, and…"

"The matriarch is coming into the steppe?"

"Yes." Juchi's tone firmed. "And you've spent too much time in the North and forgotten she and I don't remotely need your approval. So I'm coming. My daughters are coming. That's the end of it."

The remaining children had wisely fled outside. Egil met his mate's green eyes, proud of her in a strange and annoying way, his pride only mildly stung. In truth what he felt was terror—fear that all he loved would be risked so close to a peaceful end. He took Juchi's hand, patted it, then tossed it away.

"Well then you're bloody cooking. I've publicly sworn to kill myself if I've to eat any more of Tahar's stews." He shouted for Zaya, who was in any case peeking from around the door. "And you, you bring your lyre! It won't be me playing for those bastards every night. They've heard everything I've got ten times, so expectations are high!"

"Yes Father." Zaya emerged and smiled, fingering the melody of Talia's Song with the lyre already in her hands. Egil shook his head, unable now to fight the grin.

"A damn skald," he said, watching her. "A beauty with a famous father and a priestess mother. You should be claiming an old, rich chief. Not walking the bloody road like me. Stupid girl."

She sat beside him with a plate full of the bread he'd asked for, and kissed him on the forehead. "Yes, Father."

Egil ate and stared at his despondent sons, who sat by the fire with downcast eyes.

"Well I'm still in charge of you," he barked. "You'll have a thousand chores and I'll have men come every day to check they're done."

"Yes, Father," they said in unison.

Egil threw a piece of bread, hitting the elder square in the cheek. He grinned and threw it back, and Egil chased them both with a wooden stick through the house, forgetting his terror for a moment as he laughed and wrestled them.

But later, after reunion in Juchi's arms, in the silence of a lingering night, he wished Ruka was in the Ascom. Next to his master he knew he would have no fear for his family, no matter the odds. Considering in his youth he had felt the opposite, the thought struck him as strange indeed.

Chapter 14

"You want me to…what?"

The Tong king's voice held real surprise. He and his generals plotted with Ruka in the 'War Room', which Ruka suspected was rarely used. They studied maps of the city, as well as ledgers describing all soldiers, supplies, and weapons controlled by the crown. Ruka flinched with impatience. He shuffled several papers on the wide table before him to at least do something with his hands, and spoke without looking up.

"Fire is only a suggestion, king. More space is required for defence along the length of the city's walls. A controlled burn of every structure in the area would be the fastest method."

Kapule scoffed and bounced in his chair, then glanced at his generals—no doubt for a more reasonable suggestion. None appeared, and his tone pinched further. "I'm not going to burn my own city," he declared, as if interrupting a hundred voices to the contrary. "And what exactly do we do with the people whose houses we're destroying?"

Another of the king's advisors—some kind of steward—spoke from his position at the back of the room. "The Metaya estate lies in that area, my lord. The family would exploit the situation, and expect…compensation."

Kapule waved an impatient hand and pinched the bridge of his wide nose. "We can deconstruct some of the houses, Bukayag. Perhaps we can…move some to make room for whatever you're planning. In any case the weakest areas of the wall are here and here," he pointed at the map, "My generals predict that is where Naran will attack. That is, if we fail to stop their armies from reaching the city, which I don't yet accept we must."

Ruka blinked and stopped fiddling with the maps. He met Kapule's eyes, then the generals, seeking some sign of jest. Seeing none, Bukayag nearly overcame him to howl with mocking laughter. When he'd collected himself, he spoke again.

"I see a tactical discussion is premature." Ruka rose from the table. "Tell me, lords, how do you believe your enemy will attack?"

The king nodded to one of his generals, who cleared his throat.

"Naranians are renowned for avoiding a direct fight. It is our belief that, as with Mesan and Samna, they will first hire mercenaries, sending raiding parties to destroy and disrupt our lands. They will isolate us, attempt to strangle trade until we are desperate enough to surrender. We are prepared for this. We have considerable land protected by naturals hills and much of it is now walled." He nodded in deference to Ruka. "We also have our island allies renewed commitment, so our trade routes will not be easily stopped. As long as we protect the key lands, towns and cities, we believe we can out-last the emperor's efforts, until his war becomes too expensive and he negotiates or abandons it."

Ruka stood for what he knew was too long simply staring, forced to keep Bukayag from control.

"What is the size of your army," he said to cover a spasm.

"After our losses on Sri Kon," said the same general, "approximately ten thousand professional soldiers. We're assembling another ten thousand recruits as we speak."

Ruka nodded. "What is the size of Naran's army?"

Here at least the General had the grace to shift his weight.

"Some reports indicate as many as sixty thousand, and no doubt they will rally more. However, even their standing army is little more than peasants with spears. The Naranian army has rarely, if ever, been used effectively outside of their borders. This is well known."

Ruka's hands and legs twitched so he paced to cover it. He strode three times across the room as the men stared, getting his tone under control.

"Naran controls two thirds of the world, General. How do you think that happened?" He jabbed a finger at the map to keep from balling a fist. "Naran's standing army is sixty thousand. It is not 'peasants with spears', nor has it been since the sweeping changes made by General Amit, the emperor's uncle. The school in Nanzu now trains noble sons of every province in the empire with bow, sword and spear. These families now equip and pay for their own men to fight at the emperor's call. Together, they form another fifty thousand. At least." He looked at every man. "The son of heaven has also constructed machines of war—hundreds of catapults, bolt-throwers, battering rams. He has recruited scouts, skirmishers and light infantry from every territory of the empire. And they will employ Mesanites." With some menace, Ruka stepped before Kapule. "No. He will not strangle your trade or burn your lands. He will send his vast army as an overwhelming force." Ruka stepped to the map of the city. "Face him on open ground and die. Hide in your city, and his army will surround it, rain stones and flaming arrows, knocks down every gate, scale every wall, and slaughter you. That is the enemy's plan."

In the silence that followed, the Naranians exchanged many glances. The general who'd spoken shone with a sweaty redness as he spoke.

"How can you know such things?" He looked to the king without waiting for an answer, every sentence seeming to rise in rage. "My lord, truly, who is this man? What is he? Where has he come from? How does he even speak our tongue so well? What is it if not devilry?"

Cursed, Ruka heard the voices of his kin. Demon-born. A son of Noss.

Kapule frowned but said nothing. Ruka met his challenger's eyes.

"Yes, I speak your tongue. I can speak, read and write Naranian as well. Farahi procured every Naranian book on war for a hundred years, and I have memorized every word. That is why I know these things," he looked to Kapule. "And because Farahi counseled me before his death."

The general looked no less angry, but the king's shoulders stooped.

"So many," he said as if to himself. "We can't stop such a force. How many men do you have, Bukayag?"

For a moment Ruka considered a lie to bolster the man's courage. But he had no wish to save a king and people who required it, for all living things would one day face their challenges, or perish from the earth. "Five thousand remain," he answered. "But more are coming."

"It's not enough."

Ruka nodded. "Maybe. But the enemy's numbers are deceiving. They overvalue their strength, and much can be done to fortify this city."

"You just said they're more or less as good as our soldiers," Kapule said with a bit of anger.

"Yours. Not mine. And we have a wall."

Kapule frowned as his generals bristled. "The army of Mesan! Even if we fight at the walls, even if they fail to break them down. We would need divine intervention to turn back such a force."

Ruka smiled at this description.

"The general was correct when he said this city can withstand a siege. The sea will allow us trade and move supplies between the isles, the Ascom, and perhaps some coastal allies. But the lands and towns can't be defended. You must harvest everything now." Ruka saw the steward ready to object so raised his hand. "I know it is too early. Much will be lost. But some is better than none. Bring the animals, the storage—everything within the city walls. Harvest what you can. Burn the rest."

Another of the generals spoke up. "You mean to deny the enemy forage." He shook his head. "They'll have an unchallenged line of supply, my lord, all the way to their capital. It might make this war more expensive, but we can't destroy their logistics. Any troops we send out to try would be chased and killed before they could do much damage."

Ruka smiled, liking this man better.

"You are correct, General. Your task is difficult, but straight forward—bring your people into Ketsra, fortify the city, and hold the walls. My men and I will disrupt the enemy. If successful, we watch their great army fail, then starve." He shrugged, and met the king's eyes. "But all men have a choice. You could surrender. If you intend this then best do so now before lives are lost. I assume the emperor has sent his request."

At this it seemed every man in the room refrained from breathing until the king responded. Kapule's tone strengthened, with perhaps a note of chastisement.

"My people are peaceful, not cowards. From the farms, already boys as young as twelve come to offer callused hands to hold spears instead of scythes. It was their ancestors who carved this land from mountain to sea. I won't repay their loyalty with betrayal."

Ruka nodded, knowing the speech was for everyone in the room but him. Kapule stood and moved to Ruka's side.

"So," he smoothed his pudgy fingers over the map. "The walls. Let's discuss them again."

Ruka smiled and bowed his head. Despite the contemptible appearance of the plump little king, there was iron in his spine. That was good enough. A spear held with weak hands could still kill. Any man, great or small, could rise with will alone to protect his life, unbroken before the world.

In his grove, Ruka walked past the smaller replica of the walls as they would be—ramparts riddled with stairs and filled with murder holes, buttressed with great blocks of rock striped with iron bone, metal gates made to withstand every tool of war conceived by men. In the land of the living, he met Kapule's eyes.

"The task will be hard. But do what I ask, king, and we will make your city unbreachable, so long as the courage of her defenders' holds. That is my oath."

Kapule took a deep breath, and nodded. "I know the walls must be higher, and thicker, and we have put the task off too long. We have stored stone, copper, and other materials in the Eastern mines, and I can get more. How much will we need?"

Ruka answered only with a smile.

* * *

After the meeting, Ruka returned to the wall and began what was likely the most ambitious project in Ketsra's history.

He had only weeks—maybe four—to turn old and dilapidated defences into the best in the world. If he failed, he hoped at least not to burn down half the city in the attempt.

In the end, Kapule agreed to a combination of burning and deconstruction, and in both cases Ruka required thousands of Tong builders to carry out his instructions. These were complex and hazardous and required expertise. The thought didn't bother him.

Since his first days in Pyu with Hemi and Farahi's workers, Ruka had learned an admiration of the new world's builders. Most were common men—often the sons of farmers, or else masters of their trade going back generations. Ruka liked both. He preferred the company of men who worked with their hands, who he found mostly humble and competent, their minds less deluded with often ignorant education. Fortunately, there were now a great many of them in Ketsra.

After their meeting, Kapule made his proclamation of withdrawal. In caravans and clusters of peasant-trains along main roads, the denizens of the rice-lands swarmed to the edges of their capital like ants.

Shanty-towns of wood and cloth began springing up inside Ketsra. Goats, sheep and cattle entered in herds, covering the streets in filth; grain wagons drove straight to the merchant districts and bazaars, or created new merchant squares in the middle of previously quiet neighborhoods. Crime, chaos, and all the problems of packed humanity followed. Confusion and annoyance became the norm, but these were Kapule's problems.

Every day, Ruka went to his walls, gathered more men and supplies, and showed them his plans.

"Fail," he would tell the master builders, "and you and all your kin will die in this place."

He was not popular, it was fair to say, but the men obeyed.

Ruka himself worked mostly with the sons of ash. He feared leaving them with others, and no other men did more in a day's labour. They complained, of course—about the heat and the food, the difficulty breathing and sleeping. They often worked bare-backed, stared at by passers by as they shone white in the scorching sun, burnt until they whined more about the pain than the heat.

Every day the city grew more chaotic. Ruka tried not to listen but still heard the anger and gossip and blame. He saw fearful citizens waste precious coin on trinkets and fate-readers; he saw cripples and orphans grow gaunt as their begging fell on heedless ears. Many would die, he knew, and in his Grove he dug more graves.

In half a moon, the builders had fortified the entirety of the Northern wall. Garbage and scrap lay about them in disarray, and the workers complained daily of compensation and conditions. But still, it progressed. Wooden staircases spotted newly made platforms for archers and ammunition. The stone was higher, thicker.

At night Ruka brought supplies from his Grove. He needed mostly iron nails and strips to hold the wood and stone in place, but after a decade of greedy delving, he found his mines were nearly empty.

He had searched the woods for more, but found nothing save endless trees. He sent the dead deeper into his mines to explore, but did not go himself. Only the dead ventured into the deepest pits of his Grove, and each time returned with less.

"Shaman."

Ruka blinked and set his stone onto a patch of mortar. It was mid-afternoon on the sixteenth day of construction. If Farahi was right, only weeks remained. He turned to see Eshen, whose face held a mild concern, as if perhaps he had called several times without Ruka hearing.

"What is it, cousin?"

Eshen opened his mouth to speak, but Lani stepped from behind him without waiting. She was dressed in a confusing array of silk wrappings and cloth, a cross perhaps between Tong and island clothes. Regardless, she was beautiful and at ease. Beside her stood a young man in Alaku blue and silver, his restless eyes on Ruka and his warriors. In his hands he held a sealed scroll. Ruka stepped down from the wall.

"Loa, Princess Kapule." He looked from one to the other, some of his men noticing now and rising up behind him. "I hope all is well."

"Loa, Bukayag." Lani smiled politely. "I spotted young Palak here searching the builders. I fear I rather forced him to explain his purpose, but he says his message is for your hands alone."

The messenger bowed. He looked nervous, but controlled. "I come directly from King Alaku," he said, extending the scroll.

Ruka considered asking him what it contained, but Pyu messengers were never verbally instructed. Like the Order's Arbmen, Pyu messengers were treated as mere servants, often deliberately illiterate and uninformed. Ruka had always thought it a poor practice. He believed every man, messenger or king, should be responsible for his words. Perhaps then they would have more worth.

He returned the bow and took the scroll, cracking the seal without pause. It was, it seemed, a letter from the island king.

"Ruka," it read, in a hand so similar to Farahi's. "In the brief time you've been away to the continent, things have become more difficult. The piracy of my grandfather's time returns, with what I expect are several rebel lords and minor kings responsible. The navy of Sri Kon must become involved. I will therefore be able to send you only a fraction of the ships I'd believed. I know this will not be welcome news. We can discuss further, if you wish, and if so please return to Pyu as soon as possible." It finished with all the arrogant titles of nobility.

Ruka realized Bukayag had crumpled the letter in a fist. The princess frowned and extended a hand, and he did his best not to shove it in her hands.

"Your king hasn't sent a single ship," he said in little more than a whisper. The messenger blinked as if confused and muttered maybe 'I wouldn't know, my lord." Ruka was already walking away, twitching as he kept his brother from tearing the boy apart. He heard his men coming closer, as if they'd noticed his mood. Lani's face showed obvious concern.

"I'm sure there's good reason, Ruka. I'll come with you and speak with him."

Ruka said nothing, still fighting his brother for control. Bukayag had, of course, expected this outcome. His promise of the boy's betrayal had begun since the appointment, and often sneered at Ruka's 'hope' that things could be so simple.

"Eshen," he said, knowing he'd uttered the word more like a bark.

The man stepped forward without acknowledging the tone. Some of the other men exchanged looks, and Ruka knew he needed to bring his brother under control.

"I return to Sri Kon. Stay with the Tong and make sure their work continues. They need every set of hands."

Eshen nodded and stepped to a table holding his things. "The rest of the men will stay, lord. Chief Baldur will be in charge. I come with you." He slid a long knife up his sleeve, tying a scabbard around his waist. Ruka felt the man's calm, which helped his own. He put a hand to Eshen's shoulder, and attempted a smile.

"Do you come for my protection, cousin, or for the island king's?"

"Yours, lord" Eshen returned the grin. "As always."

Together they walked away from the dirt and sand into cluttered streets. In their wake, Lani managed to recruit a young man as messenger, handing him a scrawled note to deliver to Kapule without slowing Ruka in the least. He worked in his Grove as he walked, trying at least to make use of the time, planing teak boards for scaffolding to use later in the ramparts.

It occurred to him he hadn't seen Kale in many days, and though he wasn't sure if this pleased or concerned him, it was a problem for another day.

Once or twice he heard men cry out in the land of the living, and realized he'd knocked them aside or over with a hip or arm. Bukayag seemed more and more present in his distraction, and he growled in frustration as he focused again on his living eyes.

The streets were cluttered with carts, animals and the constant needs of human life. He knew he was walking too fast, being too rough. He could see Lani scrambling behind him, apologizing in his wake and maybe offering payment from the king. He knew he should slow to the speed of the crowd. Gods curse this foreign world, all treacherous islanders and their fool king.

He felt suffocated in the heat and the swarms of citizens. He closed his eyes and summoned the memory of an empty steppe, letting the cold mist of a bright spring morning overtake him. In the silence of the endless grass he re-lived a long, frosted breath, and shivered in the light of a pale sun.

"I'll hire us a ship," Lani said, moving ahead of him into the docks. He pulled back to reality to see her panting and flushed, her silk wrappings stuck to her flesh so thinly Ruka could see the perfect outline of her body. He and his brother both stared as she made her way down the steps, and Ruka made no attempt to look away.

Lani moved amongst the busy merchants, fishermen and workers without concern. She approached or yelled until some pointed or answered, and soon she was standing on a mid-sized transport bargaining with a swarthy looking sailor, swaying on the dock as the sun lit her face.

Ruka felt his breathing calm as he watched. In his heart he knew such a beautiful thing could never be for him, as he knew he was born corrupt and had damned himself further with his deeds. But such beauty gave him strength simply with its existence. There, brother, he thought. Does beauty not exist beyond power?

"This man is the captain of a Tong merchant vessel, shaman," Lani had returned and gestured to a sailor who followed. "He has agreed to take us to Sri Kon."

Ruka nodded, inspecting the ship. It was a bit small for his taste and size, and he had a hundred criticisms of the sails, the oars, and the hull. But he said nothing. The sweating captain observed him with equally polite tolerance.

"Thank you," Ruka said in Tong as he walked down the gangplank. The ship moved at his and Eshen's weight, so they sat in the center near the mast while the crew prepared to sail.

Ruka watched as they set their sails far slower than any island crew, as they fiddled too long with a small anchor on a half-rotted rope, then pushed the ship ineptly into the waves. He felt the urge to leap out and demonstrate, then to inform the captain of the many flaws on his ship. Lani joined him and Eshen on the deck. When they had cleared the beach he felt his brother twitch and growl at the effort to be still.

"Tell the Captain I would like to row," he said.

Lani's trimmed brow raised before she frowned.

"I'm not sure that's wise," she whispered, far too close to his ear. Ruka tried to control his voice but still it came out a hiss.

"Wiser for me than stewing in this disgusting ship with nothing to do."

Lani blinked at his tone and expression, then went to the captain. The man obviously argued before she convinced him, then he gestured with a now strained politeness. Ruka joined the ten rowers on a bench.

With a deep breath he seized the pommel, pulling with all his might to the rhythm of the captain's drum. He put all his anger and strength into the effort, cursing the sailors and the sea and a hundred things with every stroke. When he felt a man, then two, move from his bench to the other side to compensate, it improved his mood slightly.

Chapter 15

As the Tong rowers grew red and shone with sweat, Ruka slowed. He closed his eyes and tried to feel the breeze, or smell the sea, feeling the sun dimly on his skin. After a time Lani sat on the bench beside him, her eyes on the horizon.

In his Grove, Kale had finally appeared, as if summoned by her presence.

"Ask her about her son," whispered the wind.

"We are not familiar, islander. I killed the boy's father. It would be awkward."

Kale's eyes blazed and he looked anything but dead. "I don't care if it's awkward," came his voice. "I want to know about my son. I want to hear her voice. So ask her."

So you can hear, too, Ruka thought, but did not say. His mind and even his heart raced as he considered what words to use.

"It must be difficult," he said quietly, as if only being polite. "To be away from your son. How old is he now?"

Lani seemed surprised, looking away from the horizon. She examined his face as if to see some hidden barb or insult. "Yes, it can be. He's two now."

Ruka shrugged in his Grove, and Kale gestured angrily for him to go on.

"Is he a…healthy boy? Does he…resemble his father?"

Lani's expression was not improving.

"I thought the men of ash didn't care about fathers."

Her voice had cooled, and Ruka tightened his grip on the oar, angry at Kale.

"They don't, officially. I only ask to be polite."

And because your dead lover haunts my mind and won't leave me alone.

Lani glanced at the sailors near them and lowered her voice, which at least warmed slightly. A sad look touched her face as she spoke. "He is healthy, and takes after his father. Already he woos the women with his long lashes and dimples."

Kale's eyes closed. "Tell her I got her letter," whispered the trees. "Tell her I was coming and that I always loved her. That I wish…I could be with her and our son now."

Ruka snorted. "How can I say anything like that, islander? It would make no sense to her."

Kale's broken jaw tightened and he stepped forward as the wind howled. "I don't know. But may all your foul gods curse you, you'd best start thinking of a way. You stole it all from me. Start helping me, or I swear I'll…"

"Calm, islander. Calm. I will try to do as you ask."

Ruka thought in silence, but the sound of the rowers helped to prevent awkwardness.

"I…meant to tell you," he began. "On the battlefield, I was told why Kale had returned. I was told he had come for his princess, and his son. That his final thoughts were of them."

Lani looked at him, then away. Ruka thought a wetness touched her eyes, but it was hard to tell in the wind.

"What's done is done," she said. "Tell me Bukayag, why did you wish to marry me?"

Ruka cringed as Kale glared. A growing wind howled above the fog, and Ruka raised his hands for calm.

"It was Farahi's idea," he said to both worlds.

"But why? And why imprison his eldest son and tell him nothing?"

Here Ruka shrugged, having similar questions of his own. How did you explain a man who could see a thousand futures?

"Did you know Farahi loved to play Chahen?" he said. "Did you see him play with anyone? His sister, perhaps?"

Lani shrugged. "I never saw him do anything leisurely. He rarely smiled." She looked almost surprised as she thought about it. "He was a very serious man."

A thousand images flashed before Ruka's eyes of Farahi's smiles and laughter. Their many games. "Not always," he said. "He admired beauty. He loved to watch the sunrise, and patroned many artists and musicians privately. He loved food and was overweight as a boy." Here he saw Lani's surprise and chuckled at the memories. "When we ate alone, he would stare at the sweets and I would offer them to tease him."

In his Grove, he could see Kale's interest now, too.

"You loved him," Lani said, voice showing her obvious surprise. Ruka felt his smile disappear. He looked at Kale, speaking as much to him as to her.

"Yes." He met Lani's eyes. "He was as my brother. Farahi was the greatest player of Chahen who ever lived, I have no doubt. He told me only a fraction of what he knew. I don't think he trusted anyone, not me, not even himself. I don't know why. I don't know why he tried to marry us, Lani, or if he ever intended to do it. I know only he was the cleverest, most selfless and disciplined man I have ever known, and he spent his whole life in service to his people. Despite that, he was still a man. He was…imperfect."

Ruka rowed on in silence, flooded by memories good and ill. Lani and Kale both seemed to understand, and left him alone.

* * *

As the red eye of Volus dipped to its rest beneath the sea, they reached the royal port of Sri Kon.

Ruka's arms shook from his labor, but the work had eased his mind. He glanced at the other rowers—some of whom now looked like walking corpses. Most grinned and nodded to him. When he returned the gesture, a bit of laughter swept the ship.

The captain hopped down from his perch. "The royal port, my lady. In record time, I expect." The sailors laughed again, and she stood and thanked him politely. "Shall I wait here for you?" he asked. "Or escort you to the palace?"

"No, but thank you, Captain. We'll stay the night. Please do as you wish and see my father when you return for compensation." She handed him a royal promisary note, which he accepted with a bow.

Ruka stepped off the docks and lifted Lani down, forcing the feel of her waist from his mind. He stretched sore limbs and inspected the beach, which seemed another world from the isles to the continent, though to cross the distance took less then a day. The sand was pale, the trees less clustered, the birds colorful and shrieking from every direction.

As he inspected, Ruka realized there was only a single ship crewed and ready to sail in the harbor. Some others had been towed to the beach and stored, but only a handful.

The Tong men pushed back out to sea, and the captain waved. Ruka walked with Lani down the floating dock as men emerged from the dockmaster's cabin, including an official-looking ambassador with many armed guards.

"Something is wrong, brother," Bukayag hissed. Ruka glanced at Lani, who seemed unsurprised and unconcerned except by his outburst. It's the king's private harbor, brother, of course we'll be challenged.

Still, Ruka watched them carefully. He saw the single readied ship of sailors were watching him, and they too were armed. Other soldiers strayed at the edge of the beach as if watching the paths. Ruka glanced at Eshen, whose hand had already found the hilt of a blade.

The bureaucrat who met them was predictably middle-aged and fat. An insipid smile failed to cover his tense, awkward looking face.

"Loa, Raja," Lani called.

"Loa, my queen." The man licked his lips. "We were not expecting you."

"We came at the king's request," Lani said. She went to move forward, and startled as Ruka put a hand to her arm. Bukayag was already sneering at the official. His hands flexed in anticipation, his eyes on the growing group of soldiers on the beach.

"I remember the first day I saw you," Ruka said, stepping between the men and the princess. "You were only a serving boy, then—skinny and dirty outside the palace. Do you remember, Raja?"

The diplomat's ring-covered hands fidgeted as he stepped away. "Ahhh…yes, that sounds right. You have a most prodigious memory."

Ruka showed his teeth. "Oh yes. I remember even the leather of your sandals was frayed. But look at you now. Kikay's favor has been profitable, Raja, but it doesn't serve you today. The new king is much like his father. I don't know what he'll do to his aunt for her treachery. But I know exactly what he'll do to you."

Water lapped gently at the docks. A warm wind blew between them as Lani looked again at the ambassador and the guards, then at Ruka, her eyes widening as some form of understanding came.

"What is this madness?" She glared at the men. "Bukayag is my husband's ally, and my father's. My son is heir to the throne! I am your queen. Stand aside!"

Kikay's creature took another step away, then another, his brow shining with sweat as he glanced at the man beside him.

"We'll have to take her, too," said the assassin. "We'll cut her to pieces and dump her in the sea. No one will know what happened."

Lani's hand tightened on Ruka's sleeve. "Call the ship back," she whispered with her face turned. Ruka respected her calm but knew it would be useless. Already he heard the Tong crew calling out to the larger navy ship that now suddenly moved to block their path from the harbor. He knew all of those men were going to die.

In his Grove, he ran amongst the scattered wasteland of his armory.

"Light the forges!" he called to the dead, looking mostly for throwing spears and a shield, but really anything useful. He howled in rage as he found armor twisted and ruined from his battle with the prince. He had been too busy and failed to prepare his armory. He thought he had more time.

In the land of the living, his brother seemed unconcerned. He stepped forward again with hands clenched, eyes roaming the men who might soon be his.

"What are you waiting for," Bukayag hissed in his slurred version of the island tongue. "Come little things. Come and die."

Raja took step after step away as more guards moved to the dock carrying spears. Others were lining up on the beach readying bows. Still the men at the front waited. Perhaps none wanted to be the first to strike.

Ruka did not waste his valuable time. The forges bellowed, and he heated an iron breastplate to bend it back into shape. "Take the arm and leg plates," he called to the dead, wishing not for the first time he still had Boy-From-Alverel. His brother was laughing, pointing at the ambassador's flight.

"Run little traitor!" he called. "When I catch you, I'll eat your lying lips first."

A cry of pain came from the water. Lani turned but Ruka knew. The thought that he'd exhausted half the sailors enraged him, but there was nothing for it now. The violence incensed the men on the docks, and those in the front cried to boost their courage, then charged with spear-points raised.

Ruka hadn't yet found a decent, undamaged sword or spear—but, he'd found a shield. He lifted the smithing hammer still lying next to his anvil. Sparks twirled around his arms as the Grove-iron emerged.

Bukayag took them eagerly. With a single swipe, he shivered and deflected both spears, then lurched and roared in joy as he crushed the first man's head in a downward swipe of the hammer, and kicked the other back into his fellows.

Another 'merchant' boat filled with soldiers was already coming up behind them. The dock swayed with their weight as sailors and pirates leapt out with knives and cleavers.

"Hold them," Ruka growled.

They were trapped on the long dock with men on both sides, and dozens more on the beach. There was nowhere to swim, and no more boats. They had no choice but to fight. Eshen drew his runeblades and put his back towards Ruka's to face them alone, Lani between them.

Arrows hissed through the air but clattered off Ruka's shield, or splashed into the water. He growled and cursed himself for a fool for not sorting out his armory sooner, and for falling for this stupid trap. There'd been too much to do. He'd relied on Farahi's visions too much and he hadn't adjusted for his death—hadn't questioned every decision for consequence and treachery.

"What's happening?" Kale's voice whispered through his mind. "What have you done? Where is Lani?"

Bukayag crushed another man. Ruka stoked his forge and searched for another hammer, hoping to maybe bend a helm and even boots into shape.

"I'm a little busy, islander," he growled. "Perhaps we can discuss my failings another time."

"I can only see through your god-cursed eyes. Where is Lani?" The wind roared, strong enough it nearly put out Ruka's flame, and tossed the helm from his table.

"She's behind me, calm yourself. If I survive this you can chastise me."

An arrow slashed across Ruka's calf. Bukayag roared in rage, shield-charging to push four men back and knocking another into the water. At least twenty more blocked the end of the long dock. Some came forward with wooden shields raised, but it seemed they were content to keep him blocked off while the archers took their shots.

Ruka growled and stepped back because to go forward was to expose Eshen. He glanced back and watched the Northerner dismantling the smaller sailors. He weaved side to side even in the limited space, larger blades spraying blood with almost every swipe. Ruka backed up further to protect him from arrows.

Kale paced back and forth demanding constant updates on Lani.

"Islander," Ruka took a deep breath and hammered at his iron, which was not nearly hot enough. "Make yourself useful and find me some armor. Some coal would also be useful."

"Your armor won't protect Lani. Negotiate."

"I cannnot negotiate, prince. Your bloodthirsty aunt has wanted my head for a decade."

"Then give it to her!"

Ruka sighed, for a moment wondering if that would truly protect Lani. He knew the answer was no.

"Can you swim?" he called over his shoulder. She said nothing, and he was about to turn and ask again when he heard the splash.

"Don't let her escape," Raja called from the beach, and a few men from the dock leapt after. Bukayag caught the first in the side of his head with a hammer swipe, sending him spiraling into the sea with a deadened splash.

His breastplate was nearly wearable now. He stoked the flames with a foot on the bellows as he bent the edge with his hands. It didn't need to be pretty or perfect, merely wearable. He felt a tug at his sleeve, and turned to find three dead brothers from Alverel behind him. They were grinning, each holding armfuls of spears. Ruka and Bukayag smiled together.

They lunged and sent men scurrying back, then turned, dropped their hammer, and skewered a swimmer like a fish. More arrows bounced off his shield, and Ruka sparked spear after spear into reality, launching them at the archers to keep them wary. He threw another through two men on the docks, then spun and tossed one straight through Ambassador Raja's leg.

He paused to enjoy the cry of agony, then turned to check on Eshen. Several corpses floated in the water beside, and the men seemed in no hurry to charge. Ruka turned back on his enemies as his breastplate formed. Bukayag looked at it and grinned.

"Better hurry."

The assassins took his advice. Three charged with impressive dexterity on the narrow bridge. Ruka met them but nearly slipped on the wet dock, a bronze speartip shallowly piercing the meat of his arm before he knocked two of them into the water. He heard Eshen cry out, and saw an arrow in his retainer's back.

Ruka roared and charged again, stabbing another traitor through the cheek, the spear-tip penetrating the skull. He swiped another man from the dock with his shield, then speared another's chest. He pushed them back, knowing he had to reach the sand or risk slipping into the water himself. He couldn't fight them all on the dock. But on the sand, in full armor, he could win.

"Barbarian!"

The assassins leapt away from Ruka's attack. Two men dripping water stood at the edge of the beach, one holding Lani in his arms.

"We don't need to kill the queen, or your man," he shouted, voice confident. "When you're dead we'll be forgiven. Throw down your weapons, surrender to the inevitable, and we let them live."

Kale looked to Ruka as if this were some reasonable bargain, worthy of consideration. "I'm sorry," Ruka said, "but they're lying. They'll kill her anyway."

Kale turned and leapt into the air, soaring like a bird from Ruka's sight without a word.

In the land of the living, Ruka looked at Lani. The wet silk wrappings again showed her youthful, painful beauty. Her deep, active eyes watched him, just as angry as afraid. The idea that she might have been his 'wife' felt so bizarre, so impossible, as to be another story in some book of myths he knew wasn't true. He tried to imagine having no grand purpose, living a simple life with a woman like her, raising children and hunting on an open steppe. It felt impossible.

"I'm sorry," he said, for he had no other words. The fear in her eyes grew. Ruka looked again at the water, trying to judge the depth, and if he might be able to escape by hiding beneath. As he did, he realized it no longer lapped at the dock. He looked further, confused, until he realized the waves had stilled. Clouds gathered overhead as if sucked towards the beach. Ruka slowly glanced to the soldier threatening the mother of Kale's child, and shook his head.

"Every man has a choice, cousin," he called. "But were I you, I'd drop that knife, and run."

* * *

Kale heard words stretched like dough. He raced through the false air of the Grove, wondering why he hadn't tried before to fly. Dead men stared up at him, the unnatural birds in the trees scattering as he blew past them to land at the side of the dark, thick gloom of Ruka's lake.

He felt the same fear as before—the same disquieting aura from the water, as if some animal urge told him a dangerous beast lurked inside. He took ragged breaths as he stared.

"I'm sorry," whispered Ruka's voice in the island tongue, drawn and slow.

Kale screamed to fight the fear, the chill somehow still making his dead flesh shiver. He didn't know if there was a heaven, or some place different or beyond this prison of another man's mind. But to do nothing, to stand by and let someone he loved die—he knew that would be truly hell.

With another cry, Kale ran forward, and leapt head first into the water.

Pain exploded down his body, coating him in a kind of fire that made even his dead body shiver in surprise. The water was cold—a cold thicker and wider than the longest night on Nanzu. Even so, he opened his eyes.

Somehow the water was clearer from within, and Kale saw dark moss or perhaps shadows moving in the blurry depths. He swam down. A dim light shone from the bottom of the lake, bathing all in a golden hue. Kale felt as if something pulled at his leg, holding him, binding him, but he swam on. He thought of marine school, winning a distance swim in an outgoing tide, out-pacing all the others one by one. He thought of old Lo and his toothless mouth, voice like a faded dream. It matters why.

Yes, still true. Kale had swum for his brothers. Now he swam for Lani. The darkness blinded him as he dove further, the thing on his leg like a vice, holding him, crushing him. He no longer needed to breathe, yet felt like he was suffocating. Somehow he knew he couldn't last much longer—as if even a dead man had to choose the light with every stroke—stay or go, move or still, in-between the only suffering.

Kale fell into the light. He emerged from the cold into a brutal warmth that seemed to sear his non-existent lungs. He was a spirit, or a dead man, and in either case surely didn't need to breathe. He forced his eyes open and found himself curled on bright, white sand. Where the vice and pain in his leg had been he found a thin golden chain, wrapped around his calf, snaking all the way to Ruka.

Kale squinted at a red, falling sun, and heard voices and the clang of metal and wood. He wanted to scream in triumph, or agony. Except he had no time.

He rose and looked for Lani, soon finding her blurry shape struggling in the arms of a blurry man waving a blurry blade. With his dulled and broken senses, Kale didn't know much. But he knew this—that man and those like him meant her harm. It was enough.

Without thinking, Kale reached for the power of the world. He no longer had a spirit-house or the anchor of his body, or the threat of what might happen if he drew too much too fast. After all, he was dead. The sky couldn't kill him again.

Thick strands leapt as if only waiting from the sea, warping the fabric of the air and the beach and reality itself, teasing the meaning of such things as truth, waiting only to be re-shaped. Kale accepted it all.

He bound Lani's outline in an armor of colored strands—the safe eye of his storm. He guided the power of creation with only one purpose, a single request to the God or gods, spirits or demons shaping the power of the world.

Protect her, he whispered with dead lips, like a prayer he had once made for another girl in another life on a foreign mountaintop. He no longer cared how, or if it was gentle. Just stop them.

* * *

Ruka and Bukayag watched in fascination as the white fingers of the assassin clenched and flexed on his knife. The young man's face scrunched in effort, or perhaps confusion, as he dragged the blade away from Lani's throat. His brow furrowed as his hand moved further away, almost gently, as if withdrawn by a loving friend.

Then with a popping, and ripping—the man's arm snapped at the elbow, jutting away at an unnatural angle as the bone emerged from the flesh. The soldier cried out and stared in terror, then collapsed as his leg snapped next. His neck twisted as he looked to the others for help, or answers. His body contorted like a boneless doll, then he was thrown far away from Lani, bouncing shattered across the white, smooth sand.

Everyone else stared, afraid perhaps to be the first to move. It did not help them. Another islander—this one with a bow facing in the vague direction of Lani—dropped. His howl of agony ended abruptly as his head was crushed far worse than the heaviest swing from Bukayag's hammer.

The sky flared to life.

Lightning struck the pack of assassins near the dock, then again and again at men still in the water. The smell of fresh rain mixed with roasting flesh as they screamed. Wind howled and swept sand from every direction, and Ruka could hear Lani's cries as the men around her ripped apart. Blood splashed and doused her silks as they gurgled and choked on their own tongues in the brutal horror of their deaths.

Any man with sense was already running. The sailors on Eshen's side leapt into the water or fled to their boats. The storm ignored these, swirling over the beach destroying anything it touched. The royal beach blew apart until only Lani stood alone and unharmed, her hands clutched to her blood-spattered face. The sky and wind settled as quickly as it began. The water lapped again at the docks, and the princess' breath frosted in the island sun.

Ruka turned to watch the ships still slaughtering the last remnants of the Tong sailors. "And them," he whispered in both the land of the living and the dead, "save them, too, damn you."

But the storm ended, and the fighting too as the last sailors died. Ruka dropped to his fallen retainer, feeling a familiar numbness. Eshen had several superficial wounds on his arms and chest. But three arrows were lodged deep in his unarmored back.

"I'm sorry, lord." The Northerner gasped and spit blood as if annoyed. "I should have…more careful. Stupid."

"Don't speak." Ruka tilted him as he examined the wounds. Two of the arrows were maybe removable. The third was half buried and angled towards the heart.

Eshen smiled wanly as he saw Ruka's eyes. "I go to the mountain. Too soon. I'm sorry, lord. I'm sorry."

Ruka held back the wail of grief forming as he seized the man's hand. "You fought like ten men, cousin, it was my failing." He sealed the tears and saw Eshen wanted to argue but already lacked the strength. Ruka smiled and cradled him so the arrows wouldn't be twisted painfully by the planks beneath. "Have no fear," he whispered, rocking with the gentle waves of paradise. "You will be re-born. I will see to your matron and children. They will live beneath this warm sun, knowing their patron lived and died as a hero of old. Your deeds will go in the book. Men for an age will know your name."

As he often did in such tragedy, Ruka wished his measured mind would lose track of the moment. He wished he could not hear the water dripping through the clocks in his Grove, or count the waves against the foreign dock. He heard Lani stepping over corpses as she made her way to his side. He felt himself rocking Eshen back and forth, and the feel of the stubble of his face as he held him.

"He has lost consciousness," Ruka heard his own voice, spoken plainly, almost absently.

"There's more men in those ships," Lani said. "We must go to Tane, and quickly."

"Yes," Ruka agreed, but didn't move. He blinked and turned his eyes to Ambassador Raja, crawling away from the beach with the javelin still lodged in his leg. Ruka stared, and stared, his brother trying to rise, to claim him, whispering 'Give in, brother, and I will make it all go away. I will eat that traitor's lips, just as I promised.'

Lani watched where his gaze had moved, and knelt beside him. She eased Eshen from his lap.

"Come," she said, taking his bloody hands.

"Yes," Ruka still agreed, hammering armor in his Grove, thinking just a small break from the world would be so restful. He felt his brother twitching, held at bay only by the numbness. Ruka wanted to run into a dark, endless woods, and flee this world where life became death, always death.

He looked longingly to the endless trees in his Grove, so dark and quiet. He stopped hammering and considered running until even the dead could not follow. But he was afraid, because that's what his brother wanted. Ruka did not know what Bukayag would do with the princess when he was gone.

"Yes," he said again, but this time he stood. Without another word he walked with Lani towards the beach and the palace because there were still things to do, and because Beyla had told him a man failed in only two ways.

Long ago, outside the derelict shack of Hulbron's hall, he had decided—even if it meant suffering and destruction, for his mother's love, he would only fail in one.

Chapter 16

Ruka regained control as he walked. The numbness in his body faded to a dull ache of memory, ending, as ever, in the strength of purpose.

He growled as he now noticed several wounds on his arms and legs. All were superficial, but he found he couldn't remember receiving them. His steps crushed dirt and sand against the road in hurried steps, and he pictured ripping Kikay apart with his bare hands. It helped a little.

"My husband won't be involved," Lani said. With her much shorter legs she almost ran to keep Ruka's pace. "You mustn't accuse him. He must decide what to do. I can start the discussion—I'll explain what happened."

"Will you." Ruka thought of the island prince's magic. "Tell me princess, when those men were burning and flaying all around you, what exactly did happen?"

She looked away, panting now from the run.

"I…assumed…it was your doing."

Ruka snorted, then took a deep breath and slowed to a reasonable speed. He watched the princess' proud brow still held high, her brown skin covered in red splotches. Blood and gore dotted her clothes and face from head to foot. To remain composed after such danger and violence was difficult for anyone.

"I agree. Tane isn't likely to be involved," he said more calmly. "Since the royal harbor was empty it seems likely he sent his ships as promised."

Lani nodded and smiled encouragingly, and Ruka walked on in silence. In his Grove, he searched for Kale.

Ruka searched the library and his mother's house, the palace and the river, until the dead near his garden pointed and led him to the mostly abandoned Southern section of the lake. There he found Kale sitting on the mixed sand of the beach where Ruka had first brought one world to the next. The rope he had once used to drag a ship lay rotting in the fetid pool, some old and inferior weapons lay half-buried in the sand.

Kale sat unmoving, staring into the deepest waters. He looked tired, maybe even unable to rise.

"How." Ruka stood before him. Kale looked away and said nothing. "If you can do that," Ruka said, "you can help me. You can help complete your father's legacy and protect your people. There is much to discuss. There is much to…"

"I have no interest," the wind whipped in a sudden rage. "I protected Lani. That's all I did. I saved an innocent woman you certainly put in danger. Unlike you, I don't enjoy killing. I won't be doing it again."

Ruka forced his jaw to unclench. He pictured Kale's face as he'd entered Farahi's palace—the righteous fury as he'd ripped the young warriors of ash to shreds. "Very well. You have killed ten soldiers to save one innocent—kill ten Naranians for every Tong woman and child in Ketsra. That should satisfy your moral mathematics."

Kale managed to stare with undisguised hatred. Ruka left him in the sand.

In the land of the living, guards, soldiers and other servants of the Alaku's gaped with open mouths at Ruka and their blood-soaked queen striding towards the palace. Many rushed to offer assistance, but Lani waved them away. 'Take me to the king' she repeated at every challenge, in a strong tone that revealed no sign of the violence on the beach. At every turn she was obeyed, and several of the guards fell in behind her with weapons ready.

Lani led Ruka past fountains of clean, cold water, waving away the nervous women carrying rags and soap. She walked tall and proud past court officials and representatives from other islands, all who stared in equal shock.

"My lady," said one of the older, chief servants as he stepped before them at the double doors of the throne room. He swept them both with his eyes, then gestured at the bodyguards. "I expect the king would see his wife directly. Please tell him she's arrived."

The guards bowed and one slipped inside, and Ruka and Lani stood together in the marble room as they waited. A few drops of fresh blood leaked down Ruka's arm, but none of the servants offered him assistance.

Finally the doors opened and the guards gestured inside. Lani stomped through and Ruka followed, his rage still boiling, requiring no momentum or maintenance. For now, he was happy to let the others act first.

"Lani." Tane stood from his father's throne. Ruka caught the wisp of silk as it disappeared through some other door, and he wondered if it were dismissed advisors, or family members. "Good spirits," said the king, "what happened?"

"I'm alright. It's not my blood." Lani held up the now bloody letter she'd kept since Ketsra, and stepped forward to hand it to her husband. Ruka noticed the guards twitched in response. "We were attacked in the royal harbor," she said. "We barely survived."

The young monarch furrowed an expressive brow, his father's silver circlet dipping as he read. He looked very much like his Farahi. Something about this made things worse.

"Where is Kikay," Ruka said, feeling his patience fray like tattered rope. Tane met his eyes. As the young king's face lost all expression, Ruka was reminded of Egil.

"She said she wished to spend the day on Bato. She went with Eka."

Ruka smiled without friendliness or belief. "She forged those words in your name with a royal seal, my lord. Her assassins would have killed your wife—the daughter of your ally. They killed one of my most loyal retainers on your docks."

Lani's jaw clenched at the words, but she nodded. Tane looked between them.

"Do you have any proof? Something other than this? You don't know it was her. You have many enemies Ruka and so do I."

Ruka sneered. "None so practiced in forging Alaku signatures. My proof is the face of every assassin on that beach, as well as Kikay's servant, Raja, who I left bleeding to death. But there is no time for this madness. I don't care about Kikay. I care only about the damage. The man she killed was a great warrior even amongst the men of ash—he would have fought and died for your people. Imprison her until this war is over."

Tane led his wife to a basin beside the throne, his face still carefully guarded. "Imprison the eldest living Alaku on your say so? On your word? Presumably against the word of my aunt? I think not. But I will look into this, that I promise you."

"I'm deeply comforted." Ruka's mouth was dry or he may have spit on the polished stone. He walked to the king's royal liquor, seized a bottle of rum and splashed it over his wounds. Tane stared as he doused the various cuts. In his Grove, he went to his mother's mostly still intact house and found needle and thread, then brought them both to the world of the living in a small flare of light. He sewed the ripped flesh on his arm, then noticed Tane staring and met his gaze. That's right, he thought. Best you remember what you're dealing with.

"The Tong prepare to fight to the death," he said as he drew the needle. "My people help them with their defences."

Tane blinked and looked away, nodding uncertainly to his wife. "I'm glad to hear it. But I should like to know more about what was said specifically."

"More words," Ruka yanked the needle through another tear. "Don't you people ever tire of words. Gather your army, little Alaku, and make them ready. Every moment wasted may be our doom."

Tane's eyes flared. "You will address me as king. I am not your boy, or a little Alaku. I am king of the isles as my father was."

"You are a midget in a giant's shadow," Ruka roared, "and you bore me to death with your cowardice."

Lani stepped before her husband and turned on Ruka, chastisement in her eyes. "I need to speak with my husband privately, please. This is not meant as rudeness. No doubt you are tired from the battle, go and rest. Join us later in the dining room this evening, if it pleases you."

"Thank you, Queen. It does not."

Ruka turned for the door. He lifted a pitcher of water and a plate of fruit on his way. He considered returning to the Tong now but it would be dark soon and his body needed rest. Servants scrambled and bowed as he opened the door. Tane called from across the room.

"Show Lord Bukayag to a guest room, please."

"Titles. False politeness. More useless words." Ruka or maybe Bukayag hissed as he walked by the soldiers, their spears rattling in shaky hands. When some followed he turned and shouted. "I know the way."

They managed half-bows as they fled.

* * *

As usual, Ruka lay awake through the night. His legs dangled off the bed fit for an Ascomi child, his mind lost in memory. He re-visited his first night in Farahi's palace, fresh from the horrors of Trung's pits, fearing more imprisonment, torture and death. But he had dared to hope otherwise. Farahi had come with his chalk and his letters and his deep, clever eyes, and the course of Ruka's life had changed again.

"I miss you, brother," he whispered to the dark. He pictured Farahi's smile at a setting island sun, his far-away gaze that pierced the world. But the Alaku patriarch didn't answer, and couldn't ever again. Only his son and killer could speak in death, trapped forever in Ruka's mind or some distant land of the dead, doing only the gods knew what. The best of your family is gone, Ruka thought, the best of the Alakus perished. Now I must suffer the rest out of honor.

He sighed and thought he might begin repairs on his mother's house when Bukayag bolted upright and lifted a knife. A faint knock came on the door.

Ruka prepared to fight to the death, but the door opened gently. Light from a large candle replaced the black of a moonless night, and Lani waited in the doorway. Ruka acknowledged her with a nod, and she bowed and stepped inside.

A thicker fabric of cloth covered her from neck to knee, which—compared to her usual fare—was conspicuously modest. Perhaps she'd worn it to ensure he didn't get the wrong message from a late night visit, but she needn't have bothered.

"I expected you would wish to leave with the sun," she said. "I've arranged a ship, this time with a guard. I will accompany you, but, I thought we should speak first. I haven't disturbed you?"

Ruka shook his head. Lani's eyes flicked to his exposed body, so he quickly lifted a cloth shirt from his bedpost. She looked away, and he was surprised to be wounded by the embarrassment in her eyes. Most looked at him like one might a beast in a cage, and this no longer surprised or bothered him. Yet he had not wished it from her.

"I brought some pork and a little fish from dinner," she set a tray on the table. "I'm sorry no one brought you something sooner."

"The fault is mine." Ruka shrugged and sighed. "I…yelled at the servants. They fear me." She nodded and as she closed the door he realized there were no guards waiting in the hall. "And you, princess, do you not fear me?"

"Not today," she said, and Ruka allowed himself a smile. Lani's expression became more serious.

"The king knows very well his aunt tried to have you killed. He knows she despises you. Proof will not be required."

Ruka blinked, unsure how to respond.

"The issue," Lani continued, "is that Kikay has allies and servants throughout the isles, including in Tane's court and personal guard. She has been powerful since Tane was a boy, with considerable wealth of her own. And she is Spymaster Eka's lover."

Ruka snorted, knowing Farahi had spent much effort controlling his sister's power. He sat up and looked at the food, suddenly hungry but embarrassed to eat in front of Lani. He drank some water and considered his words as she carried on.

"The king points out his aunt blames you for the death of her brother. She knows that you killed her nephew. Perhaps you'll give her a little time to calm down. And before you ask, the king will not have his aunt executed."

I would not have asked, Ruka thought, though he knew it should be done. The weakness of Farahi's son annoyed him more than anything.

"Can't," he spit. "Won't." Ruka rose up and looked out the only window, preferring the darkness to the bright light of the flame. "Two deaths, and the royalty of paradise think they've suffered. You've no idea. You don't yet begin to understand."

"Please lower your voice."

Ruka hadn't realized he'd raised it, but tried.

"You think this is a game?" he pointed out the window. "Like other creatures of the sun, you cannot see. You fail even to imagine the moonlit monsters marching in the black. But they exist. Do you know what would have happened if Kikay killed me, Lani? Can you understand?" He found himself laughing, or perhaps failing to control Bukayag. "If I die, princess, the men of ash will come to these islands with no more talk of saving the Tong. There is no word for friendship, no word for alliance. They will come for revenge, for sport, for glory. The sickness and disease I have worked to stop these years will spread like wildfire. Pitiless raiders forged in ice will slaughter your men, take your wealth, and burn your lands." He shook his head, feeling Bukayag's urges even now. "Your women perhaps they will ignore. But perhaps not. Instead they may slake forbidden lusts so deep and shamed you'll wish you shared your men's fate."

Lani said nothing as he stood in the silence until his anger cooled.

"Farahi knew all of this," he went on. "He knew the Naranians would one day be the end of his rule and his people's independence. But it was not truly this he feared. What woke that great man in the night with sweat beaded on chilled flesh was my mother's kin. He saw our coming, so he gambled all your lives, hoping beyond hope that somehow he and I could…" Ruka raised his hands, and dropped them. "That we could change it, that we could bring your husband's people, yours and mine, together in purpose. It feels like arrogance now. Farahi is dead. I am alone again. Always alone."

Ruka sat or perhaps fell to the edge of the bed. He felt as if a lifetime of neglected sleep were finally catching him, and heard the resignation and bitterness in his own voice. He put his face in his hands, watching the candle flicker between his fingers. He felt Bukayag's disgust with his weakness.

"I believe you," whispered Lani's voice, though he hardly heard her. He sat squinting at the flame, lost in a lifetime of impossible memory, hearing his mother's voice again and again. A man fails in only two ways, my son. He quits, or he dies.

Warm flesh touched his hands and he jumped. He saw there were tears on his skin—his tears. Lani was sitting beside him, her exquisite beauty only enhanced in the dim light, even to Ruka's eyes. "You're not alone," she said, a smile forced to her face. "You have Tane, and my father. And me. I will help you."

He took the hand from his face. He knew he frightened her, and perhaps his weakness brought a contempt or judgment she was forced to hide. But in that moment he did not see it, and locked away the moment of kindness, and the touch of her hand, so rare and precious in Ruka's world.

"Thank you," he said, not sure what else to say. She squeezed his hand.

"No, thank you, for saving my life today."

She stood to leave, though he wished she would just sit for awhile. He smiled at her and bowed his head, thinking even in this moment of gentleness the world had cheated him. It was not me who saved you, he wanted to say. It was your lover, who I killed. I was prepared to let you die.

"Goodnight, princess," he said.

"I am a queen," she said with a smile. "But call me Lani, please." She disappeared and closed the door, and Ruka was alone again.

More words, he thought, you are what you are Lani Kapule, and I am what I am. And for both reasons I will never know a true moment of your love and grace.

He lay on his bed and decided he would carve a statue of her in his Grove. Somewhere by the river, perhaps, touching both sand and sea, a thing belonging to two worlds.

As he walked the outskirts of the mine, looking for the right stone, he found Kale staring, a look of cold murder lingering in his eyes. Ruka ignored him.

'You had her love and friendship all your life,' he wanted to say. 'She touched you not with pity, but as a woman. She gave you a son, and when they took you from her, you went, and did not return, when no man nor god could have taken me. You are a weak thing like my father, islander. How dare you judge me. How dare you.'

Instead he said nothing. He found a good piece of limestone from the scrap of the mine, Lani's height with good coloring. With the prince still staring, he lifted it himself to a waiting cart, and wheeled it towards the river.

Chapter 17

Only two men had ever 'summoned' Kikay Alaku to a meeting, and both were dead. She hadn't killed either of them, of course, but still, she considered it a sign of poor judgment.

The first had been her husband, who'd beckoned her from the celebration to their wedding bed, 'to perform her wifely duties'; the second, of course, her brother, who'd been angry over something necessary she'd done. Neither had enjoyed the results.

She would have liked to explain this to her nephew—in writing, preferably—while refusing his 'invitation'. But considering the circumstances, instead she'd stood from the beautiful salt lake and dried her feet on the grass, smiled politely at the messenger, then went with the armed guards without a fuss.

Now she bounced along in a navy scoutship towards Sri Kon, and considered her position.

Her assassination attempt had utterly failed. The spy's report read like a priest's mythological rambling, or a panicked soldier justifying retreat. Kikay was not a warrior and the details didn't interest her. All she cared was that they failed.

Nearly as bad—they'd almost killed Lani in the process. Inexplicably, the girl had returned with Ruka from the safety of her father's court. No doubt the assassins had worried she'd recognize them from her time at the palace, and thought to dump her in the sea.

Kikay was pleased the girl survived. They would have had to make amends with her father; Tane would have raged and acted a fool, and a dead Alaku wife would hurt the family's strength even more. But still—yes, she thought, still—if her death had been required, Kikay would have paid, and far more.

Long ago she accepted Ruka was some kind of demon—an unnatural creature tainted by the ether, touched with evil by the world unseen. But not until the 'battle' with Kale had she accepted he had actual, and obvious, magical powers, like some evil spirit made flesh.

Kale having them was unnerving enough. At least with Kale, Kikay had known through her spies of his…special attention on Bato. So while it was unnerving to witness the result of ancient power, it was not the first time. Then—just as frightening—she had learned even an apprentice of Bato could be killed.

She had thus assumed Ruka could also be killed. At least the ruse to bring him had worked. Farahi never would have fallen for such a thing, so it was clearly his mind behind most of their past scheming. This brought Kikay at least some comfort. She had rarely outmanouevered her brother, but she could certainly outwit the savage.

Her men had apparently surrounded the barbarian and trapped him unarmed on a narrow dock with no escape. They had peppered him with arrows and attacked from both sides. Yet still he lived. He had killed twenty, if the spy was correct—and maybe more, nearly by himself. After such a display, what could soldiers do against such a man? Nothing, she decided, and wouldn't make that mistake again.

Next time it would be poison, or a friend's knife in his throat. With any other man, she would have sent Arun in the shadows, but she knew in this one task he would refuse her. She had asked him once before, many years ago. At the time she'd believed his hesitation fear, but had since grown to accept an unlikely truth: her lover liked the creature, and didn't want to kill it.

After Farahi's death, Kikay had hoped Arun's loyalty would be completely hers. But it seemed he served Tane in at least some capacity. The thought balled her hands to fists. After so many years together, still he had a man's foolish loyalty to ancient ideals. The boy had almost no power. He was untried and though clever had been nearly as protected as his brothers from the realities of the world. He had only the name inherited from his father.

Damn Pyu succession laws and all traditions, Kikay thought.

She was in fact older than Farahi, and had always been more suited. She should have been queen. If she had then maybe her beloved brother would have lived. And maybe Kale would have lived and never been sent away in the first place. She might have protected them all.

"Damn that man and his schemes," she cried in frustration. The ship's crew cringed at her sudden outburst, but Kikay ignored them.

She had lost track of all Farahi's intrigue long ago. His subterfuge and network had become so confounding and far-reaching she seemed unable to act without his knowledge. He had seemed to know almost everything, great and small, which earned her respect, but made some of his decisions even stranger.

He had, for example, long known of Tane's interest in men. He had known of Kale and Lani's affection, and of all the comings and goings in his palace. So why had he allowed it for so long? And why had he sent Kale away?

That night Kikay had argued until the sun rose—to no effect—who better to sire Lani's sons than Kale?

"Who cares about some whispering, brother?"

They had argued, and argued, until Farahi had screamed "She isn't for him!" and walked out into the night. It hadn't made any sense, but neither did many of the things Farahi said or did. Yet he'd always been so clever, and often right, and after all, he was the king. So she had let it go.

Later that night she'd found him at a shrine he thought he kept secret—a few candles and trinkets to the Enlightened he'd built for Hali. He clutched some object in his hand she couldn't see in the gloom of her secret wall, his eyes closed. He whispered to the dark. "Why can't I see him, my love?"

Farahi rarely if ever showed emotion. The sound of his tears and broken voice alone had disturbed Kikay for months. "Why can't I see our son?" he'd whispered. "Is it my love that blinds me? I see no other way, Hali. I'm sorry, but the storm is coming. I see no other way."

Kikay hadn't understood that, either, though she'd never forgotten it. A tear blotched the papers on her lap and she wiped at her face with an angry wrist. Damn you, Fara-che, I miss you. But what have you done to our family?

"Land, my lady. We'll be arriving soon."

Kikay blinked and gestured that she'd heard. She was struck unhappily by the memory of being trapped on a boat with the savage—a memory of his bloody, screaming murder of the captain who had done nothing except stand too close to the monster's rage. Her tears soon dried.

"The king's private fishing dock is closer than the royal harbor, please take me there."

The captain bowed politely, and Kikay returned to her letters. Many of the lords she could bribe or threaten were dead or missing, almost as if they'd been targeted in the barbarian's bloodthirsty raids.

Most had been replaced with sons, however, and these sons had wives and children and just as much to lose as their fathers. Kikay began a new list of names. She noted their suspected ship numbers and marines, and the suspected wealth of their families. No doubt the barbarians stole, burned and killed some, so she reduced it all by half. But there would be more. And for her plans, she would take it all.

* * *

"Was it you?"

Kikay rolled her eyes as she stepped into her nephew's throneroom. "Don't act like your father. Of course it was me and you bloody well know so stop wasting my time."

Tane's square features hardened. In his circlet and royal robes, he really did look like Farahi. "I'll re-phrase," his tone pinched as it did when he was truly upset. "How the hell did you think it was a good idea to do this without informing me?"

"To protect you if it went badly, which it did. Now you have no guilt. You can throw me in a prison or do whatever else pacifies this stupid barbarian, and then I can try again."

Tane sat at the small, square table used for private family meals, raising a pitcher of wine in offering. "Lani believes him, Aunty. She truly believes Naran is coming to destroy her family, and more or less enslave her people. Within the year, she thinks."

Kikay sat and held her glass as Tane poured.

"So the Tong have been saying for a hundred years. It's in her blood. Don't take her too seriously, nor think of her too harshly. "

"Her father and generals believe it, too, Kikay. They're already preparing for attack—building walls and panicking farmers. They're ripping apart buildings for heaven's sake. The farmer king does not spend coin idly."

"Which all means nothing, nephew. No doubt the old wretch's walls could use work and he's taking the opportunity." She rolled her eyes. "At worst Ruka has exploited a long-standing paranoia. It's what he does. For all we know he's stirring up Naran and making them believe they're in peril, or some other nonsense. Maybe he's been orchestrating all of this from the very beginning. He reads and writes Naranian, as well as Tong. I've seen it. The man's some kind of demonic parrot."

Tane shook his head and stood to pace. "Now who's paranoid. Yes, the Tong have long feared a Naranian invasion that never comes. But that fear isn't exactly misplaced, Kikay. Father believed it, he just didn't know when. It could be his death was the incentive they needed. Surely the Tong have scouts and spies in place to keep them informed. What proof do you have that Ruka's lying?"

"Proof?" Kikay raised her voice. "My proof?" She threw her glass to shatter against the wall. "My own nephew smashed my brother's head against the wall like that fucking glass. Our king is dead, for trying to protect that…creature!"

Tane's eye froze as he looked at the wall, and Kikay walked to him, whispering in his ear.

"How many have these foreign barbarians murdered on our shores? Our islands are in chaos. Trade suffers, disease is rampant. Everything has turned to shit from the moment your father began to trust this demon. How much more god-cursed proof do I require?"

Tane met her eyes, and let out a breath as he sat. "You make it sound very simple."

"It is simple, nephew. Your father had a far-reaching mind, but it often sent him down insane, paranoid, pattern-seeking paths. Everything was always connected with him, always meaningful beyond what it was. Don't make the same mistake. Sometimes an enemy is just an enemy; dangerous men are dangerous men. These people will destroy us if left unchecked. They must be stopped."

"Stopped how, exactly?" Tane gestured towards the window. "If you hadn't noticed, our soldiers don't fare particularly well against them."

"We stop them the same way our people have stopped every threat since time immemorial. We destroy their ships. We never let those monsters touch our sand again. We certainly don't bloody bring them here."

At this, Tane's eyes narrowed. She reminded herself he was clever and trusted no one, which was correct but annoying when it included her. He watched her face and tilted his head, so much like his father.

"What have you done, Aunty?"

She took a long draught of wine, and snorted.

"What you should have done the moment it was in your power."

"Tell me what you've done Kikay, or I swear."

"You'll do nothing and don't make threats you can't keep, Tane, not even the hint of them. You are king, but in reality I control these islands. You can't send a single ship without my knowledge. You can't take a coin from the treasury without my creatures lifting it." She stared when he didn't respond. "You think Eka is yours? I told him to do what your father should have. I told him to sail with this enemy to his miserable lands, and burn every last ship down to the skeleton."

Tane's eyes never wavered. "You're right, Aunty, the Batonian's loyalty is…questionable. That's why I told Admiral Mahen to carry out my instructions, and ignore any further orders until he sees me again. Particularly if those orders came from Master Eka."

Kikay inspected her nephew's eyes, and laughed. "Clever. But like your father you lack a simple ruthlessness. Eka will kill Mahen. He will place another man in charge, and your order will mean nothing."

Tane clenched his jaw, then relaxed. He poured them both a larger drink of rum. "Maybe. Maybe not. Whatever happens, Aunty, I hope it's correct. And I hope it's successful, for all our sakes."

Kikay sniffed the rum, wondering for just a moment if he might poison her. She had practically raised him, and they'd been very close and friendly all his life. But it would not stop me, she thought. Indeed, it hadn't.

But she looked into Tane's young eyes and knew he was his father's son. He was not like her, and would not do what was necessary. She raised the glass to concede his point, and sipped.

* * *

Arun stood on the prow of the greatest flagship in the world, clutching two letters in his pocket. The wind was high and the waves steady, and he soaked in the feeling of freedom. He had always wanted to be a sailor. Not a pirate, as he had once become—but a merchant, or maybe an explorer, sailing new waters all the way across the Peaceful Ocean, to see new peoples and mysterious things. But that was not his Way.

Like all boys at the Batonian monastery, he had been born to a mother hand-picked by the senior monks for procreation. He had known nothing but the monastery all his enduring youth—by all appearances a young man at forty years. And in all that time, he had only ever wanted to be free.

Every evening with their duties finished, he had sat on the beaches with his twin brother Tamo and looked out at the waves. They had spoken of all the places they would see, the things they would do. But Tamo had loved the island and the monk's quiet ways, and as they'd gotten older he had stopped speaking of a life on the sea. And because Arun loved his brother, he had stopped too, and never asked him to abandon it, leaving on his own to see the world with only a note of goodbye.

"We're close now," said Admiral Mahen. His old but still keen eyes squinted as he looked out over the horizon. Arun nodded, though he had no idea. Old sea dogs like Mahen knew from a hundred signs without needing to see land.

As Arun looked at the admiral's wrinkled skin he felt suddenly very old. He was almost certainly older than Mahen. Much of his life felt like memories now—all the grand plans and greatness over, him just waiting now for others to seize their chance. If he stood still his mind recalled the harsh realities of surviving on the isles with no friends, family or money. He remembered old crimes, using all his gifts and teachings on ignorant men who'd never known the secrets of Bato.

Memory was a strange thing. In his youth, Arun had hated the monks and wanted nothing more than to leave. Now he looked back on those years fondly—a simpler time with concrete rules and innocence.

"Hell of a thing," said the admiral, looking out. "Bringing more of these people, I mean. The ones we have are dangerous enough."

Arun noticed sweat beading on Mahen's brow, his attention only half on the sea. Three sailors had approached, pretending to check ropes or mop clean hull. All had knives in their belts.

Yes, Arun thought, hell of a thing.

In his dreams he could sometimes still hear the slaughter of Halin city, and see the cold eyes of the men of ash as they butchered their way to Trung. He had known callous death before, but Kwal had been different. Poor Kwal, he thought. Another terrible deed in a life more dark than light.

The honorable captain had never recovered from the slaughter, nor the kidnapping of the women. Though he had never said so, nor breathed an ill word, Arun knew he'd never forgiven the king who'd ordered his part in it. Farahi had known too, as he knew most everything.

The king could have discharged or killed him, but it was not his way. He was a very efficient man. The lord of Sri Kon used every tool at his disposal until it dulled, and so it had been with Kwal. He sent him back to the Ascom with every trade fleet, delivering and returning men and goods, facing the weather and the sea and loose tongues with renowned competence for years.

Farahi tolerated the increasing drunkenness and malice, until one day he retired him to the shore. A few short years later he ordered Arun's knife in his heart.

Of the many dark things Arun had done for his king, this had seemed the least just. He sometimes wondered if Farahi had known exactly when Kwal would betray. And, if he had known, by choosing Kwal for the task those years ago, had he known it would destroy him then, and sent him anyway?

As the years passed, Arun tried not to ask such questions. With Farahi, anything had been possible. Arun had been the Sorcerer-King's knife in the dark for almost fifteen years. He had seen actions match predictions that spanned a decade in the making. Farahi would sometimes wake in the middle of the night with a list of names—spies, traitors, and pirates—often knowing where they would be, and when.

Arun had been his assassin, his protector, and sometimes his friend. Farahi's reign began in an era of constant infighting, piracy and petty squabbles; when it was over, these things hardly existed. Every island in Pyu had prospered. The merchant caste had doubled in size, every island, every city, every man from king to commoner benefited from the peace and stability of the Alaku monarch. No one ever thanked him.

A bit of water pooled and Arun blinked it away, recalling the last time they'd spoken, telling himself the wetness he felt was the wind.

"If I die, Eka…" Farahi had said, not long before the end.

"You won't die, lord. Your visions and my blade will protect you."

"If I die," he'd carried on, tone matter of fact as ever, "I'll need you to deliver some of my messages in their proper time. Some can be memorized vaguely but most must be precise and remain sealed. As events change some will become irrelevant, but I've made a list of sorts. I'll keep them organized. The information they contain may be the difference between life and death for our people. Promise me now."

"I promise, lord. If you die, I will finish it."

As with so many things the king had only nodded, no emotion, just another task complete before returning to the affairs of state. Since his concubine's death he had never taken another. He had spent little time with his wives or children save to teach, instruct, or rebuke. He gave no special favor to friends or family. He studied and schemed and met with powerful island nobles or distant powers from sunrise to sundown with little pause, even for illness. His laws were harsh, but they were just; he treated the common man no different than a prince, which enraged the princes and went unappreciated by the commoners. He had been the most selfless lord, nevermind king, Arun had ever known.

"To be honest." The admiral was apparently still talking. His bushy white eyebrows rose as he finally turned, more sweat and a little color in his face. "When I learned you were coming aboard, I half expected new orders. Very different orders, let's say. At the last minute."

Arun said nothing, gave away nothing, as was his way. As he had on and off since the sun rose, he clutched the order from the king's son in his left hand; the forged order from his lover in his right.

Life, or death; loyalty, or betrayal. He no longer knew which deed was which.

In his many years of service, he had grown comfortable taking Farahi's orders. After all the talk of freedom as a child, he had eventually discovered it exhausted him, and made him unhappy. Despite the often dark nature of his work, and his status as Farahi's servant—the truth was, the last fifteen years had been the happiest of his life. He had found a kind of chaotic peace with Kikay, and within himself, perhaps as Tamo had on Bato. He had been powerful, and feared, for the first time with a master worthy of his talents. But now that master was dead.

He fingered the two letters, angrier with every moment because he didn't want the responsibility. He wanted a clear understanding of the future given by someone he could trust to know what was best. He wanted orders.

Arun had many talents but prophecy wasn't one of them. Anyone who relied on him to do such a thing only displayed their incompetence.

Those many years ago he had seen the violence and otherness of the men of ash, and felt for the first time a kind of ethnic loyalty. But only just. For he was ultimately a son of Bato—a child of light and shadow, whose divine sire would never fear the conquests or politics surrounding Pyu. Arun had run all his life from his home, yet he knew he could always return.

The admiral still babbled on, more red-faced than ever, perhaps trying to cover his discomfort and the stilted 'conversation' with nonsense talk of the journey.

"In any case," he said, "we can take on two thousand passengers. We're ordered straight to Ketsra, and after re-supply and in fair weather we should be there in a few weeks, unless Roa swims."

Arun said nothing to ease the man's discomfort. His right hand strayed to the blue-iron knife strapped as ever to his side—Ruka's gift those years ago, which had never rusted, and hardly dulled. It had taken him years to notice the almost imperceptible symbols etched on the blade, revealed only in bright light to be very nearly Batonian characters. It was several more before he learned the Ascomi used similar symbols they called 'runes', and that these symbols had formed words.

"Fox in the shadows," said his blade in the barbarian tongue.

Somehow, it had been right. Arun rubbed a thumb over the dagger—only one of two things in his possession he would never lose, two objects that seemed so full of meaning and importance they defined him, connecting him with some ancient history and future beyond mortal ken. He had never once asked Ruka about the dagger, or mentioned it. Nor had the strange shaman said a word.

"It's too big for me," Arun said aloud.

The admiral startled and cleared his throat, muttering noises as if to respond. Arun turned and met the man's fear-widened eyes, which gazed towards Eka's hidden hand.

"I am here for your protection, Admiral. Nothing more. With your permission I'll sleep for awhile. Please send for me once we've reached our destination."

The admiral blinked as if uncertain, and Arun smiled as he glanced at the now several marines waiting behind, fear in their eyes but postures ready to spring.

"They wouldn't be enough, Admiral. Nothing would. But be at peace. If I wanted to kill you, you'd be dead. I do not."

Mahen's reaction came slow, but at least some of the fear drained from his eyes. He took his moment to weigh, and decide. "I'll wake you when we land," he said.

Arun bowed politely, then to the marines as he walked to his bunk.

He lay peacefully in the swaying of the waves, his decision made, his calm returned. He thought of his meeting with Farahi those years ago—the first time he had recognized his master, knowing deep in his heart he had chosen, and would never betray. He had committed to Farahi then.

He took the other object that mattered—the sealed metal case strapped as ever to his body, holding a stack of thin, unopened letters labeled with events and recipients—the final orders of the Sorcerer King.

Arun removed it and read the events and names again as he did every day, knowing at least one should be delivered now in the Ascom.

I still do not understand, my lord, he thought. But I will see it through, as I promised, to whatever end.

Chapter 18

"This is hopeless."

Dala pulled at the reins of her mare and raised a hand to stop the procession. Aiden stopped his own horse ahead of her and turned. His exhausted scouts and warriors drooped like old leather, and she stared and waited for him to challenge. He shrugged instead, and stepped off his horse.

They'd been pursuing one particular tribe of horsemen now for three days. Aiden had sent scouts ahead as messengers, the first of which had been chased off, the second never returned. The remnants of another abandoned camp spread before them.

"I'd say two hundred horses, maybe more. Half that many warriors," said the Arbman.

One of Aiden's most trusted retainers—an old outcast chief named Tahar, nodded, and Aiden frowned with almost hooded eyes.

Dala didn't much care. Like many in their little party she was not an expert rider. She was exhausted, in pain—and with Aiden seemingly no closer to actually catching a single nomad— feeling rather cranky.

She eased off her horse with a groan, for a moment trying to decide where to unpack her bedroll before deciding it made no difference at all. The plains or steppes here were almost entirely flat, seemingly bereft of life except mosquitoes and dry, prickly grass. They'd found one or two pitiful streams, hardly any hills or valleys, and in three days not a single tree. The wind was cold and dry. It never stopped, howling like baying wolves all day every day, sometimes knocking Dala awake from a half-dazed stupor after endless hours of riding.

For some reason she'd expected…more.

All her life there was talk of the 'fierce' raiders of the steppes—the brutal, vicious killers and their herds. Their party had crossed the border with tense, wary eyes, hands ready on bows and swords. But in all this time they'd found nothing, save the occasional ground-squirrel or bird. Of the tribesmen they found nothing at all, save eaten grass and the scattering of waste as the nomads moved on.

The party set up camp, falling into a now familiar pattern. Were it not for Juchi and Amira's company and the singing or storytelling of Egil and his daughter, Dala's mood would have been far worse. In fact she probably would have ordered Aiden and his men to abandon this fool's errand and return to Orhus, and might still if she thought he'd listen without a fuss.

"We need a new plan," Juchi said around their fire later that night. Dala gave her a sharp look, and threw the last of her soup bones into the fire.

"Go get Aiden," she sighed.

Juchi nodded and rose to fetch him. Dala watched as the big man almost cringed at the summons, but made his way to the fire. He didn't bring any of his retainers, no doubt because he didn't want them to hear him scolded.

Dala acknowledged his respectful bow. She re-filled her soup and ate in silence as Aiden grew more and more uncomfortable.

"You…wished to see me, Matriarch?"

Dala had learned the power of silence over the years. She frowned at his tone, which seemed entirely too confident, and even still waited before she answered. "The nomads don't seem interested in speaking with your men," she said after a slurp.

Aiden didn't rise to the bait, so Dala stared and continued. "Perhaps a woman would fare better. Tomorrow we will wait here and send Priestess Amira to announce you."

The First Chief's angry glare turned everywhere but to Dala. He wisely held his tongue until the feeling cooled.

"If you think that best, Matriarch," he said.

"I do. What would you like her to tell them?"

"Say I offer trade." Aiden had obviously considered this already. "Men and horses in war in return for supplies, tools, even lands to settle if they wish. Tell them the men who join me will see paradise on earth."

Amira frowned at her side, and Dala gestured for her to speak.

"With respect, First Chief, these men will not understand your offer. They think a man owns only the land he stands on. They fight to destroy rivals, or to steal horses and women, never as trade."

Aiden's expression darkened. "They steal women, Priestess?"

"Steal is the wrong word," Amira soothed. "The women go willingly. It is ritual…tradition. This is how they join new tribes and families."

Aiden's face lost the sudden violence, and he nodded as if this made perfect sense. Men, Dala thought, rolling her eyes.

"Just tell us what should be offered, Amira," she said.

The older woman bowed, then called out to the Arbman, who sat almost beside her, sparking a renewed expression of contempt from Aiden. She spoke to him in their tongue for a moment, and he responded.

"I asked why he left his people," she explained. "He said his mate and children had died, and he couldn't live the same way anymore. He said he just wanted a warm bed and a house before he died."

Aiden snorted. "Arbmen are the outcasts and weaklings of their tribes. It is not useful to ask them what stronger men want."

Dala raised a brow. "Both you and the shaman were once outcasts, were you not?"

Aiden's pupils flared, his gaze drifting dangerously close to her eyes. "Sheep fear wolves in their midst, Matriarch." He gestured at the Arbman. "Runts are different things."

Dala smiled, then gestured for the priestess to go on. "Please ask him what we should offer his people to fight for us," she said.

The ex-tribe members exchanged their words again, and the priestess shrugged. "He says we are wrong—that many would like land to settle, only they can never agree to this plainly. It is seen as…weak, surrendering to foreign ways. In any case, he says, they will never speak to you until you flatter them, give offerings, and show some respect."

"Well," Dala sat up, a bit more hopeful. "That's something. How do we show them respect, then?"

Aiden returned to his perpetual sneer. "Tell them Vol's champion and First Chief of all townsmen wishes to speak. Tell them I will fight any two of their greatest warriors—on foot against them mounted—until both men surrender. That should intrigue enough for a gathering."

Amira raised a brow but translated to the arbman. He laughed, and answered. The priestess winced but Dala gestured for her to translate.

"He says…'The open sky has addled Aiden's mind, and he will certainly die. But he is right. The tribes will gather for many days and throw a feast to watch two of their warriors fill a First Chief of the townsmen with arrows.'"

Aiden stood as if it were decided, and the Arbman withdrew. Dala, however, was less than convinced.

"The risk to you is too great, First Chief. Let us be patient and offer gifts and bring them that way."

Aiden offered an unpleasant smile. "The Godtongue would say delay is the greater risk. We have no time, and not enough horses." He paused, as if debating whether to speak, and his face hardened. "If I must wring every drop of blood from the men of ash, Matriarch, that is what I will do. War is the realm of men. I am their chief. Only Vol decides if we live or die."

Dala watched his unbowed head, his fierce gaze. His beliefs put them at odds, and in a way she wondered if it was the shaman who truly kept him from rebellion.

"Thank you, Aiden, for reminding me of the power of faith." She bowed from the waist as deeply in respect as her position allowed. "I will send Amira when the sun rises. No doubt a gathering will bring their greatmothers and crones, as well as their chiefs. If so, I shall do my part."

Aiden returned the gesture. He looked into the fire and withdrew a sword-charm from his neck, kissing it before clutching it in his fist. His open reverence for the old gods was considered almost heresy by most in the Order, and few knew the depth of Aiden's devotion. As Dala looked into his eyes, even she was taken aback at the bright-eyed fanaticism she saw. But it had to be ignored. His strength was needed now.

* * *

Amira left the next morning. She was met by the nomads before the sun peaked, and returned successfully by late afternoon.

"They will gather," she said as she dismounted, panting as steadily as her horse. "We're to approach in three days."

Dala willed herself not to gloat. Aiden nodded, having the good grace to show at least a little humility.

They waited there on the steppe in the wind, sending only the Arbman and Tahar and his scouts to bring back news of movement. The tribes were gathering, they soon reported, just as promised. The feared raiders moved in swift clusters of horses and wagons from every direction, surrounding them on every side. Dala had the distinct feeling of kicking a hornet's nest and standing still as the hornets swarmed.

"How will you make two mounted men surrender on foot?" she asked Aiden on the second day, very quietly, by his fire. "And what will happen if you fail?"

Aiden's cheek twitched, and he shifted as if withholding his strength. "Women's ways are strange to me as well, Matriarch. I do not try to understand. It is not my duty."

Dala looked for any trace of insult, but decided with some shock he intended this without offence. 'I've gutted an enemy with my own hands,' she wanted to say, 'and ordered a great deal killed.'

But this was pride, and she knew she was no warrior, so she said nothing.

Later she cornered Egil and asked him exactly what his master was thinking. The skald glanced from side to side, then his warm eyes and handsome face smiled conspiratorially, as if he prepared for an epic tale.

"Have you never heard how Aiden became chieftain of Husavik, Mistress?"

Dala shook her head and the man nodded dramatically, the perfect appearance of fresh excitement.

"The truth, skald," she interrupted, "not some exaggerated story fit for myths."

Juchi's mate of a decade scoffed, as if such a thing would never cross his mind, then bowed deeply in obeisance.

"Mighty Aiden has chosen this duel for a reason, Matriarch. He means to grow his legend. You see, my chief comes from a poor family. His matron was rich and already a grandmother when she Chose him. He accepted because she took his family from a poor farm to her servant home in Husavik. He seemed a man of little ambition at the time, if you can believe it, and served the chief there without incident or arrogance. But Aiden is not easily ignored, and his matron stoked the flames of jealousy in the town's warriors. Soon, he had been challenged and won several duels. Even the old chief they called 'Bear Arm' became afraid of him, thinking one day Aiden would call him out. Of course this is what Aiden's matron wanted, and whispered it was so. But rather than confront him honorably, Bear Arm and one of his brothers rode into the town circle as if for war. They found Aiden fetching water, as was his custom, and attacked together without a word. Aiden wore no armor, carried only a seax, and they attacked him with bows."

Dala squinted. "I said the truth skald."

Egil beamed at the reaction, his trap set. "I swear to Edda, Matriarch, and may Nanot strike me down. I have said Aiden was from a poor family. And this is true. Before Husavik—Aiden was a simple stableboy all his life."

"No!"

Egil laughed in practiced delight. "It's true, Mistress! He knows horses very well. It was he who picked the legendary Sula as a colt for his matron, later gifted to Bukayag. Now, the duel. The story is this: they say he took the lid from a nearby barrel, wielding it as a shield; it failed him once. He took one arrow to the leg and bares the scar still. They say he frightened the horses with little more than his stare and calls, Mistress, until the men were forced to dismount."

"That is ridiculous, Egil."

"No, Mistress, many saw the duel that day. Aiden frightened the horses beyond reason, until they reared and nearly bucked their riders, trying to escape. Aiden ran down the confused men. With nothing but a barrel-lid and a dagger he killed them both, until he stood alone and bloody in Husavik's circle. They say he gave no words, only taking the animals for his matron before finishing his errands. He claimed no titles and demanded no justice. But before old Volus tired, his eye drooping over the dead man's hall, the warriors had named Aiden chief."

Others in the camp were watching now, perhaps sensing with annoyance that the great skald told a tale they couldn't hear.

"Thank you, Egil." Dala smiled, feeling as ever a warmth for the man. She was pleased for Juchi and their happy family, with only the tiniest pang of jealousy. "I hope you're right, and that he can do it again."

"Oh yes, Mistress. I hope so too. But never fear. This time Aiden will not be unarmed." Here the skald smiled knowingly, as if he held some secret he wouldn't reveal.

Dala left him and tried to take some comfort in his words. She supposed she did, yet couldn't help but remind herself that this time the enemies would be the greatest warriors of the horselords. They would not fight on a township's narrow streets, where they might be trapped and run down—but the endless plain of their homeland.

And, Dala thought, we have no idea what will happen if we win.

Chapter 19

They broke camp on the third day and followed the Arbman North.

Dala had an unshakeable feeling of powerlessness. She regretted coming, and deeply considered turning away and riding home. If this little venture failed there were plenty of other things to do. Indeed, even if Ruka failed, Dala knew the dream of paradise would live, and there was still much strength in the land of ash.

Their crops were more productive than ever. The fertile ring—diminished for decades from the chiefs' mismanagement, was now almost consistent. Where they once relied almost solely on wheat, they now had ten crops or more, growing on widened land, managed wisely by the Guild. They fished further out to sea, hunting whale-sharks and a dozen other deep-sea creatures using Pyu methods. They had little threat from the raiders, who couldn't seem to unite for more than a day without killing each other.

So no matter the outcome, Dala knew, they could try again. They could capture the isles and ignore all the worries of this huge continent, so full of foreigners and foreign ways. In that moment on the steppes, the shaman's vision was starting to seem too ambitious, and unnecessary. As Dala faced the possibility of her own destruction, she wondered why she hadn't questioned it before. She stood for a long moment beneath the clouded sun.

"Ready, Matriarch?"

Juchi was mounted, hand over her eyes to block out the light. Dala smiled and mounted beside her.

At worst, she supposed, the men would be killed, and the women taken as prisoners. They might be forced by the raider's crones to choose tribesmen as mates, and this would be bad enough. But she would adapt, and overcome.

Aiden and his men were clearly on edge. No doubt they shared Dala's feeling of danger, but did not display anything near 'fear'. The First Chief's closest retainers shared his fanaticism, and often formed a ring around the man to pray. They behaved most days as if caught in a grand tale—the heroes of their own story, whose every action and word may be recorded for a thousand years. Dala expected they worried now only on giving that story a proper ending.

They rode in tense, but leisurely silence. Aiden and his men formed a screen before the others, bows strung and swords at the ready. Every bird and insect drew a wary glance. When the eye of old Volus dipped at last from Zisa's beauty, Tahar rode from the peak of a dip in the endless plains.

"The camp is ahead, lord. Many scouts between."

"Be ready," Aiden called to his men, though it was clear they already were.

Dala's heart pounded, frightened to be entering a world so dominated by men like Aiden—but ones with a code less cordial to weaker things. The raiders waited at the bottom of the hill without approaching, and Aiden squinted as he watched.

"What are they doing? Bring the arbman."

Amira and the ex-tribesman trotted beside the First Chief, and Amira spoke.

"They let us inspect them, Chief. It is considered polite."

Aiden nodded and told his men to wait, and two riders eventually approached. Their smaller horses had no saddles, the men were long-haired and bearded, squat and draped in furs. One carried a spear with something dangling from the tip. They came close enough to speak without shouting, but did not bow or nod in respect. The older man spoke a few words while looking towards the Arbman. Aiden interrupted with a growl.

"Your people would have sent men who spoke my tongue. I am Aiden Shieldbreaker, First Chief of all townsmen, and you will look to me."

The old raider smiled. His voice was soft, his accent harsh. "I speak, but bad. No want offence. I take to elders now."

He turned, and Aiden gestured for his men to follow. Dala stayed close, feeling at least somewhat more secure with many men around her.

The horsemen's camp seemed pure chaos. Horses ran wild inside and all around it, eating, defecating, fighting and playing, much like the wild-haired children. With some surprise, Dala saw, even the young boys and girls carried knives.

Women sat around tents sewing, washing, weaving and socializing, with few men to be seen. All stared as Aiden and his party approached, but reacted more with excitement and interest than anything. The few men they saw waved them onwards, straight through the chaos.

They remained mounted and clustered together, picking their way around hundreds of tents and curious children, until the chaos ended with horse bones placed like markers. A larger tent lay beyond surrounded by armed men with serious faces. No horses wandered here, as if they too understood to respect the boundaries. Aiden stopped at the edge.

"What do we do with our horses?" he said to the scout leading them. The old warrior's face scrunched.

"Let go."

The First Chief frowned and commanded several of his retainers to see to them. The party dismounted, Dala included, and the animals were tied to the nearby poles of a tent.

Their guide watched it all with great amusement and eventually spoke in his own tongue. Many of the tribesmen laughed, looking to each other with knowing smiles.

"What did he say," Dala whispered to Amira. She frowned and made sure Aiden, who ignored it, did not hear.

"He said even townsmen's horses don't know how to care for themselves."

Dala followed Aiden and his warriors beyond the border of bones. The men on both sides looked ready for violence, but every weapon stayed sheathed or strung to backs and sides. Egil and Amira stood at Aiden's side as he approached. They were met by a white-haired crone, and two men with horse-hair manes that seemed attached to their heads. The crone spoke, and Amira translated.

"This is Sagac of the Blackhoof tribe. You are welcome, but blood is never shed between the sacred bones of hallowed ground. Death and dishonor would follow."

Aiden nodded in understanding, and the two men gestured at a fire burning beside the tent.

They sat together on the grass in a circle, with the younger members further away. It was strange for men and women to sit together but Dala thought it best to match the tribesman's ways. Amira introduced Dala and Aiden and Egil, and the crone introduced the two tribesmen, Sagac being her grandson and chief, the other a renowned warrior.

They brought food and drink—horsemeat, rabbit, and an alcohol Dala didn't know and tried not to smell. They ate and spoke little, until a boy brought a clay bowl and placed it before Aiden with an awkward nod. He glanced at his hosts, and the priestess explained.

"Stallion testicles. The warriors imply you will need the strength."

Aiden smiled and lifted the bowl, chewing the testicles without expression. The horse-haired leaders looked pleased, and a few of their warriors further away whooped and hollered in excitement.

"Tell them," Aiden did not look away from the men, "whoever will fight me should also eat. I wish the contest to be fair."

Amira translated, and the warriors mouths opened with broad smiles to reveal orange-root stained teeth. The warrior came forward and lifted one, saying through the priestess that the other duelist had not yet arrived.

"Well said, Aiden Shieldbreaker," spoke Sagac through Amira. "Today is not a day for bloodshed, so be at ease. Tomorrow you will fight." Here he smiled and extended a hand towards the heavens. "Most men do not know the day they will die. What a privilege! That is our first gift. Tonight we feast. Tomorrow you are an enemy."

Aiden nodded. "Thank you, chief, for the gift. It is customary for our people to give gifts to their host. Will you accept?"

Sagac grinned with obvious pleasure, and Aiden gestured towards the horses.

"My mount is a powerful animal bred for war. He is yours. Tomorrow I will not need him."

The tribesman smiled widely and the warrior laughed, both looking pleased with the gift.

"I have also brought the finest skalds to play for you. This is Egil, herald of Bukayag, and his daughter. Do you know these names?"

The chief's smile vanished, the crone at his side blanched. They stared at Egil before the chief spoke.

"Our raiders have not crossed the Northern valley. The son of Noss promised not to return. It was agreed."

Aiden failed to conceal his pleasure at the reaction. Dala knew little of Ruka's deeds on the steppes, only that he had disappeared for a time after several raids to 'negotiate'. Thereafter, the raids diminished and nearly stopped anywhere near Orhus. She wondered now exactly what he'd done…

"He will not, be at peace. Egil's presence is a gift not a threat."

Sagac shifted and cleared his throat, still visibly disturbed. "We wish no quarrel with the golden-eyed demon. Tell the skald he is welcome, under the protection of the Blackhoof tribe. He should leave as soon as possible after the feast, but we would be honored to hear his singing."

Aiden nodded, and the warrior at last spoke, his face and tone angry after the talk of Bukayag. Amira nodded and translated. "The warrior Leqya says, before your skald sings, he would entertain you with an archery display."

"I would like that," Aiden answered tonelessly.

The squat, muscled tribesmen rose with the grace of a dancer, stalking outside the boundary towards several targets that looked like scarecrows. Everyone sat politely in silence, some children laughing and playing nearby, oblivious and ignored. Leqya mounted as easily as Dala stood from the ground, circling his animal faster and faster around the targets.

He drew his bow and snapped two arrows in a single breath, both burying deep in the straw-man's chest. He wheeled his horse and spun, three more arrows thwacking into neck and face before he sprinted away.

The other tribesmen were smiling again as they stole glances at Aiden, who seemed untroubled. Dala hid a tremble in her leg. She had never seen anything like the speed and ease of the man's attack. She had no concept of how Aiden would deal with one of them, let alone two. The First Chief nodded in respect when it was over.

"Thank you for that display. Leqya is very good at killing men made of grass."

Sagac's grin returned at the translation, and he called to the warrior, who laughed.

"We are pleased with your words and gifts, Aiden, and the excuse to gather with the Swiftbrook and Whitebones tribes, who are our cousins and brothers. As a final gift, we offer you the chance to decline tomorrow's duel without dishonor."

Dala nearly leapt to her feet and accepted on Aiden's behalf. The First Chief paused as if maybe considering, and for a moment gave her hope.

"Thank you, Chief Sagac," he said in his quiet voice. "I offer you the same."

This time, the tribesman's laugh was forced.

"Thank you, no. Until tomorrow then. Tonight we feast."

* * *

Egil sat on a rock by the fire, trying to choke down unseasoned horsemeat without offending his hosts.

They had some kind of sausage, as well, which was maybe deer or rabbit, but he was afraid it would just be more flesh stuffed in intestine, without even an attempt to spice.

He had not expected the tribesmen to fear Ruka so much, and wondered what the man had done in his months in the steppes. A few late-night visits to chiefs and elder matrons spewing fire, no doubt, and some dead champions in the dark.

The 'protection' offered likely applied to Egil's family, too, and for the first time since leaving the boundaries of his people, a safe feeling of comfort flowed through him. He looked to Juchi and his daughters chatting beside, pleased that these people mingled men and women so he could sit with them like at home.

"Are you ready to play tonight, Zaya? Though I wouldn't worry. I think now they'll be most polite."

His daughter turned, beaming, no doubt happy to be at last on one of Egil's grand adventures "Yes, Father. I'll make you proud."

He smiled back, having no doubt. She had all but mastered the lyre as early as twelve. Her memory was as good as Egil's. She could repeat most of the ancient stories word for word, needing only practice to master the rest. She had walked early and talked early, helped with her sisters and the house, always patient and diligent and wise. But Egil's head and life was filled with tragic tales, and he hoped the loss of her twin in infancy would spare her some inevitable fall.

He looked around the fire and noticed Aiden spoke little to the men. His retainers chewed in silence, the tribesmen the same. In fact the First Chief seemed to ignore them, using a knife to dig into a rounded stone, as if carving a hollow in boredom.

"Yes. I knew Priestess Kunla well."

Egil tensed as he saw Dala with the crone. She sat with several older women who must have been the tribes version of elder matrons. Amira translated, though it seemed the old women spoke many of Dala's words.

"Grey witch, we called her," said the crone. "Only one of yours mad enough to preach to the tribes. She was strong, and rode well."

The other women nodded, and Dala's face seemed far away.

"She was my teacher, but died years ago."

The tribeswomen nodded.

"Children?"

"No. The…witches of her time had none."

The crone shook her head and spit orange root. "No children, no future," she said, as if repeating an ancient saying.

Dala's face lost expression, and she looked away. The moment grew awkward, so Egil set down his bowl and stood.

"Time to play," he winked to Zaya, "I'll call you after a song or two."

He hid his limp and walked tall towards the fire, humming a tune before looking to the gathering as if he'd only noticed them. He'd have preferred to sit but the blasted tribesmen had no chairs, so he kept to his feet and strummed his lyre. From the first note, the men took notice.

Egil had heard the horsemen's musicians before. They had a simpler instrument with only two strings, and their singing was throaty and almost monotone, hypnotic in its way, but less expressive. Egil knew he could ease through the night with a lesser performance, but when it came to music, it was not his way. He started with an old tale of Haki the Brave, which was quite difficult, and rarely played by any except a master of his trade.

The speed was fast and captured attention. The tone was light and some of the tribesmen even danced, which no son of Imler would do. They cheered and whistled when he finished, then he extended a hand for Zaya to join him.

No songs for both men and women existed in the Ascom, but Egil had adapted some. Tonight for the first time they would sing two songs together—two gods shared by the tribesmen, Volus the Everbright, and Zisa the Beautiful. They had practiced their parts separately but never together, and Egil felt his own heart swell to watch his daughter play. She looked very serious and forlorn, untouchable and sad. It was exactly right. Their voices merged well as always, Egil's dark and deep, hers light and full.

When they'd finished Egil was surprised to find many tribesmen in tears. Aiden and his men looked on in astonishment, clearly uncomfortable, maybe even ashamed. A fierce-looking horseman spoke over his own blubbering, wiping at his nose. Amira translated though Egil had understood.

"He asks if you have any songs about horses."

Egil put a pensive hand to his chin to cover his amusement. As a lifelong skald he knew the answer to every such question was 'yes', and searched his mind for something to adapt. He smiled and perhaps the man's unhidden emotion affected him, for he thought of Sula. He glanced at Zaya and shrugged.

"Just try to follow." Then, to the tribesmen: "Yes of course, I know one. I have ridden many fine horses, but only one fit for a hero of old."

The murderous raiders gathered like children, enthralled without a shred of concern for the eyes upon them. Egil sang of Sula, the great warhorse, who he had ridden in the darkest days of his life. The animal had been his only comfort and companion save for the broken boy who would become his master. He rose the song up and down with the lyrics, telling of the journey across the sea to paradise. He sang of Sula the Bold, who bore his master against an island god, killed three men with a spear through his chest, and whose master wept at his death.

When he was finished the tribesmen cried openly, as if they'd lost their mothers. Some stomped and cheered and even embraced, or walked out to the fields perhaps to their own horses. Egil bowed and took his seat again, no longer afraid of violence starting in the feast.

Some of the tribesmen came to sit with him, including one of the warriors to fight Aiden, still wiping a wrist across his eyes.

"It must have been a great man to have ridden such an animal," he said. Egil smiled.

"It was the shaman, Bukayag, who rode him. But it was Aiden who gifted the animal to my master."

The warrior's eyes widened at this, and he glared at Aiden with a wary sniffle before he left with a respectful nod. Later Egil sat with Aiden and Chief Sagac, who both looked frustrated to speak through the Arbman until Amira joined them. The chief gestured at Egil as he spoke.

"What sort of men don't weep at the tale of such an animal? The salt in men's tears are a blessing to the earth, and Kisagri. You should have wept."

"Who is Kisagri?" Aiden frowned.

Priestess Amira cringed and began to explain, but the chief seemed to understand Aiden's words and nearly shouted in alarm.

"You don't know Kisagri?" his anger dissolved into a laugh. "You claim the gods' favor yet don't even know the lord of horses? The god of sky and storm?"

Aiden paused and seemed to consider his words. "I am a simple warrior," he said. "Vol is my lord. I claim no favor but His."

Sagac shook his head, as if at a wretched fool. "Ahh, I liked you, Aiden Shieldbreaker. But Vol is a lesser god in the heavens. Tomorrow you will wish wise men had told you of Kisagri and his four-legged favored sons. You will certainly die."

Egil cringed, and Aiden's expression became dangerous, though few but his lifelong companions would know. He spoke slowly, as if struggling to speak. "Words are wind. Endless and tiring, like your god's domain. Tomorrow our deeds will prove the truth."

The Blackhoof chief smiled and seemed not to notice his guest's ire. "Yes, I suppose they will."

Most of the men were watching and few spoke now. Zaya whispered in Egil's ear. "Should we play something else, Father?"

Egil glanced at the men and whispered in return. "The final skill of the skald, daughter. Know when to run."

He took her hand and walked back to collect his family, leading them towards their tent. They would share it with Amira, but Egil didn't mind. He lay down in the darkness with his Matron and his daughters beside him, taking all in his arms.

Tomorrow, he knew, Aiden may very well die. If he did then perhaps every member of his camp would die. But not Egil, and not his family.

Yet again they were safe in the glow of Ruka's fire, the thought as strange as it was every time it became reality. Ruka was a monster, perhaps—yes, Egil had not forgotten. If the gifted boy had been crafted by Noss to devour men's lives, Egil would not be shocked.

And yet…

Ruka had not been consumed by darkness. He had transformed it into something greater, as he had transformed the land of ash. What remained was not good, nor evil, though it contained the seeds of both. Egil had no word for this thing. He had only music. Two singers would be best, he decided, one low and one high, he struggled with the notes as he drifted to sleep.

Chapter 20

"Where is your great First Chief, skald? The sun rises."

Egil grimaced and leaned heavily on his walking stick. His feet hurt from the night before, and his back from the rough patch of ground he'd slept on. He stood near the women by the circle of bones that marked the duel. The tribesmen stood mostly alone, many of them painted and displaying knives and throwing spears.

The mood was very different this morning. None of the men smiled, or even talked. The wild-haired children still ran in excited circles around the grounds, with an occasional click or tut from nearby women. Most everyone in the camp seemed awake, except Aiden.

Egil tried not to look concerned. He knew pieces of the language, but asked Amira a question or two before he spoke loudly on his own. "Aiden prays to Vol and Volus, Chief, whose eye is not yet fully risen. He will come when it's time."

A few men snorted. Chief Sagac called with a disrespectful tone.

"Were I him, I'd pray too."

Egil knew both Aiden and Ruka would have challenged this with words. But since neither are bloody here, he thought irritably, it's left to poor old Egil.

"Perhaps you should," he answered harshly, "you've still a bit of time."

The chief's men stopped grinning, and one of Aiden's duelists spit as he walked to his horse, checking its mouth, hooves and eyes. Egil wondered when the hell he'd become the sort of man who matched boasts with chiefs and murderous raiders.

"Bloody Ruka," he muttered, sitting on a flat stone covered in charcoal drawings. When he'd woke he'd been wondering why the hell the 'Godtongue' wasn't here. Surely the islanders could build a damn wall without him. Egil squinted and looked at the clear sky, noting the almost windless air. Was that a good thing? Did it benefit Aiden? Egil cursed. He was no warrior, and had no idea.

He glanced at Dala sitting not far away but she seemed completely unconcerned. Juchi sat beside her, chatting away as if ready for morning chores. Zaya came and squatted in the grass beside, so he put on a brave face.

"So," he gestured to the two warriors, "which one do you think Aiden will take first?"

Her brow arched in genuine alarm. "Don't curse his luck, Father!" She glanced at the still darkened tent, her fingers twining. "I don't see how a man on foot can catch two on horseback, let alone make them surrender."

Egil shrugged as if the answer were obvious. In fact, he had no conception. The story of Aiden's duel was almost entirely fabricated—as nearly every story of violence was. He inspected the warrior the chief had been waiting for, and found another wild-haired, face-scarred murderer of men, his shoulders broad, his manner arrogant. Egil sighed and prepared to invent some kind of nonsense when Zaya gasped at his side.

Knowing what he would see, Egil turned, and grinned.

Aiden had at last emerged. The First Chief wore a full suit of Ruka's rune-armor. His now famous breastplate was just one of many plates covering his body. His shoulders, back, arms and legs held the same sheer metal, all surrounded by tight-knit iron mail. As he stepped from the flap of his tent, Egil saw even his feet, neck and hands were encased, and he carried a helm that looked as if it might cover the entirety of his head.

His armor glowed with a blue tinge in the light, polished and spotless, the runes obvious from a distance. He turned his face to the sun and breathed with utter calm, as if he'd forgotten what day it was, and that a duel to the death was to follow.

The tribesmen, more than any, stared. Aiden walked past the gawking horsemen to the circle of bone, straight past Chief Sagac and his chosen warriors without a word—past the horse's skull into the dueling grounds. In his gentle voice he spoke, and Egil craned to hear with everyone else.

"Swear loyalty to me now, brothers, and I will accept you without dishonor."

The men's faces tightened. They turned their horses and rode swiftly across the field as they lifted their bows. The first circled East, the other North, until they stood as a V with Aiden at the point. The First Chief remained in the 'corner' of the field, near the horse-bones, so they could not encircle him.

No horn or call began the duel. Sagac's man simply loosed an arrow with the barest flick of his arms, and the missile soared true as it had the day before. It deflected off Aiden's shield. The other duelist released two more in quick succession, the first sticking in the grass at Aiden's feet, the other snapping as it struck the metal covering his shin.

Aiden hardly reacted. With his free hand he took a strip of leather from his waist and fiddled with a pouch before he let it hang from his hand. He extended his arm as two more arrows struck him, and not until the leather was spinning in a circle did Egil realize it was a sling.

A strange, whistling came from the weapon—and from Aiden too. He hurled a rock or maybe a bullet, which wailed like a grieving woman across the field, passing harmlessly over one of his enemy's horses.

"What in God's name," Dala muttered.

More arrows bounced and clattered off of Aiden's armor and shield. The tribesmen advanced, loosing missiles at his head and neck, trying to find a weak spot or to strike his face or eyes inside the helm.

Aiden did not move to defend himself. He carried on whistling, sometimes almost barking, shouting or hissing like a snake. He took stone after stone casually from his pocket, launching them wailing through the air. One or two bounced from the flanks of his enemy's animals. The riders ducked or flinched but otherwise ignored the attempts, which seemed to cause little damage. Their horses did not.

The animals' ears had gone flat at the first rock. As Aiden came forward even a step they tried to pull away. Their riders controlled them with expert thighs and continued loosing arrows, and the strange contest of bow and sling went on. Finally Aiden struck a horse hard in the side with a howling stone. It cried out, and bolted.

The howl of Aiden's sling continued, round and round until the stones flung quick as arrows, another bouncing off the head of an animal. It reared, and Aiden charged with a scream. The famed, enduring breed of the raiders went wild, bucked its saddleless rider, then bolted in terror.

The First Chief advanced on the fallen man, who rose with a short wooden spear and a bone knife from his hip. Aiden closed without a weapon, his shield dangling at his side.

The raider charged, swerving expertly as he jabbed his spear high. Aiden seized the shaft with a mailed fist. His opponent pulled then released and leapt with the knife. Aiden met it with his shield, knocking the smaller man to the ground with a sound that carried far from the field.

Sagac's man had recovered and raced in a circle around the duel, loosing arrow after arrow to clang and bounce off Aiden's armor. The First Chief ignored him, seizing his fallen foe by his long hair, lifting him up to shatter his face with a bone-crunching strike of his iron hand.

Arrow after arrow clattered off his iron body. Aiden dropped to a knee as if wounded, and the raider shrieked as he kept shooting. Aiden put a hand over his face, lifted his enemy's spear from the grass, then in one swift motion, tossed it true, straight into the neck of the duelist's horse.

The animal shrieked and fled before it fell. Its rider rose with his own spear snapped, tossing it aside as he came on with a stolen townsman's iron sword. Aiden tossed his shield and drew his own blade.

They seemed only for a moment to match thrusts and parry. Aiden hacked at his opponent's weapon, blow after blow until the sword flew from the raider's hand.

The Blackhoof tried to draw a knife from his belt, but Aiden stomped an iron boot to his shin. The crack made every watcher wince as the bone snapped, and the rider screamed and fell.

Aiden stood in the silence save for the groans of his enemies, as if listening to the praise of his gods.

Chief Sagac shifted on his stone, face red and right hand clenched on a knife. He called out across the field in the language of the towns. "You have lost. You said they'd surrender, but both will die first. No matter what you do, First Chief, you lose!"

Aiden blinked as if disturbed from reverie. He knelt to his broken foe, slapping away fumbling hands to strike with that same, terrible metal fist. He seized the man's hair, pulled him to his comrade, then dragged both brutally across the grass. When he reached the boundaries of the dueling grounds, he threw both unconscious bodies over the skull, and lifted his visor.

"They surrender," he said, then closed the iron like a gate.

* * *

That night, Egil expected Aiden to be honored by the tribes, or swarmed and killed in revenge.

Chief Sagac seemed ready for the latter. He paced across holy ground with his bone knife gripped in white fingers, muttering in his tongue. But he spoke with his crones and great-mothers, who had calmed him, until at last he nodded with respect.

"The day is yours, Aiden Shieldbreaker. We will smoke the dream weed, and drink with the warriors. I will invite the other tribes. We will at least listen to your words."

Still, the mood remained tense. Aiden sat fully armed outside his tent, speaking little as his men played games with stones, pretending not to watch the tribesmen. Their horses were kept nearby and saddled.

"Should we try to run?" Juchi asked him when they were alone. Egil shook his head.

"They won't hurt us. Not with Ruka's protection."

Juchi packed some of their things, stuffing clothes together in ruffled clumps with uncharacteristic gruffness. "And if in their anger and bloodlust they forget this fact, or change their minds?"

"Then we die with the daughters we shouldn't have brought here," Egil felt his voice raise and regretted the words instantly. He saw the self-loathing already burning in his matron's eyes and changed his tone. "I'm sorry, my love. They won't hurt us. I have seen men on the edge of violence all my life. I know when to run. It isn't now. Not for us." He took her in his arms, and she tried to say she was sorry but he hushed her. "I'm glad you're here with me. That's the truth."

Volus' eye moved very slowly as they waited. Egil's daughters returned with clay bowls of wild berries and dried meat, anxiety plain on their faces. The family ate in silence, sitting close together in the fading light as shadows danced on the walls of their tent. The tribesmen lit fires with horse manure, having little wood, no oil or candles. The moon was dark, the eerie, flickering light making Egil stare as he thought he saw movement. He jumped as the tent flaps opened.

A tribesman with ash painted over his face jabbed his head inside like a spear. Juchi and her daughters drew seaxes hidden beneath blankets.

"You are summoned," said the tribesman gruffly. "Men only."

Egil rose before his matron could protest. He bent and kissed her cheek and took his favorite cane, smiling widely for his family.

"No chief kills a skald at a gathering. Don't worry." He searched for his lyre, until Zaya handed it to him.

"Be careful, Father."

He touched her face, and squeezed her hand. With a last glance at Juchi, he walked out into the night.

The painted tribesman waited outside. He was mostly-naked, his whole body smeared in patterns of ash. He grunted and marched Egil at an uncomfortable pace to the largest fire, straight to the chief's tent.

"Leave boots, clothes," he said, and Egil froze.

His body carried the marks of Ruka's torture. It had taken a long time to be comfortable even with Juchi and his children seeing. In all the time since that terrible night, he had never once shown them to a stranger.

"Boots, clothes, I am cold, hurry up!"

Egil felt sweat on his body as he took deep, ragged breaths. He knew there was no choice—that to refuse was to cause great insult, and the he could not go inside with his clothes when the other men were naked. He dropped his cane and forced his hands to peel away the cloth. The tribesman stared—eyes roaming the scars on Egil's chest, and his remaining toes.

"No wounds on back," he said, as if with approval, then turned inside without another word. Egil released a long held breath and almost laughed before he followed.

Smoke and heat assaulted him, and not just the smoke of a fire. Men surrounded a small fire covered in rocks over a clay bowl. Most of the gathering smoked pipes, others snuffing from bags and boxes, others tilting skins to purple lips. All were stripped and red-eyed.

Egil found Aiden in the haze, his size unmistakable, and sat. Tahar looked as if he had combined every pleasure, eyes rolling as he blinked to stay awake. Egil flinched in surprise as he found saggy, wrinkled breasts, realizing an old woman sat next to the chief of the Blackhoof. No one spoke much.

"Welcome," Aiden said without slurring. "We needed a translator. The tribesmen will not let the Arbmen in the holy tent. They say he is dishonored and not fit for holy ground. Why this woman is here I have no idea. She doesn't speak our words. Ask them. Her presence disturbs me."

Egil obeyed, and the old woman spoke for herself.

"My womb is long dried, what of it. Tell your chief if he were not a guest and this not holy ground I'd put an arrow in his eye in answer."

Aiden laughed loudly at the translation, which Egil found strange. It was clear even the big man was affected by the smoke.

"Tell her my eyes are hard targets."

The tribesmen laughed at the translation, but it had an edge. Egil noticed neither of the warriors were here, and wondered if they had been too injured to join. Perhaps by losing they had been shamed or even outcast.

The pipes and skins continued around the room, but went past Egil, apparently forbidden to non-blooded warriors. He did his best to keep up and make out the words, which seemed at any rate unimportant and about anything except the reason they'd come.

Aiden seemed relaxed. As the night wore on, so did Chief Sagac. They worked to find points of agreement: violence was a man's domain, Aiden argued, just as honor and responsibility for providing. 'With a few exceptions,' he accepted, a faint smile and nod to the old woman. They avoided discussing the gods. Aiden told them of ships and the new world and hunting whales, which they seemed to enjoy. Egil enhanced the stories here and there. The men drank and smoked and just by sitting near them Egil knew he was affected too, a pleasant warmth spreading down his face and spine. At last the chief came to a point.

"You are a great warrior," he said, growing serious. "I did not take you seriously. Honor demands I listen, so say what you came to say."

Aiden licked his lips and wiped at his eyes, but sniffed and spoke clearly.

"I offer kinship. Land, glory, and wealth to any man who will fight."

Egil translated, then noticed with some annoyance Tahar could hardly sit straight. Many of the tribesmen too looked beyond reason, their blinking faces slackened with excess. He wondered what sort of bargains they could truly make so affected, but held his tongue.

He translated the polite questions and Aiden's intense answers, and as he did he felt Sagac's smile wore thin. The chief seemed disinterested, like a man hearing a merchant's bargain out of politeness. Egil frowned, wondering how to convey this to his chief.

"Let us breathe some fresh air for a moment, lord. To clear our heads."

The First Chief frowned in the smoke, as if insulted.

"I am fine, skald, convey my words."

So they talked on with little progress. Egil struggled to understand everything said, then flinched and did his best to catch Tahar as the man fell forward as if struck with a club.

"Damned fool!" he shouted, then looked to Aiden. "A moment outside, lord. Please. This is fruitless."

The First Chief met his gaze, almost furious, blinking over and over. A few grunts came from just outside the tent, and Egil realized a flap had been cut away. Shadows were moving in the silhouette of the fire. One or two of Aiden's retainers turned just as men emerged.

"No blood!" screamed the old woman, her huge pupils frantic with fear. "You will curse us all! No blood!"

Aiden tried to rise. Egil felt frozen in place, legs watery, arms filled with the weight of Tahar. The tent seemed to come apart, the flap and sides ripping open as tribesmen rushed from every direction. Three were grabbing Aiden's shoulders and arms, others looping horse-hair rope around him. He thrashed as a coil tightened around his neck.

He roared but it was clear he'd been weakened by the drink and the smoke. He gasped and fought, striking one man's face with a massive fist, blood spraying the tent wall. As it did the old woman screamed, a wretched wail that pierced the night and repeated on and on like a dying animal.

The men didn't stop at the sight, and were very strong. At least three held Aiden as two more choked his body. His face turned blue and he stopped struggling until urine leaked down his leg. Egil watched it all and did nothing.

"Take him from this holy place," said Chief Sagac with a sneer. "Cut him to pieces and leave him for Kisagri's birds. Kill all his men."

Egil heard the other men being strangled. He sat perfectly still as the Blackhoof looked to him, wrapping a length of rope around his forearm.

"Quit your trembling. You live, skald. Go to your townsmen and tell them we will never be kin. To dishonor us or the lord of horses is to die. And tell Bukayag, we have spared you and your women because we wish no quarrel with the mountain god. If he comes for us, the raids will continue, nevermind his gifts."

Egil nodded weakly, then failed to stand. A wheeze of terror escaped his throat as one of the men grabbed him. But they only helped him to his feet, then out into the cool night air.

He walked back to his tent in a daze, feeling the tears streak down his face. The great chief, and Egil's friend, had died in treachery, and Egil had done nothing. In the long walk he felt again the coward he once was, the useless thing worried only for his own life.

"What's wrong?" Juchi and her daughters sprung up to meet him as he entered. Their faces paled when they saw him, drawing weapons as they felt him for wounds with their hands and looked outside. Egil noticed he still wore no clothes, and had forgotten his cane.

No blood, he thought, over and over, as he looked at himself. There's no blood.

"Aiden is dead," he said. "They're all dead. We have to leave."

Chapter 21

They woke Dala from a dream of paradise. The summer sun never faded there, and even the sea was warm. It wasn't clear as Ruka once described, for Dala found she could not picture this. But warm was enough.

"We have to go, sister. Please hurry. Right now."

Juchi's face was puffed as if from crying, and she gathered Dala's things with the practiced speed of a mother.

Dala knew instantly that Aiden was dead.

They gathered their supplies and left the tents, finding tribesmen waited outside. Their faces and uncovered bodies were smeared with ash, their bows strung and hanging from their backs. They watched, and followed, but did nothing.

Some few sounds of fighting came from other tents. Juchi, her daughters, and Priestess Amira moved together, sometimes holding each other as if at any moment they might fall. They went to the horses and found Egil riding one with another for each of them.

"The tribesmen have claimed the rest," he said. "Don't look at the men. Don't speak to them. Follow me."

Dala obeyed, keeping her eyes on the dirt and then on the back of the animal's mane. They rode from the camp to the dark without knowing which direction, until the fires of the tribesmen's camp disappeared, and they were alone in the depth of the night.

The sound of soft weeping came, maybe from Juchi's daughter. It helped wake Dala from her stupor. She squinted and rode ahead beside Egil, and it occurred to her that all their guides were dead.

"We should camp here," she whispered. "Riding in the dark is dangerous and we don't know where we're going. We're far enough. We can go again with the light."

Egil's voice was dull and lifeless. "Yes, Mistress."

He and his family dismounted without another word, and Dala and Amira, Juchi and her mate and children all lay down together like a family, their bedrolls unfurled, their horses untied, and slept till morning.

Light helped a little. They ate salted venison and sour berries, and Egil at least seemed to know where he was going. They started riding—hopefully—towards Orhus, and Dala was glad for the time to sit and think.

After a stretch of silence to let the others gather, she looked to Egil.

"Aiden's death cannot reach Orhus."

The family exchanged glances. Dala realized she was getting angry about the entire mess and tried to fight it down.

"This is why the Order fears kings," she said bitterly. "Every great chief will now covet the title of First Chief, though none are eminent enough to deserve it. We'll have a quiet war. Hundreds and maybe thousands of men will die in duels, skirmishes and raids, and for what? Just as we need them most."

"Aiden is dead," Egil said, his voice bitter. "I watched him die, Mistress. This is true whether word reaches Orhus or not."

"It's true when I say it is and not before," Dala snapped. "Bolster your spine, skald. All of you. Our people need us now. So does your shaman." She took a breath. "I will tell the chiefs Aiden and his men remain in the steppes—to gather more tribes to his banner. He commands the chiefs to send a first wave of reinforcements to paradise. He and the raiders will come after."

Dala watched Egil's eyes and saw he understood. He half-bowed. So did Juchi and the rest.

Good, she thought, at least that's dealt with.

She forced her mind past the ships, past the chaos to follow and even the war after that. Perhaps she and Ruka could crown the new First Chief together. With her authority and his…intimidation, the chiefs would accept such an appointment. For now that would serve.

When Dala died another Matriarch would simply take her place—that was the wisdom of the Order. One day Ruka too would need a replacement, despite stupidly naming himself 'The Last Runeshaman'. Nevermind, Dala could change the name. 'Word of Nanot', perhaps. Well. There was time, and she'd come up with something.

Bloody men and their arrogance, she thought, always 'the last', or 'the greatest', or 'the best'!

She shook her head, accepting them, even loving them and their strange and often courageous ways. As her Order had done for centuries she would yoke their strength—might given by Nanot to break the hard edges of the world. For it was the men of ash who would clear the path to paradise, and why god in her wisdom had made two sexes and bound them together. With their combined efforts, they would survive, as they had survived so many winters in the Ascom, sickness and drought, floods and fires. They would survive this, too.

She thought of Kunla's lessons as she rode. Keep high in the saddle, girl, a priestess doesn't slouch.

With a smile she thanked the old crones for reminding her of her mentor, a strong woman despite her flaws. Dala straightened and rode high in the saddle, moving to the lead.

"I would like to reach Orhus in two days," she said with a sharp, but tolerant tone. The others stiffened at the sound, but Dala had learned command required both iron and silk. She turned to them and softened. "I know this is hard," she met each pair of eyes, face reflecting her sympathy. "We have lost a great hero. But paradise is bigger than any man. The future still belongs to us, and there is much yet to do."

* * *

For the second time in forty years, Admiral Cahill Mahen watched the coastline of a foreign land. His first had been the great continent, standing at his father's side on the deck of a merchant catamaran, following land that stretched forever. It had been a wondrous moment, the pure excitement of a growing boy.

But Mahen's father was long dead. There was no comfort this time in another's authority and knowledge. Mahen stood alone, responsible, watching a horizon of grey that grew until the safety of blue sea vanished in both directions.

So, he thought—though in his heart he had known—all the whispers are true.

Far to the South was no small island or spot of dirt left uncharted on Pyu maps. Somehow the great sailors before him had never found it. Far beneath the stars of known constellations, there was a new world, if you just sailed far enough.

"Unload the oars," he shouted. "Shrink the sails by half."

"Ka, sir," yelled his captain, then down the line.

As they came closer, Mahen realized the banks at the mouth of the harbor were man-made. He nodded appreciatively at the construction, then nearly gasped when he saw the docks. A city bustled beyond with sea-life and great numbers of people, which was shocking enough, but the harbor…the harbor might as well have been on Sri Kon.

Floating docks swayed in the gentle tide; huge wharfs lay empty, ready with dockhands and transports; markers with colors from red to green directed sea lanes. For all the bloody world, down to the colors, it was as if Mahen approached a Pyu city.

At least a hundred of the same ships he'd sunk outside Sri Kon were moored on the beach. Fishing vessels dotted the shallow waters of the coast, some larger ships far enough out the sailors saw Mahen's fleet and scrambled away.

None seemed like warships. But Mahen was a navy son going back two hundred years, and his instincts told him to be wary.

"Stay in formation," he called to his captain. "We'll drop anchor here and send a few transports."

The promising young sailor nodded and yelled to the men, then rampaged amongst them gathering a crew to sail ashore. Mahen flinched as Eka appeared as if by sorcery at his side.

"You should come with the landing party, Admiral. We will have to meet with their chiefs and elders, and they will want the man in charge."

"If you think that wise, Master Eka."

The assassin half-bowed, and Mahen went to his cabin. He gathered a few knives he hid in the sleeves of his formal uniform before easing himself to the away-ship. Eka sat beside him, smiling pleasantly, and the men rowed them ashore. Their speed was abysmal, distracted as they were with gawking at the coastline, but since Mahen was too he said nothing.

By the time they'd arrived, a small party waited on the red-marked dock that in Pyu meant 'foreign vessels'. Usually only locals would ever know this, but as it was often the only dock left empty, important visitors acted as expected.

Eka looked on the waiting party, and his smile widened. He leapt out first as expertly as any sailor, Mahen following more slowly and with a groan that reflected the pain of old joints. He was surprised when he heard Eka speaking a guttural tongue that must have been foreign words, but pretended not to be as he stepped beside.

"Loa, honored guest," said a black-bearded giant in Pyu common. He had a polished silver cane, and wore heavy cloth beneath what looked like animal fur. Mahen would have thought him a warrior were it not for the other man at his side—a head taller, shorn hair and an unkempt beard, grim eyes and a huge sword strapped to his back.

"I am called Egil," said black-beard, then with hesitation, "I am an…ambassador of the men of ash. This man is Folvar, an important chief, who will help deal with all things practical. I will now introduce you to Dala, a holy woman and important priestess in these lands. Please don't touch her or meet her eyes for more than a moment. This would be thought disrespectful."

Mahen lowered his eyes, feeling awkward. In his brief moment of inspection, the woman seemed entirely too young to be important, and too beautiful to be a priestess. But Mahen could certainly accept her as holy. Her eyes and hair were near as pale as her white skin and robes. Only a vicious red scar on her cheek distracted from his imagining her a good spirit made flesh. She spoke in her foreign tongue with a strong and pleasant voice, and Egil translated.

"Matriarch Dala is happy you've arrived safely, Admiral. She says it would be customary to hold a feast in your honor, but war requires haste and sacrifice. We are almost ready to depart."

Mahen was no stranger to meeting with kings and princes, but he had no conception of what to say to a barbarian priestess.

"Thank her for the thought. I am happy to re-supply and sail as soon as possible. Does she know how many passengers?"

'Egil' smiled politely but did not speak to the matriarch before answering. "Chief Folvar will handle all practicalities when Matriarch Dala is satisfied."

The priestess spoke, and Egil bowed.

"She would like you to walk with her, Admiral."

"I am at the lady's service," he said.

Together they walked down the dock, Mahen distracting himself from the awkwardness by inspecting the harbor. He decided with surprise that even the lumber they used was from Bekthano. And in fact it seemed they had even built their warehouses and maybe houses using it.

Very slowly, and quite awhile later, he began to wonder if indeed it was Bekthano lumber at all.

Eka, Egil, and Dala spoke in the barbarian tongue as Mahen walked silently alongside. He found his eyes drawn to the women in particular, who were very tall and pale and beautiful, with hair and eyes in many colors. Often he turned in confusion when he thought he saw the same person twice, and many of the children in particular looked almost the same.

The people stared at him, too. Some of the men pointed at the ships and carried boys on their shoulders, wide smiles on many faces. Like all the other men of ash he had seen, these were bearded giants. Most looked young. In fact nearly everyone Mahen saw looked young, and he decided he might be the oldest man on the beach.

At last they entered a big, almost round building with smoke rising from two chimneys. It had a roof thatched with maybe grass, and a fence around it covered in wooden spikes. The city seemed made by two different peoples— a huge distinction between older buildings in rings, and newer ones in lines. In both cases, it was all very dirty and vaguely uncivilized to Mahen.

Several of the giant warriors sat at a round table in the hall, as many women clustered together on the other side. Children and dogs played everywhere. As Mahen and the others entered all activity ceased, and they took Mahen and Eka to the table and seated them with the men, Dala with the women.

"This is Chief Folvar's hall," Egil explained. "He is responsible for this town and everything in it on behalf of Aiden, First Chief of the Ascom. He has been to paradise but does not speak your tongue well."

Mahen nodded, unsure what he was supposed to say. Eka spoke first in their tongue, then translated for Mahen. "I told them you were the man in charge of the fleet, as well as the attack outside Sri Kon."

Mahen nearly choked on his spit.

"Why the hell should you tell him that?" He glanced at the warriors, thinking how ridiculous the knives in his sleeves were and what a stupid old man he was for getting off his ship. The chief nodded to him and spoke without a trace of humor. Egil translated.

"Folvar says he was there on the beach. He says you killed many men and sunk many ships that day. He congratulates you."

The other men seemed to look at him with approval, and Mahen took a bit of a comforting breath. This sentiment, at least, he understood—he too respected competent men of war, even if they were enemies.

"Thank him, Egil. Tell him I was very glad not to have had to fight him and the men of ash on the beach."

Egil did, and Folvar smiled with wretched teeth before he spoke again.

"The chief asks if you can use that same skill at sea to take his men and horses to the continent, though the storm season fast approaches."

"Tell him there is no more capable fleet on the sea." Mahen shrugged. "If Roa swims, we'll pray together."

Again Folvar smiled at the translation. Dala's voice cut in from the other side of the table.

"The matriarch asks 'what gods do you worship?'"

Mahen noticed Eka's twitch of disapproval, but saw no escape.

"My people worship no gods, my lady. We believe gods like Roa, the god of the sea, created the world, but that they are careless with it and cruel. We worship the Enlightened, a great man of peace, and the good spirits that live in all things."

Something akin to contempt touched the beautiful face, and she spoke again.

"Dala asks if you have a…wife, and children, Admiral."

"Yes. Two wives, five children, and twelve grandchildren."

Egil frowned and paused as if to choose his words before he translated. Again the matriarch's face showed displeasure, and she spoke at some length to a slightly older woman at her side. Egil cleared his throat before he translated.

"Priestess Amira," he gestured, "would like to claim you as a mate while you are here. She says she is curious about a man who…has been chosen by two women. She says you are both old and your wives are across the sea, so why not."

Mahen stared, knowing he had failed utterly to hide his shock. He glanced at Priestess Amira, who he thought quite attractive and under no circumstance 'old'. He turned to Eka in helpless confusion. The assassin shrugged.

"To refuse is likely an insult, Admiral. Most everything is with these people."

"I…" Mahen felt his face reddening. "We don't…we are not married. Please tell her…I mean no offence. Honorable citizens… old men are not requested to…mate, in this way. Amongst my people."

Folvar looked bored at the exchange, and spoke to the matriarch, who waved him away. Egil smiled and translated.

"Congratulations, Admiral. The matriarch has approved. You may leave and take the men of ash on your ships tomorrow."

Mahen felt a chill at the way Egil said he'd been 'approved' of. The matriarch spoke again, and the eyes of nearly every barbarian in the room widened or flicked towards her. Egil spoke to her again at some length before she seemed to cut him off and gesture towards Mahen.

"Matriarch Dala," Egil said with obvious concern, "says it is time for her to go to the new world. She says you need not concern yourself with 'Roa swimming', because God will protect her until her task is complete."

Mahen nodded helplessly, annoyed at the prospect of having an important woman on a ship full of sailors. "She is of course welcome, but the waters between our lands are dangerous. I recommend against it."

Egil did not translate. Dala spoke, and he nodded, but did not translate that either. Mahen cleared his throat.

"Well. If that's all. I'll join the chief outside. There's much to do."

The priestess seemed to nod her assent, and Mahen pulled back his chair. Eka's silence and the tapping of Egil's silver cane followed him outside. He closed the doors, and they stood outside for a moment exchanging a look Mahen recognized. He had often enjoyed the same with other lesser men of state, awaiting their fate outside Farahi's palace. The solution was no doubt the same.

"Smoke?" He withdrew three thin cigars from his pocket, lighting them on an oil candle burning beside. Both men smiled politely and accepted. They smoked in silence, long enough Mahen felt his nerves steadying before Eka broke it.

"You needn't worry about the matriarch's scrutiny, Admiral. She didn't like your bumbling or your faith. She'll go with the chief's ships."

Egil nodded in agreement, and blew a ring of smoke as he finished the cigar. He pat Mahen on the shoulder, his manner now quite convivial. "You should have lain with the Priestess, islander. I find it helps."

The 'ambassador' walked off with Eka behind him, and Mahen followed after a few steps. His frown deepened as he considered the words.

"Helps with what?"

* * *

For three days, Mahen was submerged in barbarian chaos. He discovered there was no central authority which would supply his ships, nor even launch the barbarian's. They did not have enough crew, nor did they seem to know how many supplies were required, or who would provide them.

With the help of Egil, Priestess Amira and Eka, Mahen had to negotiate and bargain with different 'chiefs' and merchants for everything. Many of these merchants were women, whom Mahen was not supposed to offend or particularly look at. Negotiation and translation filled his days with endless confusion, banality and frustration. All costs were to be documented and sent to the Matriarch, for it was apparently her and other powerful women who truly paid.

On the evening of the fourth day, Mahen abandoned an attempt to buy extra rope in frustration, deciding they were ready enough.

"You people need a bloody king and some damned rules," he growled to Egil as they made their way to the deck of his flagship. The man was nearly always in good humor and Mahen expected some quip or joke, instead he'd seemed sober and quiet.

By morning of the fifth day, they had a hundred ships loaded and prepared, with crew established and assigned. The 'horses' they loaded last. Mahen had never been closer to one than the Northern beach of Sri Kon, and knew little except they were huge. Putting them on a ship seemed a terrible idea, and the horses agreed.

As he watched men struggle to get two up a ramp, he shook his head.

"What do the big bastards even eat?"

"Grass, mostly," Egil grinned at his side. "But we have loaded sheaves of hay."

"They're going to shit everywhere and probably make us all sick," Mahen complained. "If and when they panic they'll make a bloody mess."

Egil shrugged as if he agreed. "The shaman asks for them."

Mahen accepted reality and went to his command deck. He looked out over the combined fleet of his people and the barbarians, still confused at his own role. He had expected Eka at his side to remind him of disobeying the king, but the assassin had surprised him.

"I will be sailing with the Matriarch, Admiral," his tone was as neutral as ever, the disquieting monk-turned-assassin terrifying as ever in his pleasant stillness. "I wish you luck," he'd smiled. "And the favor of the good spirits."

A week before, Mahen would have happily seen the dangerous spymaster anywhere but on his ship. Now, he found, he preferred him close.

"Why on earth would you do that, man? I wouldn't trust these barbarians to sail a skiff."

Eka smiled and bowed. "Goodbye, Admiral. I hope to see you again. Long live the king."

Mahen wanted to protest but found no reason to do so. "Long live the king," he'd agreed, and returned the bow.

The barbarian skald, Egil, had joined his flagship instead to translate if required. Mahen wasn't sure he believed this reason but was pleased regardless. He found he liked the man's company—a sentiment he seemed to share with everyone else. Egil's smile and laugh were as common and infectious as a sailor's curse, and he made even plain things interesting with his stories. Any evening in his company meant a night of grand tales, or at least song.

"The world is changing so quickly," Mahen said to himself, looking out at the harbor. He felt trapped in a story not of his making, powerless as a swimmer caught in the tide. Egil creaked as he shifted in the chair set out for him, and smiled.

"For us too, Admiral. For many years now."

Mahen blinked away his thoughts and shook his head. "Isn't there a chance this is all for nothing? That there will be no war?"

Egil puffed on his pipe and quirked a brow. "You have met Bukayag?"

"No. But I sank his ships."

Egil snorted. "Fifteen years ago, Admiral, we didn't know what a ship was. We had only coastal transports. Fishing boats. Nothing like your warships. We feared the sea and we still do. Though I speak with you now in a foreign tongue, we know nothing of other people. It was Bukayag who took a forgotten dream of paradise and made it real."

"But that dream doesn't require war. Take your people to the continent, seek land. There are still uninhabited islands, untilled earth near the Tong and elsewhere. No doubt it isn't ideal farmland, a bit far from rivers, but…"

"I have served Bukayag since the beginning, Admiral." Egil looked towards the sea. "If what you suggest meant peace, he would have done it. He has no great love for violence. When our men put down their spears he helped build homes and plant crops. He showed them a new world of riches, and asked for nothing. Yet this great and dangerous man has turned ten years of will and attention to this 'empire' and its coming." He shook his head. "Bet against him if you wish. But all who have are dead."

Mahen sat with a groan and lit his own pipe. "I served a great man once," he said after a time. "My king brought law to a land of pirates. He too feared Naran."

They smoked for a time in companionable silence as the Ascomi ships set out. The Pyu sailors raised their sails and lifted anchors without instruction. Mahen sat and relaxed as his captain and officers did their work. He thought he heard birds, but realized it was singing. High pitched, female voices came from the shore.

"What is it?" Mahen asked when he could stand the curiosity no longer. Egil looked to be listening too, sober and lost in his thoughts.

"Talia's song," he said with a sad smile, as if he didn't want to explain. Mahen waved him on, and he sighed.

"A story, like all our songs—a girl saying goodbye to her father." He frowned and shrugged with his pipe, as if it were too difficult to explain. "The words…you must understand, starvation is common here. Many battles are over food." When Mahen said nothing, Egil cleared his throat, and sang softly. "Little Talia sat and watched the embers, thinking of father at war. She didn't care at all if the grain was gone, so long as he came back to her. So long as he came back to her."

The skald looked away, and the two men watched the women and children on the coast as they sang for the ships.

"Are your men truly going to fight and die beside the Tong?"

Egil looked at him, as if surprised by the question.

"They gave their word, Admiral, and Edda is always listening. Even if all the world is arrayed against them, they will fight."

Mahen found he had nothing to say to that. He listened to the sad, slow song, and knew he would remember it for the rest of his life.

Whether it was the ambassador's words, or the last few days of toil, Mahen was reminded of what he truly was—a soldier. He saw one connection between himself and these foreigners, at least, a true link that brought a kind of comfort that crossed the cultural gap.

These barbarians, he thought, are men of honor.

"Well." Mahen stood and dumped the remnants of his pipe over the rail. "What happens on land was never my business." He called out to his captain, and gestured to set the sails. "But by every cursed god, spirit or holy man, Egil, I tell you this, I'll get us across this bloody sea."

The skald smiled with a nod, strumming his lyre as he puffed, and the admiral went to his work.

Chapter 22

"Five ranks, split formation! Reform you lazy bastards!"

Osco stood in the immaculate field of the royal training grounds, outside the block of his two hundred troops. Nearly as many officers looked on from the nearby seats and sidelines, but Osco wasn't bothered. He'd taught and drilled his men on every piece of the rotating formation his people called Flexing Fist. Now it was time to put it together.

"Move back, give your brothers space! You think the enemy is going to wait? Shield-turn, step back, next row forward. Oncoming rows—shield slam or stab, then shields up. Find the gaps. Keep in formation. And watch your damn feet. Your position holds until your officer calls."

He walked down the line dragging his sword along the wall of shields. The young men stood panting, eyes forward, faces red and sweating in the hot sun. They weren't up to Mesanite standards, nor even close, but compared to other Naranians they were gods. Osco grunted in mild approval.

"You do not advance. You do not retreat." He pointed his sword at the painted line on the sand, which showed almost uniformly before the men's toes. "This marks holy ground. Behind it is a cliff; before it the sea." He lunged forward, face inches from one of the men. "What happens if you go forward?"

"I drown, sir."

"You drown," he pulled back. "You are one hand, one foot. You can't swim alone, you can't do anything. Can you fly, soldiers?"

"No, sir," they chanted as one.

"You can't go back. You can't go forward. So you hold your fucking sacred ground until your brothers say push, because together you can swim, fly, and kill. You can do anything. Change ranks. Second row. Churn."

The first rank twisted their shields to the side and fell back in one smooth motion. The rank behind rushed ahead, jabbing the rims of their shields or their short swords at an invisible enemy with a roar before forming a new wall.

Osco swiped the still visible colored line in the sand in front of a soldier's foot. The young man didn't look down or flinch. Osco grinned.

"Very good. Break and eat. Strength and endurance all afternoon. Impress me, and tomorrow is a rest. Dismissed."

The men cheered and broke as Osco turned for the mess. If he was honest, the speed of their improvement surprised him. But there were still many problems.

Firstly, they still had the habits of spoiled, city-dwelling children. They were picky eaters. They worried too much how they looked or whose father was richest or indeed who they were outside of soldiering. At least he'd dealt with their god-cursed top knots.

Two weeks of drilling to exhaustion had destroyed several bad habits as it always did. A broken down man did only what he had to, and fretting over his hair didn't count. Once Osco had them all near shattered he'd started sparring sessions, which he ended over and over with a firm grip on stupidly long hair, dragging the man down to the sand, and kicking him into submission.

That night a red-faced Naranian officer had come to him privately to complain about his methods, and explain the significance of the braid. Osco had considered holding and kicking the man in the same method. Instead he smiled politely and carried on. After a week of it, the soldiers showed up with every top-knot cut off.

Some of their comrades began mocking them as 'children' without the hair. Osco didn't care and did nothing, but later heard rumors his men led night raids on the other troops, beating the offenders bloody. Again the Officers complained. Again Osco ignored them.

Li-yen told him later one of the commanders had gone to his general, who must have been truly insulted, and went so far as to complain to the Emperor. Neither man returned to the training grounds.

After that, no one else mocked Osco's soldiers, or questioned his methods.

Today, like every day, Osco ate his evening meal in the mess by himself. He went back to his appointed tent, updating his journal of events, making notes on some of the men. He returned to the training grounds at the appointed time, and so did his soldiers. As usual they were alone on the perfectly kept field, save for the few servants who cleaned it nightly.

The men's almost shaved heads shone red in the fading sun. Their postures were strong and straight. Osco had them stretch every major muscle, then march with their shields and weapons—without his attention, so they might talk and joke. When they were finished he inspected them again, mostly pleased with what he saw. He called out so they all could hear.

"Your countrymen think soldiering is temporary. They think at the end of the day or the battle a man should go home to his family, and return to civilian life. They are wrong. One day I expect your emperor will pay you as masters of your craft, and be pleased with the bargain, for you'll be worth five of his ameteurs."

The men stared ahead with pride, and Osco thought it warranted.

"Soldiering is now your profession. I expect you dangerous, alert, and controlled at all times. A soldier knows the enemy doesn't come when he's ready. War is not polite, it has no rules, it's not a game with winners and losers. War is murder, fought by packs of killers. What are you?

"Killers, sir!"

"What are you?

"Killers, sir!"

Osco paced and fought back memories of childhood—standing in the same rows with his house and kin as old men shouted the same words. He looked at the same sun that shone over every man, wondering where they were at this moment.

"Let wiser men know peace," he said. "You kill when ordered. You stop when ordered. You did well today, tomorrow is yours. Dismissed."

The men bowed in the Naranian fashion, and it broke Osco's reverie. His own people would have called out for the glory of Mesan and saluted with a stomp. But Osco was not in Mesan. These soldiers were not his kin. He returned the bow and left them on the field.

By the time he'd returned to his borrowed tent his mind was full of doubts. For a generation his people had refused to train the empire's men. To them this was their last remaining resistance, despite fighting in his army. It was why the emperor didn't truly trust Mesan and kept them at arm's length, though many of his other former enemies were integral parts of the empire. It was, no doubt, why Osco was here—protected even from a general's complaints.

It was therefore Osco's only chance. Many times in the past, his people had sent an ally 'military support' in the form of a single general—one man to help mould an ameteur army of their neighbors into a true fighting force. With a bit of time, it usually worked. Most peoples made poor use of the resources they had. Most men who ruled cities and kingdoms believed only in numbers—how many men, how many weapons, how many days of training, how much food. But as with Naran, these numbers were often lies—meaningless without coordination and courage—things far more difficult to understand.

Osco knew Naranian young men weren't so different than Mesanites. They loved being exceptional too much; they cared for their fellows and empire too little. But they could learn. It was a risk to teach them, but training wasn't like a weapon forged—you couldn't store it away and lift it again when you needed it. Training an army took constant maintenance, a culture of hardship you didn't just abandon at a whim. If you let them, men would revert back to the soft, life-loving cowards that formed the heart of all things. Osco's one small unit wouldn't transform the Naranian army and the culture that surrounded it.

And so, Osco's forebears were wrong. Refusing to train their enemy was not resistance. It was a token gesture to preserve their own pride. They had capitulated in all the ways that mattered; their petulance only displayed their impotence.

Victory over Naran required imagination beyond that of a soldier. What that victory was, Osco did not yet know.

He lay in his bed, tired but restless as he listened to the night sounds of his enemy's capital. They were very orderly, like his own people. The city shut down at night and only imperial servants could travel, the proper time marked by candles and gonged through every street. There was a place in the city for every class, occupation, and people, in order of their importance. And no matter the fairness or inequity of it all—everyone, as far as Osco could tell—followed the rules.

He wondered if these people could be made more like his own, then nearly snorted at the thought. Yet he knew he must keep an open mind. For now it was enough to become valuable to the emperor, and regain some semblance of power. Indeed, it was already working.

The emperor had allowed him to exchange letters with Liga. Through no doubt carefully inspected words, he'd learned he truly did have a daughter. With their personal code, Liga had managed to inform him it was her—that she was safe and unharmed, their daughter healthy. It comforted him more than he'd expected.

Life was soon going to become more dangerous—war with the Tong and her allies was coming. Men and supplies came daily from all over the empire, swelling the edges of the city ever further with soldiers and all those who served their needs.

Mesan would be coming, too. Osco wondered if he'd be housed near his brothers, if they would look at him and think 'there goes the proud Osco, who tried to make himself patriarch, and now serves the emperor as a slave'.

Perhaps that was the truth. Whatever a man called himself, every foreigner in the emperor's army was there by force. But Osco no longer hated them for it. He found, with some surprise, he didn't even hate the emperor.

He was locked in a game, playing a part, and if he died some other ambitious man would replace him, and things would go on. Killing one man in such a game made little difference. Osco had to change the rules.

When he at last lay down to sleep, he hid his documents, expecting they were nonetheless inspected by spies. As his breathing steadied and he felt himself drifting, the sound of footsteps snapped him awake. A shadow passed beside his tent, and he lifted a knife from beneath his pillow.

"Greatest apologies for this inexcusable intrusion, Commander Harcas," whispered a female voice. "Please forgive my disturbance. I would never be so rude except on a matter of direct importance."

Osco rolled his eyes, thinking a Naranian assassin would probably apologize before he killed him. He responded with equal politeness, and finally the messenger felt comfortable enough to arrive at her point.

"The emperor asks to see you. You are please to come with me immediately."

Osco winced, for he had not bathed in days, and his clothes were stained with mud and grass. "I'm…sorry. I should prepare first."

He felt the young woman's indulgence through the fabric. "The son of heaven knows what state you are in at all times, Commander. He says now, please."

Osco sighed and rose. The likely truth of this left a cold feeling in his gut as he slipped his feet into dirty sandals, then followed the servant into the night.

* * *

The half-moon was bright enough that Osco and his guide walked without candles. The great chimes had rung, so no citizens walked the streets save for servants of the emperor. Most everything was still and silent.

Some few oil lanterns lit major streets, resting on brick pillars guarded by an attendant. Despite the many rules and harsh punishments here, the poorest class stole anything left unguarded. The emptiness gave Osco an ominous feeling, as if this is how his world would end—not with some great war or cataclysmic event, but disused and forgotten.

He had no fear of assassins, at least. If the emperor wanted him dead there was no need at all for subterfuge. He would be invited with a smile, in broad daylight and with confirmation, to attend his own execution.

As an imperial servant, Osco was now taken through the front and without a blindfold. The guards still searched him and his escort for weapons, but bowed politely before and after. He entered the waiting room and found it aptly named as ever.

At last, one of the emperor's bodyguards summoned him inside the court. The Naranian Royal Guard were not 'soldiers' as Mesanites imagined them, but more accurately described as assassins. They were often recruited as boys from the lowest classes, chosen for their cunning and ferocity, then moved to royal houses and given lives of privelege. They were, in other words, fanatically loyal.

Osco bowed and followed. His eyes were lowered, but he still saw a gathering of men in military uniform inside, and his pulse quickened. Older men with hundreds of decorations stood like shameful children on both sides of the emperor.

"Ah! Osco Magda! Newest servant of the empire! Thank you most sincerely for coming at this incredibly late chime. My apologies for resorting to such rudeness. Please forgive me."

The emperor's tone, it was fair to say, was not good.

Osco prostrated himself as required. As a military servant, it was not quite as low as previously, permitting him a small window of sight. Osco felt the almost palpable intensity of the bodyguards near the emperor, and feared this was his end.

"I understand your troops are coming along very nicely," said Yiren, his tone far too welcoming. "My congratulations. You have done very well and I am completely pleased with your progress."

Osco blinked, still confused.

"Thank you, emperor, your praise embarrasses me. It is the men who should be rewarded for their efforts."

"I agree completely. You should please decide what would be suitable." Here the emperor shifted and maybe even stood, letting the silence build before he sighed. "As you know, war is expected soon. It grieves me that men would put their own selfish interests above the common good of peace, but such is the price of ignorance of God's wisdom." Again he paused. "In the quiet before mortal combat, a normal man's mind often turns to his life and family. Is that not so?"

As usual, Osco was thrown by the emperor's almost chaotic style. "Yes, emperor, in my experience that is so."

Yiren grunted. "Like you, it is my belief that good servants should be rewarded, and poor servants punished. That is right thinking and right acting, working in harmony."

Osco raised and lowered his head in response, for a moment again unsure which he was. He heard the sound of a curtain withdraw, followed by quiet, graceful feminine steps. He was desperate to look but kept himself prostrated.

"Please sit beside your husband, Liga."

The steps came closer, and Osco felt as if his limbs had turned to stone. He saw only bronzed skin in Mesanic sandals cross before his limited vision. He took deep breaths, hoping maybe at least to smell her, but could only detect the damned overpowering palace oils and perfumes. The emperor sat again in his throne.

"Servant Osco, to compensate for some of my army's extreme failings, I have decided to create a new military position—Lieutenant General of Heavy Infantry. This position will report directly to the General of the Naranian Common Army, and be given command of several thousand men, to be trained immediately to fight in close formation on the front line. This title is commensurate with other positions, and therefore comes with land and an estate under imperial protection, most suitable for a man to raise a fine family. I would like to offer this position to you."

"Thank you, emperor." Osco could hardly breathe. He wanted to see Liga's face—to see if she understood, if she approved—if she knew that beneath this simpering mask was the man she loved. "I am truly humbled," he said. "Of course I gladly accept."

Yiren grunted as if this were obvious. "But you are still a pagan. In Ru's wisdom this is understood and accepted. For how can a man love what he does not know? To be a general in the imperial army, though, this must be corrected. You will be given the analects and have certain religious obligations. You may keep your old gods as well, if you wish, as long as you learn of Ru. That is one of his teachings. Is it not wise?

The delay was long enough Osco thought he must answer. "Yes, emperor, very wise."

"I will also be assigning all Mesanites under the leadership of your new superior, Over-General Tau. They will likely be housed beside you and your men. Will that be a problem?"

"No, divine lord, not for my part."

Yiren snorted. "Yes. I don't trust your family or your people either, Osco. As a loyal, promising servant of the empire, I therefore ask if you notice…any unusual discussion or activity from your countrymen, you will come to me. Use your judgment when it is appropriate. Can I rely on you for this?"

Osco felt the iron bars of his prison growing ever stronger, still unsure if he could outwit this man and his empire. "Yes, completely."

"I am pleased. Serve me well, General, in this and the war to follow, and there is no limit to your rise. I have long desired a Mesanite patriarch I could trust. I require only loyal soldiers on the Western edge of my empire. How that city is ruled, its laws and customs, these are none of my concern, as long as Ru's teachings are respected. Do you understand?"

Osco did his best to control the raging beat of his heart. You persuasive bastard, he thought, knowing it could all be lies, if given so easily taken away just the same.

"I understand."

"Good. Then go to your new home with your family and my blessing. Ah, the future is very exciting, how I envy you! To read the words of Ru for the first time, it will be as if being re-born, will it not?

"I hope so, emperor. Thank you for your generosity. I am your eternal servant."

Yiren slapped a hand on his throne, and Osco felt the room flinch. Whether the man expressed dismissal, anger or amusement, no one could truly know. Osco did nothing, knowing the emperor ruled with chaos and fear, and that most of the night's display was not for him. He had felt the rebuke and perhaps the taunt with every utterance of the word General, in the politeness, the reversal and promises. It was all a game as Yiren moved his pieces.

But for now Osco did not care. He looked very subtly at his wife, seeing she wore the formal dress she had at their first meeting. She was a little older, a little harder, but no less beautiful for that. She held something in her arms, and though he could not quite see, he knew it was their daughter.

"Please gather and report," Yiren barked, his tone utterly transformed. "I said come after my guest was finished, neh? What are you all waiting for? Another chime? Out please, General Harcas, go, go! Enjoy your home! And you others take your places! Would you deny your emperor his sleep?"

Osco touched his head to the floor then backed out of the room with eyes lowered. Liga followed, copying his movements. Then he was standing in the hall beside her.

He gestured towards the far door and the servant clearly waiting to escort them. They walked side by side, barely glancing at each other, out into the darkness and street lights. They walked without words all the way through the Imperial Quarter, past markers that signaled royal grounds, to a grand estate with land and gardens and servants.

Osco knew it was an executed general's former home. Their escort handed him a key.

"It will not often be required, master," he said. "A servant will be waiting at every entrance."

"Thank you." Osco did not bow because Naranians of his rank did not bow to servants. He opened the door himself, and gestured Liga inside.

When they seemed alone, Liga looked at him, but he shook his head. Nearly all rich Naranian homes were built the same way. He took her away from the open corridors and expansive rooms, with their endless doors and closets, down the stairs to the cellars already filled with barrels and casks. Even here it was not safe. Later, Osco would go through the house and inspect every wall and floorboard for secret rooms, but for now it would do. He turned and met Liga's eyes.

Tiredness ringed them with the dull bruise of attention, a squinted caution born in betrayal. Still, they were the same in the ways that mattered. Every muscle in Osco's body urged him forward, every piece of him that was flesh and blood wanting desperately to take her in his arms.

He reached out, very gently, and touched her face, then stroked his daughter's mop of dark curls.

Liga smiled warmly, a wetness held in her lids without a blink. He saw no sign of judgment for his words in the emperor's presence, nor of his many failures that brought them here. She gave her support, her loyalty, her understanding, all without a word.

He leaned forward and kissed her, very gently on the lips, and felt her tremble as she put her head against his chest. Given the circumstances, he thought, this was warranted. He held her in his arms until she withdrew.

"This is your daughter, husband." Her voice did not tremble. "I named her Sabina."

Osco knelt and together they prayed for her health in silence. By custom he could change the name, or even reject the child, for he owned both his wife and his children. "Her flesh is my flesh," he said in ritual approval.

Sabina had her mother's look, save for Osco's dark brow. She seemed to frown up at him, as if asking when he intended to secure her future properly. The weight of the thought felt heavy, and he wondered what he owed the girl and even his wife beyond what he owed his people. Did Liga's loyalty not deserve him above the needs of those who had betrayed?

He looked to the brave woman who had stood at his side, who had done what was needed for Mesan, and knew the answer.

"May she have her mother's strength," he said, "and bear worthy, vigilant sons."

They held their daughter together, and Osco knew nothing had changed. They would have to accept this foreign power, perhaps even for a generation. If so they would teach their children freedom in their dreams, and to speak truth behind false words uttered to their enemy.

"We should have more children, as soon as possible," Liga said, touching his arm. Osco felt his stone almost crack beneath the joy of shared understanding. He took her hand, and led his family up from beneath foreign soil, past the elaborate prison, up the stairs to place the girl in a crib they found freshly made. He lay his wife down beside.

Osco had lost his family and his home, but, he still had the perfect wife, save for her beauty. As she undressed and he looked on her, feeling an ache that roused him as no other woman or even battlefield had ever done, he thought perhaps even that flaw—perhaps even her beauty—yes, that was a blessing, too.

Chapter 23

Asna Fetnal Isha Fetlan lay in a pile of cushions and considered which betrayal would serve him best.

To betray the fat king Kapule was obvious. He was a soft ruler of merchants and farmers, with little power in the world save for his city. But for these reasons, he expected betrayal, and so Asna rotted in one of his padded prisons.

Guards waited outside his room, and in the hallway, and outside his window. More guards would wait in the clouds and on the rooftops and in Asna's smallclothes, no doubt, if they could. But it wasn't this that stopped him from escaping.

To betray Kapule was also to betray the barbarian butcher. This thought caused Asna's throat and anus to clench in fear even to consider. Yet on the other side sat the emperor of the world, whose spies and killers lurked from sea to mountaintop with poisoned sweets and ladies and knives, and to ignore him meant to choose a life of exhausting danger.

So, Asna did nothing, and shifted on his cushions.

The Condotian had only ever had two friends, and even this many surprised him. His people did not believe in 'friends'. They believed there were only three groups: family, enemies, and everyone else. And sometimes family were enemies, too.

Yet lucky Asna had once had two friends. The dead island prince, and the madman Mesanite. Though he too was likely dead. And god curse them and bless them both, Asna thought, them and this wicked world.

To think of his friends made Asna sad, but also pleased at all the blood they'd spilled together—the victory first at the tower in Nanzu, then the battle at the edge of the Tong plain. He had killed more Naranians there than he could count—far more, since he couldn't count very high, and it had been truly glorious. Yet who would remember? Certainly not the losers, who as a rule cast aside failure as mere detour on a grand journey. Silent glory was as useless as a barren field, an empty winejug, or a flat woman's chest.

"I must get out of this place!" Asna screamed, turning face down on his pillows, staring at the clean cracks in the tiles of the floor.

It had been many mistakes and stupid gambles which led him here—mistakes only friendship explained.

"Take no money later for deeds today!" his Grandpapa had taught him. Yet that is what Asna did, because he had liked the boy, and seen his power, though in his heart he'd known nothing so gentle and dangerous could last.

The shuffle of fabric on stone brought Asna springing to his feet, hands slipped over hidden knives.

The rice king's prudish serving girls bowed at the door. They brought him wine and rich man's food as regular as his pampered bowels, as always shrouded by cloth from shin to neck, even their hair tucked into a sort of scarf. They came in a clustered pack, also as usual.

"Hello, beauties," Asna smiled his winningest smile and relaxed one hand to bow. Their eyes floated anywhere but in his direction. The first time he'd spoken to them their alluring dark eyes had bulged as if he'd slapped their grandmother. But they were used to him now. They said nothing, also as usual, and took his plates and pots and straightened the furniture except for his cushion pile.

When he could stand the silence no longer he shouted—causing several of the women to flinch visibly—in Condotian.

"I want to fuck! And I want to shit on grass, and not in bowls!" Then he sprawled over his cushions gathered in the center of a plush rug he'd dragged to the corner furthest from the door.

The women carried on, and otherwise ignored him.

He fanned himself because it was bloody hot and he still wore a leather cuirass under his silks. He expected the king to order his death at any moment. No monarch much liked having a Condotian mercenary in their palace—especially one who knew the emperor of the world was coming to burn said palace to the ground.

Escape, however, was almost impossible. Nevermind the guards, who were everywhere—every eye watched Asna as if he were a predator waiting to pounce, which he supposed he was. But if they came for him, by his father's rotten cock he'd be damned if he didn't kill a few and spit on their dying, stupid flat faces first, and then maybe…

"Master Fetlan?"

Asna tumbled from his cushion pile and stood with as much grace as possible.

The women had largely left while he stewed in his misery, but one lingered. She looked just like the others—dark and painted eyes shrouded in stiff fabric. In Asna's fantasy he already pictured her throwing off layer upon layer as she cried "I need the seed of a wild nomad, now, desperately!"

He came forward in his most sensual pose, but it was just like the last time. The Tong woman withdrew a note, and whispered.

"The son of heaven sends his greetings, master. He thanks you for your previous information."

Asna bowed, already depressed, wondering if it was even the same girl as approached him before. He couldn't tell beneath all the fabric, and supposed it didn't matter. The Tong king had no reason to deceive him. If he wanted Asna's death, he could have it, and required no silly games to trap him first.

"That? Was nothing, beauty. A small gift." Asna's eyes feasted both on the girl and the note in her hand. "For me?"

She nodded as she offered it with a gloved hand. Asna went to take it but changed his mind, instead using a silk cloth from his pocket. A man could poison just about anything. "Please destroy it when you're finished," said the girl, pretending not to notice.

She picked up some dishes as she made her way to the door, and left without another glance.

Asna banished the urge to run screaming behind her, killing his way to safety. He waited with what small patience he possessed until the door closed, then unfolded the paper with the silk.

Like the first letter he'd received soon after arriving in Ketsra, it was written in Naranian, and rather vague. Asna could read the language much better than he could speak it.

"Dear servant of the one true god," it began, "who in his infinite mercy forgets all our sins and remembers only our good deeds, well performed."

Full pardon in the empire, Asna understood, and further reward for success.

"As ever, God recognizes two great threats to peace; the first, disobedience in the face of divine law, which destroys a man's soul as surely as lies—this is heretical but familiar, and not to be concerned with; the second is true blasphemy—violence against a peaceful people. We ask, in His name, for a harsh rejection of this forever."

Asna squinted, hating Naranian treachery and scheming and their six faces and three hearts and five tongues. Still, he knew what the emperor wanted—what every creature of power wanted since time immemorial—an end to a rival.

"There is a house of Enlightenment in the temple quarter," continued the letter. "Please ward yourself and those worthy against evil by marking it. Do this, and pray quietly, and surely God will honor you. Only a man of faith is truly free."

Asna flopped on his pillows and blew air, wondering how many spies and assassins the emperor had in the city. He was being instructed to prepare an ambush with invisible allies—to find a way to mark a specific temple, and bring Bukayag there to die.

But could Bukayag die? Even in treachery?

Asna thought of the battle in the island throneroom, then the beach where he'd ridden like a demon from hell through magic that killed all other men. Asna shivered and spit on the clean tile floor. It didn't matter. Even if he wanted to, he was stuck here in his padded prison.

Then he frowned and thought of the final words—'only a man of faith is truly free.'

Did this mean his release could be arranged? Did they have a spy so close to the king? Some kind of advisor? Asna knew he didn't have much choice. If he did nothing, either the king's or the emperor's knives would come. If he managed to escape, he'd be forced to live on the edges of Naran, poor and struggling like a stray dog, right back where he started.

Or he could gamble, and kill the monster that killed his friends.

No doubt the emperor would have some secret magic to help. Just as likely, the giant would overcome it, killing them all in a frenzied rage of screaming death, Asna and the assassins wailing in terror while he ate their bones.

No. Asna shivered. Very no.

There was glory, and then there was madness. He had seen the thing fight and withstand power that ripped a palace from its stone. A sane man didn't threaten a whirlwind with a sword. A sane man ran screaming, abandoning his wives and children for good measure. But then neither did a sane man refuse the emperor of the world, and spit in his face.

So Asna lay back on his pillows.

He stroked his manhood for the fourth time that day, then stuck a few throwing knives into the furthest wall. It helped a little.

* * *

Three days after Asna received the emperor's letter, they released him. A messenger arrived as if breathless and hurried, apologetic as if they'd somehow forgotten Asna were there.

"No trouble," he told the fat, noble born merchant, whose guards continued to stare at Asna like rotten food stuck to their boots. "No trouble," he said again, clapping the man on the arm as he laughed, then looked at the guards as if they shared the joke.

Then he scooped up an expensive jug of wine to drink on his walk—which was to say, he stole it—and left his prison in a fine mood. The afternoon sun was hot on his face, the breeze full of promise and the scents of the city.

"Smells like shit," Asna said to the closest man, then laughed again at the sour expression, and the hurried walk away. Nervermind, he thought, I'm free! And by every hated god and spirit it felt good.

With all his limited will, Asna stood on the crossroads of Ketsra, with a sea behind him and open field ahead, trying to resist the ancient Condotian urge to turn from all responsibility and consequence, and to run for his life.

He thought a stiff drink and a loose woman might help, so he roamed the farmer-king's city with an eye over his shoulder for spies. He sold the jug and some pillows from the palace to street merchants, who frowned and haggled like starving peasants, the words 'you bloody thief' on the tips of tongues but never quite on their lips. Still, they paid.

Asna found no brothels or inns. Like all men everywhere he knew they would have them, just hidden and covered in ritual and lies, bought by the same powerful men that lived in every city in the world. Condotians had no time for such stupidity. They banned only the things a man couldn't do and pretend he hadn't.

When night fell he at last wandered to the temple district and understood why they'd chosen it. The buildings here were more spread out, more isolated, less people roaming the streets. He found the temple to the Enlightened and bowed to the priests, who frowned at him but left him alone. It was a stone structure with big, heavy double doors, and small windows. Not easy to get in or out.

He felt himself sweating at the thought of the event, wondering how he'd talk to the men he needed to talk to, and how he was going to get a big foreign monster to follow him here, then go inside while Asna fled for his life.

"Damned other friend," he muttered. "Where is your cunning madman mind when Asna needs it? Dead in a ditch. Stupid man!"

But he supposed if Osco Magda were stupid then everyone else was stupid too. He sighed and took the chalk from his pocket, marking a small x on the top corner of the door. Tomorrow he could still run away. Far to the West maybe, where men worshiped rocks and animals and had never heard of Ru, or barbarians with golden eyes.

He left and bought meat close to turning, then found a nice dark corner to sleep in. Not much of a last meal, he thought, but better to die hungry and free than full and bound.

A stray dog watched him with a pitiful whine in his alley, and he fed it the crumbs before lying down to sleep. It would stay near now hoping for another meal, and wake him if there was trouble. An old nomad trick, never growing old.

Unlike me, he thought, stupid old lonely Asna.

But he was never one to linger on troubled thoughts, and slept quickly, despite the fleas.

Chapter 24

Ruka wiped sweat from his eyes and squinted at the ever-burning sun. His red skin peeled from too many hours at the wall, his rough hands cracked and bled, his back and shoulders pulsed with the dull ache of toil.

"Still alive?" he called to the men of ash carrying stones from disassembled buildings.

A few grunted. They were just as red and burnt, and more exhausted than Ruka. One man slapped the tender flesh of another's back, who growled and swore a low curse. The others laughed.

They had patched nearly the entire Northern wall, heightened it by ten hands, and reinforced every gate with iron. A great accomplishment by any people's standards in the time they'd had. Yet still not enough.

Ruka and his men worked side by side with thousands of Tong. They had limited common words, and so separation and strangeness existed. Ruka hoped after enough hard days, and enough pisses in the same trenches, the beginnings of respect would form.

"The Fat Foreman sits in the shade. Again." Modi—a youth from the Galdric generation—took a drink and stared at the Tong.

Ruka winced as he looked at the useless man and his mostly useless team. He had ordered his men to keep their mouths shut about the foreigners. Each had their own leaders and systems, and the Tong had far more workers to deal with.

"Look at it this way," said an older warrior from the North, "while he sits, he can't drop anything on our feet."

The other men grinned, so Ruka left it alone. As they worked, women and children walked along the builders with pails of water. One was fetched specially for Ruka and handed as if in sacred offering. He took it with a nod.

Despite his initial protests, they'd made a habit of clearing him space to sit, cleaning his plates, and asking after his thirst or hunger with endless regularity. If he worked too long they fretted and worked themselves to death beside him until he was forced to stop.

He sat though he was not tired, and drank though he had no thirst. He watched the Tong work and play—whole families together along the wall. They joked and laughed as if the project were another day in the fields or the markets, and not a race to save themselves from death and slavery.

In his distraction, he failed to notice a young, veiled woman had approached with another bucket of water. She bowed, then handed him a slip of parchment instead of a cup before disappearing into the crowd.

With all the people and chaos, buildings and streets, Ruka couldn't tell who might be watching. It didn't help that the Tong looked much the same to him—their hair and eyes always dark, and mostly hidden.

"I need a walk," Ruka announced, a few of the men standing to follow. He didn't bother trying to stop them, and supposed watchful eyes besides his brother's was wise. He found a bench in a garden square—a gift to the city years before by a wealthy noble—and unfurled the parchment.

"Mighty warlord from across the sea," it read in Naranian characters. "I hope this letter finds you hale and healthy. I understand you can read and write our tongue—a clear sign of your wisdom. First, my congratulations. King Alaku and his family have ruled for one hundred and seventeen years, so your boldness and cunning in victory are to be praised. Second, now that your great circle of power has moved ever closer to the coast, I must introduce myself. I am Yiren Luwei, emperor of Naran, and therefore the world. Attached to this letter is a map of the continent labeled with all of my vassal states. In truth, all lands beneath Ru's light are subject to his laws. I have many friends, and no enemies, for God demands peace amongst men, that 'no spear should long be raised in violence against another'. All enemies of peace must therefore be destroyed most hastily. It would be far better to be my friend, and open to Ru's teachings. For such a friend and student, I could offer control and governance of every island in Pyu, with full legitimacy and in perpetuity. All I would expect in return is for those islands to remain at peace, and to refrain from interfering in Ru's plans on the continent. With a full heart, and an eye to the harvest moon, I eagerly await a sign of your openness to God's wisdom."

It was signed simply: 'the son of heaven.'

Bukayag tried to crumple the letter, or maybe rip it to shreds, which made Ruka smile. The tone was shockingly arrogant, the emperor almost proud of his own hypocrisy. He supposed only a great power could force the whole world to call expansion 'peace'. Still, he thought it foolish. If Naran claimed all lands touched by the sun its dominion, why should any man with courage not call himself their enemy?

Farahi, of course, had always understood.

He'd known such a people would take and take until they were truly stopped. In all the years of their friendship, Farahi had never once discussed the threat of Ruka allying himself with Naran. This seemed strange, since Ruka thought it logical. If it meant settling new lands in relative peace, the men of ash might accept such a bargain. Some of the chiefs no doubt could be bribed with riches, land and titles, just like men of the continent.

Or, perhaps, they could have. After the dream of paradise and Ruka's preaching, and so many years of toil and waiting, the chiefs of ash had not come to kneel. Not to island kings, not to a sorcerer-prince, not even to the 'emperor of the world'.

Ruka ignored the many eyes he felt crawling upon him, drifting through memory until he saw his friend's face curled in a grin, another sunrise victory at chahen. Though Ruka felt alone in the world, surrounded by danger and incompetence, there in a foreign capital, surrounded by guards and no doubt assassins and spies, he laughed aloud.

You clever bastard, he thought, without anger. Without a word of deceit you tied my hands.

The Alaku patriarch had seen two threats, and himself trapped between. He couldn't attack, he couldn't defend, so he changed the rules. He befriended and emboldened one enemy until its ambitions moved beyond his lands—another victory in an unwinnable game.

Ruka flipped the letter over and brought quill and ink from his Grove, ignoring the few gasps at his creation. He wrote on the back of the page in Naranian characters.

"Yiren," he smiled as he left out the titles. "Your words are nonsense. Perhaps this is because your father and uncles gave you power without struggle. And I wonder: how can a man live without shame, having no greatness of his own, yet receiving praise? Men of deeds speak clearly. Here is a lesson until we meet: I reject your laws, your god, and your sniveling. If you attack Ketsra, I will destroy your armies, end your rule, and strangle you until you are dead."

Ruka winced at the few bits of poor penmanship. He blew the ink dry, then stood and held the letter in the air before he set it on the bench.

Whether any spies watching took it to the emperor made little difference. He turned back to the wall with his confused men beside and felt his brother's steps quicken. The enemy is coming, he thought, and they are coming soon.

'Son of heaven'. Ruka looked in his mind again at the emperor's letter. Never trust a man who speaks for the gods, he thought, and almost snorted.

His own continuing life of lies galled him daily. If he lived long enough he would tell his people the truth. First he had to finish gathering the might of ash and send his true answer to this emperor. First he had to tame Naran.

"We've much to do, cousins," he announced at the wall. "You'll thank me when the enemy climbs."

His retainers looked on his renewed energy with sagging, resigned expressions, groaning as they rose. Ruka turned to the foreman and snarled in Tong.

"Tell your lazy bastards there's plenty of light." The man jerked in surprise and glared. Ruka expected the words would have little effect, but it made him feel better, and to do nothing was always to fail.

In his mind he re-watched images of the wall as he'd patrolled inspecting. They still needed to be higher, for he wanted any man who fell to be alive but wounded badly. He wanted ten thousand half-dead, wailing soldiers squirming at the base, stacked until the message sunk in.

They had only weeks to make it so. Though they'd been lucky with weather, the rainy season was not yet over, and infrequently delayed their work. Ruka had to assume Farahi was right, that he had only until Matohi of the seventh month of the island calendar. Twenty days, no more.

It's time enough, he thought. It has to be.

"Time enough for what, God-tongue?" the young Galdric warrior said at his side.

Ruka froze, not realizing he'd spoken aloud. He looked to the earnest eyes of his follower, always so ready for another miracle, a look he had grown to both love and despise. And this one last time, he thought, the faith will be rewarded.

"One more gift, cousin, from mighty Vol. He will give it soon." He looked at the platforms being made and fought his brother's pleasure.

Let this arrogant emperor come, Bukayag all but whispered, hands flexing in anticipation. Let the son of heaven bring his minions and toys. The sons of hell will bring theirs.

* * *

It took two days to meet with Kapule, and several more to arrange the 'display.'

In the meantime Ruka worked on the wall and tried not to allow a rising fear. His ships were already late. This meant poor weather, betrayal from Sri Kon, or difficulty in the Ascom. Farahi had only ever discussed possibilities, and said any could prove disastrous.

Ruka carried on. He knew doom would come for him in victory or defeat, a final reckoning for a life of dark deeds. It made no difference. He carried on because he had promised Beyla, and because she was right—it was all a man could do.

In his Grove, the dead had now largely swept away Kale's destruction. His armory was re-assembled, the practice field cleared and ready for use. Much of the gardens, riverside and graveyard were still littered with debris, but beauty rarely survived crisis. Ruka was thankful he had hidden his most important creations in the cave.

Ten years to construct and perfect—to haul the ore, to shape and test, to refine until a common man might wield them. Ruka hoped they summoned properly, and functioned in the land of the living without flaws. He knew there would be a price. Even with his expanded knowledge, every act of crossing between the living and the dead had its cost. But as ever, Ruka would pay.

With ten of his men behind him, he walked to the main courtyard of Ketsra, now cleared of the makeshift market. Tong citizens surrounded it, noble to common born, farmer to merchant-lord. King Kapule sat on one side with several members of his family, including half a dozen sons and daughters. Ruka saw Lani was among them. She nodded and smiled as he entered.

The crowd hushed. Kapule stood to greet him like a long lost son, and Ruka noticed there was a ramp beneath him, so as he did he might be almost level to his guest's height.

"Welcome, ally, and future son in law!" Kapule blinked and waved a hand forward. One of his veiled daughters scuttled ahead and bowed. "This is Yasmina, your betrothed."

Ruka bowed awkwardly. Like all Tong she was very small compared to him, her eyes all he could see besides her clothes, dark pools surrounded by painted lashes that gave nothing away. She didn't speak, and neither did he.

"Well," Kapule clapped his hands. "I and all my people are most eager to see your gift, Bukayag. If it is ready."

"It is, ally."

Kapule waved him forward, and said much more quietly. "I once waited on another ally for some impossible miracle. It didn't turn out well, in the end."

Ruka was glad in that moment Kale wasn't watching. All man's work falls to ruin with the spinning of the sun, he wanted to say, yet we must hold to the light while we can. He met Kapule's eyes and smiled as if unconcerned.

"It is not yet the end, great king."

"Ha. Yes. True. Quite true."

Ruka could see powder and paste mixed with sweat on the older man's neck. His eyes were quick, almost desperate, as he turned to his people and made a short speech on unity and tradition.

Ruka walked to the center of the square and waited. He knew there were many problems in the city that weighed heavily on the Tong king. The emperor had sympathizers and appeasers; crime was raging out of control; nobles and farmers alike were unhappy with the rationing, the forced harvest, and being locked together in a city made for half their number.

Kapule was a man of peace. He had never asked to stand at the front line in the battle for the world. He was just another move in Farahi's game, with little choice now but to play his part. Ruka sympathized.

He felt his breaths deepening and realized he was afraid. In the years since summoning his first shield to the world of the living, he had learned much of Grove-magic. He knew his body changed, and maybe more of him beyond his senses. There were holes in his memory and his attention now. He had lost pieces of himself in bits and chunks, sacrificed on a hidden altar. The sun's warmth was ever-cool; the taste of food subdued. He could not sleep, rarely drank, and sometimes went days without emptying his bladder. Now he would give another burst of great power, and who knew what else he might lose?

Kapule was apparently done speaking, gesturing almost frantically to proceed. Ruka blinked and glanced at his water-clocks, knowing he had lost several moments. He saw concern on his retainers' faces, but nevermind. He was the God-tongue—the demi-god runeshaman. His strangeness was almost required.

Ruka lifted an iron rod in both worlds. The contact helped, somehow, as touching the earth helped. Whether he drew power from the soil, or sent it down, he had no idea. But like the riddle of steel his understanding made no difference—it worked. For now that would do.

Like the grand tales of creation—Ruka held his iron aloft like Tegrin, wondering what other truths might be buried in legend. A whole life might be spent delving into these mysteries, he thought, and not be misspent. After he had burned in the mountain, Ruka hoped he'd have the chance.

His men lined up beside him as ordered—another trick, he had learned—to draw power from life, if required. It would cost them, too, and he hoped not to need them. Some of those at the wall at the fertile ring were now older than their years. Some had died strange deaths in illness, hair shedding in clumps as their bodies fell apart. Another terrible deed Ruka would answer for, all the years he had stolen, all the lives he had claimed.

He closed his eyes.

In his Grove, the dead had removed his weapons from the cave, setting them in lines and tying all with rope. He noticed Kale was watching now from the fog, hands in his robes. No doubt Ruka's display would not be as impressive as the prince's, though it had taken near a decade of toil. He thought of Egil, and smiled. A little drama always helped.

"Folk of Nong Ming Tong," he yelled, voice extended from his gut. "It will be you who defends your city. But hear my oath—stand on these walls; fight, and you will not fight alone!"

With effort not at all required, Ruka rose the rod and struck the earth. The dead chained around him, their hands on the machines. His men braced themselves in the land of the living, faces scrunched as if against a strong wind.

The air stilled, and his Grove shook. A scent formed like a thunderstorm without rain, an acrid stench as if the wind itself burned with a crackling hidden flame.

Power flowed down Ruka's arm, hissing through the rod and into the earth. Like all his creations of metal, the mighty weapons formed in a hail of sparks flowing up. Onlookers cried out and turned away, shielding their eyes or withdrawing entirely from the square.

Just as suddenly, it was over. From nothing, a hundred weapons of death filled the clearing in perfect rows. They looked just as Ruka had built them—designed first on Naranian models, then transformed with steel, improved and simplified, perfected over a decade.

Giant metal bows and catapults built with careful mathematics, decorated with runes, shone in the continental sun. They would shoot much further, with far more power, and at least three times the speed of the empire's. Ruka opened his eyes and ran a hand over the closest.

The emperor's army would come expecting shoddy walls guarded by little more than armed farmers. They would ready their siege, expecting to rain death without danger, hoping to soften their enemy before they smashed through the gaps of a broken wall. They would learn otherwise.

Kapule had found his feet. He stared along with his court at the war machines, open-mouthed with awe.

Though Ruka had produced what could only be called a miracle, it did not feel this way to him. He knew there was an answer. A man could have done what he had in the land of the living with enough material and time. It was not like Kale's power, which seemed godlike and impossible. As Ruka looked on the terrified crowd watching him now as his own people did, he felt a fraud. But he knew for now it was better to be a prophet than an ignorant fool with power beyond his understanding.

He waved to the crowd like it was nothing, and turned away. His body trembled and he feared he could not speak without it showing.

"Are you alright, shaman?" Modi's voice came as from a distance, though he stood at Ruka's side.

"Yes," Ruka's numb mouth mumbled in return. He barely felt the stone beneath his feet, and he began to count when his heart pulsed, several water drops at least and still it had not beat again…

"Shaman."

Lani stood nearby with her sister—Ruka's bride-to-be. The island queen was the only woman in her family not veiled. "Thank you for the mighty gift," her smile seemed genuine. "You have proven your words again. I will tell my husband all you've done for my family."

Ruka would have bowed but felt unbalanced, so nodded instead. Lani was speaking again but the world was dull and dark, pulsing as if old Volus blinked his lidless eye. Ruka swayed, but his brother kept them standing.

The world returned to confused and maybe offended stares from Lani and her sister, and strange shouts and a ruckus at the edge of the town square. Ruka turned and saw a familiar face, but his memory failed to place it. The thought struck him as so strange and unfamiliar he stilled until Kale appeared before him in his Grove.

"That's Asna! That's my friend! Let him in!"

Wind roared in the prince's excitement, and Ruka shrugged before calling to his retainers to let the man forward. He remembered him now—from Farahi's palace. He had nearly rammed Ruka's own spear through his thigh.

Bukayag licked his lips and seemed eager to rip the warrior apart. 'Asna' looked plain but strong. He wore the same bizarre, colorful and dirty clothes from the palace, but now as then, walked with the step of a killer.

"Mighty warlord," Asna bowed dramatically, his eyes on the women. "Beautiful ladies. Asna greets you most particularly, and with emphasis."

"Speak quickly," Ruka growled, feeling strengthened every moment by Bukayag. "What do you want."

"I make bad Naran, apologies. I bring speaking from a mutual friend. Osco of Mesan. He has words he says you find useful."

Ruka had little interest in hearing more, but Kale stared meaningfully.

"Why should Osco of Mesan tell me anything."

"Ah. He says you would ask this. He says he owes debt, for beach." Here he looked to the queen of one nation, and princess of another, and winked. "Great men hate debt, beauties. Very proud."

"Speak the words."

"Ahh….very sorry. Naran bad. Not me. Osco in Ketsra, I bring you, yes? Very close."

Ruka wanted only to sit until sensation returned to his body. His brother tingled with treachery, if not fear, but Kale looked for the first time in weeks as if he might go the day without whining and Ruka sighed. He would bring his bodyguard. Without Farahi, he was also uninformed, and even if it was a doomed trap, some information might be useful.

Lani's eyes went up and down the warrior as one might inspect a rotting corpse. "Do you know what a Condotian is, shaman?" She didn't bother to hide her scorn.

"I know enough, queen. But thank you."

"Well. I say no more. Please join us at my father's palace this evening for a meal. You are welcome, as always."

"Thank you, I will if I have time."

Lani took her sister's arm, who had again said nothing, and led them away. Then it was only Ruka towering over the Condotian, his bodyguards beside him, inspecting Asna with violence lurking in their limbs. The foppish warrior backed away, smiling, the stink of his sweat growing stronger.

"Ahh, this way friends. This way. Follow Asna."

* * *

Ruka walked through the cluttered streets of Ketsra, feeling improved with every step.

Ahead of him the nomad turned with a forced grin and a dramatic bow, as if he were escorting noble lords. Nearby Tong stared and sometimes crowded. They made travel difficult all the way to the temple quarter—a now familiar route to Ruka, who sometimes came to the shrine of the Enlightened for a moment of peace. As in Sri Kon, the monks there ignored him, or were in any case kind. He didn't know why, exactly, but supposed those who truly believed in gods and spirits weren't much impressed by a man, even if he was a giant.

"This is a trap," Bukayag muttered for the second time. "You should give me this snake and let me squeeze the blood from his ears."

If it is we'll kill the assassins and make the city safer. If he betrays us, he is yours.

Ruka noticed some of his retainers staring and suspected he had spoken too loudly. Bukayag practically gasped with anticipation, and seemed unaffected by the numbness.

Priests of the many related faiths of the Tong scattered and sometimes bowed as Ruka and his men entered. Beneath the politeness, though, most seemed annoyed at the intrusion. The grounds looked much the same as always. The Enlightened's shrine lay squat and solid on the far Northern edge of the grounds, frequented mostly by visiting islanders. No doubt it had been built as some agreement between kings, little regard for actual worshipers.

Asna stopped at the doors. Ruka inspected the building from the outside, seeing few windows or entrances, and unless the temple were packed with warriors he had little concern for his life. That didn't mean they wouldn't try.

Last he knew, Osco of Mesan had been with his army, then apparently left the city and returned home on his own. Ruka didn't know why, but perhaps Mesan considered rebellion. Farahi never suggested as much, but that didn't mean it was impossible.

"He wait inside, large lord."

Asna fumbled at the heavy doors and walked into the gloom, and Ruka followed, leaving two men outside. In his armory, a full suit of armor was now prepared along with enough spears and swords to hack his way through a small army.

The shrine, which was really just another temple like all the rest, was mostly empty. A few monks could be heard chanting in the upper level, the familiar sound drifting pleasantly to Ruka's mostly-functioning ears.

"I am tired, nomad. And impatient."

Asna gestured for calm. He stood on his toes to try and see to the upper levels, and soon a monk descended the stairs. Bukayag almost snarled at the man's walk, which was not that of a holy man.

"I'm not surprised," he said. "Only disappointed."

In his Grove he met Kale's eyes.

"Your friend will now die screaming, islander. You should not have forced me here."

"Just wait," whispered the wind. "You don't know he's lied. There could still…"

"Outside, shaman." Modi drew a long knife and moved to the door at muffled sounds of violence. He kicked the latch and shook his head, other men moving to his side.

"I carry a message from the son of heaven," said the monk, drawing his hood to reveal a sweat-soaked face.

"I piss on his words," Bukayag growled, light flaring as he took armor from Ruka's Grove. The wide eyes of the 'monk' blinked away a droplet, but his jaw clenched before he spoke.

"The wise emperor says 'even great evil can be purified in god's light'."

With that, the 'monk' closed his eyes, dropped his candle, and Ruka realized the sheen on his skin had not been sweat. It was oil.

A roar of flame engulfed the man, then the steps, and began spreading up the walls.

"Surprising!" yelled the Condotian over the screams, hands still raised for calm. "But do not panic, lords! Trust in Asna!"

Two of Ruka's bodyguards moved for the smaller warrior, so Ruka growled and charged the door. It was thick and heavy and would require some effort to break if the barrier outside couldn't be moved. The fire was spreading quickly. The floors weren't covered, it seemed, so as not to give the plot away, but the walls were doused and covering in orange flame.

"Get a ram," he said to the dead in his practice field, who ran off to obey. "Out of the way," he barked in the land of the living, and Modi leapt aside as Ruka prepared himself to hold the weight. As he took the huge hammer and began to summon it, the doors flew open. A Mesanite smeared with blood stood outside.

He stepped away and gestured to exit. Dead men dressed like priests and monks were scattered about the grounds, Mesanites in half armor and cloaks moving about, finishing off wounded, and taking prisoners. Ruka paused, but walked outside.

"Leave that one alive," he called to his men over his shoulder. His retainers soon came out behind him with a few coughs, dragging the Condotian.

"You see?" Asna licked bloody lips, the side of his head a ragged bruise. "Trusty, trusty Asna."

The Mesanite bowed stiffly to Ruka, then exchanged a few broken words in maybe the hill-tongue with the nomad. Asna smiled, and seemed to try to clap a hand on Ruka's shoulder before the men of ash nearly shook his arms from their sockets.

"Ah! Gentle! Gentle, giants! You see? Asna is faithful. He brings Mesamites! Now, large lord take assassins to king, neh? Very impressive. Message is clear. Ally for certain."

Ruka could almost feel his brother's disappointment. Kale looked vaguely sheepish.

"Well," the wind whispered as he shrugged. "Asna is…an idiot. But he means well."

The prince was smiling, but his soft eyes promised a terrible price for the nomad's death. Ruka sighed and waved at the dead and dying servants of the emperor.

"Spare some, and take them to Kapule. I'm going to rest."

"Yes, rest is good, large lord. Leave all to Asna. That is, if you could first release good Asna, then he could…"

"Let's be clear," Ruka snarled in Naranian. "I don't like you. You serve greed alone, with no loyalty but to yourself."

Asna smiled and nodded vigorously. "Yes, surely wisdom. No matter what Asna does, he is never traitor."

Ruka blinked and glared at Kale, who only shrugged.

"Let him go," Ruka growled to his men. Then he walked away from the still-burning temple, past the growing cluster of actual priests. Some carried buckets of water but saw the corpses and warriors and just stopped to watch the fire.

Ruka knew the surrounding buildings were mostly stone and the fire wouldn't spread. Normally he would do what he could to stop it, but wanted only to lay down and try to sleep. As he walked he remained concerned with the numbness and memory holes, which were growing fuzzier and harder to place. But what bothered him, truly, on his long walk to the palace, was that the damn nomad made a lot of sense.

Chapter 25

Dala sensed the fear first. For many days the waves and swaying of the ship waxed and waned, and she had learned largely to ignore it. With the other passengers she sat in the hold telling stories, or singing songs, ignoring the comings and goings of the sailors. The strange island ambassador, Eka, sat silently in a corner, or stretched his limbs, dark eyes shrouded in calm. Dala had several attendants, and these sat with her at all times, holding a curtain so she might change, wash, or empty her bowels with some privacy.

When the few horses began throaty cries and shifting madly in their stalls, she wasn't alarmed. Later she climbed to the deck and for the first time looked at the darkness swimming across the sky. She saw sweat on the sailors' brows, intense eyes as they stared at their sails, or glanced at their officers.

"What is it, Captain?" she called to the old, stoic leader of the fleet, who had already crossed to paradise twice with the shaman.

"Nothing yet, holy mother," he answered over the wind. His smile was polite but for the first time dismissive, and without a gesture of respect, he turned towards the sailors scrambling over the ship.

Dala went below. The young faces of the Galdric warriors and her attendant priestesses turned to her with earnest hope, a bit of the fear above now gleaming in their eyes.

"It's nothing," she said, with what she hoped was perfect calmness. "Just a bit of weather."

Her attendants brought her pillows and a blanket, fussing as if she were an invalid. "Why don't you see if the others need anything?" she gestured to the many men already gripped by illness from the motion. Her attendants bowed and took them ginger root from her personal supply.

As the women went about their task, some warriors dared now to meet their gaze and speak to them or smile. They preened and boasted and showed their teeth or the rings on their ears or arms. Priestesses could take mates now, after all.

Dala tried to focus on her letters. She had made something of a journal of their voyage, noting the passing of time and the beauty of the open sea. On the ninth day they had seen a family of whales, spraying water ten times the height of a man. She had seen some before on the beach in the hunts, but these ones were huge, bodies as long as the ship, splashing as they leapt. She was terrified but exhilarated, and it only increased her excitement of seeing the new world. For what other wonders might await?

Her stomach lurched and she realized the ship was rocking more heavily now. Damp sailors barreled down the stairs and started tying supplies, shouting for everyone to find one of the iron rings along the walls and sides of the hold. Dala ignored the eyes, and again climbed the stairs.

The sails were pulled down entirely. The sky had darkened so that it nearly felt like night, no trace to Dala's eye of the sun. She looked South towards the fleet but saw nothing, and they seemed for all the world alone in a heaving desert of black dunes.

Rain spattered her in waves, which felt pleasant in the heat. "Where is the captain?" she shouted at the closest sailors, struggling to hold herself steady. The men ignored her, and she half-climbed along the same iron rings built all over the ship, finding the captain pulling buckets from a separate hold. He looked back at her, his face set in a way that reminded her of Aiden—not fear, but a deadly calm—a man locked in a duel. He left the task and stomped towards her.

She gasped as his grip closed around her arm like a dog's jaws. "Get below!" he shouted over the storm, then dragged her. "Get her down and secured," he yelled to sailors near the stairs, and two of them half-lifted Dala, struggling and swaying with the ship until she was back in the hold with her hands tight around an iron ring.

All remaining lights were doused. Dala heard only the screaming of the horses, the soft weeping of her attendants, and the howling of the storm. She flinched as thunder crashed, and for the first time doubted her own survival.

Have I served my purpose?

The question came like an icy bath, freezing Dala's guts worse than any winter. She closed her eyes, and fought it, for she had survived famine and a useless father, the wolf and the Order. She would survive the sea.

"Holy Mother," she cried in prayer over the storm, "hear our words." Her attendants followed in chorus as she recited the Galdric call. She focused on her moment of weakness and pushed it down with the all the contempt it deserved. "Death is nothing, children," she cried. "All are helpless before the might of God. Hold to your faith, and She will preserve you."

The ice melted as Dala willed her strength outwards—to the children of ash clinging to their rings, to the animals bleating in terror, to the captain and his crew. "I have enough," she whispered, "take my strength."

She imagined the ship crashing through the waves, wood and iron flexing in the endless force, and willed it to hold.

* * *

Birmun, son of Canit, lay bound in rope, and wished for the thousandth time for death.

As was done every day, one of the sailors brought him water in a wooden bowl, spit in it, and left with a sneer. They had not yet beat him, but their words had been harsh since the first day and grew worse with every night. Birmun did not make it any easier on himself.

He did not insult them in return or fight back in any way. Instead he ignored them, and drank or ate whatever they gave without complaint. It was what was expected, perhaps, from a nightman or an outcast—but not a chief, even a fallen one.

The men of ash believed Edda the goddess of words heard insults. Southerners went so far as to believe that if unchallenged by word or deed, these insults became true. So every sneer, every dishonor born in silence only compounded their disdain. Birmun knew this. He just didn't care.

They'd left him in the hold with the crates of supplies, which they sometimes accused him of tampering with though it was clear he hadn't. Eventually, they tied him up. They'd left his rune sword lying in the corner—the one piece of this broken man they didn't understand or risk insulting. With some amusement, he knew they were afraid to touch it.

He spent his days in memory. The speed and strength of Aiden in their duel had been almost inhuman. Even with Birmun's hidden knife the man had reacted in time—overcoming dishonor and deception with brute force and skill. Then, instead of punishing treachery, he had spared him.

Birmun could think of no reason why. After two days of miserable thoughts, with nothing but the waves and the creaking wood of the hold, he had realized: perhaps it was the worst punishment the chief could think of.

Locked and bound in the hold, Birmun felt again like a dead man's son. This time he had no toil to occupy his mind and expunge his rage. Sleep came fitfully, as it always had from his years of working through the night.

Sometimes he woke to the screams of the girls, women and babes he had killed in a bloody horror in Orhus—the worst night of his life, and proof beyond all doubt he was damned. Some days he wept openly. His captors saw this too but still he did not care. It seemed his whole life had been revenge save one brief moment of love, and even this felt twisted and wrong, built on blood and ended with scorn.

If only we'd had children, he thought again and again, then despised himself for it. The repetition seemed unstoppable, a personal hell of his own making, and he wondered briefly if Aiden was Dala's lover now, or if perhaps she rotated through the great chiefs every night. Or maybe, just maybe, she had taken the Godtongue.

When he could stand it no longer Birmun worked at his ropes. When the men found him untied, they said nothing. He stretched and worked his muscles, lifting barrels or pacing across the hold. When the gloom felt too oppressive he shouted and begged the sailors for something to do. He was insulted, and told not to come up. He called again and again that he would row until his hands bled, but the men only laughed. They said the prophet's ships did not need rowing.

Birmun took to singing loudly, calling out nightman songs, working man songs, songs from his childhood. On the second night, his voice raw, three men came down in a rage and attacked him. He fought them but lost, laughing as they beat him, spitting blood as he shouted, "Kill me, you cowards, can't you even manage that?"

It seemed they couldn't. Two sailors held him down and bound him again, one red with rage picking up his sword and holding it aloft as he shouted "It's going where you belong, in the god-cursed sea!"

The sailor stomped up the stairs, and Birmun was surprised to find he cared. The weapon was all he had left in the world—the only thing that made him anything. "Fuck you," he shouted from the door, "you motherless son of a dog, the Gods gave me that. You pitiful nothing. Who are you? Who are you?"

But he did not answer, and left Birmun in the hold. He lay quietly for a time without even the plague of memory.

They were forced to feed him after that. Birmun only stared dumbly at the wall and lost track of the days. He did not remember the sun or the moon, but the heat in the hold became stifling. He heard birds calling and smelled fish, then heard men shout and call to others off the ship. When he finally roused and looked out a crack in the hall, he saw a bright blue aura infused the world.

"Bring him up."

Men took his arms and dragged him up the stairs, and for the first time Birmun noticed his own stench. His hair and beard were long and greasy. His ripped pants were stained with his own filth. They dragged him off the ship and threw him down to hot, grainy earth, so pale and bright he had to close his eyes. He tried to see the world but couldn't understand. The sun was far too hot, the trees huge and without leaves except in a locked canopy above.

The New World.

He had made it to Tegrin's Promise—real and here for the second time in a decade. Men of ash were coming from the huge city beyond, greeting the sailors with clasped arms and embraces like long lost brothers. The little foreigners watched in fascination—these ones much the same to Birmun's eyes as islanders, if perhaps slightly darker and rounder in their features. He watched the happy reunions with numbness, looking out at the waves. Then he heard the shaman's voice.

The sound reminded him of old days and what he had lost, and a whimper wracked his body.

"They took my sword," he heard his own voice. "They took my sword."

A huge shape loomed above him, and through his tears Birmun saw the shaman's golden eyes. They turned on the sailors, who said nothing, and Birmun almost laughed in the thick and dangerous silence. Instead he collapsed to the powdery sand.

When he found the strength to rise again he found Bukayag crouched, inspecting. The shaman looked much the same. The skin of his face and head were browned with ruddy patches. The same intense gaze roamed, the brightness like a light shining over Birmun's life—as if he could see all his secrets, thoughts, and shames.

Birmun saw himself through those eyes, and felt disgust.

"It is men who make swords," said Bukayag. He sighed and put a hand to Birmun's shoulder, then gave a gentle push. Birmun collapsed to the sand. "Some draw breath but are truly dead. Are you one of those?"

'Yes,' Birmun thought, but said nothing. In his breast he felt a trapped scream of rage. 'How dare you', he wanted to say, 'a great man, who maybe has Dala's love, how dare you be so cruel to me now.'

He managed to rise to his hands and at least meet the man's eyes. When he did, he saw no trace of the cruelty he'd imagined. Birmun breathed and looked to the sand, failing to hold back his tears.

"You have known loss before," said Bukayag softly. "Once you were an outcast in a ditch, your hands stained by waste. Yet you stood in defiance. Where is that hero now?"

"He's gone," Birmun's voice shook with despair. "Long gone, shaman."

"No." Bukayag looked away. "We are not so different, you and I."

Birmun could not accept this and snorted through his misery. The shaman looked to the sea and smiled.

"Only broken things know the hollow tragedy of victory. Success is a cheap balm slathered over a festering wound. It's never enough." The shaman stepped back and rose. "But there is an answer. Stand now, man of the mountain. Think of those who once stood in the ditch beside you. They needed you then, they need you still. Clear their path to paradise and find redemption. But first, you must stand."

Birmun's mind obeyed without instruction, flashing with images of his replacement brothers—the misery and tragedy of the nightmen's lives, and the cooling embers of their hope. Few were truly nightmen now. In the changes wrought since the dream of paradise, many had given up the drink, worked in the day and even gained mates and children. But many had failed.

"It isn't fair," Birmun choked. "I was just a boy. It was all over before it began."

"Life is unfair, son of Imler, far more than you know. We are but insects hiding from the gaze of a fire god. Nightman or prince, your short life will end, all your hopes and dreams but the fleeting pleasures of spring."

The world shook, or maybe it was just Birmun's arms. "I've done terrible things," he choked, "I will burn in the mountain, shaman. There is nothing I can do."

Bukayag nodded without pause. "A man must suffer. The driftwood of your soul will burn, and you will remain. That is the lesson of the mountain god. Now stand."

A groan escaped Birmun's lips as he tried. It was too much. He'd sunk too far. The shaman's ugly face filled his world, golden orbs staring with the first sign of contempt.

"You aren't weak. You're selfish and filled with pride. It was just a sword, nightman. It was always nothing. Now get up you sniveling coward."

Birmun roared and seized the shaman's arms, spittle flying from his lips. He wanted to strike him, or maybe himself. His legs felt chained to the beach, his body bloated with water. He cried out and wobbled to his feet, the shaman making no attempt to push him away, nor to help him.

"Fight your doom," Bukayag whispered in his ear. "Fight for those still rotting in ditches, scorned by those who should praise their toil. Fight for those who have never known love, or victory, until the mountain claims you, you will not fight alone."

Light flared in the shaman's hand. Dark iron formed and grew until it touched the beach, nearly a replica of Birmun's first Rune-blade. Bukayag took Birmun's hand and closed it around the handle, then looked to the many watchers.

"No man can take what the gods have given. Lose another useful tool, son of Imler, and you'd best go with it."

"Yes, Godtongue," muttered the sailor. Bukayag pulled away, leaving Birmun to stand on his own. He swayed, but managed, and the shaman smiled.

"Noss, too, has his champions. See to him."

The men caught Birmun as he sagged, numb now in mind and body. He felt shame for the ill thoughts he had allowed of the shaman, and for his own arrogance he should have long denied.

As they dragged him through the sand, he knew there was only one champion of fallen men, and it was not a 'nightman chief' who offered revenge, or a priestess who offered forgiveness, or great lords who offered oblivion. It was the outcast prophet, the wolf of Noss, who offered a winding path from hell.

Birmun's head lolled as black spots overcame his eyes. He felt his body dragged gently by its arms. But only one thing mattered now, and with every scrap of strength left to him, even as unconsciousness came, Birmun gripped his master's sword.

Chapter 26

"Sister, you must visit your future husband. Make him understand he returns to something here."

Sara looked again at Lani as if she were a madwoman.

"Why don't you visit him. He's a disgusting monster. I fear every moment in his presence I may catch some kind of illness."

Lani fought the flush of anger threatening to creep into her voice, and put more tedious little beads on the string in her hands. She found she did not much like her sister.

"He's going to be your husband. You'll have to get over it. If he has something to return to he'll fight better and be more loyal. We can't be certain yet that…"

"I don't want him to return." Sara shrugged and returned to her beads. "It doesn't matter. Mama says I'll never have to actually marry him. He'll die out there. Or anyway I won't have to go through with it."

Lani put down her hated beads, shocked at the foolish words. "If he dies, sister, then so might we. Surely you see that."

Sara rolled her eyes. "You've spent far too much time with dramatic islanders, sister. It's just a squabble. You weren't here so you wouldn't know. There's been three just like this since I was a girl. A few doomed soldiers will die, Papa will make a deal, and these merchants or those farmers will be very angry, and then all will be as it always is."

Lani prepared to summon another line of attack, but how could you tell a child there was a world they couldn't yet see? They beaded their strings together in silence, until she found herself with a sad smile, thinking of the shaman. What was it he'd said? Words never did much of anything?

"I'm going to go and visit with some of those doomed soldiers, sister. Would you care to join me?"

The girl looked as if she'd been asked to swim in feces. She covered it with an indulgent smile, and shook her head. "No, thank you sister, we would need common clothes, and an escort, and cousin would fret endlessly. I don't think they need the bother."

"Oh I won't bother them," Lani rose and walked to the guarded corridor. "I'll go myself, just like this. Enjoy your beadwork, sister. I'll see you for dinner."

Unsurprised the girl said no, Lani first visited her son. She found him happy and tussling in a room full of royal children, surrounded by nursemaids and her father's wives. She left him to his games and walked the well-guarded corridors and courtyard, taking a veil for her hair. By her clothes the city would see her as a rich woman, but not a princess. Still, Sara was right, in such dangerous times she would need a bodyguard.

She walked to the guest rooms perhaps as much for pride as anything. The stoic foreign warriors of the hills lounged on tables and benches gambling, or wrestling or running in the square. She nodded to any that noticed her and searched until she found their leader.

"Commander…Carth, is it?" She found him observing his men cook in a servant kitchen, and he turned and bowed without any indication of surprise, annoyance, or anything else. "If you aren't too busy," she said, "I don't want to bother my father. Now that I'm here I feel a little silly, but, I need an escort into the city. It's not your responsibility, of course."

The hillman furrowed his brow and Lani remembered he hardly spoke their tongue, and she'd spoken far too quickly. She tried again more slowly, again feeling a bit foolish asking until the man tilted his head in understanding, looking almost pleased.

"Bored soldiers…not good," he said. "Task is useful."

She smiled and waited in the courtyard, and soon left the palace with five of the world's greatest warriors in plain clothes. She walked through the ever-dirtier and cluttered streets of Ketsra, still feeling as a stranger in her own land. She attracted eyes but didn't feel uncomfortable or threatened, avoiding major roads as she did her best to find her way.

It took most of the morning just to cross the city. Beggars lined every street, red-faced merchants shouting their wares in a chaos of frantic travel. The mood felt panicked and confused, as if the rich agreed they should be hoarding but didn't know what, the poor scrambling to catch their crumbs.

Lani reached the temple district with sweat-sticky clothes and an overdue thirst. She'd heard of the fighting, which seemed mostly cleaned, save for the half-burnt temple of the Enlightened. It was largely stone, however, and the structure had been saved. Lani could hear chanting in the nearby garden and suspected the monks were doing their duties outside.

She walked through the open entrance, the doors either burnt or torn from the wall. A small light flickered in a dark corner, and Lani knew from the broad silhouette she'd guessed correctly.

"Please wait outside," she gestured to her guards, who nodded with understanding and left before she walked on. Her heart quickened, and she breathed to settle her nerves.

"All the priests are outside," she said casually as she approached. "Did you frighten them off?"

The ashman shaman looked surprised, but not unhappy. "The monks are…kind. I come here often to be alone."

Lani noticed the trinkets placed on a small altar and realized he might be praying. "I'm sorry," she suddenly wasn't sure what to do with her hands and cupped them awkwardly. "I've disturbed you."

"No. Please."

He gestured, and Lani smiled politely and knelt beside him, offering a bow of respect to the Enlightened. They said nothing for a time, but Lani found the silence uncomfortable.

"Have you converted to the island faith in your time here?"

The giant smiled. "I find it peaceful here. Most of my life was spent in quiet solitude. I suppose I lived something like a monk."

"That's hard to imagine," Lani smiled, trying only to make small talk, but Bukayag said nothing more.

She inspected him in the silence—the strange mix of silks, cloths and leathers, as if adorned by three peoples. Despite his size and strength, there seemed something fragile about him, and she had the strangest feeling that at any moment he may lay down on the mat and weep. But she thought this foolish, and that it must just be her own feelings of fear placed onto him.

"I was also alone," she said quietly. "Surrounded by foreigners who might be my enemies. I knew very young I was trapped in a game of kings."

The ashman nodded but said nothing, and Lani found herself wishing to say more.

"I…tried to befriend Farahi's sons, but, it rarely felt pure. I suppose I'm very practical. I don't know why I tell you this, except because it's true, and because I'm frightened of the future. Tane is my friend and husband. He's a very good man."

Still the giant said nothing, and for a long moment Lani feared her discomfort would overwhelm her until his deep voice rumbled off the stone.

"And what of me, princess? Was I to be befriended, seduced? Is that what is practical?"

Lani thought she detected amusement, maybe even friendliness in the tone, and hoped it was not a trap.

"Once." She released a breath. "I'm sure my father told you—a growing fleet of 'pirates' attacks our ships. Island lords, of course, once our allies for a decade, yet bribed so easily by the emperor." She looked to find the shaman's strange eyes locked on the dim light of the candle. "The men of ash—they have been our allies, a month? My father's advisors think you will betray."

"And what do you think, princess?"

"You're quite capable," she said. Bukayag said nothing, still appearing vulnerable, as he had in the palace with his head in his hands, as if the weight of the world might crush him. "No," she added. "I think you loved Farahi. I think you mourn him, though you try to be strong and hide it for all those who need you. Do you have no family, no trusted friends? Is there no comfort?"

The giant closed his eyes, a single drop of water spilling to the stone. He shook his head.

"I could hold you, if you wish."

The warlord blinked and shifted, as if ready to run.

"I am not trying to seduce you," Lani added quickly, coming closer. He was so huge she wasn't sure how to approach, but moved to his side and lifted an arm to place over her shoulder, finding a mostly comfortable position to place her head. He remained utterly still, so she turned and eased her arms around his side.

"I…in my land…I'm too large, and unaccustomed…"

"This is fine," she said, feeling only the rapid beat of her own heart, and the surprising coolness of his skin. At last his arm held her, and though she knew he could crush the life from her body, she was not frightened. They stayed this way until Lani's knees were uncomfortable on the stone.

"I'm sorry," the giant inspected her as she pulled away, as if for some sign of injury or offense.

"It's just the floor. Perhaps we can lie down awhile?"

Bukayag's eyes flicked back and forth in a kind of panic, but he nodded and lay down. She tried to find a place at his side and drape an arm over his body. His hands lay rigid on his stomach, and she meant to hold one but accidentally touched the place his finger should have been. He flinched.

"I'm sorry, does it hurt?"

"No, it was long ago…" he shrugged, as if it were impossible to explain. "I…remembered losing it."

Lani frowned because she did not understand. It seemed a strange thing to say, but then, this was a strange man.

"Would you tell me how?"

She wasn't sure if the question was wise, only hoping to speak would relax him. A sad smile touched his face.

"You wouldn't believe me if I did."

She let it go, and touched his arm with her hand. "You have many wounds," she said absently, unable to ignore the cords of hardened muscle. "What is this?"

He flinched again as she touched a blackened bit of skin on another finger.

"From the frost," he whispered. "It is very cold in the land of ash. Shelter can be hard to find."

His golden eyes roamed the roof, as if he saw some painting beyond her sight. Though she held him, she felt he was not truly with her at all. She understood that no one had ever held him like this, and the thought brought a kind of pity she wished it hadn't. Perhaps the touch would do nothing, but it was all she could do, so she continued to hold him.

"I don't understand you, princess," he whispered after a time.

She smiled, feeling more comfortable. "Men rarely understand women. I don't understand you either, but I would like to."

He said nothing, and when she rose her head to look she found his eyes strained, the expression familiar but alien on such a man.

"You're afraid," she said, regretting it as the giant's face lost all expression, save for his distant eyes.

"I have seen strong things die in the dark, princess, no glory found in a predator's jaws." He took a long, lingering breath and sat up, taking her hands, so small in his, before putting both to his cheek and lips. "Like the monks, you are very kind. I know it brings no pleasure to sit with me. I know that I am monstrous and strange."

"No…" she shook her head and didn't pull away, but he let her go.

"Please, there is no need." He met her eyes. "Yes, I am afraid, Lani Kapule, but not of death. Only failure. You need not secure my loyalty, nothing will stop my purpose now. I thank you for this moment, and hope to see you again before the end."

Lani's heart pounded at the way he said 'the end', so sure, as if he knew his fate exactly.

"And I you," she whispered, much later, alone in the half-burned temple. The fierce warrior had risen and lifted her to her feet, bowed and gone without another word, his heavy steps still fading into the night.

Chapter 27

The island prince had seen Ruka's moment with the princess. He'd stood nearby watching, his eyes holding such fury Ruka thought he would have to try and kill a dead man. But Kale said nothing, and the moment passed, at least for now.

Ruka had left her at the temple, then worked two days and nights moving his machines to the wall without rest. On the third, with at least eighty of the weapons resting on platforms surrounded by bolts and stones, a red-faced Tong messenger came from the harbor.

"The fleet, shaman," he panted. "An Ascomi sail on the horizon."

The city flew past as Ruka did his best not to crush the citizens of Ketsra. He found many of his men standing on the docks with hands blocking the sun from their eyes, straining to see. Ruka saw the single sail, and paced.

The breezeless morning wore on, but no other sails appeared. At last the now visibly damaged ship limped to the docks with half her oars, and the men of ash ran to help their kin disembark. The crew's faces were pale and wan as they fell to their knees to kiss the sand.

"There was a storm, Godtongue," explained the captain after a long, trembling drink of water. "We left a day ahead. When we saw the weather we fled with full sails and barely outran it. We bailed like madmen, and thanked the Mother when we saw old Volus between the clouds."

"And those behind?"

Ruka turned away, certain of the answer. The captain paused far too long.

"I…don't know, shaman. Perhaps they evaded it."

Ruka left the men on the beach, feet carrying him anywhere but the sea. "We cannot wait," he said to the air, or perhaps his brother, before turning to the castle. His guards were still with him so he sent messengers ahead, then marched through the city, ignoring the eyes and startled glares.

The king's guards and soldiers no longer checked or halted him at the gates. He passed the outer courtyard, then the busy palace doors, all the way to the court without a word of confrontation. Kapule sat inside surrounded by advisors.

"Ah!" The king welcomed him with a wave. "I hope you have better news, ally. The Naranian army is at last on the move, marching rather leisurely, it appears, straight toward my city. So there it is. No more talk or games. I suppose I should congratulate you—you were right."

The Tong king and his council looked even sweatier than usual. Many had glassy-eyed, long-drawn stares that reminded Ruka of animals caught in a predator's jaw.

"I thought enemy scouts prevented us from learning such things," Ruka said, moving towards the central table, its surface still covered with maps and documents describing the city's supplies and fortifications. Kapule snorted.

"My allies are cowards, shaman, but they are still my allies. I have many spies."

Ruka flipped through the sheets and ledgers but saw nothing new or useful. He took a deep breath, and hoped the men didn't break at his words. "I had hoped for more reinforcements. They may yet come. But my men and I must prepare to leave."

A fresh surge of panicky musk rose to the air, and Ruka regretted his choice of words. The king, at least, understood.

"Is there not more work to be done in the city?" Kapule's voice was well controlled. "Perhaps we can wait a bit longer before your attack."

A part of Ruka wanted to accept this. He put it away. "You're ready. If the enemy reaches Ketsra and I haven't returned, hold them off. If my people arrive, they will support you."

Kapule licked his lips and shifted on his pillows. "As you say. But…who will operate the war machines, shaman? Surely they take some amount of knowledge, and we haven't had enough training…."

"I bloody will."

Ruka repressed his smile at the voice.

Ex-Chief Builder Hemi waddled in on gouty legs, precisely on cue. A strong young man supported him, likely one of his sons. The royalty of Ketsra stared with incredulity as the island Orang-Kaya grunted his way to an empty chair, and plunged with a sigh.

"I sent for assistance," Ruka explained, still holding back his grin. "Hemi was Farahi's Chief Builder for many years. He and his men will assist with my machines."

"Two-hundred masters from the isles," Hemi's gasps for air betrayed his attempt at pride. "We've seen crazier shite from the barbarian than stone-lobbers and spear-chuckers, I tell you that."

Kapule blinked and looked between them. "Who is going to pay for said two-hundred master builders? Enough for the men to risk their lives? To fight the empire?"

Hemi snorted and shook his fat-padded head. "Bloody farmers and their penny pinching, miserly…" he caught Ruka's expression and cleared his throat. "Builders risk their lives with every task, my lord. It's me who's paying." He gestured at Ruka with a resentful scowl. "For the Kubi, I suppose. Though my ship stays in that sorry excuse for a harbor, and if things look too grim…"

Kapule's eyes flared, but Ruka's mind had moved on to the task ahead. He turned for the door and his men before the king called from behind.

"Ruka the fields are still filled with scouts. Thousands. The Naranian army is larger even than we'd feared." Here he shrugged, glancing at his sweaty generals. "The work on our defences…it has been more than impressive and should give us a better position. But…should we not at least consider other strategies? Perhaps we could negotiate at the gates."

Ruka turned slowly to cover his brother's mocking attempt at laughter. He met the eyes of the men in the room one by one, wondering who would betray. 'All of them,' almost coughed his brother. 'Betrayal is how rich tribes end'.

"Negotiate? What is there to negotiate?"

Kapule's hands raised as his tone soothed. "I suggest options, nothing more. There's a chance the emperor could provide terms. He's a reasonable man. Naranians are a reasonable and civilized people. Sitting in burnt fields and looking on impregnable defences may give them…new perspective."

"Civilized." Ruka almost spit. "Such fine words men use. I see a beast coming to kill you and enslave your children. Is that what civilized means?"

The king frowned, and Ruka turned to the silent Mesanite at the edge of the gathering.

"Carth, what will you do when the emperor comes? Will you fight and die in a foreign city?"

The young man blinked in surprise, his thick brow raised. The intentions of these abandoned warriors was a source of some awkwardness in Kapule's court, but none had truly asked outright. He spoke slowly in stilted Naranian.

"I defend King Kapule, lord. Those are my orders."

Ruka snorted and turned to the king. "There. Simplicity. Would you bargain with a pack of hungry wolves, lord? Or would you build a wall, and guard the gates? You forget your obligations."

Kapule's jaw tightened and he glanced at his advisors before meeting Ruka's eyes.

"I forget nothing. I look at reality and see death for my people."

"Some will die." Ruka nodded. "Men are poor at judging risk, which is greater than your lives. Your people's spirit and future can be easily lost, and are impossible to retrieve." He paused and wished they could understand—that a man could be taught suffering with words instead of scars. He looked to the soft merchant sons and tried to think of some way to make them understand. "Will you give the wolves your children, lord, for a moment of safety? That is your choice. Else you must fight and maybe die, but at least be worthy of remembrance."

Kapule squirmed, looking far less put upon than Ruka had intended. "I have many children," he muttered with a quirked brow, then waved a pudgy hand as if annoyed. "Your point is taken." He looked to his generals and adjusted his hat. "We are traders and farmers, unaccustomed to war. But I know you're right. You and your people are great warriors so you must understand—we are afraid."

Ruka softened at the truth. "There is no dishonor in fear. Your people are wealthy and prosperous. You have much to lose, but also much to gain. Greatness is not forged idling in cold comfort, but in the fires of mortal danger. You may see your people rise, Kapule. And who then can say what is possible for the Tong?"

Kapule met Ruka's eyes with a long, and perhaps taken stare. At last he nodded, and Ruka walked to him, ignoring the skittering panic of the bodyguards to extend a hand.

"All courage, great or small, is rewarded. Remember that."

Kapule took it in his soft, weak grip, but Ruka thought no less of him. He looked to the Mesanite.

"In proof I have one last gift—for the mighty victors of an island beach. I leave it with the king before I depart."

The hard young man nodded with a curious brow, and Ruka looked to the generals and the king, who he now relied on to hold the city behind him, knowing if they failed he and all his men would die.

"Take heart, cousins," he smiled, or maybe his brother did. "The men of ash go to war, and leave your enemy ruined in our wake."

* * *

Another precious day passed as Ruka prepared his cavalry. Still they saw no sign of the fleet. The morning was bright and clear and he squinted in the oppressive sun and heat of the continent, even here on the milder coast. Two hundred mounted men of ash waited for him in the palace courtyard, mostly old warriors, or youth of the Galdric generation.

Ruka paced amongst the living heroes that formed his cavalry. Every horse was saddled, every man who could ride on their backs. He knew all their names, their hopes and ambitions, injuries and deeds. The fullness of each man he discarded in his memory, until only warriors remained, nameless riders in a battle for the future of their people. Losing men was harder than losing soldiers.

"Cousins." He met the eyes of as many as he could. "We have crossed an endless sea, built ships and walls and weapons of war, and gone further than any hero in any book." He looked up and squinted. "Today we are not Northern or Southern, common or renowned. We are the only hope of our forebears and children. And the gods are watching."

The men stared with wide, sparkling eyes, and Ruka strolled along their ranks, stopping to adjust a man's stirrup, or draw another's dagger and run his hand along the sharpened blade. He patted horses and men's legs in approval, still purging the deeds of each in his mind, wishing he could show them their own stories as he saw them, undimmed by time.

Dina, one of Sula's daughters, stepped from the makeshift stables saddled and ready behind her handler. Ruka met her dark, steady gaze, and smiled. She was average for an animal of her breed. She did not have her father's strength, yet he had chosen her from amongst many siblings, ignoring the frowns of the masters. Ruka did not need a sprinter, but will and endurance—a survivor of the steppes. When he'd looked in Dina's eyes he saw what made Sula truly great, all that mattered in the end—the eyes of a thing unshaken by the world.

"Come," he touched her nose. "Together we'll impress your mighty sire. Or at least try not to shame him."

He smiled in remembrance as he led her along the Sons. They had stripped to light chain shirts and leather padding, carrying spears, swords and bows, but little supplies. There would be plenty where they were going.

Kapule did not come personally to see them off, but many of his sons and daughters waited with court officials, fake smiles on frozen, noble faces. Ruka didn't much care except to obey their rituals of politeness, bowing and waving as he passed. Many of the Tong had also come from all walks of life, staring outside the ring of guards at the strange, huge beasts and riders.

Ruka wished Egil were at his side, with Eshen and Aiden, Tahar and Altan, rune swords and axes ready. Of his many 'champions', only Birmun remained with him, his body recovered and garbed in the same armor as the rest, dark rune blade hanging from his saddle.

"I'll keep a flame burning until you return." Lani stood at the front of the court. She smiled and shrugged as if embarrassed. "I asked your men. They said yours was a fire god. I mean to pray for your safe return."

The island queen was dressed like her siblings and he hadn't noticed her. Her hair was still covered in a veil, but she uncovered her face to speak. Her smile emerged like the sun from dark clouds.

"Thank you, Queen Alaku, that is thoughtful."

His words felt as inadequate as ever, but he sighed and called out in his Grove.

"I may die, islander. Is there anything you wish to say?"

The wind did not stir, nor did Kale show himself. He had been absent longer and longer and Ruka prepared to move on when the slightest breeze whispered.

Not from your lips.

Ruka nodded, but thought it foolish, wondering how much goodness petty hatred erased from the world. He looked one last time at the girl for the final touches on his statue, then mounted Dina. Lani approached and spoke low for his ears alone.

"You fight for this city, though it has not yet fought for itself." Her eyes looked strange, and unfamiliar. "It would not have shamed me to be your…matron," she said, and smiled. "It would have been the opposite."

Bukayag searched for deception, and perhaps willed it. Ruka wished he could stop his mind from knowing she had every reason to lie, to entice him. But his brother was awake, and his mind could not be ignored.

"In another life," he answered without emotion. His brother tried to kick the horse and move ever forwards, but Ruka held. He felt the burden of his emptiness, the price of his miracles, but still there was room for softer things. "Wife or no," he said quietly, "you and your son are safe as long as I live. Goodbye, princess."

He rode without meeting her eyes, and the Sons gathered behind and around him as they trotted towards the clear path to the gate. No one cheered or clapped, nor threw flowers as they sometimes did in stories. Two hundred men of ash rode in silence from the safety of the walls to face the greatest army ever assembled.

Some had tears in their eyes, which Ruka knew was joy. The old warriors had waited all their lives for such a moment, their greatest fear to die a useless burden in their beds. The great skald was not there to sing them a deserved song of glory, so a false prophet and shaman would have to do.

Ruka began a low song of war sung by Egil in a hundred halls. The surprised cavalrymen laughed and joined him, their deep voices raised together as the crowd stared, the low hum of chattering stopped as they listened to a foreign song sung by foreign men.

Ruka locked it away in his mind—all the sights and sounds of peace. Ketsra, like most cities, was a miracle. So many living things together in relative harmony, stacked to stave off the inevitable doom, conquering the world around them. A triumph of human nature.

The iron gate clanged. Outside the walls, only hard men and beasts of war existed, hooves trampling burnt life on an empty plain. It brought Ruka little pleasure, but as warmth flooded his spine he had to accept—unlike the city, which he respected but did not enjoy, it felt like home.

* * *

"General Harcas." The Naranian messenger bowed low with respect. "The Over-General invites you to attend him in his command tent. Please leave someone in command of your troops and follow me."

Osco almost rolled his eyes—as if he were too stupid or incompetent to handle chain of command. But he stayed composed. Like most Naranian insults, the condescension was incidental.

He waved a dismissal at his men, who sagged in relief then raised their shields and marched to the barracks while Osco stared.

"Lead on, honored messenger," Osco bowed politely, and kicked up ash as he followed the imperial servant. The massive encampment lay on a series of now burnt fields, which tinged everyone and everything with soot. The Tong had ravaged the countryside as they withdrew, setting fire to the land and taking the animals. Clever, but, considering the endless logistical train of the empire, ultimately irrelevant.

They soon crested a hill that should have held a lookout tower, and Osco surveyed the endless army of his enemy. At first he stared in disgust at soldiers scattered about the camp, wandering out of their units, gambling and even drinking with the host of camp followers. The sheer vastness of it all soon overtook him.

Intellectually, he knew Naran covered much of the continent. He knew it held fourteen cities and near as many tribal peoples within the borders of the sun god. To see it was something different. In their massive camp at the borders of the Tong, men and boys of every shape, color and size wore a thousand arrays of uniform and kit. They displayed every tribe, kingdom and race of men in the world, spreading from sight in all directions, a low hum like a swarm of bees buzzing from their gathered mass.

Smoke and campfires mixed with the dusky light. Carts, donkeys, slaves and merchants crawled the narrow passages between tents, more dense than a city's streets. Osco descended into it all behind his guide. He followed into the richest section of tents, until merchants became imperial servants in clean uniforms—even the dress of the slaves displaying their master's wealth as they scampered to serve.

Few here were soldiers. The Naranians went nowhere, even a battlefield, without large swaths of their bureaucracy.

After enough tents the size of small homes, Osco entered a plainer, square construction in military colors—the base of operations for Over-General Tau. Officers sat in their assigned places in a half ring around a cluttered table, the Over-General at its head.

Tau shared little with his contemporaries. Unlike them, he had spent much of his youth pacifying minor revolts in the Eastern edges of the empire. He was older, maybe sixty, from a minor family with little ties or power in the capital. He was, in other words, somewhat competent.

"Officer Harcas," the older man didn't look up from his paper. "Please take a seat."

Osco bowed and obeyed. Like all the others his seat was assigned, just as the speaking order, the agenda, and the procedures to change or adapt said agenda were assigned. Osco expected—if they could manage it— Naranians would also assign their bowel movements, and for a moment he wondered if some bureaucrat were working on a diet to make it so.

The two men next to Osco reflexively pulled away when he sat. As a rule, the others despised him and did little to hide it. The only exception was the other Mesanite, in charge of the forces from Malvey, who already sat in his assigned seat at the edge. He had been temporarily granted the rank of Colonel—the minimum possible to be in the tent—but was not allowed to speak unless spoken to. What house he was from and what he thought or knew of Osco, he had no idea, but at least his countryman displayed no outward sign of contempt. Aside from the Overgeneral, he alone acknowledged Osco with a nod.

Tau officially began his meeting. As important or perhaps more important than the meeting itself was the log of said meeting, no doubt to be sent to the emperor. Every man introduced himself, and the General dutifully recorded each as present. When they were finished establishing that, in fact, each man was in the room, they gave their progress reports on training and logistics, all of which were painfully routine. The general informed them, with an impressive assortment of complex words, that he had nothing new to tell them. One by one the officers gave up their opportunity to speak on other matters, except Commander Faoshen, who eagerly leaned in his chair.

"Point of complaint, General, regarding an administrative matter."

Osco blinked himself awake because most such complaints pertained to him.

"Proceed, Commander."

"Thank you, Over-General. Though it pains me to mention, the special-designate troops under the newly appointed General Harcas' command have yet again been documented in fights with other soldiers. According to the War Doctrines, when on campaign, this mandates serious action."

Tau's quill hovered over his parchment as his gaze flicked across the room.

Osco withheld the sigh. Such things were not about resolution, but an obsession with appearance. He was supposed to acknowledge the complaint and apologize, promising he would look into the matter. However, Commander Faoshen was well understood to be incompetent, appointed by his family to keep him out of family business, Osco could therefore ignore the ritual entirely.

He kept his voice without interest. "If the emperor's favored men are engaged in fights, Over-General, surely the other soldiers must be considered at fault, else we risk displeasing the son of heaven. But I bow to your wisdom."

Tau's heavy brow narrowed as his eyes returned to Faoshen. "I agree, and suggest you officially withdraw the complaint."

The young commander's face turned bright red. He had gambled, but only deepened his shameful reputation. "Of course, Over-General," he bowed from his chair, "you are correct, as always, I withdraw it."

Tau squiggled a line on his parchment, then finished the meeting, as usual, without having discussed procedure if the army were attacked, or indeed if anything unexpected happened at all.

By the time they left the now sweltering tent, the sun was entirely down. For a moment Osco met the eyes of his countryman, seeing a well-hidden strain he suspected mirrored his own. In the brief look Osco felt they exchanged an understanding—a mutual misery in knowing such an army had once defeated them, and brought the blue city low.

They turned and went their separate ways, and Osco thought even now, despite their poor discipline and simple tactics, they would win again. With sheer manpower, they would overwhelm their foe, and the last free city of the South would fall. Even the barbarians and their sorcerer couldn't stop such a massive army, and so they too would flee, or die.

Osco returned to his tent to sit and stare at a hidden bottle of rice wine. Much later, he took it, and hoped his children might find a better chance.

Chapter 28

"Land!" called a bleary-eyed sailor from above. "That's paradise, brothers! I see the sand!"

Dala wept quietly in the half-shattered hull of the shaman's 'Kingmaker' as cheers and cries of joy swept the ship. Men and women embraced or thanked Nanot or the old sea gods for sparing them. Many sailors who weren't bailing sagged to sleep where they fell.

Dala put herself together and turned to her attendants, smiling as she accepted bows and words of devotion of behalf of Nanot for sparing all their lives. With a groan of pleasure and pain she released the iron ring she'd been holding, and rose wobbily to her feet. "Rest, children," she eased the first girl to rise back down. "I'll return shortly."

Her stomach lurched even now that the waters had calmed, but she managed to climb the wet stairs. Everywhere bits of water seeped through warped or broken pieces of the deck, pooling in the lowest portions as men threw it back with buckets.

"How many days since the storm began, captain?"

She found the greying man leaned against the rudder, his eyes glazed, his face aged a decade.

"I don't know, holy mother. Three, maybe four. We survived by the grace of god."

Dala blinked in disbelief. It had felt like months. She put a hand to his shoulder to tell him she was not offended by his earlier actions. Unlike many of her colleagues, Dala knew hierarchy must bend to competence when required. "The mother's grace, and the skill of you and your men, Captain. All will know your deeds on that sea, I promise you."

The old sailor summoned the strength to bow, and Dala left him to rest.

Most of the sons of Imler looked as pale spirits, staring at the leaking hull with unseeing eyes. Their few horses had become mad in the storm, the crew forced to kill them, or throw them to the sea. Their armor and weapons had scattered, most tossed overboard so they wouldn't kill as they thrashed in the waves.

"We'll be safe soon, on land with allies," Dala announced to them, and to the hold. "We're almost there."

Those still awake bowed. Dala returned to her ring, wrapping weak and torn hands around the metal without thinking before she too collapsed and slept.

She woke with a start from a dream of drowning in a cage. Amira shook her gently.

"We've arrived, holy mother. The captain took us straight to the beach. We've made it."

Dala clutched the woman's hands in thanks then climbed to the deck. It was her first time seeing paradise, and no matter her exhaustion or condition, she was not going to miss the view.

Bizarrely shaped trees were everywhere, all a brighter green than any plant in the Ascom. The pale beach reflected the sun; the water was blue, as Ruka promised, so clear Dala could see the sand. She put a hand over her mouth to hold back the tears.

Voices began sounding all around them, down the coast and from men in small ships with three hulls. Half naked islanders with spears, bows or knives soon surrounded their ship, gesturing to stay back and stay on board. After a short wait, two others came in beautiful silks, one in blue and silver, the other in red and green. They approached and began speaking the foreign words Ruka had taught his people over a decade.

Dala knew most, but these were spoken so quickly and chained together so closely it was difficult to understand. She looked for the island ambassador but couldn't find him, fearing for a moment he had been lost in the storm. For now it didn't matter. She stepped off the ship to speak with the men, the captain and some of his crew close behind her.

"Loa," she greeted in their tongue. The colorful men gaped, widened eyes crawling over her hair, face and body. Such direct male attention was uncomfortable, but Ruka had warned her it would be so. She put a hand on her chest. "I am Dala, Matriarch of the Ascom. Please take me to your king."

The two men exchanged words even more rapidly, but the man in red and green held up his hand as if they should wait where they were.

Dala knew many of her people needed water. More importantly, they needed to get off their dreadful ship, and to hurry to the shaman to learn what else was needed. She smiled politely, and tried again more simply.

"Alaku king ally. Please take me now. The storm…was very bad."

Again the two men seemed to argue in hurried words. "Where is the foreigner, Eka?" Dala turned and whispered to the captain, who shrugged. She yelled up to the ship to find him but none of the crew had seen him either.

As they waited, another islander came running with a scroll, handing it to the speakers. They both read and said nothing for a time, then spoke to their men in low voices, at last coming forward with nervous but hard eyes.

"Men stand here," said the man in silver, "women stand here." He gestured in a line to two different spots on the beach. "Remove your weapons." He pointed at the captain's spear.

The sailors instantly bristled at the tone, but looked to Dala to explain. She wasn't sure what to say. More of the islanders were gathering with every moment, but these people were her allies. She did not see any reason to fear them.

"We arrive with Admiral Mahen," she hoped she'd said the name correctly. "I am Ascomi queen. We need not be disarmed. We…"

The man in red and green stepped forward, reached up with his little hand, and slapped her.

"I don't care who you are, savage," she vaguely understood. "Men here!" he shouted again, "women here, or all of you die on this beach!"

Dala felt far more shock than pain. For a moment the crew of her ship were silent, perhaps just as amazed as she. Then they roared. Every nearby, exhausted man of ash leapt at Dala's attacker, their honor demanding his death.

Dala called for calm but knew it was useless. To strike a matriarch, in full view of men sworn to protect her, was beyond all tolerance. Any warrior who did nothing would be so dishonored he would burn for a thousand years.

With their surprise attack, the sailors managed to stab the man in red and green several times before the smaller warriors clubbed and grappled them to the beach. Most were so weak from the sea they could barely stand, but still fought with abandon.

Dala withdrew and watched, seeing several take wounds that would surely kill them.

"Please, children," she screamed. "Not now! Your moment will come. Do as they say. The shaman will be close. Don't throw away your lives!"

Whether they heard and agreed or were simply beaten into submission, the battle soon ended. The islanders dragged survivors from the ship and divided them. Dala did as she was told, but noticed, very carefully, they had not searched the women for weapons.

After her first few deadly moments in paradise, Dala found herself bound and marched along the beautiful beach with thin but strong rope. Her face was soon covered by a dark hood, and she lost even the view.

* * *

"My lord. Lady." The messenger bowed low before Tane and Kikay in their receiving room.

Kikay squirmed on her throne. She'd received word of the ship from one of her spies, but only barely before the king, so she'd had to use the rather pitiful help at hand. Tane gestured for the messenger to continue.

"A foreign ship has been found beached in a military district, lord. The army is holding them until they receive word. They are prepared to handle wounded, or prisoners, if that is your wish. I await your order."

Tane frowned as he glanced at Kikay. "So. Their fleet survives. The timing is close, though the storm likely caught them." He turned to the messenger. "Summon all my physicians. Have them placed as guests in the palace and see to their every need. Stow and see to their ship. Begin repairs, if possible."

"Yes, lord." The messenger bowed.

Kikay's nails dug into the wooden pommels of her chair. It seemed Eka had failed, which brought her more disappointment than surprise. Now Tane was going to fail, again, the son so much like the father. He had more charm, perhaps, but less cunning. Both lacked the ruthlessness required.

Like always, Kikay was supposed to sit idle and watch it happen. The dutiful aunt. The quiet problem solver cleaning up all Alaku messes and weaknesses, enduring painful lessons and familial death until the boy learned the dangers of the world.

No, she thought. Not this time. Not again.

"Enough."

Her voice rang from the vaulted rafters, and the messenger froze in an awkward stance. Tane sighed, and turned to her politely. "I know your opinion, Aunty, but they are here. Whatever we do later I prefer to at least start pleasantly."

"I said enough," Kikay raised her voice, and stared into her nephew's eyes.

Tane's gaze flicked over the many servants in the room, and his expression lost politeness.

"I am no longer your nephew to be commanded. I am your king. Best remember that."

Kikay shifted towards the boy without breaking her stare. It was time he learned reality.

"You are what I say you are, nephew. And I've had enough of your half-measures and reasons. Enough." Finally she looked to the shadows behind the curtain of the Alaku crest, where her newest servant waited. She pointed at the messenger. "Take him."

Three of the four door guards which were truly hers moved without pause, seizing the messenger's arms. Tane's voice was amazingly calm, which Kikay decided was naivety rather than understanding.

"I don't know what you think you're doing, Aunty, but…"

Kikay stood and stepped away from the dais and the guards.

"Brother Tamo, take my nephew into custody."

Tane rose with a confused but determined expression, lifting a sword scabbarded behind his throne. He had two 'hidden' guards behind him, three more behind a secret door, and many more outside the room. None of these concerned Kikay.

The Batonian monk ascended the dais, serene and with his hands in his cuffs, the ever-pleasant smile stretched across his face. He looked so much like Eka, she realized, they could have been twins. He said nothing as he advanced, for he had maintained his vow of silence for many years. Despite the inappropriate circumstances, Kikay wondered if he had also taken a vow of chastity, and resolved to find out.

Tane's face darkened. He gestured for his hidden guards.

"You go too far, Kikay." He pointed, and spoke so much like his father. "Stop this man. Seize Princess Kikay for treason. I want her in a cell, now—and not some padded room for guests. I am your king. Obey me, or face the consequences."

Many hands and brows twitched. The hidden guards burst from behind their curtains and doors, and Kikay's guards rushed to meet them. Tamo jerked from the dais with unnatural speed, hands striking men like iron clubs, smashing them down with every blow. Her own hidden guard sprayed arrows and shot to kill.

In a few heartbeats, the 'battle' was over, the room silent. Kikay shook her head.

"You are family, nephew, and I love you. I gave you your chance to protect these islands and you failed. We can't afford more mistakes."

Tane stared at the guards that had betrayed him, not with fear, only rage. "Don't be fools. You won't survive this. I am the Alaku king. Take her, now, and I'll still let you live."

Tamo moved gracefully up the steps, sandaled feet leaving marks in the blood. Tane held his sword between them.

"Men and their titles. You focused too much on your father," Kikay sighed. "He never was the harsh thing you thought he was. It was always me who chose the guards, me who knew their names and their families and ensured they were paid or punished. I have always protected you, as I protected your father. Don't fight me."

Still, he did. Kikay respected him for that.

The Batonian vaulted forward, and the king twisted and cried out as he swung his blade—seemingly a skilled and killing blow against an unarmed man. But Kikay knew otherwise.

Her father had sent her to the monks as a girl, and she had learned of the divine blood that flowed through their veins.

Tamo—master of the dance of light and shadow, which weaved the reality of the world—had been bred and trained in the boy-god's Way. No mortal man could kill him.

He swat aside the blade with his palm and shot forward, seizing Tane's sword-arm as he wrenched him to the tiled floor.

"You can't just kill me," Tane growled from the tiles. "And you can't rule, Kikay. No island has ever been ruled by a a queen. My lords won't accept you."

"You disappoint me, Nephew. Sri Kon has long been ruled from the shadows. I see no reason to point it out now. Please take the king to his chambers, Brother Tamo."

The monk nodded and dragged a kicking, shouting Tane without a hint of difficulty, until the rear door opened and closed, and bathed the hall in renewed silence.

The remaining servants stood with pale faces and downcast eyes. Kikay did not blame them. They would of course have to be killed. Kikay would cleanse the entire palace and perhaps even their families. It wasn't the way she preferred, but perhaps inevitable. She quirked a brow as she looked at the messenger, whose body seemed locked in a motionless pose, as if stillness would protect him.

"Kill him."

Kikay refrained from saying who, because she was curious. The young messenger blinked and twitched as if trying to wake from a nightmare, and two guards from the doorway stepped forward.

One simply took his arms, as if knowing instantly who the true killer was. The other dropped his spear and withdrew a long knife, stabbing without pause, over and over until the screaming messenger fell with quick gasps, then curled on the floor and stilled.

The killer met Kikay's eyes and bowed. For now she withheld a nod of approval. "What is your name, soldier?

"Gento, my lady."

She knew his name, of course, as she knew he had killed his first man at the age of ten for stealing from his father. Kikay had long found ways to pardon such men, and get them on the royal payroll.

"Please bring me my messengers, Gento. Dispose of the bodies tonight after your shift. Recruit five good men. Your salary is tripled as of this moment, and theirs will double. They will report to you. Come and see me when it's done."

"Yes, lady. Thank you."

She rewarded him with an approving nod, then lifted a stack of letters, glad she'd spent the time to learn Tane's handwriting.

"Oh, and Gento," she called, running an absent finger along the arm of Farahi's throne. "Go to the beach. I want the savages arrested and imprisoned. The women we'll keep, at least for now. The men die tomorrow publicly."

"At once, my lady."

The young killer turned to go with some of the other loyal guards, but Kikay felt at ease. Brother Tamo was close. She had already agreed to Old Lo's price, and would have the master's perfect obedience. She was annoyed he couldn't speak because it meant she'd need another chief servant. This was not as efficient as Arun, perhaps, but too much power in one man's hands had always been a risk.

When she finally sat in the Alaku throne, the same her father had used, she was surprised at the rush of pleasure. It felt right. All those years of persuasion and games and nonsense, always to cajole her brother or her nephew or the Orang Kaya, whether with words or wealth, her body or with blood.

Now it was over. It was finally over. She was free.

Chapter 29

Dala sat with Amira and her other attendants in a foreign cage, and rested her eyes. A few guards sat nearby, drinking and gawking.

"I thought these bastards didn't have any women," one said. The others laughed.

"They're kind of big…and filthy, neh?" said another.

A third pointed at Dala. "Can always wash 'em off. I'd climb that one like a tree."

The men all laughed, and Dala made no indication she understood. She knew men better than most priestesses—that in private they spoke of women with irreverence. Still, the crudeness was jarring.

It was hard enough to process the giant fortress of cut stone, the incredible heat and moisture in the air, the foreign sounds and smells and the near death at sea. Now she was trapped, at the mercy of small men, without any of her power. Dala forced herself to breathe.

"Drink, sisters," she slid the remnants of their water bowl to Amira first, whose thick lips were still cracked. They also had a bowl of rice—a foreign crop her people had learned well over the past decade.

"Eat. Regain your strength. We may yet have to fight."

The women did as commanded. With the exception of Amira, they were not warriors, but Dala had not chosen her attendants because they were the daughters of important women—she had chosen them for their devotion.

Awhile after they'd finished, another man in fine fabrics entered the dim room with more warriors. The guards leapt to attention, and the newcomers eyes drifted over everything.

"One of them speaks some of our words. Which is it?"

Dala stepped to the bars.

"Fleet in storm, but many more come. Be careful, ally."

The guards looked surprised at her words, but the new islander seemed uninterested.

"By order of King Alaku," he said, "you and your people are pirates in these islands. Tomorrow your men will drown in the King's Sea. You women are royal property and will stay here until the king says otherwise. As you are not citizens, there will be no trial."

Dala met the man's cold eyes, anger rising as she translated the words. He turned, apparently finished with his task. All the guards followed him out, taking the only torches from the walls. They locked the metal door behind them, and Dala remained at the bars as the prison plunged into total darkness.

"What did he say?" whispered Amira.

Dala fumbled her way to the women and took a steadying breath. "We'll have to do something, very soon."

A knife left its scabbard. "We can make rope from our hair," Amira whispered. "If a man comes too close, we catch him."

The sawing sound of the knife on the woman's beautiful black locks filled the prison, then moved one by one to the others. "I would not fight a son of Imler with just a blade," Amira added. "But, these men are more like strong children." Some of the others grunted their agreement, and Dala put her hands to her sisters' knees and shoulders in thanks. She lay back against the wall, putting the hot welt on her cheek against the coolness of the stone.

Royal property, she heard again, said so easily in the foreigner's words.

Servants became much like property in the land of ash, but they were not prisoners. They could make any agreements they wished, leave when they wished, and could challenge anyone at the circle of law.

Ruka had explained 'slavery', but Dala had not understood until this moment—to be held by force, like a criminal in the stocks, forever, though you had committed no crime.

In the Ascom, criminals were maimed, killed, or outcast, held only until their trials were over. They had no prisons. To suffer such an existence seemed so foreign and impossible Dala could accept only one word to describe it—a word that implied a state so intolerable, only violence and death would resolve it. That word was war.

* * *

Footsteps echoed in the dark.

"Be ready," Dala whispered. Her sisters shifted to their knees, ready to spring to the bars. Amira held the rope of their hair loose behind her back.

The dark silhouette of a man entered lit sparingly by candlelight. He stood in the corridor with something tucked under an arm, then approached—much too close to the cell.

Amira did not hesitate. She was a child of the steppes and had caught a hundred colts from horseback in youthful games. She swung her rope, her throw true, the loop sailing past the man's head and snapping down as she pulled. With the barest flick of his hand, the visitor swatted it away, and pulled back his hood.

"I require distraction," said the king's servant, Eka, in the Ascomi tongue. A black fabric covered him from neck to toe, with maybe even a mask he'd pulled away from his face. He held up a key.

"I thought you were dead. Open the door." Dala wrapped her hands around the bars.

"The king has been betrayed," he continued as if he hadn't heard. "You and your men will help me deal with his aunt."

"Our men are elsewhere. Open the door."

"Once you and your men have helped free the king, without harming him, you are free to return to your ship. The king may assist you, or he may not. I guarantee only your lives and freedom. Do you understand?"

Dala stared as she gripped the cool metal. He was tall, but thin, and she had the urge to reach through and strangle the life from him. A tingle in her spine warned her away.

"I understand."

"Your men are held in the prison proper, where there are many guards and soldiers." Here he paused, and shrugged. "You women can fight?"

Dala pulled the seax from the inner fold of her dress, slapping it with a clang against the bars. She felt an almost frantic need to be free of this cell, as if she were trapped beneath too much stone in a mountain, or underwater, only moments from suffocating.

"We can fight," she nearly growled.

Eka met her eyes and watched very carefully, as if looking for something specific. He took an unstrung bow and several quivers from beneath his arm, and what looked like a letter from his pocket, slipping all through the bars, along with the key.

"Then this is for you."

Dala blinked in confusion as she unsealed the letter, and read island symbols. The writing was very neat and precise, with no greeting or titles. It said, rather strangely:

"If Eka/Arun (or if you do not know him, simply the man in black before you), fails, you must kill the woman, or all of you will die."

When she was finished, Dala folded the paper and placed it in a pocket. Eka watched her eyes as if curious, but seemed satisfied, and turned towards the only exit.

"Can we trust him?" Amira whispered as they prepared to follow.

"We have no choice."

The foreign 'ambassador' led with careful, silent steps. Amira strung the bow he'd brought them, looping the straps of the quivers over her shoulders. Dala's other attendants held seaxes in strong but shaking hands.

"The halls to the prison are narrow," whispered their guide. "We must kill anyone we find. If they escape they'll alert the castle."

Dala nodded, and together they crept through the perfect rectangles of stone, twice waiting for Eka to explore ahead, then passing dead men with cut throats.

The maze of corridor's led to sturdy gates with more winding passages and at least five guards visible on patrol. Eka paused in the gloom of a windowless hall, and met Dala's eyes.

"Clear the doors. I will help you."

Without another word he pulled the mask over his face, turned down another corridor, and seemingly vanished from sight.

Dala's heart pounded through her grip on the seax. She looked to Amira and her attendants as she raised the blade.

"How's your aim, sister?"

Amira quirked a brow. She was the only one of them without fear written plain across her face.

"Average, holy mother."

"Average for a murderous nomad, sister, or for a priestess?"

The older woman grinned, and Dala reminded herself that God watched over all.

"Be ready," she said. "Stay in the dark. I'm going to gather them." She tucked the seax in her sleeve, then put a hand to the wall and limped towards the guards.

"Help!" she called weakly in the island tongue as she approached the doors.

Two of the guards squinted in the gloom, then exchanged a look before they advanced.

"King betrayed," Dala grunted, then dropped to a knee and leaned against the wall.

The young men put their spears up as they reached for her. They weren't quite her height, but they looked strong. "Please," she said, taking the hand of the first and making to pull herself up.

"Whose out there?" shouted another voice, two more guards now coming from a nearby hall with weapons readied. Dala waited until they were close. She grunted in pain and pulled at the two guards trying to help her. As they struggled to lift her, she pulled her knife, and stabbed it deep into the first man's gut.

Amira's first arrow struck the other in the neck. The guards charged and Dala could only hope her sisters stopped them. She stabbed her man again and again as she pulled him down, his body and blood covering her on the floor. She heard the feminine grunts of her attendants as they fought the other guards, but she couldn't see. When she was sure her target was dead she rose up and found her sisters had already won.

A red line dripped across Amira's scalp, but she seemed alright, and held a spear disarmed from the guard. "Well done, sisters," Dala met each woman's eyes, then turned back towards the gate. Two more corpses lay at Eka's feet, waiting patiently at the door.

"Drag the corpses inside," he whispered, then cracked the gate.

The men of ash sat in three different cells. They stared in amazement as their matriarch and the other priestesses entered stained with blood, then as Eka unlocked the iron catches. Between the sailors and warriors, fifteen remained. Several were wounded from the beach, but maybe ten seemed in good fighting shape. Eka met Dala's eyes, as if unsure what she might tell her men now that he'd freed them.

"Our ally is betrayed." Dala pointed at Eka, and paused. "The ambassador asks us to free his lord before we go. I gave my word. But I am not your chief."

The captain stood with a groan, a layer of bloody cloth wrapped around his shoulder and left hand. "Get to it, lads." He gestured at the table and chairs set aside for guards in the cell, and the sons of Imler ripped them apart, all coming up with wooden clubs.

Eka handed them spears from the dead guards, then frowned as he looked to Dala, a narrow-eyed suspicion on his brow.

"The king's sister. She's not to be harmed."

Dala paused, knowing now who 'the woman' in the letter was. But if the ambassador had not written it, then who did?

She shrugged in response, as if it made no difference.

"As you wish."

* * *

Kikay shifted on her brother's throne.

"Captain Gento, where the hell are my soldiers?"

Her newly appointed killer stood amongst a small crowd of messengers. He slapped another on the back and sent him out the door before he turned and bowed. "The inner courtyard has been locked, my lady. Someone has sabotaged the gate. Most of our soldiers are trapped outside. I have them fetching ladders." Here he stopped, and winced. "The barracks are also…on fire, it seems. The guard in the courtyard are dealing with it, or searching for the prisoners."

Kikay's nails dug into the wood, and she nearly screamed 'how could that happen and who could have done it?'

But she knew. Anger and fear swirled like mixed poison in her veins. Still, she would not run. Not from her home. Not from a dozen limping savages and a disloyal lover, doomed as soon as her killers rallied. She looked to her new bodyguard, waiting patiently in the corner, and took a surge of comfort.

"Bring the guards here, all of them, right now."

The captain winced. "My lady, the fire could rage out of control. Surely the prisoners mean to escape in the distraction. There are only a few places along the wall they could possibly…."

"That was not a suggestion! They are not escaping, you incompetent fool. They are coming here, for me. Now. Bring every soldier."

Gento's face glowed red as he bowed, gesturing to his new men as they marched for the door.

"Bring Tane," Kikay told the hidden assassin behind her, who bowed and disappeared.

She didn't want to kill her nephew, but she would, and Eka would know that. The threat alone should suffice. How the man had managed to set a fire large enough to threaten the barracks and sabotage the gate, without notice, she had no idea, but it didn't matter. These were only distractions.

"My lady, there are barbarians in the courtyard!"

A messenger's head poked through the crack in the open door. His eyes bulged and a blue blade slashed across his throat. Kikay found herself standing.

"Close the door!" she screamed, and three guards still at the iron barrier leapt to obey. One flew back as the door flung open, a blood-soaked savage on the other side wielding what looked like a statue's arm as a club. He glanced around the room, then charged.

More came behind him, both barbarian men and women, loosing arrows and screaming like wild beasts as they set upon Kikay's guard. She backed away and cried out for her bodyguard, who advanced to the foot of the dais with his hands in his cuffs, calm as a Bato breeze.

Two of the barbarians rushed to meet him. A voice of warning came from the door, but Tamo took the spear from his back, spinning it before he lashed out like a viper, the curved blade at the weapon's end cutting across the first barbarian's face, then dropping to half-sever the other man's shin. The first fell back blinded, the second to the stone.

The chaotic fighting carried on. With the exception of Tamo, Kikay saw her remaining soldiers were being slaughtered. Some ran for the hidden doors, most falling to arrows or spears in their backs.

At last Eka entered the palace, more of the savages behind him, and closed the door. Kikay's rage swelled at the sight.

"Have you lost your mind?" she called into the now growing silence of the finished brawl. "You're a traitor to your own people."

"I serve the king," Eka said, as if without pleasure. His eyes seemed so casual, his demeanor so calm. He took in the corpses and the many secrets of the room, checking each like a craftsman at his work. Finally his gaze flicked to Tamo at the foot of the dais, then at last to Kikay.

"What have you done, Kika-che?"

Kikay trembled uncontrollably, her hands balled into fists.

"What your treachery forced me to. Do you think I wanted this?"

"What did they ask," Eka said quietly, the sadness in his eyes another wound in Kikay's heart. "Kale's son, I imagine? How many children have you given them now?"

Kikay forced her limbs to stop shaking. She wouldn't listen to this. Not from the man who had made her deal with the monks again. Her servant signaled with a hiss from behind he was ready with the king, and Kikay raised a hand that meant to wait. She knew she should run, but she was tired of hiding, tired of waiting, of holding back.

"Tell your savages to put down their weapons," she said, "or I will cut Tane's throat."

Eka came forward as if unconcerned, his eyes now on Tamo.

"I will put another of Farahi's sons on the throne, Kikay, it makes no difference."

"They won't make it." Kikay spat. When her ex-lover said nothing she felt the words gather and release. "Did what we have mean nothing? Do you think me so incapable? Or is that monster your master now?"

"I have only ever served one master. Now let his son go. You love Tane, Kikay. I know you do. Stop this."

Frustration and loss warred with Kikay's anger, and wetness touched her eyes. "I won't let your weakness destroy my family's legacy. You've been bewitched, just like Farahi. Stop him Tamo. Kill them all."

The Ching master descended the steps with his spear. Eka stepped away, speaking in the dreadful tongue of the barbarians to the many waiting giants with his hand as if to tell them to stay away.

"Your faith is misplaced," Eka spoke quickly. "Bato is corrupt, brother. It always has been. No being who treats men like animals, who turns kin against kin, is a god worthy of the title. Come with me. Leave that place and its secrets."

The Ching master's smile was polite, his expression serene. He extended a hand, fingers twitching inward as if in invitation. Eka's chin tilted, his nostrils flared, and he drew a short blade in one hand, his blue knife in the other. Kikay's memory sparked as she looked on his face, and she remembered the look from so many years ago—trapped in a cage with her torturer at his side. For the second time in a decade of life together, Eka was afraid.

A sound like the echo of a stone falling down a well seemed to hum from Tamo's body. The air blurred as he moved, a streak of motion as his spear spun then jabbed again and again. Eka reeled, barely deflecting the blade with the barest motions as he fell away across the room.

Like the barbarians, and the hidden servants, and the duelists themselves, she could only watch, mesmerized, oblivious to the world.

Kikay knew secret power existed in the heart of Bato—that the boy-spirit who lived forever gave men 'gifts'. The monks were more than men. She knew that. But she could not have imagined.

Tamo's feet whirled as his spear struck from every angle, jabbing at Eka's face, feet, and body even as the Ching master withdrew from any sign of a counter. Kikay finally blinked. When she opened her eyes blood dripped from Arun's arm and leg. He advanced, blade whistling as it deflected spear thrust after thrust and he tried and failed to catch his brother. She blinked again, and his face was torn. His hand was pierced, his black shirt coming apart.

In moments, Arun slumped to the floor. Tamo stopped and watched his brother with that ever-present smile, head quirked as if only curious. Kikay's cry to stop the fight was lodged in her throat. Every wound on her lover's body felt as if it were hers.

Arun looked up from his knees and met her eyes, except not quite—as if he refused, and truly looked past her. The fear was gone, only the sadness remained. He shook his head, as if to tell her not to do this, and Tamo glanced at her from the corner of his eye, no indication if he cared to spare his brother or not.

Kikay stood frozen as she considered. Perhaps I can spare him, she thought. Perhaps he can still be turned and I will have two Batonians bound to me with blood. And together we can destroy these barbarians and return Sri Kon to its glory.

Tamo had stopped smiling, his quiet steps now racing across the stone in Kikay's direction. She raised her hands in panic, confused, knowing the binding with the monks was unbreakable and specific, his betrayal impossible. Still she readied as if she might somehow defend herself. A feminine voice whispered in her ear.

"I am not slave."

A strong hand seized her hair and yanked. Fire burned through Kikay's back, and she tried to scream, then gasp for air, and failed at both. As she was pulled down, she looked into the pale green eyes of a barbarian woman, now cradling her in strong arms like a child. Kikay tried to push her away but lacked the strength.

Tamo reached her side, spear floating at the barbarian's throat as he frowned, and inspected.

'Help me,' Kikay tried to say. 'Kill her!' But both came out as choked gasps, her lungs feeling as if they would burst, her limbs so useless and weak.

Tamo sighed. He rose and snapped his spear over his knee, turning away with hands in cuffs, as if the room and its people no longer concerned him. He walked towards the gate without a word.

Kikay kept fighting for air. She felt as if the world had gone mad and she was being ignored, everyone conspiring against her.

"Hush now." The barbarian woman was suddenly gone, and it was Eka cradling her in his arms, his blood-smeared face smiling down at her. Voices echoed all around him, and Kikay saw Tane bowing to the barbarian queen, his voice far away.

"Thank you, ally. Of course. I'll bring my physicians for your men, and help you to the continent. I'll do everything I can."

She tried to take a breath, to get up, to make Arun do something, but he held her fast on the tiled floor.

"Goodbye Kika-che," he whispered, and she wanted to tell him not to trust these people, that there was still time. He kissed her brow, then darkness.

Chapter 30

Ruka raced across flat Tong farmland, slowing as he spotted the road. Another seemingly endless procession of carts, donkeys, and Naranians cluttered it, as far as he could see on both horizons.

"How many soldiers?" he called. Birmun's horse snorted as he nudged it forward.

"More than yesterday, shaman, but not by much. I count no more than two per wagon."

Ruka nodded. His eyes were not as good in the light as the sons of Imler. He squinted at the sun, trying to measure how much light remained using waterclocks in his Grove. They had lost time to rest and graze their exhausted horses, killing a few scouts on foot, but now they were ready. It would be a long day of blood.

"Come, Dina." Ruka squeezed his thighs and clicked his tongue, and Sula's daughter swished her tail as she advanced. He glanced back at the Sons, whose thirst for glory remained unquenched. Such men did not require a speech.

"Fire the carts," he called, "kill any in your path. When the sun touches the horizon, meet West over the hills. Guard your lives, cousins, you are needed tomorrow."

He crested the slight bulge of hill, summoning a long-spear from his Grove. The warm metal filled his grip as he couched it for a charge.

"Make your father proud," he whispered in Dina's ear. As the riders came into their sight, shouts of warning and screams of terror erupted from the Naranian line.

With no further urging, Dina charged headlong towards the column, running for a gap. A few arrows and stones flew past her barded head and body, the distance fading in moments. Ruka ripped a spearmen from his feet, skewering his chest with his longer weapon. He sent his shield back to the Grove and drew a sword in his other hand, hacking at wagon riders on both sides, screaming to further terrify the animals. He heard the Sons storm around him, throwing javelins and lancing hapless men.

The first resistance shattered. Soldiers and merchants fled as slaves dropped to their knees, or crawled beneath the wagons with hands over their heads.

Ruka lifted a torch, sparking it before trotting down the caravan. All the wagons were covered with good, cloth tarps—which no doubt offered fine protection against the rain. They were, however, highly flammable.

Flames erupted everywhere the horsemen charged. Naranian civilians fled in almost random directions, growing ever more terrified as every soldier they found either fell to a snarling killer, or turned and fled themselves.

Ruka's warriors killed almost leisurely. Theirs was the strongest, thinnest armor Ruka had ever produced over fifteen years of perfection. They wielded swords and spears of the finest steel, and rode mounts bred over a thousand years for war. The riders themselves feared only that Vol would see the death they dealt, and find their skill at murder wanting.

Bukayag had his fun. Ruka left him to the slaughter, waiting until the bottom of Volus' eye touched the distant hills, then shouting withdrawal to those who could hear. He spurred Dina West for escape and rest, his own ragged breaths matching the animal's.

When they'd escaped, he looked back at the fading light to see a line of flames from one end of the road to the other, as far as he could see. Corpses lay like ants around an upturned hill, as if they'd perished in battle against a coiling snake of fire.

Later, in their makeshift camp, Ruka took stock and found only one horse was lost, its leg broken in the charge. The men had taken injuries, but no losses.

He left them to their sleep, walking into the night to patrol for enemy scouts. Tomorrow evening, perhaps, they would find another section of road, and attack again. Ruka let his brother roam the world of the living, knowing he would need his strength now more than ever, and had to accept the risk. In his Grove, he helped the dead dig more graves.

* * *

Osco ate in amiable silence beside his countrymen when the messenger arrived. Despite their inauspicious beginnings, Osco and Marcel—the other Mesanite commander—had become something like friends.

One morning Osco had plopped himself next to Marcel at dawn with the others, the tables mostly unfilled as the rest of the army slept.

"I'm supposed to spy on you," he'd explained. "Another valuable imperial order. You look like House Albin."

The junior officers had properly sat in silence until Marcel spoke.

"Yes, House Albin. Unless my mother lied."

None of the men so much as smiled at the joke, and Osco met Marcel's eyes.

"The city makes the son."

Marcel had nodded at the old expression, and that had been that.

Osco ate with his countrymen in the mornings after, and the junior officers had mocked the Naranian army in good humor between bites, repeating the ritual daily. Nothing else of importance was discussed, nor any news shared. Osco wondered briefly if his family had asked these men to kill him if opportunity arose, but he doubted they would, and in any case it didn't bother him much.

Every day the army marched half the length they should have, at about the pace of a diseased, legless cripple. Osco went to his update meetings, learned nothing of value, then returned to his tent and drank. In the few rare drills he was allowed with his soldiers, he heard whispers. They were not alone in the enemy fields, said the men. The foreigners were attacking.

Vicious raids were apparently damaging supply lines. Scouts had been sent to cover every road and field to Naranian territory, with forces moved to protect key shipments.

At first Osco paid the rumors little attention. Then men said a string of quiet executions preceded a string of quiet promotions. Osco hadn't believed this at first either, for what madness could make an army kill its most experienced officers mere days before a siege? But days passed, and men vanished from meetings, and so it seemed the rumors were true.

On the sixth day of pathetic marching in the midst of another rain, the messenger arrived for Osco. He put down his breakfast and nodded to Marcel as he rose, and the messenger led him through the ordered chaos of the camp, down to the rich tents of the nobles and bureaucrats, then further into a walled square that was built every night. At the edges of the grand quarters, Osco recognized an imperial guard, and struggled to keep his mouth from gaping.

The 'tent' was the size of a house. Guards surrounded the wall, others the curtains and temporary doors that must have been placed on some kind of stand. They searched him, then led him inside progressively cleaner carpets until he was told to remove his boots. Everything stunk of incense and sweat.

"Once inside, kneel in obeisance," said the final imperial guard, wearing mostly a soldier's uniform. "Your emperor is before you."

Osco bowed and obeyed. As he lowered himself he saw many servants and high-ranking military men around the emperor's throne.

"General Harcas," came the now familiar, frightening voice of the son of heaven. "Thank you for coming. There is a problem I was hoping you could assist with."

"Of course, divine lord."

The tent was otherwise silent. After a brief pause the emperor laughed, which seemed genuine and almost good natured.

"Ah, General. Thank you. I am reminded with great amusement you are not Naranian. My other servants would have professed their worthlessness and begged for my indulgence. Your barbarian speech is quaint, but refreshing. I will honor you by speaking in the same gruff manner. The problem is this: we face an unfamiliar enemy. Their strengths are considerable and unknown. I am told you are one of few men to face them and survive. Will you please answer some questions?"

"Anything, divine lord. But in truth I know little."

"Little is much better than nothing. Honored servants, please ask General Harcas questions you think will prevent any more of your utter failures. Please ask freely. But, Over-General Fu to start, perhaps?"

The silence took a somewhat different, more deadly tone, until an older man cleared his throat.

"Are the barbarians all capable of…producing weapons from air? And is there any limit to the amount?"

Osco felt a kind of surreality at the question. Here he was, disowned by his family, kneeling as a servant of the emperor, answering questions about magic swords. Yet it was true. He had befriended an island sorcerer, and seen the giant's power with his own eyes.

"I believe only their leader is capable of this. My advice is to assume no limit."

"Is the metal of their weapons and armor another form of sorcery?" asked a different voice. "Do they all carry it, or only the animal riders?"

"I believe the metal is a form of iron, General, but with exceptional ore and craftsmanship. All of the warriors I faced on Sri Kon carried it. Their armor was nearly impervious to Mesanite stabbing swords."

Some of the men exchanged sounds of incredulity. A few whispered before the emperor's voice snapped like a whip.

"If I had wished to hear children squabble and fret I would have brought some. Ask your questions and save me your commentary!"

Osco swore he heard a man gasp, or maybe weep, before another spoke.

"What are their animals? How many do they have? What do they eat? How fast can these creatures run and for how long?"

So, Osco thought, the soldiers are well-informed. Even now these riders harry our supply lines. Does that matter?

"On the islands I saw approximately three hundred animals. Less than half were killed. They are very fast—at least twice the speed of a man and for far longer. What they eat I'm not certain. In many ways they resemble donkeys, which are very hardy and can eat grass, grain, and roughage of many sorts. If so, the Tong plains would sustain them indefinitely."

After this, the questions turned to banalities, mostly asking in a hundred ways if indeed these were men who ate, shit, and required sunlight. At last the emperor seemed to grow tired of it and silenced the men with his voice.

"As I assume you have guessed for yourself, General, we are being raided by this enemy. The loss of troops is slight, but our supply train is very long and vulnerable. If you were responsible, how would you protect it against this enemy?"

A man's voice emerged with an audible squeek, as if torn from the mouth of a cave-dwelling beast, forced out by thirst. "Please, emperor. Our armies defeated Mesan. A victory because they failed to match our tactics over supplies. I…humbly request, this responsibility be left to us, your loyal officers."

Footsteps followed, the squeak replaced with a terrified shout, then the dull fleshy sounds of a man stabbed to death in the middle of the room.

"I thank Over-General Fu for his history lesson," said the emperor. "I humbly request no further interruptions of my questions or my guest's responses."

Osco breathed, feeling sweat covering his body but in a way glad for the time to think. To him it seemed almost obvious what to do, and he wondered if the emperor only baited him now to test his loyalty. It made no difference. Osco's path was decided. He would not waiver.

"The leader of these foreigners is the most dangerous man among your enemies, lord, and he will be with these beast riders. You must kill him while you can. You have far more men than required to siege Ketsra, so split your forces. Reinforce the caravans with archers and skirmishers armed with throwing spears. Aim for the animal's necks, faces, and legs, hurt them as much as you can. Pursue the enemy every moment. Take many thousands and march them day and night. Take trackers and dogs. Don't let this enemy rest."

"Thank you, General," the emperor answered instantly. "Those are excellent suggestions." Here he paused, and spoke as if his head had turned. "Please go and ready your men, as you are going to join the force sent to hunt these raiders. If you succeed, you will never be the last man in my war tent again. Do you understand?"

Osco almost winced, thinking of the chaos and moving parts he would have no control over, and maybe even the assassins that might come from the other men in the room. But still, there was a chance, however small. He had to take it.

"I understand, emperor. Thank you. I will serve."

Chapter 31

Osco wiped sweat from his brow and glanced at the fading sun. His men were exhausted. Again. All but the Mesanites looked half-dead, and even a night's rest wouldn't bring them to readiness.

"Camp routine," he called with a sigh, and the half-asleep flagbearer jerked upright and tilted his flag back and forth before slumping against it.

Osco's plan was already failing. His unit had followed the enemy's tracks easily enough, their huge animals leaving a path of eaten grass and trampled dirt wherever they went. He had enough men—if they could coordinate. But by the time he sent word to units moving in the path of the riders, inevitably they had gone past or turned, running down and butchering any smaller units of scouts that spotted them. Only his Mesanites had the stamina to have a chance at marching them down, but with the few he had, if they were caught alone, they'd be killed too.

So he made camp. It took a painful amount of time and this despite building no protection. They didn't have enough trees or shovels and in any case the men were too tired to dig trenches or build fences. Mostly they all slumped together around the few fires Osco allowed, and set the barest number of watchmen. After several days of endless marching, Osco found he no longer cared.

He sat by his own fire with Marcel and withheld a groan as he massaged his aching feet by the fire.

"There goes another nail," he muttered, flinging it in.

Marcel picked at a callus with his knife and grunted, glancing at his own boots with a wince. Like most men of their culture they spoke little enough, but got along. Osco could not know, of course, but from what he'd seen in their days of long marches, he considered Marcel of House Albin a competent, sterling example of a Naranian soldier. He sighed and watched the man closely.

"Most nights I still expect to wake with that knife in my eye."

Marcel stopped and raised a brow. "You snore louder than my wife. If I were going to do it, you'd be dead."

Osco nodded and wiggled his toes. He'd decided as much.

"I'm going to trust you with the lives of my wife and child now, Marcel."

The other man said nothing, so Osco went on. "I think you would die for your people and your city. So would I. To preserve both I'm going to give you the power to destroy me. Have I chosen wrong?"

"We'll see," said the commander, watching carefully now. Osco took the letter tucked in his boot and set it near his bedroll.

"My absence would be noticed, as would yours. I want this delivered to the barbarian chief. I need you to choose the man you think is best."

Marcel spit through a gap in his teeth and sheathed his knife. "These barbarians," he said, "they kill scouts. Messengers, too."

Osco nodded as he lay down. "You pick the man, Marcel. Or do nothing. The choice is yours."

He closed his eyes, and later he dreamt of Liga and a small house on the edge of the hills, raising sheep and goats and a small crop with his children; he was taxed by no lords or cities, and had no kin save the woman he had chosen, and the children they had made.

In his life, Osco Magda had felt little enough hope—less even than comfort. He woke before dawn, groaning to sit by a faded fire to eat salted mutton in the dark. But before he did, he packed his bedroll to find the letter was gone.

It could have been a spy, of course. Or it could have been that Marcel took it and would use it later to destroy him. But still, there was a chance. There was hope. Osco had survived all his life on less.

* * *

Ruka wiped the scout's blood off his blade, and scanned for others in the dark.

The moonlight was too dim for any but the beasts of Noss, so as was his custom he had left Dina at the camp with the men of ash. He saw nothing but wild grass; an animal howled much like a wolf; insects buzzed and the breeze whistled across the huge plain. With a sigh of weariness, he turned back to his camp.

Their attack was already drawing to an end, but they had done their work well. From beyond the Tong border to the edges of their rice fields, Ruka and his cavalry had burned and ravaged merchants and caravans carrying an almost impossible amount of supplies. They had captured so much food and water that driving off the merchants had been the simple part—the actual burning and destruction of so much material required creativity. Doing it galled Ruka and his men, for in the land of ash, men did not 'destroy' food. But still they had done it.

In great burning heaps of sacrifice, the surplus and labor of many thousands of men and acres lay scattered like refuse. They had burned three wooden bridges, collapsed a dozen wells, and razed countless waystations, too. It wasn't enough, perhaps, but Ruka's men could do no more.

A week of raiding and riding, and Sula's Sons were near the limits of exhaustion. They slept only four hours a night, their horses resting too little, though the men walked them whenever possible. Many men had broken fingers or hands or taken injuries from arrows or stones. None uttered a word of complaint, and he knew they would raid until they died if he asked.

The Naranian army chased them, day and night with scouts and blocks of light infantry. Ruka could hardly believe how many men seemed in pursuit—thousands left in barren fields to hunt down a few hundred foes. But on they came, and the Sons needed to return to the safety of Ketsra, or else wear down and die.

A watchman called as Ruka neared the camp. He raised a hand in greeting, and Old Volus shed light enough now for the day creatures to rouse, birds calling as the men lit fires for a leisurely breakfast.

Ruka had not slept or truly rested in five days. He squat by the fire and washed blood from his hands in a basin, and the men made efforts not to stare as they gathered a bowl of stolen sausage and rice in offering.

"Thank you," he said, though as usual was not hungry. In the eyes of his men—who had seen him patrol every night now, ready to lead them again come morning—he saw worship. The Southern men kissed sword-necklaces on silver chains, readying for death and renewed purpose behind their prophet, who they believed would lead them all to everlasting glory. Ruka did nothing to discourage it.

He mounted and rode before them as they readied, waiting until all had gathered. Many were injured from arrows or torn muscles from endless strain. Some were dying from infection or old hearts strained by blood loss and toil. None stopped, and Ruka looked on his mother's kin with pride.

"We have done enough, cousins." In some he saw the flicker of disappointment, relief in most. "Today we ride hard to Ketsra before the light fades. Leave all your supplies on the grass. We carry only weapons now."

The warriors nodded and went about it in silence. The younger men who preferred to live didn't shame themselves before their elders by cheering for the prospect.

Ruka cracked the seal of the scout's message as he waited. He had taken many such letters over the last few nights, and most helped him know which directions to avoid. This seal was different though, and for a moment he inspected the symbol, then looked back on the features of the man he had killed.

Cold realization struck as he read. With it came a shame he knew he must bury until his day of judgment—another failure stacked on the pyre of his guilt. In his Grove, he walked to the graveyard and took a shovel to dig the grave himself.

The letter was simple and written in a careful hand. It lacked the endless salutations of Naranian military messages, and Ruka's heart beat faster as he wondered if it was true.

"The son of heaven travels with his army," it read. And closed, rather cheekily Ruka thought, with a signature: "Victor of the King's beach."

* * *

"A little further, cousins."

Ruka stopped Dina on a high hill and matched the ground against his memory. They were close now, but the difference between life and death in most pursuits was slight. And the Naranians were still coming.

Endless thousands marched in chaotic patterns across the plains, or pursued the Sons' tracks, as if half the army had been turned to the task.

The cavalry moved on. Three more hills now trampled by boots and burnt of all life, Ruka crested the last before Ketsra should have been visible. He heard it before he saw—even Dina snorting at the now familiar buzz of human life.

The Naranian army stretched before the farmer capital, a writhing carpet of flesh and cloth, wood and metal, a wall between them and the safety beyond. The siege had begun.

"Can we go around, shaman?"

Birmun's bruise-puffed eyes squinted at the distance. Though he had asked the question, it was clear he knew the answer. Ruka let out a breath as he looked at the size of the imperial army, knowing this was only a fraction.

"Imagine what so many men might accomplish," he said sadly, "if they turned their minds to creation."

The other Sons were reaching the top of the hill now, wide-eyed at the sight of their enemy.

"We're going to have to break through," Ruka said, his brother's hands tightening with pleasure at the thought. Some of the older men, too, seemed to brighten for the first time all day.

"Where the gods lead, shaman, we follow," said Canut, once a great chief of Orhus.

Ruka nodded and considered his options. While very orderly, it seemed the army had not set defences of any kind. The camp was thick with tents and the daily life of soldiers, but Ruka saw no trenches or fences, sentries or men in formation. They would have to charge through them.

From here it looked obvious, but once inside the tents it would be chaos and the riders could be easily turned, the horses tripped by men and debris. Those who made it through would have to sprint for the gates under a hail of arrows, and hope the Tong actually let them in.

"There," he pointed at a cluster that seemed the thinnest, then looked at the men. Old men like Canut smiled, the younger's mouths firm in clenched jaws. Ruka knew all expected to die. He rode ahead of them, and even so most kept their eyes on the endless enemy. Ruka raised his voice, snapping his first words.

"And Lo before me did I see a field of the dead, and I rejoiced!" He pointed at the army. "These are but nameless fools, cut down in the story of your legend. Tomorrow the Sons of Sula will be the men who broke an army, and even your children will whisper your names. Stay with me, cousins. We go to the gates. Do not stop unless Noss calls your name." Ruka drew his sword, giving Birmun a fierce grin as he turned towards the city.

He whispered, just for Dina, though he hoped Sula heard him, too, grazing in the heavens amongst the endless fields of the star-gods. It was as likely as anything.

"There sits our mountain," he said, imagining Noss before the flames of Turgen-Sar, enraged at the gods. "Jump with me, brave warrior. We'll see who burns."

Dina moved to a steady trot, brethren falling in behind. One horse was not so foolish as to charge a wall of men. But like their riders, they lived for the herd, the deed of one spreading to consume those that witnessed it, courage fused like iron, chains growing stronger with every link. With horses, as with men, it took but a single act of heroism.

Sula's daughter snorted and picked up speed, hurtling to a sprint as the camp closed. The Sons moved in a now-familiar pattern—trained for months in the land of ash, wielded against the caravans again and again—two riders at Ruka's flanks, then three behind them, then four, then five, spread until their formation resembled a spear.

The first imperial soldiers saw their peril. Men came scattered from tents with panicked shouts of alarm, some armed with spears and clubs, knives and bows. Some ran. Most watched the rising dust and thunderous crash of armored horse and rider, no idea what to do.

Dina turned at the closest; Bukayag roared his challenge, and Ruka aimed their spear. The three of them charged together.

* * *

Lani stood on the wall as she did most days, looking at the army that meant to destroy her life.

If the siege were to go badly, Lani would get on a boat with her husband's servants and sail away to an island fortress. Her people had no such luxury. If she ran and abandoned them, she knew she would always be running. The empire would come, one way or another, and perhaps it would be her children who lost all and became the emperor's slaves.

But she still had hope. Every day she looked out for dust on the horizon, often waiting until nightfall, to see the men of ash return with news of victory.

"I'm sorry my lady," said her cousin. "They won't come this way. Nothing can get past the army. The barbarians have gone to the coast, maybe, to reach some of their ships."

In his words she heard the silently uttered 'they are all dead, lying in unmarked fields'.

Lani smiled politely but stayed where she was. She had spent her day walking amongst the men as she did every day, with Father's bodyguard because 'he was concerned one of the emperor's assassins might decide to kill a vulnerable Tong princess.'

"An island queen," she had corrected him. "And though I love and respect Father, I will go where I please. The men are frightened and if I can help with morale I will."

He had grumbled, but still she'd seen his pride.

Most days she toured the walls, praising the soldiers for their vigilance and bravery, and thanking them on behalf of the king. She even went to the remaining men of ash and found they spoke a few words in the island tongue—enough for her to thank them, though they had been so awkward she wasn't sure it helped.

As she walked she couldn't help but notice the poor—the beggars resigned to alleys and the corners of squares and well-traveled streets. As she walked amongst her people she felt the danger, the otherness, the tension building in fearful waves.

At night her mother and sisters and mothers-in-law quietly criticized her behavior and her dress and her manner. But as far as she could tell, they were mostly powerless, timid women who talked because they could do little else, and she ignored them.

Six nights she waited at the wall with no sign, and now stood for her seventh. She looked down the ramparts, still amazed at the transformation of the defences. Bukayag had been in their city no more than a month, and yet in that time he had transformed a weak city to a fortress of stone and iron.

"He's still alive," she whispered, "I know he is."

"What's that, my lady?"

Lani looked out at the fading light and said nothing, imagining what might happen if she did not run, and Ketsra fell. Polite slavery, she supposed—taken to the Naranian capital and trotted out on command, another foreign queen humbled before the god of the sun. She would become like her mother and sisters and Farahi's wives, broken to some king's fist like a songless bird. Her son, an heir of one throne and claimant to another, would be hunted down. Perhaps he could be sent to a temple, and at least live a quiet spiritual life.

"My lady, we should return to the castle before dark. Your father will worry. And it will be more difficult to protect you. The city can be dangerous at night."

Lani looked to her cousin and smiled politely. It was the same conversation every night, but he meant well and only thought of his family's safety. In truth she didn't know why she waited, perhaps she had become used to it. First waiting to come of age. Then for Kale, then for Tane, now her father and a life of more control.

She had her son, at least. Kale's son, and the thought brought her joy. Yet the one man who might keep that child's future bright wasn't his father, nor her husband, but a stranger from across the sea.

She had almost turned to go when she saw it—a cloud rising from beyond the army, lit crimson by the dusk.

"Alright, Captain," she turned, catching the horizon cloaked in haze from the corner of her eye. She spun back to the wall and squinted until she saw. "There!" she pointed, and her cousin frowned but followed with his eyes.

Red dust was rising in the West, growing and growing towards the imperial army. A section of tents and men near the disturbance were scattering, some towards, some away. The cloud rose, and from its outskirts men and animals emerged, racing across the plain in tight formation. They roared as they struck at incredible speed, piercing deep into the camp.

"The gate, Captain."

Lilo blinked and looked but did not move. Lani raised her voice.

"Get the bloody gate open, Captain. Right now!"

The young man's frown vanished as he understood, turning towards the main gate and the troops stationed there. He was moving before he shouted.

"My queen."

He raised his voice for the other guards to follow, leaping with great agility from the parapet, then raced towards the gate.

* * *

Bukayag hacked a young man's head in half with a backstroke, while Ruka focused on their objective.

With the chaos of men and animals, tents and supplies, he couldn't afford even to look at the men behind him. He could only keep Dina from catching a leg and snapping it on a rope or a pile of scattered lumber, and keep straight towards the walls.

Forward, he warned his brother, always forward.

In his Grove, swords and spears lined three racks beside his practice field. The dead needed no instruction, handing him weapon after weapon as he killed and moved, shields, spears and swords forming as needed in his brother's hands.

As expected, it had looked more obvious from above. Many tents were too tall for Ruka to see past, even to the high wall beyond. He was forced to race around, hoping he kept straight and that the men behind could adjust. All around him Naranians scattered and surged, some brave enough to attack, but most fleeing in terror. Many called out—some in prayer to their god, others in more practical shouts for reinforcements. There were many civilians, too—including women, which mostly stared, or screamed. Ruka tried not to trample them.

Time lost all meaning save for which threat was next. Ruka's sword-arm burned, his grip a numbed clench around a long, curved sword. Sweat dripped inside his helm and he nearly discarded it until an arrow bounced off his iron forehead. Men were throwing logs and furniture in his path—anything to slow him. One brave scout leapt at his side and hung from Dina's saddle, trying to stab exposed flesh until Ruka drove his sword beneath the man's arm, and he fell away.

Dina's pace had slowed to a crawl, and the enemy was gathering. Ruka roared in frustration and leapt his mount over a fallen tent, then flinched as flame erupted over the cloth. Whether he had somehow done it or if men were now throwing oil and fire he did not know. He finally glanced back at his men and saw their formation had crumbled, now more like two staggered lines. In that moment, he realized some of the older men had no intention of following, but had raced off to find their deaths in some glorious end. Ruka did not judge them. He led on, as always, for those who fought for life.

Another giant tent loomed, and Ruka swerved and crashed headlong into a running soldier. Dina crushed him beneath iron hooves and ran on without instruction, knocking more men aside with her armored flanks as much as Ruka.

Together they leapt the smoldering embers of another campfire, and at last saw the walls. Ruka charged for the closest gate.

Arrows hissed and flew everywhere. Some thudded with dulled pain against the thinner armor on his back, others snapped on his steel plates. He tightened his thighs and Dina ran across the less cluttered ground, and Ruka was suddenly glad he hadn't built trenches outside the walls.

The remaining Sons came in packs behind him, red with blood and wild-eyed from the frenzied charge. Ruka slowed and let them gather, seeing with relief some arrows now rained down from the walls. The Naranians in pursuit withdrew as scores fell with wounds, most unwilling to come too close to the walls. Ruka led the survivors to the closed gate, and waited.

In long drips of his waterclock, metal screeched and cracked on stone, but to Ruka sounded like a mother's lullaby. The reinforced doors opened fully, and a week's worth of exhaustion and fear drained from his chest as he led his men inside.

Lani waited inside, surrounded by guards. She wore the heavy royal cloths of her father's people, her hair covered in blue island silk instead of a veil. The men with her and guarding the gate were cheering, even some of the townsfolk in the street to applaud.

Ruka and his bloodied men gathered as the gate closed. He counted fifty—less than twenty percent of those who had left a week before. No doubt fewer would live to see the dawn.

The guards and the princess approached with water, and to help men from their horses. Ruka found Birmun, rune-blade clasped in white-knuckles as he stood on trembling legs.

"Still alive, cousin. The gods must love you."

The nightman chief slumped to the dirt, his hands still shaking.

"I should not like to see…" he rasped, "a man they hated."

The survivors laughed in trembling spurts, the glory of their survival in this moment more powerful than the loss of their brothers.

"I'm pleased to see you alive, shaman." Lani's eyes shone with wetness, and though it might have been deception, Ruka locked the image away. She handed him a clay jug of wine, and he wished he could truly taste it. He raised it for the sake of the onlookers, lifting Birmun before he drank deep, and kept his face austere.

"To the victorious dead, cousins."

The last of the Sons took their own cups from the crowd and gathered in a circle as they drank. Ruka held them in the moment, knowing they deserved their families to welcome them, a great skald and their own tale in a book of legends. Failing all, he let them take his horse, and walked at Lani's side towards the palace.

"We'd best prepare," he whispered, turning his mind ahead. "Now the siege begins in truth."

Chapter 32

Yiren sat on the imperial throne of his traveling palace, and stared at his portrait. His many servants and generals had been summoned to attend him, and these knelt with eyes and faces downward, sweat and silence building in the sweltering tent with every moment Yiren chose not to speak. It would be best, he'd decided, to appear most displeased.

As the enemy struck his army with their animals, he had been out watching his soldiers gather.

It had been the first time Yiren had seen these ashmen, and their 'horses', with his own eyes. He had assumed the reports of their efficacy exaggerated, indeed, he had assumed them almost invented by incompetent men bested in battle—proud warriors seeking to justify failure. He had, it seemed, been wrong.

The day was clear and sunny, but Yiren's sight had been mostly blocked by the pomp and protection around his tent. He remained officially 'disguised' as another important palace official, wearing rich but non-identifiable robes of common nobility. To be away from his capital at all was very dangerous, but as the enemy's dust rose in the distance, he had run from his many layers of protection for a better view.

Yiren had not seen war before, either, nor even a battle. He had been raised on the military exploits of his father and uncles—the daring tales of Amit the Fox, and the young son of heaven, who had out-fought an empire with farmers, bandits and bastard sons, killing the tyrant who had killed their father.

He had read every story of war from the poets to the odious histories of the academy, but he had never seen men die, nor smelled a thousand bodies tense with fear. His army was the greatest force ever raised—so many they stretched beyond sight in all directions, composed of every vassal, ally and tributary, a continent united at Ru's call. Yiren did not intend to allow such a glorious conquest to go without his presence.

So for the first time since childhood, he had left the palace grounds, surrounded by bodyguards and most of his court. He took all prudent precautions—though of course the army soon knew unofficially he was with them. Soon they would be allowed to know officially, but only when the moment was right. For now it was useful to make the officers agree in meeting after meeting that a lie was the truth. Indeed, it was the very essence of power, for any fool with a large stick could prevent speech—but to put words in another's mouth with nothing but threat? This was the power to re-shape reality.

Yiren was not afraid of assassins or what his people might say, or indeed of anything. When he had seen the dust and heard the panicked cries, he had run from his palace and stood high on the back of a wagon full of supplies, his bodyguards scrambling to catch up. He saw the enemy in their formation—huge and impressive as they trampled lesser men as if they were spring grass.

"They're going to make it," he'd said, to no one in particular. His mostly paralyzed soldiers ran or leapt to the dirt, with some few finding the courage at least to shoot arrows or throw rocks or spears. He tried desperately to see the ashman's leader but couldn't tell them apart. He saw only the animals and their formation as it maimed and killed, even as they sped towards the city.

A shiver of concern had found him, and he knew Osco had been right to suggest the destruction or capture of their leader. Yiren was disappointed he hadn't succeeded, but seeing the speed of the beasts as they carried their riders to safety, he wasn't angry or surprised.

Now, sitting in his tent after half a candle of pause, Yiren sighed and turned to his generals. Their faces looked almost swollen with moisture, fingers laced before wobbly knees, children waiting to be punished.

But they were not to blame. The attack had been sudden and all the best fighting men too far to respond. It annoyed Yiren that they hadn't tried when Amit certainly would have. But this was short-term thinking. Competence may win a few more battles, but when the war ended an emperor would have a legion of servants who'd tasted power, and now desired a meal. Better by far to sacrifice the best—to let the bravest and boldest spend themselves, so that the others might thrive in peace.

"Thank you, Generals, for your patience. Over-General Sindao, I would please like you to begin assembling the war machines according to the analects. And Over-General Shi, please prepare your sapper teams. I would like several projects to begin digging towards the walls this evening—interlocking as in the model of my uncle at Bindoa."

The named men dropped to the floor in supplication. The tension had risen almost too high already so Yiren did not pause before he spoke.

"Over-General Tau," he said, and the man in charge of the army's defence flinched. "Will you please ensure no more of our enemies enter or leave this city?"

Tau found his voice with some difficulty. "Of course, divine lord." His eyes flit along the patterns of the carpeted floor. "Thank you, lord, for your patience, and confidence. I will not disappoint you again."

The others flinched at the unrequested and arrogant words, but Yiren smiled politely.

"Thank you, General, but you have not disappointed me. Please go with my gratitude and confidence, gentlemen. I'm sorry to have disturbed you." Yiren waited until they had almost reached the door. "Oh, and General Tau? Please send me the head of the officer whose duties included forming the infantry. Someone must be responsible for that utter, and unforgiveable disaster, yes?"

Tau dropped to the carpet in prostration, then withdrew with the others.

Yiren waited for them to leave, then paced to stretch his legs. He hoped very much Tau knew not to select Osco of Mesan to receive the punishment, or else he would have to replace yet another Over-general. In one of the many books on emperorship, Yiren had once read it was important for commands to sometimes be vague and require interpretation. This was one of his favorites, for he had found in this way you could reward or punish at your leisure, and the fear produced outweighed the occasional sacrifice.

Next he called for his flameweavers, who waited always in a secondary tent attached to his mobile palace. His two new high priests entered in the plain blue robes of the Order of Two Waters, and took position before his dais. As ever, his bodyguards tensed in high alertness, which was appropriate. Yiren had learned much from his new high priests, but he had four assassins prepared to kill them every moment of the day.

The metal used to produce their miracles of flame, for example, was not as mysterious or limitless as he'd believed. It seemed even divine power had rules. A man could be killed long before the effect was lethal—particularly if the target was some distance away. Using the metal was perilous. Already two of the flameweavers had succumbed to a bizarre illness that took the victim's hair in clumps, discolored the skin, and induced vomiting and bleeding before eventual death.

Were it not for this, Yiren would have been tempted to use the metal himself. He considered for a time that perhaps the son of heaven would be granted the greatest power, and also protected by God's favor. But he had since changed his mind. Yiren had read every book on rulership ever written, and if there was one thing he had learned, it was this: the son of heaven's power did not flow from his own arm, but from the submission of others. Whether those arms wielded spear or hammer, pen or flame, it made little difference. All were an extension of his will.

Still, the prospect excited him. When he was older and had a proper heir, he had decided, he would try.

For now he existed in reality, and greeted his priests politely. He inquired about their days and how things were progressing, but they knew why they were truly there, and eventually he invited them to join him in his harem tent. They showed no disgust, eagerness, or anything else, which was correct.

"Bring your gift," he said to the young lovers, pleased as always to participate in such a pure and fleeting emotion. That he feared their power enhanced the sweetness. It was a weakness, he knew, but God protected him. He rose smiling, servants, bodyguards and priests in attendance, as they would be throughout, all the way to his private chambers.

* * *

"Think of a city as a turtle, wrapped tight in its shell. You may smash it out, but the work is messy, the shell ruined—and maybe you don't have a hammer! Better by far to find a stick and pry the beast out. Or, if you are very patient, no tool is more reliable than thirst." From the fifth Analect on War, notation by Amit 'The Fox'.

Ruka summoned every Naranian book on war to his mind, and re-read the passages on siege. He knew them well, of course, but the act brought him comfort. His enemy, though numerous, was at least predictable.

The morning sun was high and hot as Ruka stalked through rows of his machines, hidden by the Tong wall. All ranges were pre-adjusted, elevations set to counter Naranian tactics. If they followed their precepts, the imperial army would construct their own machines for the next four days, then lob rocks at the walls and over them in a constant rain until the siege was over, or they ran out of stones.

Meanwhile, they would dig shallow tunnels starting just out of archer range, maybe even hundreds all the way to the walls. They would interconnect them and make room to remove earth and bodies, digging paths inside the city for spies and sabotage and maybe even small raiding parties. But their primary goal was to undermine the structure of the wall, digging far and wide enough a section of stone would collapse under its own weight. When it did, the army would charge the gap.

Ruka looked at Hemi and his builders waiting on the ramparts. All were expert men with many years of experience, and they lounged playing dice and grumbling about the lack of rum. They weren't fighters, but they had faith in their employer, and the machines—not to mention the high stone wall protecting them when the shooting started. Ruka had no doubt, live or die, Hemi would have promised a fortune to these men and their families. He was a cantankerous old miser, but he had served Farahi well. And…perhaps, yes, just maybe, he was Ruka's friend.

The aging Orang Kaya waddled up, sweating from the exertion of climbing the wall. "Well here we bloody are then." He fanned himself as he spit tobacco. "I've got the boys ready to make adjustments. But your damn machines are tighter than a virgin's arse. It's no easy feat to move them."

Ruka almost cringed at the crude expression. "The range is correct." He watched as the dead fired practice shots with the remaining lobbers in his Grove. Hemi squinted and spit tobbaco with a 'how can you know the exact range' kind of stare. Ruka smiled. "Naranians have manuals for everything, Hemi. They will push their machines to an exactly measured distance in perfect rows, which they consider safe. We will wait. When they are nearly finished, we will smash them."

"Have they no fear of us shooting back?"

Ruka shook his head. "None of their enemies ever have. The Tong's heavy bows are pitiful. The Naranian's spies will have informed them of this. But they won't know about mine."

"Oh they likely will, savage, they just won't believe. Damned madman." The islander slapped his arm, then frowned. "Those sappers, though. You never mentioned counter-sapping. I don't hardly understand it, and anyway, I'm not sending my boys into the damned ground like rats. You'd best have some other plan."

"Ketsra could use a proper sewer." Ruka shrugged, then nodded towards the city. "They have many farmers with little to do. I thought we might employ them."

Hemi grunted, eyes narrowing as he stared. "I know that look. Whatever you're planning, I'm not sure I want to hear it."

Ruka grinned as he pictured the structure in his mind. His eyes roamed the sloped ground downhill, all the way to the water in the South. "The tunnel would need to go down main street," he pointed, "across the city, from the wall to the sea."

Hemi blinked then scanned the distance, then returned to Ruka's face. He spit tobacco as he laughed.

* * *

With Kapule's help, Ruka recruited five thousand laborers composed of farmers, soldiers, and the city's builders. Before the sun fell on the first day, they had begun the second most ambitious earthworks project conceived in the city.

"A pipe," Ruka explained with one of Kapule's maps. "Made of copper, running underground, all the way to the sea."

The master builders had stared and gasped and said it was impossible, but Ruka was accustomed to this. Later he would expand the project, connecting more pipes East and West to cover the majority of the city. But for now, this would serve.

In the day—and with royal agreement—he worked to purchase or confiscate the required material, leaving Hemi and Birmun in charge of the wall. With every moment that passed he knew the Naranian tunnelers moved closer. In the evenings, Ruka took some of his new build teams and began his own tunnels, leading from near the ramparts out of the city to line up with the enemy. In a few days the tunnelers would meet outside the walls, and begin a complex and deadly game, the true horror of the underground fighting not yet understood. For now, at least, the men were in fine spirits.

Ruka brought Birmun when night fell to lead men willing to dig by torchlight. Bukayag's strength was required again and again, but Ruka allowed it without question, knowing every moment would count soon.

At the end of the fourth day, with dusk glowing red over the farmer king's walls, the Naranian machines finished their construction, exactly on schedule. As written, they lined up at their arranged distance in perfect uniformity, teams stacking ammunition in vast but orderly mounds.

Hemi summoned Ruka, and with his hands and clothes stained with dirt he stood on the wall. He looked down the length of the Northern section and the hundred machines conceived and built over a decade of toil. It would be the first time he used them in the real world.

The builders were eager. They waited with the teams of Tong and Ashmen moving rocks and arrows up to the platforms, so much deadly intent, yet not a single man killed. The moment struck Ruka as deeply tragic, and he couldn't help but think that with a few words from a few men it could all be stopped. Yet a thousand words and deeds both great and small had brought them here, and whether for pride, completion, or curiosity, he felt too as if nothing so vast could ever change its course, trapped in some binding law of nature.

"The teams are yours, Hemi. You give the command."

The chief builder didn't share Ruka's hesitation. He grinned like a child with a new toy, grunting as he rose to his feet with the help of his son. He raised his hand for the attention of the foremen, who would shout the orders down the line. He took his moment.

"Fucking shoot!" he roared, laughter and voices echoing in Pyu common along the Tong wall, followed by the stretching, clacking hum of rope, wood and steel. The iron arms clanged as they smashed against padded catches; rocks held in sling-like pockets surged, the force calculated with Naranian mathematics.

Ruka's machines could shoot twice the distance of his enemy's. The steel was all but impervious to the swell and wear of weather and use, the draw strength and weight of the missiles so far beyond that of wood it was a child's toy against a sword.

Hundreds of rocks and arrows vaulted from the high stone, hissing through the air with terrifying speed. The men below would not yet even understand their peril. Ruka could not see properly if they stopped to watch, or continued their work, but none fled. Perhaps those who saw expected their enemy's shots to land short, or miss entirely. They did not.

Rocks the size of a man's head crashed and tumbled in a hundred scenes of carnage. Man, machine, and beast of burden flattened and fell as Naranian cries rose. The perfect lines of orderly construction descended into chaos. Men fled or crawled away from the targets of destruction, the perfect piles of ammunition scattering like leaves. Ruka lost the sounds of the enemy as cheers erupted along the wall.

"Take that you bastards!" Hemi howled and coughed up phlegm with a flabby arm in the air, his son holding up his enthusiasm.

Ruka turned away. He walked amongst the dead in his Grove, putting a hand to the shoulders of those who had made this moment possible. They looked how Ruka felt. Not pleased, nor proud—just the hard eyes of men butchering precious livestock to feed their families.

"Reload, and keep them destroyed," he said to Hemi as he passed. "Don't waste ammunition."

He walked from the rampart stairs, then towards his trench, feeling the eyes of his old friend, the builders, and his own men. They expected satisfaction, perhaps, a savoring moment of victory. But Ruka had no desire to kill. He had tested the weapons many times in his mind and knew they would work. And he had much to do.

Chapter 33

Incredibly, the imperials attempted to re-build their machines, almost precisely in the same spot. With something approaching incredulous glee, Hemi again smashed them all to pieces.

"They're out of their bloody minds," he'd laughed at the wreckage, again inviting Ruka to come and see for himself.

Ruka observed but said nothing. He watched the broken weapons and men collected and removed; he watched the supplies lifted and carried, cleaned and replaced, until all signs of the destruction were gone. In an afternoon it was as if it had never happened—a great beast stung by a pesky wasp.

By the mounds of the enemy's dirt, he expected their tunnelers were nearly halfway to the wall. Thousands of laborers went in and out of the ground like termites to break the only thing between the city and so many angry soldiers.

He inspected his own teams and found them nervous, so close now to meeting their enemy. When they did, men would go down and fight the other sappers with knives and short stabbing tools in grinding butchery, suffering and dying in darkness.

The city was still peaceful but close to panic. Few had actually seen the enemy army, but none could now fail to see their peril. Outside the harbor, pirates had begun to swell, flagless and aggressive, wolves circling a pregnant doe. Of course, they weren't 'pirates', but the fleets of a dozen island lords. Without Farahi, his people had failed just as he'd feared they would. Divided as ever by fear, greed and apathy, with nothing but old laws made by dead men to bind them. Without the sorcerer-king, the island lords fell one by one to the emperor's coin—the miracle of peace unfelt by two generations of pampered fools.

A roar echoed from the wall as Ruka's machines fired again, and the dozen Tong builders around him cringed at the sound.

"Your war is here, cousins," he shouted from his table of maps and plans. "Even now the enemy digs, coming to destroy everything in this world you love. Do I have your attention?"

He could see that he did.

"I have imagined a project." He winced, having no desire to lie to the craftsmen as he had to the king. "I told your lord it is a sewer, and perhaps one day it will be. In truth, I require water at the wall. We must move the sea uphill."

A few men scoffed, and one of the builders cleared his throat. "Here on the continent, shaman, water goes downhill."

"Tell me all the ways you move water from the earth."

Again the men scoffed, but took it seriously. They discussed several types of well, from pulleys and counterweights to pole-lifts and water-steps. Ruka listened patiently before he showed them his own, leading to a largely confused series of turned heads.

"In the land of Ash," he explained, "it is difficult to move grain from storage. So I built a screw. As it turns the grain is scooped and moved up a pipe, much like the one we're building." He gestured at the huge trench even now being lain with the thin copper.

Kalma, Hemi's son, frowned. "Water is more difficult, shaman. It would have to be huge and perfectly sealed. How would we even move such a thing?"

Ruka nodded, pleased at the mental leap and correct question. He shrugged.

"I am open to suggestion."

* * *

"How fares the war today, tunnel king?"

Osco knelt at the chaotic entrance to the sapper network, his hand extended. 'Digger'—the low-born sapper foreman who had no name save his occupation—took it and pulled himself up, his face smeared with mud.

"Better than yesterday, General," he said as usual. The peasant engineer grunted and leaned callused hands on his knees. The little skin not covered in dirt looked pale, his eyes rimmed with red. He stood and his back popped and cracked, bent even as he straightened. Osco could not help but admire him.

With the failure of the war engines, Digger and his crew were the best hope to breach the walls. But because of their low class and inglorious work, the Naranian officers showed them scorn. None except the General responsible even watched them, coming only once a day for a progress report.

Osco, however, was fascinated. The Blue City had walls, but no Mesanite army had ever defended it. In the four hundred years of their recorded history, if any enemy threatened them, they had marched out and slaughtered them without hesitation, until Naran. They were masters of the open field, but knew little of siegecraft.

So Osco spent his days with the sappers, ordering his men to help move the dirt growing in huge piles to the sides of the army. When the counter-tunnelers met them and the fighting began, his men carried the wounded and dead, too.

The Tong's defenders had met the main imperial path. Men of both sides took small spears and knives beneath the earth to stab as they crawled, fighting like ants in tunnels so small they could hardly move. It was impossible to retreat. Instead they were dragged out by a system of ropes, a second tunnel for the dirt and the dead. It seemed to Osco a chaos filled nightmare of darkness, and he shivered just at the thought.

"What are you waiting for? Get down there!"

Digger was back to his work, moving about the tunnel with a new team of recruits. Most looked terrified. Every day, every team, Digger and his engineers would have to whip men down into the earth, though to refuse was death and maybe worse.

Still, victory seemed inevitable. The sapper network continued to grow, the manpower of the army nearly unlimited. They were already finishing new tunnels, forcing the Tong to fight on multiple fronts, if they even found them all. Despite the barbarian's effort to destroy supplies, the Naranians had recovered and renewed the lines from their capital. Time, too, was on their side.

"I'll see you this evening with more men," Osco waved to Digger, who took the time from berating his terrified recruits to bow in thanks.

Osco returned to his tent and tried to sleep without rum. His enemy's faith in themselves continued to shake him. He had watched their war machines surprised and destroyed, knowing many armies would have nearly broken just at that. The Naranians didn't flinch. The general in charge had been executed, the officers had gossiped over promotions, and the dead were buried in an afternoon.

Failing sleep, Osco tried to write a letter to Liga but stared at a blank page. What could he say? What was the purpose? 'Ketsra is doomed, my love. My one hope is failed. The barbarian killer is trapped behind walls and an endless army.'

Apparently the Tong port was blockaded, too. The emperor had bribed half the island lords, and so the city would soon no longer be able to supply itself. The islanders and the Tong had been allies, but also enemies. Old grievances, greed and resentment, a cancerous rot of vulnerability waiting to destroy a people as sure as putting down their swords.

As always, Osco put away his letter, found Marcel, and drank.

They talked of battles and kin and poor training, then they moved dirt and carried corpses. They listened to adequately supplied soldiers in relative luxury complain about their hardship. They watched frightened boys descend into the earth, then only some of them come out.

Hours and soon days blurred together.

Once or twice the diggers became too bold, and a few war machines rained death on men too close on the surface. The Tong held their tunnels, and the Naranian officers grew impatient. Every day the general grew more frantic, unable to pass an inspection without screaming at common men huddled and shaking at the task ahead.

"Do you need more men? Or just more courage? Work day and night! Send every man until the enemy is dead!"

Digger eventually emerged and bowed, his shaking body stained with dirt and blood.

"The Tong are very stubborn, lord, please accept my apologies. They resist our efforts, but they are weakening."

"I should think so!" Spit flew from the general's lip. "Every day you fail costs this army, this empire, more than you can possibly understand. Serve your emperor. Succeed, and soon, or pay the price."

Digger bowed, and the general left without assisting him. More men were whipped into the earth, more corpses dragged out. Osco couldn't tell the men apart anymore, their faces and clothes so covered in filth. Skill made little difference in the tunnels. It was a meat grinder on two sides, both churning their youth against the other. And the Naranians had more.

Man after man tied bloody ropes to his leg, then crawled for the glory of the emperor. But the sun god shone no light beneath the earth. Only weak lanterns of oil that sometimes burned the men alive, only torches that never lasted long enough. A few men accepted execution rather than go down. Some others had begun to flee in the night, chased down by hunters.

Another day, another headache as Osco rose. He didn't count anymore.

"How fares the war, tunnel king?"

He began the ritual with a flat voice, not really asking. Digger sat smoking against a trench and nodded without a word. Bodies lay outside the rope-tunnel still uncleared, so Osco grabbed one and hauled it to a tarp for transport.

"Damndest thing," Digger said, a long draw on his smoke. "They've put some kind of…wall, in the main tunnel. Don't know how. Metal plate, says the men. So I crawl down, all the way to the front, and sure enough. I knocked to hear the sound and know it's thin, but can't pierce it. Tried everything. So we try under, try around. But it just goes on and on. How'd they do that? How'd they get it in there?"

Osco sat beside the man and said nothing for a time. "Must have hammered it down from above," he concluded.

Digger nodded as if it didn't matter. He looked around as if to see if they were alone. "There's…words," he whispered. "Words on the metal."

Osco felt his hand slip absently to his throat. He saw the giant's wild eyes in the gloom of Farahi's palace, and impossible strength wrapped around his neck.

"What did it say."

"Go home," the man let the burning cigar near touch his fingers. "Or die forgotten in foreign soil."

Osco nodded, and put a hand to the man's shoulder.

"They can't stop you forever, Digger, even with such tricks. They're trying to frighten you."

The smallest of grins cracked dry lips. "I reckon it worked."

"I'll move some corpses." Osco pat the man's knee and rose. "You sit. Between the two of us, we'll think of something."

Digger smiled a little and bowed from a sit. "Thank you General, yes, we'll think of something."

* * *

Ruka stood in a growing rain and flung mud beside Birmun, two thirds of the way now to the wall. Despite everything, the Naranians were winning. Their tunnelers came in an endless grind of men, at least five teams now working under the wall. They chipped at the edges of the foundation, and though the Tong fought them bravely, there was never enough.

"We can't hold them forever," called one of the Tong commanders from the street. "It's hard to find men who will go down. And the veterans are wearing out."

"What's the largest tunnel?" Ruka asked, already regretting it as he climbed from the trench.

The man led him to the tunnels and pointed. "It's been expanded, we can fit two men at a time to fight."

Ruka looked at the soiled, downtrodden men waiting for their turn, and shivered at the thought of the narrow space.

"We need another day, maybe two. If I block this tunnel, can you hold the rest that long?"

The commander seemed confused, but nodded. "Yes, I think so."

Ruka dropped to the packed earth of the tunnel floor, but hesitated at the entrance. His hands gripped the top and closed, his knees refusing to bend.

"No," Bukayag hissed. "I won't let you trap us down there. Don't be a fool."

Ruka fought him, and for a long moment, failed. He roared and heard men panic above, forcing his brother to their hands and knees with will alone. He tied the rope around his waist and crawled into the dark, eyes lighting the narrow tunnels in shades of black and white.

Near the front he crawled over teeth and bloodstains, bits of hair and chunks of men and could hear fighting up ahead. "I'm sorry," he whispered to those holding the passage, "thank you for your sacrifice."

He walked to an iron gate from his model of the island palace, etching words as an afterthought for those few who might see. Light flared in the land of the living, and the metal grew before his hand and squinted eyes, forcing dirt aside as it expanded into the world. The sounds of the fighting were gone, and Ruka worked his way back with assistance from the men as they pulled his rope and dragged him away.

"Hold back the other tunnels as long as you can," he said as he emerged, "that tunnel will be closed for a day or more."

The men stared as their commander nodded, and Ruka returned to his project, limbs trembling with the magic.

He found Hemi's son Kalma at the coast, frowning with the other builders. "We still can't move it, shaman. The screw…it's still too big. The water too heavy."

The diggers had finished their trench, from the sea to the wall large enough for a wide pipe, but still worked on several reservoirs. They had in the end made three of Ruka's 'screws'—one smaller pump for each reservoir that held pools of water in stages up the slope. They would force water from the sea up a pipe half filled with the screw, moving it the rest of the way with pressure, then again from the first to the second and the third.

"There's no time for more reservoirs," Ruka winced. "Nor can we delay the sappers. It must therefore work."

Kalma grimaced, eyes narrowing in thought. Their first screw was submerged in the water, the blades as tall as a man, ten builders on each side to move huge cranks to spin it. The tide was coming in, the men splashing in the shallow water. They could fit no more men usefully on the beach, but it took a huge amount of force to move the water uphill. Ruka had considered using horses, but first he'd need to re-tool a winch for the proper motion.

"We could use ships. If you had more cranks."

Both Ruka and Kalma turned to find an island marine on the beach. Several of Farahi's ships had been left on the Tong coast with a few hundred sailors, mostly doing nothing as they awaited their admiral and fresh orders.

"What is your name?" Ruka inspected the young man but didn't recognize him.

"Haku, sir," he answered, eyes unreadable. "I'm in charge of the royal navy in Ketsra." Here he paused, then added. "And I fought you on the king's beach."

Ruka nodded, and inspected, seeing a depth to those eyes. The islander looked too young for such responsibility, but then it was war, and men of competence could bloom at any age.

"Ships might work. Get your sailors ready."

Ruka worked furiously in his Grove, summoning two more cranks, then fusing them to the drill with heat from a dead forge. The islanders lined up their ships as if boarding an enemy vessel, twenty men becoming fifty as they expanded the length they could hold.

Ruka stood with the men and gripped iron, resisting the urge to pray. He looked at his mother's kinsmen, bare chested and burnt, standing with continental men of peace and island sailors, all in common purpose. The tide swelled at their waists, the sky cracked and thundered with a growing storm, and Ruka wished all his life could be spent like this.

Whether there were gods that loved or hated them, he did not know. But as he watched them fight the waves and the sand, he wanted them to survive, to prosper, and to grow. He would die for it.

"Ready, gentlemen?" he called to the Tong, who cheered and bent to their task. "Ka, islanders?" he yelled over the tide. 'Ka, sir!' came the answer. "Show them the meaning of strength, cousins," Ruka seized the metal and pulled, and the men of ash snarled and did the same.

A drum beat from the ships, and the marines pulled in unison, the sound uniting the men on the beach too as they surged naturally with the beat. Metal creaked and turned, the sea bubbling as the screw forced water and air to spiral upwards.

"Keep going!" Ruka yelled. "It's working!"

The spiral turned and soon the motion helped them spin the blades. The beat of the drum quickened as the screw spun faster and faster, and a foreman raced uphill with his arms raised to the reservoir. Ruka and the three tribes of men grunted and turned in a steady rhythm, braced in the waves, rain and sticky sand.

They heard the cheers. Tong builders shouted from far up the street as the water sprayed from the first pipe. It would be far easier moving between reservoirs, and they needed only to keep filling, and last as long as possible.

"Well done, Kwal!" Ruka called to the boats. After a long pause he heard the young man answer.

"It's Haku, sir, but thank you."

Ruka blinked and felt the names and faces blur in his mind, the perfect shape in his memory gone. It didn't matter. Not anymore. "Kalma," he said, "go to the wall. Get all the tunnelers out."

* * *

Osco's morning now began with alcohol, too. He collected Marcel and some of his men, then trudged bleary eyed to the sappers. Everything was mud. A rain had started in the night and continued, and with the blocked off main tunnel, the fighting was light. It was easier to carry mud than corpses.

"Where's Digger?" Osco scanned the dirt-smeared faces and incredibly could now tell some apart.

"Down below, sir," one of the young engineers bowed.

Osco nodded and went to his work. The mood was slightly improved, which was a pleasant change but meant the end of Osco's hope was likely closer. After a few hours of toil the gossip was that the main tunnel had been all but cleared, the obstacle bypassed.

By early afternoon, a horn blew from the walls. The sappers, engineers and laborers all stood from their tasks and watched the city in confusion. Osco was worried the machines might be loosing and prepared to move his men back, but nothing came. He watched the gates but had little fear of a sally in any case. Men started shouting from the tunnels.

From every entrance men scattered or ducked inside or pulled ferociously on a series of ropes. Osco scanned the walls of the city, looking for some clue, but saw nothing.

"What's wrong?" he called when he could stand it no longer. "What's happening, Foreman?"

"Don't know, lord, not my fault." The young man shrugged helplessly and his face had paled. "They said run, or pull. All the men ahead. Didn't say why. Just doing what I'm told. I'm not responsible."

Osco and his men ran to the ropes and pulled with the others, dragging men screaming with terror from the holes. Soon they came out soaked and half-drowned, spitting water, gasping and weeping. Some of their faces and hands were covered in red scratches that looked like nail marks. Then the last ropes came loose, and no more men came out.

A trickle of water emerged at the main tunnel, then grew stronger and stronger until it became a gush that began filling the hole. Men scrambled away and tried to take their tools and supplies, but it kept growing until it filled the staging area, more and more until it was like a small lake. The whole army pulled away as it grew, then seemed finally to stop.

Osco walked amongst the engineers, who stared in a kind of shock without speaking. He searched for the most senior he knew, and shook him gently until he met his eyes.

"It's not possible," he said, "it's not possible, sir."

No one else said a word until the Overgeneral arrived. He looked at the water with sweaty skin that grew red as he saw the idle sappers.

"What is the delay? What is this? Drain it out! Do whatever they did! Where is the man in charge?"

The relatively young engineer, who seemed by all accounts to be the most senior man alive, gestured at the water with helpless hands, as if it explained everything. Osco knelt and dipped a finger in the water, tasting it. He looked at the city, trying to imagine the distance from where he stood to the coast.

"It's sea water, sir."

The Overgeneral glared, head shaking as if Osco were just another incompetent idiot. "What the hell does that mean? What are you even doing here, Harcas? What's wrong with all of you? Get back to work! Clear it and keep digging!"

The young engineer sagged to the dirt and looked away, arms wrapped around his chest.

"Please," mumbled a sapper, his bloody face still dripping from the panicked claws of his drowning comrades. "Can't, lord. Can't go no more."

A few others ran.

"I want them hung!" The Overgeneral turned to the nearby soldiers screaming. "Every last one! I want their names! I want their wives and children hung!" He turned from the dig site, wild-eyed as he stomped away. None moved to obey, including the soldiers, and for a moment the ever-busy site was still, almost peaceful save for the clangs of floating shovels in the water.

Go home, said the iron wall. Or die forgotten in foreign soil.

Osco took a flask of rum from Marcel's pocket with trembling fingers, and poured it into the pond.

"For Digger, and the others," he said. "They were good, brave men."

Marcel paused, then nodded, and they shared the drink. Osco had lost count of how many Naranians had died since they'd dragged him from his home in chains. But in this moment, at least, he did not find the numbers comforting.

Chapter 34

Admiral Mahen looked out at the navy blockading Ketsra, and clenched swollen fists.

"Pirates?" asked the captain quietly at his side.

Mahen said nothing, but knew exactly what he saw. On the East he recognized the tell-tale shape of Halin sails, to the West the flat, wide pontoons of the Molbog lords. They weren't 'pirates', they were island navies with their flags removed—lords who had betrayed their own people for the emperor's gold. What had once been to him a family squabble, had now become treason.

Mahen's stomach growled and his eyes drooped with fatigue. The storm had blown him wildly off course, destroyed a quarter of his fleet, then left him almost without wind for another week. His ships were loaded down with foreign warriors and animals, half-dead from so long with the sickness of sea. He had fewer scouts and outriggers than his enemy, and if his own smaller vessels couldn't contain them—which they couldn't—they would spread all around him shooting fire.

"Anything else?" he glanced up at the sky to Rangi. "Is there anything else, you murdering, shit-eating son of a bitch bastard?"

He sighed and looked to the captain of his flagship, who waited in disciplined silence despite the outburst. His crew were still the best in the world, his remaining ships battered but holding together.

And, he did have a hold full of enraged, giant, murderous killers…

"Loa, Admiral."

Egil and Chief Folvar emerged from below as if summoned. Mahen sniffed the air and glanced at the enemy fleet.

"How does Lord Folvar feel about ship-to-ship fighting?"

Egil translated, and the dark-haired giant clenched a fist over his scabbard.

"Efras Naga."

Egil smiled politely. "Lord Folvar carries a famous sword in our lands, Admiral, which he says is thirsty. He would be pleased to assist."

Mahen wasn't sure Lord Folvar was ever 'pleased' about anything, but he did seem eager.

"Thank you, Egil. Tell him to ready his men. The enemy is mostly trapped in that bay, and our ships need only make it to the shore. We're going to ram the bastards."

Again Egil translated, and Folvar grinned before he turned away.

Mahen gripped the rail and breathed. He had endured over a year now of shame and defeat—so many utter failures after a lifetime of victory. First he'd been away precisely when his king needed him, then forced to rely on Tong charity, then he had failed to guide Prince Ratama in re-taking Sri Kon.

With Farahi's support and blessing, Mahen had spent decades bringing law and order to the Alaku seas—the greatest honor and achievement of his family's storied history. Now here he was, floating at the edge of that sea, islander against islander as their allies burned.

Mahen shook his head, beginning to understand his lord's alliance with these Southern warriors. They…had their problems, of course. They were too serious and took offence so easily, employing their fists as often as their words. But they understood kin. They showed honor and respect for their own gods and spirits; they endured the wrath of the sea with fortitude, praying in critical moments, working hard to assist without complaint. They were, in fact, more like Mahen and his family than the island lords.

He had failed his king, that was the truth. But he would not fail the son. An Alaku still sat on the throne of Sri Kon, and Mahen had always respected Tane.

"I want every warship flying blue and silver," he called, turning to the officer deck. "These are Alaku waters. The king's sea, gentlemen. We sail full ahead, we sink any bastard who thinks otherwise, and burn anything that fights or floats. Ka?"

"Ka sir!" they yelled as one.

"Egil," he called to the skald waiting at the stairs. "Tell your lord these men are traitors. They're honorless scum—not worthy enemies, or soldiers. They don't require a moment's mercy."

The ambassador squinted, not translating until Folvar grunted in annoyance. The skald sighed and went on far longer than seemed necessary to explain, until the chief waved a dismissive hand. Egil limped to Mahen's side.

"Folvar didn't understand, Admiral. It's..difficult to explain." He raised his hands and shrugged. "You needn't worry. Mercy is an island word.

Chapter 35

Yiren waited for his servants to remove the corpse of the Overgeneral from his suicide pan. He shouldn't have killed him, really, but Yiren was frustrated. Anyway, someone had to be held responsible for such calamity.

The royal sappers were obliterated, including all but five of the trained engineers. The incredible amount of water could perhaps be diverted and some of the tunnels re-used. But maybe not. It was careful work requiring expertise. And anyway, what was to stop the Tong from flooding them again?

So the sappers had failed as the machines had failed. The vast majority of Yiren's assassins in Ketsra were dead, and the few left weren't enough to deal with the hundreds of guards posted at every gate to prevent subterfuge.

The war analects were now quite clear: he could wait for starvation, or assault the walls.

Yiren in any case ordered his generals to debate options. They argued about lobbing rocks under fire in a scattered line covered by archers; or gathering plague victims and throwing body parts over the walls. Both seemed desperate and not at all guaranteed. When Yiren could tolerate no more he spoke.

"Honored Generals, thank you for your vigorous discussion. But the state of your siege is intolerable. It ends now. The time has come to announce my presence to the army. Please have word spread through the officers that the son of heaven will stand and witness their efforts. Obviously, in the sight of God, failure is unacceptable."

The remaining senior military men looked to each other in the silence, perhaps unwilling to accept what this meant. Yiren stood.

"The son of heaven does not sit outside unconquered cities," he snapped. "You will prepare every ladder and ram at your disposal. Tomorrow, you will order a full assault, by order of rank from the center outward. All foreign warriors will be employed on the left, led by Mesan. The attack will continue day and night until the city is taken, or the army perishes. Cowards who withdraw are to be executed, their family lines ended."

The men prostrated themselves and muttered sniveling supplication, and Yiren watched his newest general. By the tightness in his jaw it was clear he disagreed. Yiren was curious if he would speak—his superior dead on the ground before him. He waited, but grew impatient.

"General Harcas, you have something you wish to say?"

The young Mesanite swelled with breath then exhaled.

"My lord—the strength of my people comes from formation and tactics. They are not well suited to such an assault."

Yiren's bodyguard prepared to kill, but he held them back with a gesture.

"Are you saying they aren't individually the best fighters in this army?

Osco's thick brow furrowed towards the floor. "No, lord, I'm certain they are. But skill means little when climbing a wall."

Yiren sighed as he considered, his hand still raised to stave off the man's death. It probably was a mistake to waste them all at the same time.

"Thank you for your counsel, General. You may select half of the Mesanites to remain under your command, along with my elite in reserve. The other half will be sent as planned."

The Magda traitor trembled with rage, and Yiren waited with genuine pleasure to see what would happen. He decided to kill him if he spoke again.

The proud brow quivered but he knelt in silence with all the rest, and Yiren was pleased. It was an excellent lesson for any servant—to know that sacrifice would be required. Osco had challenged and offered wise counsel, but accepted his will was law. A few such military servants were important.

"Thank you, honored guests," he waved to his attendants and bodyguards to help the men remove themselves. In any case they leapt away as if a basket of snakes had been dumped at their feet.

Yiren found he was satisfied. No doubt many tens or even hundreds of thousands would die, but this did not concern him. The ancient word for 'soldier' in the first analect, written by Ru's first and mightiest son, was often translated as 'sacrifice'. This was the purpose of soldiers. They were the heroic drones of a great colony, bred to fight and die bravely and thereby ensure the lives of their families.

Yiren knew this all too well. Duty and obedience was all. When his father had become emperor, his first task had been to destroy the parents and children of his cousins, who had not received a new imperial name in the lawful revolution. It had therefore been his duty, and he had done it swiftly. Yiren only hoped his soldiers were as honorable.

For no matter how much death and suffering, how much cost in supplies and lives to the many races of men, in a few days Ketsra would fall. Ru would at last reign from every coast of the continent as decreed by the analects, and Yiren Luwei, god's favored son, would be the first true emperor of the world.

* * *

By mid-afternoon, a morning drizzle had turned to a soft, but substantial rain. Mist shrouded the skyline, and made the enemy army hard for Ruka to see.

"What now?" men whispered to their fellows or commanders or foremen, who answered with a hush or made jokes at their expense. All had been told, and in any case knew—the attack would come. Only Ruka knew exactly how.

With no obvious strategy to destroy the walls, the Naranians would assault in full strength. The battle would rage until the light faded, then according to the analects, the enemy would lick his wounds and begin again in the morning.

If we hold, he thought.

Down the ramparts he saw Tong holding flimsy spears, soaked and miserable in their thick cloth gambesons. They stood in silence, wary faces scanning the mist. They had faith in their wall, perhaps, and in their youth and part in a grand story. But they were afraid, and rightly so. For no matter their training or imaginations—few would understand the slaughter to come.

Ruka did not need magical visions of the future to know it would be the reddest day in every survivor's life. When the assault came, the empire would stack death on top of death at the farmer-king's wall, climbing over great heaps of their countrymen, soaking the soil with ended life. Many would suffer terrible wounds in the days to come. Few would learn how to clean off the blood.

Ruka walked the ramparts checking ammunition, and so that his allies might see a monster fought at their side. He nodded to the men and smiled Bukayag's smile, his usually faint pulse thundering in his ears. A part of him looked forward to the battle. He had waited for it all his life, and already he pictured helpless young men of the continent, trapped between stone and the long drop with slippery fingers and frightened eyes.

They are mostly boys, brother. Just farmers and merchant-sons—they do not deserve our hatred.

Bukayag hissed and seized the wall, hands flexing in anticipation. He looked out at the shapeless form of his enemy and snarled.

"They're all to blame. They come to foreign land with boots and iron. They are wolf pups hunting a pregnant doe, uncaring and shameless, only too timid to be cruel. If men had but one heart, brother, I would tear it out and chew."

Ruka breathed and tried not to let the words become his. Nearby Tong who had heard his brother's tone cringed, so he moved away. He walked the length of the wall, counting a thousand men with another ten beneath, ready to take their places, or carry wounded. They had machines ready to destroy rams, endless water to douse fires, and considerable ammunition. They had prepared well, the city coming together to defend itself. But now came the true test.

Ruka took his place in the center, knowing this was where the first attack would come. The men of ash surrounded him in iron, curved swords and seaxes at the ready, black bearded iron giants like the statues of Ascomi gods upon the walls. He only wished he had more.

At last the enemy blew their horns and the echoes of their drums raced down the line. Ruka looked to his men and met Birmun's eyes. He said nothing, for he knew his brother's fierce grin said more than any words—the fullness of his scream more articulate as he answered the call of war. Birmun and the others howled at his side.

* * *

The imperial army emerged from the fog in endless rows, not bothering with a looser formation to reduce their casualties from missiles.

"Loooose!" cried Hemi's son, and the builders and Tong archers rained death.

Stones and dark, wooden shafts—most made unknowingly from Ascomi trees—filled the fog, striking everywhere to a morbid chorus of screams.

Foremen and army officers raced across the ramparts and platforms shouting orders and beginning the movement of ammunition from below. More soldiers were being called already from the reserves to be ready to replace casualties and bolster hard-pressed sections of the wall. Most carried short spears and long knives, and would be weak on the battlefield—but they could kill helpless men on ladders well enough.

Few of Ruka's warriors had any skill with a bow. It wasn't an honorable weapon in a duel, and the good iron armor worn by rich Ascomi chiefs and their retainers stopped lesser weapons. To pierce good, corrugated mail took a bow with a massive draw, and only hunters and the raiders of the steppe spent the required years of practice to use such a tool. Instead, they waited for their enemy. Some spoke words from the ancient tales in measured breaths like battle hymns, feet stomping down the line to the rhythm.

Every man wore an iron breastplate or chain rings with sleeves that would stop any weapon on the continent. The heat and weight would make them suffer, but suffering was nothing. All had survived a wasteland; all had fought duels and shed blood or killed, or if younger—part of the 'Galdric generation', trained many years for this moment. All were warriors—men of winter and ash formed from the earth furthest from the sun. And whether it was true or not, all believed that to fail here was to doom their kin to destruction forever. It was true because the Godtongue said it was. And no matter what came or what their allies did, Ruka knew his followers would stain the good black earth of paradise with their blood.

"Cousins," he shouted, taking some small control before his brother's day of glory. "Send them down alive and screaming, so their brothers hear their terror."

He looked on the pure, fanatical will of his mother's kin, worried only a few might leap from the wall just to land the first blow.

"You have been patient, brother," he whispered to Bukayag. "For many years. But today is yours." Bukayag practically shook with excitement, and Ruka felt a grisly smile.

Unlike the men of ash, his enemy's armor was weak, or non-existent. In his Grove, he lifted a bow, made with a light draw that would still kill men. In the land of living he stepped to a gap in the wall and drew. Long had he known he would one day stand here waiting, and he had never been one to waste time.

The dead gathered arrows in piles in his practice range. Ruka had not counted them, but with a quick glance decided he saw at least a thousand. He extended a hand to take the first, drawing and aiming at a target before sending it to the land of the living. The shaft flamed to life in Ruka's fingers, growing into the bow as he pulled back the string.

"The men on the wall are yours, brother. But those before it—those are mine."

He released, and a flaming arrow roared down into the Naranians as they prepared their ladders. The first target fell without a shout, clutching his chest as he disappeared from sight, trampled by the others.

An eager island servant handed Ruka another arrow. Like many of the dead he had become a master of his craft, eyeing the fletching with a satisfied grin. Ruka returned the smile, comfortable as ever with all craftsmen. "A beautiful weapon," he praised, and the young corpse nodded enthusiastically. "Let's see if we can use them all."

***

Osco forced himself to watch the assault. By order, he stood with the Mesanites he had spared on the outskirts of the siege. They were 'to be prepared' in case they were needed, but Osco very seriously considered fighting his 'master' to the death if they were asked.

He watched the other half of his brethren massing on the left flank with countless thousands, ready to march in madness at the huge walls with little more than ladders.

The Tong's weapons began killing almost gleefully as the army entered their incredible range. Archers followed, loosing at an aggressive rate that implied either great fear, or vast ammunition. Knowing his enemy, Osco expected the latter.

The Naranians marched bravely. Their drums pounded and their flags waved, squares of men moving with painful slowness through the attack. They did not run, or charge, and the time it took to reach the wall was agony. Waves of missiles came like the pain of a wound, pulsing in waves before the next re-load of the terrible machines.

Osco realized it came from everywhere except the center, which seemed mostly silent. As he considered the strangeness of this, a single flare of light appeared in the fog. He narrowed his gaze and watched as a streak of fire launched from the very middle of the siege, hitting men now preparing their ramps and long ladders. Another followed, and another, and Osco began to count—a death for every two beats of his heart.

In that moment he knew, as perhaps he had always known, why the Tong machines had been so terrifying—as he understood the flooded sappers, and now the thump, thump, thumping of the flaming arrows. Kale's killer guarded that wall. He stood right in the middle of all that death, right where he belonged.

Osco wondered how many of those giants stood beside him. Would the same warriors he had faced on an island beach now swat his countrymen like flies? He wondered if Carth and his men might be there. Perhaps Mesanite would fight Mesanite, one on either side of a foreign wall neither wished to take or hold. What meaning did honor have, he wondered, when brother fought brother over land that did not house their children?

At last the army climbed. Massed infantry scaled like insects, more visible now as the fog was lifting. Ketsra's shrouded defenders became clear, unbroken and thick along the ramparts. The sun shimmered above all like an egg cooked in a pot of water.

Rocks and boiling oil rained from the ramparts, fire spreading down the line in screams of agony. Men fell in their hundreds, then their thousands. Ladders burned or were broken, battering rams smashed hopelessly far from the gates. On the Naranians climbed.

Builders went to the walls, too, and in the midst of the chaos began constructing towers, ramps, and climbing apparatus, even as they were shot, crushed or burned. Hammers drove nails into the stone and attached ropes as the battle raged, even as men fell on their work from above.

Osco looked on the Mesanites and managed a grim smile. Unlike the others, they had gone with shields rather than ladders over their heads. They prepared in formation, moving slowly to their climb and in unison. They ascended the wall as a bronze carpet of ants, moving slower but soon higher than lesser soldiers until many reached the top.

There, they began to fall.

Osco looked away. He could see casualties already being carted down through gaps in the line. Servants dressed in red ran up and down the siege with cloth tarps on wheels in caravans of ragged flesh. Men marched, climbed, and died—replaced steadily in an endless stream of slaughter.

After a time Osco reminded himself to breathe. He unclenched tired and shaking fists, and blinked dry eyes. The sun rose, peaked, and began its descent, and he accepted water from a servant carrying it from unit to unit. Finally he could stand it no more.

"I'm going to the wounded," he said to Martel, who nodded wordlessly.

Osco walked in a daze through the hectic camp, following the red-shirted surgeon's aides through thousands waiting their turn at the wall. He passed to the makeshift tents that buzzed with a constant moaning, pierced only here and there by a wail, or scream.

He found even here the foreigners were separated, the dead and dying assembled with thoughtful precision. Osco found one tent far more quiet than the rest, and walked in without needing to ask where his brothers lay. He stopped inside the stinking, dimly lit entrance, counting the beds, then walked amongst his countrymen, stopping at each living man to recite a prayer, thank him for his bravery, and express the pride of his city. He did not ask their names and was not expected to. He knew the ritual comforted them—reminded them that here, at the end of honor and sanity, a civilized world still existed, and would remember them. But he did not know if it was true.

The beds seemed endless. By the end his voice was hoarse and sweat covered his body, but this was nothing, less than nothing, and he felt only shame for not joining the men's fate.

Two long rows from the end he found Martel had followed and begun the rituals on the other side. He repeated the words, he touched men's hands and arms. As with the suddenness of the violence that had maimed them, the moment soon ended, the task finished.

Osco and his familial rival walked to the entrance together for a breath of less corrupt air, wiping sweat from their brows. A surgeon's aide offered them water, which Osco waved away with an almost violent jerk, and the boy fled.

"These god cursed people," spit Martel. "What sort of man drinks next to the dying thirst."

Osco nodded but said nothing because the soft men of Naran had no culture of war, and did not understand. Their soldiers were peasants with spears and went to war in ignorance.

For a moment he wondered if the giant sorcerer had received his letter, but did not believe it mattered now. Despite all the death and horror, Ketsra was doomed. These fools would fight to the bitter end in invisible chains, and neither Bukayag nor any of his men would leave that city.

As he looked at the wounded, Osco knew Yiren would not permit defeat. He would send his slaves at that wall until it fell, or until every last one of them was dead. He would sacrifice his people on dirt and stone, until the defenders were so exhausted they couldn't lift their arms to kill. Like Osco's kin, they had been trained to obey since childhood. With their son of heaven watching, safely protected by ten thousand men, they would fight to the end.

Osco looked into Martel's eyes, seeing his own misery and rage reflected as if from a pane of glass. But unlike the eyes of every other man in this god-forsaken army—they were not those of a cowed slave who accepted his fate.

Though it would mean his death, and the deaths of his wife and children, and though he knew Naran could replace a dead son of heaven—Osco no longer cared. Some things could not be born in silence.

By the blood and suffering of the fallen, and every sacred oath of honor he held dear, Osco swore to kill the man responsible for this massacre. If one died here, maybe the next would be more cautious with his people's lives.

"Woe to the enemies of Mesan," he whispered, and Martel broke from his trance as his jaw clenched. He saluted with a nod.

Chapter 36

Egil looked at the arrows lodged in the Admiral's gut, and knew he was dead.

"Not so bad," he said, covering the blood-soaked rags. Mahen grunted in pain as he tried to laugh.

Egil shouldered the man's weight on the deck of the warship, and waited to climb down to the beach. Their vessel had reached the harbor half-burnt, the blood-soaked crew still scrambling to douse flames with buckets of water. The captain helped Egil carry Mahen by the other arm, and they stepped down the ramp together.

Most surviving ships had already docked or at least made landfall along the coast. Only Folvar and his now blood-soaked retainers remained, sending the rest in smaller ships to the beach and the sounds of battle at the far end of the city. Egil looked out at the remaining pirate ships, most of which were in flames or sinking into the bay. The few remaining fled for their lives.

"That a problem?" he pointed. The admiral grunted.

"Rats always..ah, spirits…flee a sinking ship. They'll scurry back to their rocks now."

Egil and the sailor set Mahen against a flat stone, and he sighed in relief as he looked out at the water.

"I'm alright, go with the others."

"I'm no warrior, admiral." Egil shrugged. "There's little point."

The fires of the bay sparkled in the old admiral's eyes as he watched. "There's a hundred thousand men in this city, skald, hiding in their houses. I expect they could use a bit of courage. Heroic song, and a fine singer."

Egil squinted as he considered the words in silence.

"Go with the ambassador," Mahen called to the many sailors and marines now gathered on the beach.

"We should stay with you and the ships, Admiral," answered his captain. "The remaining pirates…"

"They're bloody finished and so am I." Mahen winced and put his head back against the rock. The captain knelt with tears in his eyes. "It's alright, son. Tell your children what an old stubborn goat was their grandfather, and take this man to the wall. That's an order. Go straight down main street with torches and loud voices, ka?"

"Ka, Admiral.

The young captain saluted, and Egil found he didn't know what to say. He'd had no idea the man was his son. He liked the old islander, too, and didn't want to leave him to die alone.

"Best hurry," said Mahen, patting Egil's knee. "I'm going to sit and watch my enemies burn awhile. A fine way to spend the evening."

Egil smiled and nodded sadly. He translated the words for the men of ash waiting nearby, and Chief Folvar nodded as if it weren't a joke, removing a necklace to place in the Admiral's hands.

"Vol was watching," he said with meaningful nod, then winced. "His foolish people worship…rocks and trees. Still, this one will be re-born. A mighty shark, perhaps." He smiled encouragingly.

Mahen took the silver sword chain and nodded weakly in thanks before he looked to Egil for translation.

"Folvar says you are a great warrior, Admiral, and a man of honor. He thanks you for seeing his men across the sea."

The islander clutched the necklace in a bloody hand, clear pleasure on his face.

"Goodbye, singer. I was pleased to meet you."

Egil held back the tears and nodded, hearing the ballad of the island sea-warrior already forming in his mind.

"Goodbye, Admiral. May you feast with the gods, in the halls of the brave."

With that he bowed and scooped a piece of driftwood for a walking stick, and with the mix of sailors and warriors at his side, betrayed every instinct, and hobbled towards the war.

Foreign men and women watched them from their houses, families gathered behind windows and doors braced with lumber, as if it would keep out an army.

"Do they speak your language?" Egil asked the captain.

"Aye, mostly. And we theirs."

Egil nodded and called to a group of men on the street as if they were soldiers. "Your brothers need you on the wall! Bring weapons! Bring yourselves! Follow us!"

They looked at one another in confusion and did nothing, so Egil stomped his way to the gathered cluster and grabbed the youngest, putting a shovel from the nearby garden in his hand. "Now is your moment, boy," he growled. "'Tomorrow they'll say 'he held the city with a damn shovel,' and even the soldiers will be jealous. Few swings of this, my boy, and in the morning you'll be a hero."

He pointed at two others who looked healthy and strong, seeing a little guilt in their eyes. "And you?" He pointed to the nearby houses. "Will you let other men protect your wives and daughters?"

"We've no weapons," said one with a violent shrug. "We aren't soldiers."

"Give them some knives," Egil gestured at the sailors, who stepped forward and handed bronze blades. "There, now you're soldiers. Let's go, brothers! Follow us. We'll have an army before we reach the walls!"

He turned without a glance and crossed the street, marching to the next pack of silent watchers. These he belittled or boosted as required, and by the third crossing street he had fifty men. "Get your damned cowardly neighbors!" he called to his growing pack. "Rouse the city! We go to the walls!"

When he ran out of visible packs, Egil began to sing, loud as you please, torch raised as he serenaded the street with an old warrior song, doing his best to throw in Pyuish words. When he passed others who didn't join, he stopped and pointed and called them cowards, and shouted 'whose city is this?' until the men were drowned with similar calls, usually going inside and returning with clubs or knives and red-faces to join the growing column. The more noise he made, the more he gathered, and the more came to see what was happening, the more Egil swept in his path.

By the seventh street he couldn't count the mob. Most were men, young and old, but he saw some women and older children too. They marched through the city growing in noise, many others singing foreign songs. Mothers came from their houses with jugs of wine to give to the men, and Egil hoped to god it bolstered their nerves. He even took one and threw it back. "Damn my matron and all sensible things," he called, to no one in particular. "I'm a free man, and gods be damned if I'll die sober!"

The men roared as if they understood and it had been some victory speech, and Egil marched on.

"What'll we do with them at the wall?" yelled the Pyu captain over the din at Egil's side.

"No idea!" Egil called. Then he shouted another rallying cry, holding up his wine jug as he swigged. The men roared in exaggerated approval.

* * *

Ruka ducked an arrow and lifted his sword. He stared for a frozen moment at the look of triumph on a young Naranian's face as it crested above the wall. Ruka supposed he understood—to have survived the long march and the climb when so many others had fallen—it must have seemed a miracle. It made no difference.

Bukayag cleaved the boy's head above the jaw. Their razor-sharp steel splashed blood and brains from the wall like a mason's scrap. The boy's body fell, and for a blissful moment, another did not take its place. Ruka leaned and breathed against the cold stone.

"They are pressed hard in the East, shaman," Birmun yelled over the din.

"Go," Ruka grunted. "Take Canut's retainers."

The old chief and five men of ash pushed towards the heavier fighting, their faces pale and sweating. Ruka had thinned his men in the center as much as he dared—maybe one Ascomi for every three ladders below, each chopping as if hoarding firewood before the frost. He should have spread them sooner, he knew. He thought the day's attack would already be over.

Blood and body parts slopped over the walls, coating all like sediment-filled paint thrown from pails. An ever-growing mound of corpses formed at the base of the wall, impossible to remove even by the efficient Naranians. Ruka had stopped counting, but his own losses were light. For that reason he should have been pleased—the day had been a one-sided massacre, many hours of pure butchery for the enemy's soldiers.

But the fog was gone. In the warm orange glow of a fading sun, Ruka saw an endless mass of troops coming forward. He began to understand, with a quiet fear—this emperor was not 'testing' the defences. He had broken from the analects—this was the main assault, the only assault. And it would not stop until the will of the city shattered, or the whole of the emperor's army perished.

Ruka blinked to clear sweat from his vision, picturing in hurried images all the faces of the men he'd killed. The climbers were terrified—their ascent perilous, begun over the bodies of their comrades, every failed wave before left in ragged tatters. Yet still they advanced. They climbed their brethren's corpses to be hacked at the wall, or if very lucky, to perhaps wound an enemy before being cut or thrown down.

It was beyond bravery. In his enemy's faces Ruka did not see heroes, but madmen, expressions wild and inhuman—slaves driven with the whip, bound by the mind.

"Fresh wave, shaman!" one of the Tong commanders called.

Ruka blinked and banished the dead. More arrows flew past him, one striking the mail on his shoulder then bounced away. He looked at his feet, confused, for the missile was too thick and angled. Bukayag, of course, understood the horror first.

Droplets of blood fell from the sky, and the defenders cried out in terror as they swat as if at a swarm of flies. The Naranians were using their machines to throw the body parts of their own dead.

Bukayag was growling, or maybe laughing. He swung their sword to meet fresh men and boys climbing to his reach, and Ruka did not interfere. They had a deal—at the wall, they were his, and Ruka was so very tired.

Darkness loomed, and he had no reinforcements. He watched the violence as if imprisoned—as if Bukayag were the master and he only an observer. His brother killed and roared, his limbs moving as if every death only made him stronger.

Time passed and deaths mounted, until attacker and defender fought by torch and moonlight alone. For the day-blind men of Vol and Galdra, Ru and the Enlightened, the world became only grunts and screams, shapes emerging and vanishing in the night. But Ruka was something else.

He leaned over the rampart and looked at the men below, many staring at the glow of his golden eyes shining in the dark. Bukayag saw their terror and laughed, calling out in his broken Naranian.

"Now you see what monster awaits you! Come and die!"

The closest leapt, falling back to the earth rather than face him, and Bukayag seized a spear, hurling it with monstrous strength to pierce at least two men.

Ruka pulled him back and raced down the rampart, finding more and more men left unchallenged. He no longer looked to his water-clock, nor to his retainers or allies, for he was too tired to think, and his brother did not care. The dead in Ruka's Grove dug in a frantic rhythm yet still failed to keep up with the graves. They massed around the graveyard in many teams of diggers, as many as could be spared from vital tasks.

Bukayag killed. He pushed soldiers to their deaths with his bare hands; he threw them at the others on their ladders; he cut them limb from torso with single swipes. When they refused to climb, he skewered them with Ruka's spears.

"This is the world of men," Bukayag roared, seizing a climber by the neck and dangling him over the wall. "This is what they are, what they will always be."

The young soldier died, and Ruka felt nothing. He heard voices around him and knew the enemy was getting in. He heard cheers and knew they saw their victory—that they had likely taken several sections, and with every moment massed nearby. Soon they would try to open the gates, but Ruka couldn't stop them. He could only watch his brother fight for their lives.

Bukayag spun as he sensed movement, slipping on the pool of blood at his feet but catching himself on a rail. Ruka blinked, expecting attack, but nothing came. He saw fire moving up the ramparts, men carrying torches and massing at the stairs. More came from the city, in the hundreds, and maybe the thousands. Bukayag blinked in confusion, unable to comprehend. But Ruka knew. They weren't the enemy. They were the Tong.

Builders and farmers, merchants and miners charged up the stairs carrying knives and planks of wood. Women and even children came with them, a boy as young as ten with hammer in hand. Ruka could see they fought already along the wall. None of his own men were left beside him save Birmun, who had apparently not left his flank, guarding him with dead eyes and black sword dripping gore, corpses all around him.

Ruka saw the rest were slumped down against the base fortification, exhausted or wounded. It wasn't soldiers defending anymore. It was the city. The Tong had come. The citizens had risen.

Bukayag shrugged in contempt, and Ruka collapsed. He felt arms drag him down the stairs as they replaced him, the wall held by those defending their home. Ruka wondered briefly if he were already dead, or asleep, and all of this a dream. He slumped down beside the others, hearing voices he could not understand, not caring if they were foreigners or his own people. He closed his eyes a moment later, and knew nothing more.

** * *

Kale had watched the gruesome scene through Ruka's eyes since it began. In his 'Grove', the giant lumbered to his cabin in the woods, too exhausted to even close the door. There was a crashing groan inside, and then silence.

A knot of emotion formed in Kale's breast he expected never to unravel. The slaughter was horrific. The aggression of the Naranian attack seemed impossible to believe. Why they had come with such force and passion, and why a single city of farmers and merchants on a far-away coast should be worth such a price, he simply couldn't comprehend.

He saw only that Naran had come to destroy a peaceful people—Lani's people; friends and allies of the isles and Kale's family, with no reason save ambition and greed. And in the midst of the horror, Ruka fought them.

Like some vengeful god he'd stood high upon the wall in the thickest fighting, knocking men from the Tong's walls and leading the defence. He had mumbled to himself in fits, sometimes crying out to the Naranians to just go home.

Then the darkness came. Ruka's eyes had filled with water as he looked on the battlefield with as much horror as Kale, and transformed. A shadow emerged from his skin, something Kale had seen before in Farahi's palace, rising with dark tendrils to wrap him tighter than any armor, drawing him up as if a puppet on strings. His eyes leaked red behind the gold, squinting as if displeased until the light of the sun truly faded from sight.

Now Kale watched Ruka asleep against the wall, fascinated and confused. The giant twitched as if still fighting in his dream, his eyes closed, his breathing steady. As Kale watched, his bloodstained hand moved to the dirt as if pulled, and drew words, very slowly, in the Pyu common tongue.

I see you, Princeling.

A shadowy maw surged away from the still body, snapping at Kale, but seemed bound to the giant by short golden threads of silk. Ruka's eyes opened and he straightened. He rolled his shoulders and breathed comfortably, as if untouched by the night of impossible strength.

"Suffering offends you, islander," he hissed, his voice strange, "does it not?"

Despite the words written in the dirt, Ruka's shadowy eyes did not turn precisely to Kale's spirit, as if it couldn't quite see or sense him. Kale said nothing, and the thing shook with laughter, or maybe a snarl.

"Our enemy will be enraged at the slaughter, islander. Once inside they will reave and rape. They will destroy this city. You know it is true."

Still Kale said nothing, fascinated by the exchange, though he expected the shadow was right.

"We can end it, you and I." The shadow smiled with Ruka's face. "We can end the slaughter and send these would-be conquerors home. You need not kill. Your soft hands will be clean." Here he paused, perhaps waiting for Kale's response before he lost his patience. "Show me this son of heaven. I will kill him. Me. Bukayag, son of Noss. I will do this, and see how slave-men crumble at the feet of their fallen god. Show me, and all your little friends will be safe."

"What are you?" Kale backed away, letting his spirit whisper in the Grove, hoping the thing could hear. It's eyes snapped back and forth as if searching.

"I am reality, islander. I am the starving wolf that eats its young." 'Bukayag' shrugged, drawing a knife from his hip. "Do nothing, if you wish—rest like all the other corpses in my brother's prison. But you have more to lose than your life. Oh yes, little thing, I can hurt you. You have a son. You have a family. And I will not let my brother die in this place. We will escape. Disappoint me, princeling, and when my brother sleeps I will pluck your whore from her royal bed, and before my brother wakes I will…"

"Enough."

Kale almost shivered at the look of ecstasy splayed across Ruka's shadow-warped face. He wondered if instead he could destroy this thing, or the entirety of Ruka's Grove, if he turned all his will to the task. But doing so would not save Ketsra.

He paced, torn as ever between action and inaction. Despite the horror of this thing, it was right. Better to stop the invaders at the wall. Better to kill one man and maybe put an end to the madness for a time. It was what Lani would want. What would protect her longest.

"I'll help you," Kale whispered, and the creature or maybe madman smiled. "But I won't kill for you. At dawn, I'll show you the emperor, and help clear a path. Look to the sky." With that he lifted his arms and rose up from the outer defences, soaring higher until the city sunk beneath his feet.

The task, he decided, would not be difficult. A wall hadn't stopped Kale those years ago, and back then he had only the barest glimmer of power. It floated around him, endless and bright, even in the dark. For a moment he wondered how much carnage he could cause to the imperial army, if he wished, but put the thought away. He wouldn't kill, never again, except to directly protect those he'd loved.

If it was a mistake to help this shadow Kale couldn't be certain. In his heart he hoped the emperor and the barbarian would meet on the battlefield, bare their fangs, and perhaps the world would lose two monsters in a single day.

With a small thread of power, he plucked a hole in the thickly clouded sky, and searched the endless army for one of the two men in the world who deserved his attention.

* * *

A messenger came for Osco in the middle of the night. He went fully armed, though he expected no chance of getting close enough to kill.

The walk through the sweat-sheened army felt impossibly long. He arrived at the now unhidden imperial tent and bodyguards swarmed him, disarming even his hidden knives, which didn't seem to surprise or concern them.

Half the generals, and most of the nobles, priests and bureaucrats sat in specific order all around the emperor in a fortified throne. He wore the full regalia of the son of heaven, the crest of his family and the empire stretched behind him on silk pulled taut between ivory carvings of the sun and moon.

Osco was told to wait until summoned, then when called not to prostrate himself but approach as a military servant with head lowered but eyes to watch for cues. He was thankful, for he did not know if he was capable of kneeling to this man again.

The mood in the tent was…pleasant, almost giddy, and filled with confidence.

"General Magda," called the emperor almost immediately on his arrival. "Thank you for joining us."

The emperor's eyes were furtive, his heavily powdered skin moist, his movements pronounced. Osco recognized a kind of temporary madness gained on the battlefield, a shallow arrogance to drown fear.

"Of course, divine lord." He approached to the appointed radius and bowed.

"The enemy is weakening," Yiren said with an exaggerated grin. "Their are women and children on the walls. It won't be long now."

Osco nodded as if in congratulations. Defeat had already planted itself in his guts and spread like corruption, his efforts all but useless so far.

"You and your countrymen have served me well, General," said the emperor. "I am told your Mesanites nearly overwhelmed the defenders in their initial attempt. Many reached the ramparts. Many wounded or even killed defenders, and held the fighting their much longer than any other troop. Their commanders are to be congratulated."

Osco said nothing, employing a lifetime of stoic control not to seethe with hatred. He realized he was simply here to be honored—to stand in the winner's circle when the walls of Ketsra fell. The thought made him feel despoiled, unclean, and he desperately desired a wash. But he bowed as if pleased and stepped away when dismissed to join the other 'victors'.

More commanders and politicians were summoned and congratulated. The emperor recounted stories of the men's heroic efforts and loyalty, and how the new lands would soon require management, and surely the men most key to the victory would be involved.

The rich nobles preened and cooed, and the ritual went on. The boldness, the vision, the devotion to piety and Ru's glory could not be heaped with enough praise, the men's self-congratulation limitless in its endurance.

You haven't won yet, you smug, arrogant bastards, Osco thought.

But he had no delusions of their failure. There were simply too many, their impossible obedience unshakable in victory or defeat.

The celebrations continued to a rising dawn. The servants opened the tent so the nobles might watch the battle, bringing lemon-water and sweet meats and pounded rice. Still-thick clouds bathed in crimson light filled the sky—a fitting view for a night so red with death. Osco squinted as he watched them, thinking his eyes fooled him until he heard men in excited voices pointing. A thin ray of light had broken through the thick canopy, driving down like a spear precisely aimed at the Naranian command. Osco turned with the others, and found Yiren's features lit. It was even more precise than he'd realized—the son of heaven glowed in the dawn.

All stilled and silenced, and for a long moment the emperor seemed not to acknowledge the phenomenon. Then he smiled. "God himself shines light on his favored son." Yiren closed his eyes as if basking in the warmth. "Victory is close at hand."

The men began to applaud. They prostrated and prayed on hands and knees, praising their emperor with renewed oaths of eternal loyalty. Yiren accepted it all. There seemed no end until a bodyguard entered with a messenger, apologizing for the disturbance. Two of the generals spoke to them privately, but Yiren interrupted.

"Speak."

The messenger bowed as if to obey but the general blocked his path.

"Apologies, lord, we will deal with it. Please don't concern yourself. It seems the Tong gate has opened, and some men are coming through."

"Are they surrendering?"

The general glanced at the messenger, who now seemed paralyzed and did not raise his head, before he spoke. "No, lord. It seems they are attempting a doomed counter-attack. I'll go and deal with them."

Yiren shifted on his throne, but seemed amused.

"Do that, Over-General. And take General Harcas with you."

The older soldier twitched and kept his eyes carefully from Osco's direction. "Of course, lord, but…that might not be wise."

Saying this to the emperor seemed also unwise, and many men looked away as if fearing Yiren's reaction. He smiled politely. "And why might that be, Over-General?"

"The men emerging, divine lord—some are barbarians, but others—at least by their spears and formation, it seems, they are Mesanite heavy infantry."

Osco felt the many eyes crawl upon him, but showed nothing. He thought on the last time he had seen Carth and his men—their stand at the beach, undaunted in the face of destruction. He realized he hoped it was true. He hoped his brothers chose to face an endless army with unarmed citizens behind them, never ahead, a last stand as their final deed.

Osco's people were not perfect, he knew that. But no Mesanite had ever conquered a city. They trained for violence all their lives so that others might live without it. And here, at the battle of the age, with no reward or purpose save that which had forged them, it seemed the best of House Magda fought against a tyrant by choice.

Thank you, Osco thought, with a pride he could barely keep from Naranian eyes. Thank you, brothers, for reminding me who my people truly are.

Chapter 37

Egil sat with the wounded and exhausted defenders, finishing the dregs of his wine. His mob had reached the ramparts and spread along the wall, and while many had seen the task and simply run back into the darkness, most had climbed.

They found Ruka at the end of the main road, fighting almost alone for a long stretch of the wall, cleaving attackers like a farmer's wheat. Egil and some others had managed to pull him back as the Tong filled the gap, though he had looked at them with no recognition until Egil called his name a dozen times. Finally he'd sagged, almost lifeless and limp as they dragged him away.

Now Egil watched over him, sitting on the edge of the ramparts drinking. He couldn't remember ever watching Ruka sleep.

Birmun sat beside him, struggling to stay awake.

"Still alive?" Egil whispered. "Sleep. I'll watch him. You're both safe for now."

Birmun frowned and grunted, but closed his eyes and sagged instantly. Now Egil drank alone and listened to the battle. He thanked the Mother he'd convinced Juchi to stay in Orhus with the children. Despite the madness, he found himself quite comfortably lost in his own thoughts, then nearly shouted in alarm as Ruka's hand moved. It drew Pyu symbols in the dirt, and Ruka began muttering to himself, teeth bared as if ready to bite an unseen foe. Egil froze at the expression.

He had, of course, long known of 'Bukayag'. Many times over the years he had seen Ruka become a thing more like a beast. He frequently spoke to himself, sometimes in fierce disagreement, less careful to conceal it as time passed. The other men of ash who saw seemed unbothered—as if it were only natural for their prophet, who heard the gods speak, to answer them so. If anything, it only grew his legend, for surely, the logic went, only the greatest of heroes would argue with the gods.

Egil expected it was a kind of madness.

Moments later Ruka rose with hands curled like claws, moving as if renewed by a full night's rest. His eyes found Egil's, and as was true in the past there was recognition, and perhaps impatience, but nothing else.

"Is Aiden here?" he rasped as if he'd forgotten how to speak.

"No, lord," Egil spoke soothingly, hairs rising all over his body.

"Useless, lazy things." Ruka's face stretched to reveal his teeth. "Rally warriors, and meet me at the Eastern gate."

Egil—as a rule—did not question the words of 'Bukayag'. He bowed in respect and said nothing, and with vacant eyes, Ruka turned away as if for some other important task.

Egil gathered the Pyu sailors, two official messengers who waited at the main gate, and Chief Folvar. He sent messengers to the king, and in what felt like no time at all, he had managed to summon two Tong generals, the Mesanite commander, the king's daughter Lani and his bodyguard nephew, then finally woke Birmun.

"What took so damn long," Ruka growled at the Eastern gate. Egil could only sigh, and shrug in apology.

Ruka was already surrounded by men of ash and horses. The king's entourage approached, and within moments they were arguing over what should be done. The king had apparently suggested sending reinforcements to the wall and then a messenger to negotiate. His generals agreed, pointing out the great victory already, and that surely the emperor's soldiers were just waiting for a chance to keep face.

Ruka stared all into silence.

"The emperor," he said slowly, "is outside these walls. Only his death will bring victory."

The Tong exchanged dubious looks. One of the generals spoke.

"Corpses are piled half as high as the wall, Lord shaman. The city is rising to the defence. Surely, they will at least consider…"

"No. They will die to the last," Ruka interrupted. "A hundred thousand slaves will climb and overwhelm you. We must kill him."

As if to punctuate his point, a cluster of broken limbs and flesh sloshed across the nearby dirt, no doubt thrown from a catapult.

"How?" asked the other Tong general, clearly disturbed by the sight. "As you say, the army is vast."

"Distraction," Ruka barked, as if it were obvious. "Two groups will leave the walls and fight until a gap is cleared. Then I will take every horse and rider, and charge him."

Both generals scoffed and looked to the princess and the king's nephew as if to join in their disbelief. They seemed concerned but said nothing, and the general answered.

"These 'two groups', if they leave the walls, even if you succeed…"

"Most will die," Ruka confirmed with growing impatience. The general's voice rose.

"You said their army would fall apart outside these walls," he stepped forward, "after their supplies were sabotaged, the army would fall apart. Wasn't that what you told us?"

"Plans change." If Ruka noticed the aggressive posture he didn't show it. "This is the way."

The Tong general shook his head and turned away, whispering quiet words to the other general before turning back. "I can't send men out that gate. It's suicide. None would agree to go."

Ruka's face curled in disgust, and tension grew in the silence. The Mesanite commander broke it, speaking in an accented language Egil didn't understand. The Tong princess translated for him.

"Commander Carth says his men are fresh, and bored, and well armed for the task."

No one else seemed quite sure what to say, particularly the generals. Chief Folvar spoke little enough of any continental tongue, but seemed to get the gist. "If men are needed, shaman," he nodded in respect, "I will see it done."

Birmun too stepped forward. "I'll ride with the shaman, chief, and guard him with my life."

Folvar met his eyes, as if inspecting the truth of that claim. Eventually he nodded.

Ruka however seemed utterly unimpressed, and disinterested. His squinted eyes swept the gathering and he turned away as if all were decided. "The Mesanites will hold. When the enemy is locked to their flanks—take your men and smash them, Folvar. Chase as far as you can. I require chaos."

The chief nodded, and after another round of translation and reluctant agreement, the Mesanite commander went to rally his men. The Tong generals seemed somewhat embarrassed, and promised to hold the walls and gates securely. Ruka had already walked away.

He brought his horse from the goat pen turned to a makeshift stables while the men of ash gathered and the Mesanites returned. Egil stared with everyone else at the hundred men in plate armor, gleaming with the unmistakable tinge of Ruka's steel. They wore open helms, breastplates, vambraces and leg plates, carrying huge, almost rectangular shields. Swords and spears jutted from their hips and backs, and Egil realized the shields had been etched with writing that did not look like runes.

"What does it say?" he pointed before he could consider. The Mesanite commander glanced at it, and his face took on a small display of pleasure. He spoke, and the Tong princess translated.

"Carth says your gods must speak his mother tongue. The shield says 'Woe'."

Egil nodded though this meant nothing to him. Another foreigner emerged from the pack of warriors, ugly and bright with colorful silks. Egil recognized him from the island palace as the man who had fought Ruka with the sorcerer prince. Some kind of outcast nomad they called 'Condotian'.

"Asna will go with barbarians," he announced, as if everyone cared, and his Naranian was even worse than Egil's. "Asna is very used to saving Mesanites."

This proclamation was largely ignored, but Folvar said nothing as the man joined his warriors, cracking his neck and swinging a pair of thin, curved swords.

They finished gathering, and Ruka called to the gate guards, who turned the crank and the iron doors opened with a pop and lasting squeel. Many citizens came to watch as they had just days before. The Tong looked frightened and tired, but in a kind of awe, as struck by these Mesanites as everyone else.

To a man of ash they seemed unlikely warriors—clean shaven and small, more like boys than men. Yet they carried their weapons and armor with sinewy limbs of dark bronze flesh, eyes hard and determined. Without song or speech or alcohol, they marched through the opened gates alone, advancing in unison towards an impossible foe.

Though Egil was a skald and now spoke at least four tongues, he couldn't seem to find the right word. The 'hillmen' were from far away and with no kin in the city, no pressure nor reason to do this thing save for they alone had the strength and courage.

Was it glory? Purpose? Pride? Egil did not know. Like Ruka perhaps, they were living myths, the sort who should exist only in tales told to children, the closest thing a mortal race could ever have to gods.

Heroes, he thought, would be the word he'd use in their song. Yes, the hundred heroes of the barren hills. It wasn't quite right, to be sure, but it had a nice ring.

* * *

A few moments march from the gates of Ketsra, and the Mesanites were swarmed.

At first Egil could see their enemies were scattered and confused. Naranians carrying ladders near the gates were slaughtered and trampled by the heavy infantry—some tried to run, others fight back, but in either case achieved little. Arrows soon rained at them and their shields raised in a moving wall.

But the enemy rallied in a wave and attacked in force. They struck the front of the formation and locked the perfect square of men in battle. More Naranians followed, wrapping around the flanks until they'd engaged them on three sides.

The king's entourage watched from atop the ramparts, looking back at Ruka on his horse with increasing urgency.

"Not yet," he said, eyes turned to the heavens, as if he could see the battle in the clouds.

Everyone else watched, and waited, mostly in silence. Egil felt his own nerves stretched thinner and thinner, and found Birmun's eyes on him from the outside of the cavalry. He grinned, and called out. "Put this in your song, skald. Say that Birmun, son of Canit, knew from the moment he rode his first horse, one day he'd die on one."

A few others laughed, eager for the blood and death, but still they waited.

The enemy began to wrap entirely around the Mesanite formation, surrounding it on all four sides as they pushed against the wall of shields. Somehow the foreigners held their ground, stabbing and throwing back corpses in a steady rhythm of slaughter. Finally Ruka nodded, and the gates opened. Folvar and his warriors roared as they charged.

The speed and weight of hundreds of men of ash broke apart the thin rows of flankers. They swept around the outside of the square like water crashing over rock, butchering any who stood. The Mesanites waited, and held, then when clear marched like nothing had ever happened, finishing wounded with the bottoms of their heavy shields as they moved.

Folvar and his men raced screaming towards the entirety of the Naranian army. Flags rose and fell, officers shouted and drums beat, and two blocks of the waiting enemy shifted to engage. Several thousand men changed formation, and from the height of the wall the earth looked like a moving hill.

Ruka looked to his cavalry, excitement at last in his eyes. The remaining Sons, bolstered from the ships, formed a thin wedge before the gate. The Tong princess stepped down from the wall, withdrawing her veil to call to him. Egil knew the amorous look of women better than most, and nearly choked to see such a thing directed at Ruka.

But it was the beast, not the man, and he did not look or answer. The girl looked hurt, and Egil wished he could explain, could say 'it's not him, but the dark jester at the heart of greatness, the destroyer locked inside the smith.'

He knew she wouldn't understand, as perhaps Egil didn't understand, and not even a skald could describe it without his lyre, so he too said nothing. Instead he turned away from the sadness and looked to the sky, feeling his jaw slacken. It seemed Ruka had not been watching idly—a single beam of light shone from dark clouds, straight to the front of the Naranian army.

"There is my prey," Ruka hissed low and harsh, eyes slit as he called to his men. "Ride before me, cousins. Kill their children until the gods know your names!"

The Sons howled and kicked their horses, leading the charge through the gate, their animals shaking the ground. Ruka waited, blinking over and over, twisting his head as if enraged before he looked out past the gate in confusion. He smiled sadly as a flicker of the man emerged from the beast.

"Ruka!" Egil called, sensing his chance. His friend, captor and master turned and met his eyes. For a moment he was lost for words. 'I forgive you,' he wanted to say. 'I'm proud of you. But if you don't die here, I should like to live far, far away, and never see you again.'

"If I could go back," he shook his head, and shrugged. "I'd still run to the smoke of your fire."

Ruka's smile broadened. Water touched his eyes but vanished just as quick. "If we could go back," he called, his voice so deep and melodic he should have been a skald. "I'd leave you to the damn wolves."

Egil laughed as Ruka turned and charged. He wept openly without shame while Lani watched him, then smiled encouragingly and patted her arm. One day perhaps he would tell her the tale of the sons of Beyla, their triumph and tragedy, so intertwined they could never be apart. But not today.

Chapter 38

Ruka woke fully in his mother's house. Exhaustion clung to his flesh deeper than a winter frost, trying to snap him like a roof weighed with heavy snow. In the land of the living, he found himself mounted, armed, and leaving Ketsra's walls.

An army loomed before his living eyes. He raced behind the Sons as they trampled and cut a path of blood, all around him men screaming and shivering spears against shields. The Mesanite heavy infantry pushed into the Naranian line, as if some giant, iron-shelled turtle with quills; men of ash rampaged around them, screaming with the battle joy of true fanatics.

What have you done.

Ruka's eyes drifted to a single shaft of light piercing the clouds with unnatural precision.

"Don't interfere, brother," Bukayag shouted. "This is the way."

A cluster of tents lay beneath the light, encircled still on all sides by thousands of soldiers.

Ruka steadied his breath, and wondered if the men could yet be turned back to the walls. The infantry were not far, but engaged on at least three sides. His cavalry were formed as a line shielding a spear, the grouping narrow as it charged straight towards the light. Ruka had no way to stop any of it over the noise. There was no choice but forward.

He stayed behind them, watching the battlefield for any change. He took javelins from his armory and let Bukayag skewer men in the chaos. Birmun rode tall beside him, pale faced and red eyed, but shield held to protect Ruka's flank.

The last Sons of Sula made their namesake proud. Arrows and rocks flew at their heads, enemy soldiers jabbing with spears at their flanks and legs. The Sons answered with steel, every pocket of resistance shattering to their lances or beneath iron hooves. They had ridden as close to the infantry as they dared, but now turned for the biggest gap of fleeing men and made their purpose clear. The enemy could not stop their charge.

The strange light came closer, until Ruka could see it lit a single platform, and a single man. Ruka pointed, feeling his brother's burning hatred swell his limbs with strength.

"Ride, men of ash!"

No glorious speeches were possible or required. The warhorses surged with renewed speed at their riders' command, swift and true as the Naranian guard scrambled. Some called out, standing firm as broken soldiers fled past. Ruka saw Mesanite infantry, but they were too far. There was only the bodyguard, and a few men and women in robes—no doubt nobles and priests with nothing but their useless rules and faith to protect them.

Ascomi warhorses churned grass and mud and frothed with spit. The mighty chiefs and their retainers—the best armed, best trained, most vicious killers in the world, charged to their glorious doom, and a legend that would live forever.

Ruka knew no force on the earth could stop such a charge. He would kill this son of heaven, then see what a race of slaves did without their master.

* * *

Osco felt sweat drip down his chest. He wavered between panic and joy as the barbarians charged.

"Priests, take your people forward!" the emperor shouted, voice close to hysteria. "I want them burned! All of them! I want them burned!"

The twentyish men and women in robes were stepping forward in a line before the emperor, even as the soldiers ahead of them raced ahead to their deaths.

Hundreds of men in the path of the giant beasts had already been trampled or cut down without even slowing the terrifying warriors. The riders caught the edge of another block of infantry and rampaged past to a near open patch of field. They were close now, with only bodyguards, and the unarmed 'flameweavers' to stop them from reaching the emperor in time.

Osco looked at his handful of men, and weighed the future against the now. If they were going to kill him, it was time. Martel met his eyes, clearly ready. All that stopped them both was the knowledge of what might happen to their people—that with the emperor's death, the next son of heaven may turn his wrath on the traitors, and Malvey may be destroyed.

Far better, Osco thought, if it's the barbarians. And if not them, exactly, then at least done in their chaos, so nothing can be certain.

'Hold,' he said with his eyes. 'Hold.'

Amazingly, the emperor did not run. He stood in the light as if it were armor, yelling at his priests, breathing ragged breaths with his face contorted like a man close to ecstasy.

"Witness, children," Yiren cried out, voice tight, "the wrath of god!"

The 'flameweavers' extended their hands, voices rising in a chant, and for the first time Osco truly wondered if they were liars and fools, or actual sorcerers. He didn't wonder for long.

Light flared from outstretched hands, growing quickly into snaking rivers of orange flame emerging from the priests. With frightening speed, the rivers straightened and snapped forward like tautened ropes, and struck the charging barbarians.

Many screamed, and Osco stared, his eyes held by the magic. The flames seemed more than heat, more than light—the straightened pillars of flame battered like physical things, blasting the enemy in gouts of ruin and dark smoke as the sorcerous missiles flared back and forth between them.

Man and animal seared and charred, flesh giving away to bone, metal melting in the impossible heat. The formation was almost perfectly aligned for destruction, their long wedge riding into a burning furnace before all was obscured in a growing cloud of ash.

Osco released his grip on his sheathed sword, numbed by the shock of it. He did not know if the battlefield had silenced, or if his ears had lost the will to hear. He found his arm was on Martel's chest to hold him back, because he could see the Flameweavers were tired, but not exhausted. He would not watch his men share such a fate.

Hope died in his heart again in a single moment, and his hand left his sword entirely. Nothing could have survived the power he witnessed. Not the strange warriors, nor their leader. It was truly over.

* * *

Ruka rose in the charred and blackened grass. He banished his shield, now glowing orange on his arm.

Dina thrashed at his feet, her torso blackened and exposed beneath melted iron. He knelt beside her, knowing another great warrior would die because of him. As a boy he had looked away from the task; but now he met Dina's panicked eyes as he hushed her, and dragged the knife.

Bukayag said nothing. It seemed even he had not been ready. The heat had consumed their world, impossible and real as it moved in a series of deadly arcs from men and women in robes.

I should be dead, Ruka thought, again seeing the fire and feeling his brother's confusion. I should be dead.

Birmun had saved him. He lay smoldering on the grass, one of his arms nearly skeletal, most of his chest and face seared away. In the moment before the fire struck, Ruka heard him shout his mount forwards, straight into the path of the fire.

Ruka coughed in the smoke and stumbled forward. A dull pain throbbed in his leg, and he suspected he'd broken it in the fall. Everywhere he found the ruins of what was once men and horses—the brave Sons cut down by a force that couldn't be fought with sword or spear. He found the old chief Magnus lying still, flesh bubbling, teeth revealed in a fierce growl.

"Why didn't you tell me they could do this," Ruka whispered to Kale in his Grove. "Is this your revenge?"

As he asked he found he wasn't angry, only curious. Kale's voice filled his mind, both in the land of the living and the dead.

"I didn't know."

Ruka nodded, believing him, not that it mattered. He fell to a knee and dropped his spear, knowing the city was doomed. His people's dream of settling new lands in relative peace had vanished in the smoke, replaced by a lifetime of raids and war—a generation of bitter warriors who would take their rage on the new world that rejected them.

"Were you never listening to her?" Bukayag hissed. "Are we dead, brother?" his voice rose. "Are we dead?"

No, Ruka thought, we yet live.

"Then nothing is over."

Ruka snorted, not impressed this time by Bukayag's defiance. He gestured at all his warriors dead or dying at their feet.

"All the things I have done," his brother growled in contempt. "All our lives building a legion of the dead, and now, here amongst the corpses, you think us helpless?"

Ruka blinked and looked to his Grove. The dead were already gathering, coming towards him from every direction, broken faces watching from the fog. They became a numberless crowd, surrounding him in his practice field.

"Get up!" Bukayag put a hand to the grass and forced them. "The dead are mine," he hissed, "they were always mine. Use them."

Ruka trembled, repulsed. "It was me who honored them. This is the land of the living, brother. It is not their place. It's not…real. It's in my mind."

Bukayag lifted a half-melted sword and laughed. In the heat it had malformed until it looked more like a blacksmithing rod.

"Life and death," he whispered, "mixed and malformed. They are not so different, brother. Both fade in the soil, layer upon layer before time had a name. Only will separates them. Now use it."

Ruka clenched his fingers around the still-heated metal and tried to take deep breaths without choking. He knew it was another line he should not cross, another barrier with a price to pay. Already he had lost the taste of food, the full warmth of the sun, as he had lost desire and sleep and most of the feeling in his body.

But if he did nothing it was the living who would suffer—Egil's children, and Lani, Hemi and all those who deserved better. And he had a little more to give.

"So be it."

Ruka took the iron in both hands, growling as he drove it into the earth. "Take them brother," he closed his eyes. "Take as much as you need."

The dead were crowding now, arming themselves with swords and spears and linking hands in a chain.

Ruka saw the night he'd recruited his first outcasts, decrying the prophet as the men stood in a circle around a fading fire, their arms linked around him. Heat swelled in his chest, and through the numbness he still felt pain. It traveled, burning like a river of acid from his torso to his arm, growing until he nearly let go. When he looked he expected to see his flesh bubbling away, but saw nothing. Bukayag roared.

"Did I say you could die?" he screamed as if in agony, seizing Birmun's corpse with his other hand, yelling the words into his burnt face. "What was your vow? Where is my prey?"

Ruka forced their eyes to the heavens, hoping to see the star gods shine through the smoke. In his Grove, he looked on the dead men shimmering from view, and wiped tears from his cheeks.

"You don't have to," he whispered. "You have given so much. You owe no more."

But the dead said nothing. They never did. A hundred vanished, and in the land of the living, the earth trembled.

Birmun's body twitched first. His one remaining lid half-blinked then opened and he lifted himself, flesh from his hands sticking to the grass as he rose.

Ruka did not know if it was truly him, or some nameless dead trapped inside him. He looked on the horrible wounds and the calm, lifeless eye, and thought on the first time he had seen the man. He had been so young and full of life. Now he too had given all. And more.

Words formed in Ruka's mind, unbidden and undesired. He saw himself in Husavik's hall, the first time as a 'runeshaman' with Egil and Aiden. He heard the words he had spoken, in his own voice, even the feeling as they left his throat. He shook his head, feeling a madness—a trapping of fate or fortune too cruel to be possible.

I am not a prophet, he thought, again and again, I am not a prophet.

Still, the words came.

"No fire," Ruka whispered, seeing Aiden's eyes mixed with Birmun's, "can burn a land of ash."

The other corpses stirred. Birmun rose, the fire of creation bursting from his withered arm as he took a new shield from Ruka's Grove. The Sons followed in unison, up from the dying grass and smoke without a word, unmoving from their feet, as if waiting for command.

Dina rose, too. Her exposed ribs flexed as she thrashed upright, then stared at Ruka with impatient eyes. He put a trembling hand to her ragged mane, looking away from the blood still oozing from her open throat. He mounted, and put away his questions and fears, which no longer mattered. Bukayag was right, as Beyla had been right. His purpose stood yet unfulfilled.

"Forward," Bukayag growled for them both, then more quietly just for Ruka. "I've seen their tricks, brother. I can take it. I can take it."

Steel swords flared into the hands of the restless dead, their blank eyes turned to the light. The nightman chief went first.

* * *

Osco shivered as a scream in the smoke pierced the world. It was the wail of a father with a dying child—oily tears poured on a raging fire, looking only for a man to blame.

He stood mute as celebration swept the Naranian elite. Men cheered as their panic turned to euphoria, then dimmed at the sound of the scream. Yiren swayed on his feet, looking up the sky with hands held in offering.

The earth began to shake, and for a moment all feared more of the barbarians charged on their animals, the bodyguards and even the Mesanites bracing spears as they searched the smoke. Then the shaking stopped, and with all the others, Osco waited, and watched, as burnt men stepped from the cloud.

The emperor—who had moments before seemed a man on the verge of righteous ecstasy—looked from his men, to his priests, to the half-dead enemy, then gestured as if annoyed.

"When I said burn them, priest, what I meant was kill them. Finish it!"

The visibly trembling head priests stared at the closest barbarian. Bone protruded from his jaw, his face red and black, one of his arms dangling yet holding a shield. He came forward for all the world as if unaffected, and the male priest shrugged and maybe shivered, trying twice before he could speak.

"My lord….they should be dead. Look at him!"

Yiren's hysteria returned, his face twisting as he screamed. "I don't care! Burn them again!"

The tone snapped Osco from his numbness, and he saw more and more of the now unmounted warriors of ash emerging from the burning field.

In his life he had seen men survive grievous injuries—or at least keep fighting with them in the heat of battle. But what he saw now was impossible. These were walking corpses. Their armor was black and collapsing, their reddened flesh oozing blood. Breastplates and helms had fused to their bones, chain links still glowing orange with heat.

Many Naranians gasped as sparks flared from some of the enemy, new weapons forming in their hands in the same manner as their leader.

The flameweavers looked exhausted. Some stumbled visibly, others moved an unseen object from one hand to the other, visibly burnt fingers struggling to unclench. It seemed the miracle of flame had sapped their strength, but they remained in position, stepping forward as if to renew their attack.

Osco's heart pounded, and he glanced again to Martel. Everyone's attention was turned. And many of the emperor's bodyguards were dead.

Another inhuman roar erupted from the smoke behind the growing line of warriors. It echoed in the eerie gloom, thundering with the sound of hooves, and one last rider charged. Osco did not need to see to know who it was.

"Kill him!" Yiren jerked as if to flee for the first time, but seemed to refuse to leave the light. His last few bodyguards almost smothered him with a shield of flesh, and one died as a spear flew from the darkness.

The flameweavers answered. Grunting in effort, they released yet more rivers of flame—most at the lone rider as he emerged.

Bukayag appeared riding a beast from hell—half-burned and flinging blood, eyes dark and empty as night water. His armor glowed with heat save for a dark shield in one hand, a curved sword in the other.

The fire struck the beast's chest and legs, others deflecting off the sorcerer's shield. The force of it slowed him, yet still he came.

Flameweavers that targeted him cried out and fell. The steady streams of fire flared into him, all around him, the animal's flesh stripping from its bones, until all that remained of its chest and head was a skeletal thing. Finally, it collapsed, still kicking its rear legs as its rider tumbled to the earth, then rose and walked on.

The streams flickered, then stopped. The head priest fell with a spear lodged in his chest, and the burned men charged. They threw axes and spears, ramming into the bodyguards, others reaching the flameweavers, hacking apart the distracted, unarmed men and women wearing nothing more than robes.

The few bodyguards who fought back jabbed swords and spears into armored, lifeless flesh, their enemies not so much as crying out before they hacked them down. The magic ceased entirely as the sorcerers fell, and the flames surrounding Bukayag died out. The barbarian leader glowed, his heated armor dimming like a fading sun—then all at once, vanished.

Bukayag stepped from the flaming patch of grass at his feet. His eyebrows were gone. His flesh was red. Sparks flew from his hand, another of his spears growing from nothing, hurled straight and true into another of the emperor's bodyguard. New armor formed around his body as if forged from the air, and he laughed.

What remained of the emperor's guard charged, and the men of ash fought them in frightening silence, heedless of their enemies blows, striking without concern for defence. Their huge leader, a massive black sword in his hands, rampaged through the last of the bodyguards spraying blood with every swing.

Osco looked to Martel, whose face was pale, but nodded. He whispered to his second, and he to the third, and the men of Mesan began to move. Osco did not join them.

He stepped forward instead, watching Bukayag and a giant with a half-burnt throat at his side. They hacked down the last of the Naranian elite as if they were nothing, swords cutting straight through their enemy's weapons and armor. Like the others, they all but ignored the spears that bounced off their iron, every stroke felling another man, often straight through his guard.

"Son of heaven!" Bukayag screamed in Naranian. The emperor at last panicked. He ran from his light, straight away from his challenger towards the rest of his army. Instead he found a solid wall of shields.

A dozen Mesanite heavy infantry with dead guards at their feet shoved him back towards the barbarian.

"Don't touch me!" Yiren's voice was still hysterical. "I am the son of heaven!" he shrieked. "Your hands will be cut from your body!"

He backed away with panicked eyes. The nobles and academics of his court saw their predicament, grouping closer and closer together as the barbarians butchered the last brave men trying to protect them. Then it was only the nobles, surrounded on one side by a half circle of Mesanite shields, the other by victorious barbarians, their vast army too far and too slow to matter.

The emperor moved back to the still-shining pillar of light, twisting at its edges, looking from his camp towards the city, searching in vain perhaps for any pocket of safety. His councillors, even the generals, made no attempt to fight.

The battle around them had stilled as Bukayag stepped towards Yiren. His huge strides closed the distance, and the smaller man croaked in terror. The emperor's legs buckled and he fell to his knees. The giant seized him with a pale, bloody fist, lifting him by the throat until their eyes were level.

"Son of heaven," he said again, as if in disgust. With his other huge hand, he seized the man's head like a trapper with a rabbit, and without another word, snapped the emperor's neck.

Chapter 39

It took all of Ruka's failing strength to hold his brother back. The pleasure of a ruinous maiming of the man who had brought such misery to the world smelled like roast pork to a starving man, but he knew he would choke on it.

He met the eyes of the Naranian generals, nobles and bureaucrats, knowing through study exactly which court positions would be invited to war, and who was who by their clothing. He had read all their books on war and etiquette, and every word of every analect. Not for the first time, he thanked them for their thorough scholarship.

"The battle is over," he spoke the words in his enemy's tongue. "The son of heaven is dead." The shock that had consumed their faces still flickered with a kind of panic, and none moved. "Call an end to it," Ruka yelled, pointing at the soft-handed generals at the edges of the cluster.

Faces dripped and colored with shame or perhaps terror. One general walked carefully to the edge of the circle, calling out for standard bearers and buglemen, and Ruka knew he had obeyed. Naranians had a procedure for everything.

He stepped forward until he stood directly under the light Kale still shone from the broken shroud of gloom. As he did, he wondered if he had always known what would happen here—just as the words for the dead had come without intent. Perhaps he truly was the Godtongue, an unwitting instrument of a higher power.

No, he screamed in his Grove. That was a lie, whatever he was he had no special insight into the meaning of the world. He saw two paths before him now as always, and wondered if Bukayag was truly another man, or merely a thing to be free from responsibility.

He extended his arms and raised his face to the heavens. In the first analect, repeated in countless portraits and in Naranian art, he had seen an image of the first emperor basked in sun. This was how he stood. Ruka closed his eyes and prayed Kale did not end his power, then spoke the words written by academic elite, taught for generation after generation in every Naranian school.

"As the light of God rises," he shouted, "so too does his son."

The whites of every Naranian's eyes widened, their gasping audible. Ruka's words were believed to have been spoken in an unbroken chain, from the rise of every son of heaven since the beginning of their history.

"A man is dead," he raised his voice, shouting so many nearby soldiers might hear, "but Ru's son is immortal. I am Bukayag, son of Beyla. I have crossed an uncrossable sea; I have stopped your endless army, and destroyed your false priests and emperor. I am the master of life and death, good and evil. So I ask you, children of the sun, who now is the son of heaven?"

The Naranians gawked and stared, and Ruka felt the dead warriors gather behind him with murderous intent. He raised a hand, and they held their ground.

"Islander!" he called in his Grove, praying the young man could still hear and would understand. "There must be peace, Ratama. I don't want this, I promise you that. These men are close, but they must have a final sign—something the army might see. Help me now. Trust me and bring an end to this madness."

For a long, lonely moment, Ruka stood in both worlds hearing only the bugles, and the retracting of soldiers from the walls of Ketsra like an outgoing tide. The moment seemed as if it belonged in an ancient tale, where anything was possible, either good or ill.

The shadows around him shook, and the pillar of light flickered and disappeared.

Ruka did not react, trying and failing to think of some new miracle he could produce on his own that might cow the men before him. As he did, a gentle breeze began. The wind grew and grew until the dark clouds above the army roiled and twisted, and the sun's light replaced the dark in a wave across the Tong plains.

Ruka stooped to a knee in his Grove. He looked to the dead in the land of the living, and each put a hand to another's shoulder, linking at last to Birmun. Ruka smiled at him, and touched the nightman's arm. If he could truly hear him and understand, Ruka did not know. He hoped he could.

"Go in peace, mighty champion. Suffer for your sins, but do not fear. You will be reborn."

He tried to take back the dead, but none appeared, and the corpses collapsed.

"It is over," he called to the Naranians, nearly weeping with the loss. He turned to watch the eyes of the bureaucrats and nobles, seeing a numb, bludgeoned form of belief. "There will be no executions, no more death," he said more softly. "There will be no vengeance, for I am the true son of heaven, and you are all the children of Ru. Your lives are precious to me now."

Some fear and tension, at least, seemed to drain from their expressions. The blaring of the horns had begun to fade, the drumming cease, the screams at the walls dying away as the fighting truly stopped. Ruka knew the treachery and conflict of living things would return. But for a time, there would be peace.

"I am the son of heaven," he repeated, looking to the half-wall of shields held by the old emperor's enemies. "As my first command," he smiled, knowing there were two paths and he had chosen and not his brother. "I appoint Osco Magda as First Chancellor. He will return with your army and all my authority, and begin his position immediately."

With that, Ruka turned away, thinking of all the tasks undone. He called over his shoulder. "Leave your men to protect the court, Chancellor, and walk with me."

* * *

Osco stepped over the corpses, still stunned. The insanity of the moment felt like a dream, and it was all he could do to find some ground to hold and steady himself. In the span of an afternoon, the world had changed and changed and changed, and he had to keep up, or drown.

He walked in silence for several paces before the giant sighed and turned. Osco tried to prepare, to force his mind to consider the possibilities. The sorcerer waited without speaking, so Osco began.

"You should take all these men prisoner. Go straight to the capital and don't let them out of your sight. If you refuse to kill them then imprison them somewhere deep and remote. Remove however many you wish from office and attempt to promote sympathetic men." He shook his head. "Not that I can even imagine who they might be. As soon as they're out of your reach they're going to try and destroy you."

The giant smiled his arrogant, infuriating smile. "I've chosen correctly, I think. I'm not going to the Naranian capital, Osco. Nor do I have any intention of sitting on the throne of heaven."

Osco blinked, lost again. He tried to imagine what on earth this meant but couldn't.

"The display…all your words…"

"Men think too much of words." Ruka shrugged. "It will keep them busy. They'll have to depose or dismiss a son of heaven without bloodshed, for I won't be there to kill. That should be a useful exercise. In any case, I'm sending you. Take your men, and your noble prisoners—do whatever you think is best. Just keep the peace as long as you can. Refrain from bloodshed as much as possible."

Osco shook his head, trying not to think of the assassins and indignation and monstrous politics to follow. "Why me? What is your intention? I'm not even Naranian."

The giant's brow raised, his mouth curled, as if he hadn't really considered it long. "Because you're clever. You speak their language, you know their ways. I have read the holy books and nowhere does it describe a man's race or people as important." Here he shrugged again, the faint smile still on his lips. "And because I have no one else."

Osco glared. "I could refuse you. You have no power over me."

"True." Ruka nodded. "You are free to go back to your wife and your people and tell them you turned away the reins of power over their tyrant." His eyes sparkled, and Osco rather felt like punching his wide ugly face.

'How do you even know I'm married or anything about my people or how very right you are,' he wanted to scream. But by now to question anything about this monstrous man seemed ludicrous, so he just sighed. "And while I'm trying to rule the entire world, what exactly will you be doing?"

Ruka looked towards the city, though his eyes seemed to see beyond it. "It is not the entire world, Osco. I will bring those with the will and courage across the sea. Then my purpose is finished. Go in peace, Chancellor." Here he quirked as if listening to something on the wind, then met Osco's eyes. "The island prince…was an impossible thing, and maybe a good man with power he would have learned to wield with wisdom. You followed him. That is why I chose you."

Osco frowned, feeling in a sense he was being called naive. "I am not the islander, savage. My people are my concern. You are giving me great power over their enemy, and I will use it."

Ruka turned, his smile vanishing as it twisted to the sneer Osco had seen in the island palace. He stepped closer, and Osco felt himself pull back.

"Power exists to be used," whispered the shaman. "But you will take no vengeance. You will do what you must to retain power and prevent a war, but you will otherwise treat these Naranians as your own kin. Listen carefully to me now—you will treat them as if every man and woman amongst them is a noble born in the temples of Mesan."

Osco scoffed in the giant's face. "They are not my kin. They have for half a century…"

"You are all the same pitiful creatures to me," the shaman's eyes bulged as his teeth bared. "For we both know I am no son of heaven. I am what you think I am—a monster sent from hell to devour the evil hearts of men. Do what I tell you, little thing, or be punished."

Osco met the deadly glare and did not cower. He knew now for certain the giant needed him—that whatever his true plans, they required a moment of stability. Osco doubted he could survive the intrigue and chaos to come, but if he was the man's only hope it made no difference. He said nothing, for his lack of fear said enough.

The giant smiled again, but it was a predatory thing.

"Yes, I need you. But one tyrant lies dead at my hand. Improve on his failures, or one day I will butcher a path to the tomb of the blue city and stand amongst your dead. There I will raise the armored corpses of your ancestors, and use those you honor most to burn all you love. Do you doubt I could?"

Osco blinked, speechless as he stared into the giant's golden eyes. Mesanites buried their warriors armed, just as he said. They had since time immemorial, and the crypts of Malvey held thousands of the great warriors.

He wondered again how this man could know such things. Osco's fear had been almost purged from him as a boy, burned away from years of training in a culture made for war. But as he met the creature's glare, then glanced at the corpses of the half-burnt men who had fought at his command, he remembered what it was to be afraid.

"No," he whispered, "I do not doubt you."

Ruka's face changed again, returned instantly from the beast to the man.

"Then I wish you well, cousin. May your deeds be worthy of the weight you bear. Take the dead, but leave the men of ash where they lie. Their brothers will come for them."

With this he walked away, and Osco realized some of the Mesanites had quietly approached in case Osco needed them. He took some comfort in that.

As he looked out at the chaos and the foreign army, he wanted only to run home to Liga and his daughter. Perhaps they could live on a farm in the middle of the hills and raise goats and grow wheat. Osco would have preferred anything save for what he'd been tasked. Martel walked to his side, wiping blood off his sword.

"Orders, First Chancellor?" His eyebrows smiled.

Osco put away his simple dreams and met the man's eyes. He had never been destined for a life of comfort. I must make use of this opportunity, he thought, however brief.

With even a few months of power, he might have the greatest chance to produce freedom for his people. First he'd send Liga and their daughter far away, to the country, perhaps, with loyal men. Once they were safe, Osco was untouchable. They could only kill him, and death was nothing.

"Let's get this god-forsaken battlefield cleared," he growled. "We have an uncountable horde of confused bastards to get home, and I don't trust those bureaucrats. I want them isolated. We'll raise up the military men. Make sure they know they're about to benefit greatly if they support us. General Tau can be trusted, at least a little. None of the others yet. Bind them in the military prison until they agree. The barbar…the son of heaven said no executions. So be it. Naran's noble lords can spend their next year digging ditches and mining copper. I will make a list of names."

"Yes sir."

"And bring me every Mesanite left alive from the battlefield. We're going to need them. They'll form my bodyguard."

"Yes sir. The first batch should be easy, sir."

Osco followed the man's eyes and turned to find Carth and, perhaps more incredibly, Asna standing with his men behind him, their armor soaked in blood. Carth saluted, and the Condotian swept his ridiculous bow.

"Reporting for duty, General."

"And also Asna the Great, other friend. If goat-men can afford him."

Osco pretended to inspect them, for a moment unable to speak. He cleared his throat.

"What took you so long?"

The corner of Asna's mouth quirked, and Carth glanced at Martel, who just shrugged.

"Apologies, sir," said his Second. "We're here now."

Osco nodded, and raised his voice so the other men could hear. "When I have the time, I'll make sure you all wear the Devoted star, and your names are etched on the obelisks of honor. In the meantime, keep some damn decorum and humility. We have a lot to do."

"Yes sir!" they said as one.

Osco looked at the impossible thinness of the men's iron shields, undamaged through thick and desperate fighting. He shook his head, knowing who made them, and realized beneath the blood there was lettering in two tongues, a mix of Mesanic and Naranian. He forced his jaw to stay closed as he read, feeling moved by forces he didn't control—just a piece in another man's game. In Mesanic it said simply 'woe', but on the edge of the metal in Naranian, it read: 'Emperor's Guard'.

"What's wrong, General?"

"Gods curse that bastard to hell." He took a deep breath and pointed at the trembling bureaucrats. "Nothing. Follow me, brothers. We'll start with them."

Chapter 40

Strange, Ruka thought, that such a little thing can change so much.

He stared down into an island well, and tried to contain his excitement. Though the hot summer sun shone overhead, he did not feel it. His skin had become some leathery shell protecting a stranger's bones, but he had accepted this and the loss of desire, hunger and thirst without complaint. Purpose always required sacrifice, and he had paid.

The date and season came to his mind now in the calendars of three peoples, each with its strengths and flaws. The men of ash cared only for season— the spring thaw, the harvest, and the deadly freeze; the Islanders tracked their moon, caring only for the ebb and flow of the tide; the Naranians focused on the sun. Words, songs, and calendars—this and more could tell you what a people valued without knowing it themselves.

Ruka cared only for precision. What mattered is that he stood yet alive on the Eastern coast of Sri Kon, ninety rotations of the world around the sun since saving Ketsra. This knowledge made him smile.

"What are you doing?"

Kale's spirit hovered just over Ruka's shoulder. Since Ketsra, Ruka had slowly been able to see him in the right light. They spoke rarely enough, but since the siege they had not argued or threatened one another. Kale had not attempted to destroy Ruka's Grove or interfere in the world of the living. He walked the mists, he went to the library, he meditated, and seemed at peace. Ruka was not given to idleness, but could admit a kind of appeal to the dead prince's existence.

"I am measuring a shadow," Ruka answered, looking one last time at the water in the well. The sun was in place—a perfect circle shining in the reflection. Ruka ran to the high building he'd chosen and measured, squinting as he looked East then waited for the mark of the length to the top.

Some few islanders watched him curiously. Though perhaps 'suspiciously' was more accurate. Farahi's son had extended Ruka's welcome, continued trade with the men of ash, and even spoke of their courage in Ketsra. But there remained a certain animosity. Between the disease, the purges, and the occupation, it would take many years before the relationship could begin again. Perhaps even a new generation to decide.

Ruka locked the height in his mind, then called "Come along, islander, I shall show you."

Mostly for Kale's benefit, Ruka went to his study in his Grove. The dead dutifully took notes of his previous work here, and he stretched out Naranian parchment filled with calculations.

"The earth is a sphere," he explained. Kale rolled his eyes as if this were obvious, and Ruka suppressed a smile, thinking of his own people's belief it was a ring. "Already I tried this test another way, by knowing the speed of the sun, from East to West…"

"The speed of the…how could you possibly know that?"

Ruka shrugged. "I set markers on a field, and burned Naranian measuring sticks. It was very simple, islander, if imprecise. I had also not accounted for the curvature of the world. So I measured wells and shadows. I needed a particular moment, and that moment is today—what my people would call the summer solstice—though which day exactly is irrelevant, only that it is the same. For the correct…pattern, of the sun. "

Kale's eyes showed incomprehension. "What is all this nonsense?" He gestured to the calculations.

"This is your people's geometry, islander. They have used it for a hundred years."

"I…" Kale met his eyes and winced, "was a poor student."

"We know the distance between Sri Kon and Bekthano, which can be measured in ri," Ruka pointed to the map. "This shadow tells me the sun is exactly two degrees from the zenith. Therefore Sri Kon is two degrees from Bekthano on the curve. Do you see?"

Kale squinted and seemed in pain. "What makes you think there's a distance…I mean, isn't the sun more like..a god, I mean…isn't it philosophical? Not exactly a thing?"

Ruka shook his head, writing the number into his formula for Kale's benefit. "Now that we have the distance, and the curve, we need only finish the equation. There…it..." Ruka frowned. "Well, there are no words in any tongue for this number. But just over a thousand, thousand ri," he grinned. "Approximately."

Kale looked less than impressed. "Congratulations, I suppose. So how big is that?"

Ruka laughed and looked out at the waves. What a wonder, he thought. What a terrible, beautiful adventure life was.

"Our maps are insufficient. Were we to take the isles, and the land of ash, and every scrap of land on a Naranian map, I suspect it would be only half of it. Less than half."

Kale scoffed and crossed his arms. "That's impossible. There would be ships. Some indication. Unless the other half is just sea."

Ruka smiled, thinking both their people thought the same, and the Ascom was not so very far away.

"We can not know unless we look."

He packed up his things, then walked to the small harbor mostly used by local fishermen. He was not in Sri Kon primarily to measure shadows, though it was an added benefit. He was here because at last the fleet of ash was coming, filled with the brave pioneers who would make new lives in a new world. A messenger had come ahead already. The fleet had—this time—avoided storms and disasters, navigating well with sundials and a few Pyu pilots sent by the king.

Of course, problems remained. With Aiden's death—which Ruka blamed himself for—tensions had risen as Dala and the Order tried to establish a new First Chief. He had not heard from them since Dala returned to Orhus, so he had no idea if they'd succeeded. The isles were still in turmoil, old noble hatreds flaring as Tane worked to establish control.

It had helped that Ruka and the chiefs agreed to settle on the continent, and leave the isles alone. There was more space and it suited them better anyway. One day perhaps more of his people would go to the isles and make lives there, mixing with the islanders in more ways than simple, somewhat distrustful trade. But for now there were hard feelings, and hatred.

The Tong were a different story. Thousands of their citizens, from noble to common born, had watched the men of ash bleed and die on their walls. As disaster loomed, and many of their own had fled their lands, the men of ash had come. They had protected those who could not protect themselves.

Though the Ascomi were harsh and savage men in the softer city folk's eyes, they had treated their hosts with respect. There had been no looting, no rape, nor would there be mixed bastards to sew a generation of angry remembrance. When the fighting had proved bloody beyond reason, they had not run, but endured with the Tong. When it was over they had stepped down from nightmarish ramparts, a bloody crucible that broke ten thousand minds and bodies, and asked for nothing.

Ruka walked along the beach in remembrance, his eyes on the horizon. Many trade ships and fishermen dotted the sea; the island ports had all but returned to normal, piracy obliterated for a time in a single battle. Admiral Mahen would no doubt be forgotten, the men whose livelihoods he'd saved too busy with toil to care for this noble or that. But Egil already crafted the tale of the Sea-Wolf. The men of ash would remember him in their songs.

After the siege, Ruka had left the Naranians in Osco's hands. The defeated imperial army had sent a small wagon train with supplies, but otherwise gathered and left the carnage they had wrought without explanation, surrender or apology, or a message of any kind.

Ruka had returned to Ketsra and helped bury men, women and children—mostly those who had fought on the wall in the crucial moments. The mood had been sombre as survivors did what was necessary.

King Kapule earned the honor of his station. His soldiers, children and court went through the city with royal coin and manpower to do what they could—paying families with losses, taking requests and seeing to sufferers. He called in loans and begged favors from allies and foreign dignitaries for the promise of future deals. In the aftermath of his crisis, he had not forgotten his friends.

The Farmer King held a mass funeral for the dead, and the men of ash were the guests of honor.

He spoke to his people from a raised podium, fifty heralds stretched from the palace to the plains to repeat his words. Ruka, Chief Folvar and half a dozen other important men stood beside him, feeling awkward with so many eyes, until Kapule turned in their direction.

"I misjudged you," said the king. "No people could be truer friends and allies. I was wrong, and beg for forgiveness."

Ruka had translated, and Folvar and the others had bowed awkwardly. Whether the emotion in the king's face was real or not Ruka did not know, but in the moment he had believed.

"We understand," Kapule had said with a kind of trepidation, "your people either burn or bury their honored dead. My people wish them to be forever here in Ketsra, placed beneath the wall they held, immortal defenders of our city. But, we…understand, of course, if they would prefer to be taken home."

His priests had presented a shrine with a silver plaque, to be placed high on the gates, every name of the Ascomi dead somehow gathered and inscribed in Tong symbols. Below the names it read: 'here lie the greatest warriors in the world, who fought and died for strangers, for nothing but a neighbor's love.'

Ruka had been pleased to learn then he had not yet lost the capacity for tears. Kapule had watched his reaction and smiled.

"We should never wish to be without such neighbors and allies again. There are unbroken lands to the East and West, and it would be our honor to welcome your settlers there, and wherever else such a hardy people think they can tame. They will live beside us, and share our knowledge and our tools, if that is their wish."

Ruka translated for the men, and they bowed in the deepest respect their culture could. The Tong had applauded and wept with them, for the foreigners and for themselves, in loss and relief—the great burden and privilege of survival.

Then he and Egil and Folvar had returned to Sri Kon and to Dala, who had apparently killed Kikay with her own hands. She sat perched beside Tane, who looked drawn and not altogether pleased with his fortunes.

"Shaman! You survived." She descended wearing island silks, hair oiled and tied like the islanders, already adapting to the strange new world. She smiled. "The Goddess truly loves you."

Ruka had been pleased to see her, though when he looked in her eyes he couldn't help but see Birmun broken, burned and gone. She had told him of Aiden's fate—the greatest fighter of an age, killed by treachery. It had almost summoned Bukayag, but he'd fought it down.

"The fault is mine," he'd said. "I should never have sent him there."

"It doesn't matter now, shaman. What has happened on the coast?"

He told her of their success, and the Tong's offer, and she had stepped to him and put her hands on his arms like a proud mother.

"Then we must return to a grateful people. They will honor you and your warriors for a whole season if we let them."

Ruka felt his brother's desire to wrap her in their arms, then his own repulsion at her darker deeds. He stilled until she took her hands away.

"I would only disappoint them, priestess. I have never sought honors. Go and accept for me. Take Egil. I have seen him collect praise like a bottomless well in the rain."

Egil's eyes had sparkled in mischief and feigned injury. "What the shaman means to say I think, Holy Mother, is that I am a skald, and therefore a well of joy, from which I share generously." He glanced at Ruka. "And you're bloody welcome.

Ruka had looked at the man who changed his life, knowing he did not intend to see him again. He regretted this, as he regretted many things.

"What will you do," asked Dala as if unconcerned, "if you will not come home?"

Home, Ruka thought, is home what the Ascom is?

"I will rest awhile," he said, "you may take all the warriors."

"I'm sure you're tired and wounded," Dala nodded as if she understood. "No man is more deserving. Be at peace and convalesce, and we will see you when we return. Come along, Egil. We must go on the tide if possible. There is much to do."

Ruka had said his goodbyes to the men, who gathered at the ships and waited as if for one more divine proclamation, their eyes turned to Ruka like children awaiting another grand tale.

"You are heroes of the book, cousins," he'd shouted. "Now you must live. One story ends, another begins. That is the way of things."

He had seen the hurt and confusion, the loss of purpose he knew so well.

"We would serve you shaman, as always," said Folvar, the once uncertain boy grown to a leader of men. Ruka smiled and put a hand to his shoulder.

"You served the gods, chief, not me. They are finished with me now. They believe in you, as I do. What you decide will be right."

Folvar had looked uncomfortable, but he had gone, and the warriors with him.

Ruka avoided the Tong princess, who he was told had sought him out before she returned to her husband's palace. He inspected the sewer now running through Ketsra and helped the builders plan expansion. He thanked Hemi and his son, the island builders and marines, some of whom had been injured and killed, all of whom had risked their lives.

Throughout all, he found his passion for what might be seemed extinguished. Through the numbness, all Ruka wanted was a sprawling forest to live deep inside for what remained of his life, and never see another soul. Or maybe, he thought, in lesser moments, I should just walk into the sea.

But Bukayag would not allow that. Ruka could overcome him in many things, but not in this. He had given too much and could not go back, and more than anything feared what would happen if he tried and lost.

He spent much of his time in the temples of the Enlightened, or wandering the beaches of Sri Kon. The remaining dead in his Grove were busy as ever, repairing the damage and rebuilding, toiling away in their ever more perplexing world, removed from Ruka's instruction.

Weeks and months passed and soon he waited every day on the coast for the returning fleet. By the estimates and season they would arrive very soon, and each passing day he grew more and more worried. Finally the first ship arrived and the messenger came. Ruka went to the coast feeling a burst of renewed energy, and conducted his little experiment.

He waited, and waited, and just as the sun descended from another spin of the world, Ruka saw his sails on the horizon. The ships came ever closer, glorious and intact. He wished his mother was there, and could almost picture her waving from the flagship's prow, golden haired and radiant as the sunset. Instead there were other women, and children—farmers and men of peace coming to make new lives in a new world, as their ancestors had once done in the frozen south.

We did it, Beyla, he thought. The Vishan return. Their descendants have triumphed.

In his pride, and lost in the moment and the bittersweet memories of his life, he almost missed the strangeness of the sky. Dark clouds had coiled like threatened snakes as the wind turned harsh, a weak breeze giving way to a sudden gale. Ruka's reveries shattered like glass.

Islander! Islander!

Ruka raced across his Grove.

Where are you? What are you doing?

The prince appeared from the fog, spirit looking up at the sky with a furrowed brow.

"Nothing," whispered the wind. "It isn't me."

Ruka stopped in confusion, about to ask then how, and who? Instead he turned along with the prince to the East, looking not far away now—to the island monastery of Bato.

Together they watched waving threads of heat twining in the sky. Ruka's gut weighed down as if with iron, and it seemed, beyond his numbness, he could still feel fear.

The sky cracked and shook as thunder broke the stillness of the beach. With a flash that squinted Ruka's eyes, a bolt of lightning arced from the heavens, and struck the first ship.

Chapter 41

Ruka sprinted as he hadn't since childhood. His feet crushed white sand in the world of the living, lush grass in the world of the dead. He had seen a small, six-man outrigger beached on the nearby harbor, and though it would not be easy, he believed he could take himself to Bato. What he would do on arrival was entirely less clear.

"The storm, islander! Help the ships!"

The prince's silence rang with judgment, and Ruka roared in frustration.

"Whatever our hatreds, those people don't deserve to suffer for it."

Kale's disembodied voice, when it came, was quiet. "The sea is dangerous. It's not me who brought them here."

Ruka stifled Bukayag's broken laugh. Yes, he thought, life is cruel to the weak.

He looked out at the ships that had become wooden prisons, so close to shore, yet just as well a thousand ri away. The sky roiled, grower darker with every moment.

Give men what they want, when it benefits you, Farahi's voice pierced the storm. In his Grove, Ruka fell to his knees.

"Take my life, islander. When this is done, it's yours. These ships bring brave families, not warriors, and they are welcomed by the Tong. Please. You owe them nothing and me less. But for pity's sake. Please."

Kale's broken jaw flexed and he shimmered with silvery light. He stared hard, brown eyes just like his mother's before they closed. He looked to the sky, then floated away without another word, robes billowing behind.

Ruka stood, and ran. He did not know what Kale intended, but it made no difference. He reached the boat and ripped the ropes from their pegs, throwing away the heavy anchor. He charged into the the shallow water as he dragged the ship, but there was almost no wind except far above. The sails hung limp and useless, so he seized the oars and rowed with his back turned towards his purpose.

If the best and boldest families of the Ascom perished here, all his deeds were for nothing. If Beyla's kin, so close to paradise and a new world, were to drown for dreaming his dream, it would have been better if Ruka had not existed at all.

Thunder cracked and mixed with screams. Or maybe Ruka only imagined them. Memories of violence rang through his mind, from Kunla to Kapule, Alverel to the empire. All the blood, all the suffering—all for nothing if he failed.

The waves around his boat were weak, the air cool and still, as if the power in the distance had drawn every force in all directions. Above him the sun flickered and danced as shadow twisted across the world, as if two gods warred in heaven, fighting for the honor of destruction.

The thunderous reports ceased as suddenly as they began. Ruka turned to see a dark sky void of lightning before Kale's voice whispered on the wind.

"I couldn't stop it. He let me. He…wants to speak with us."

Ruka swallowed, feeling the name form on his lips. Still, he asked.

"Who?"

Cold air surged around Ruka's boat, or perhaps the heat just vanished. Light shone from above, and Ruka was lifted by something that was not wind. He rose from the reality of a beast without wings, soaring from the outrigger as if he weighed nothing—as if the forces that bound the world did not exist.

"It's…my teacher," whispered Kale, in a distracted voice. "A spirit living on Bato."

Ruka pictured the face of the boy who was not a boy he had met those years ago. He had known, perhaps, as Farahi had known, and as it seemed Kale knew, that this thing mocked the understanding of man. Its existence, though seemingly quiet and isolated, revealed a truth too frightening to be uttered by mortal lips.

We are more helpless than we know, Ruka thought. Not just from disease and great waves and eruptions from the earth—there are things out there, things beyond us.

"You've met him," Kale whispered in understanding, his spirit watching now.

Ruka nodded, feeling a pit of terror even in his brother's gut. He looked at the sea as they passed, thinking at any other time he would have exalted in the flight. In his Grove he stood amongst the smoke and heat of the forges and what remained of the bustling dead. They readied armor and weapons—every tool they could think of developed over many lifetimes of work. But, he suspected, nothing would be enough.

* * *

Ruka touched down on the Batonian shore, the only strip of beach on the island. Standing at the low edge of the receding tide, the young monk stood with sandals in the water.

Ando turned wearing a pleasant smile. His hands rested in the cuffs of his robe, his posture at ease. He looked exactly the same as he had when Ruka walked with him along the Lancona, and answered his questions fifteen years before.

In a way, Ruka thought, he was my teacher too.

By his existence, Ando had taught Ruka that beings of such power lived, causing him to push the boundaries of his Grove. The thought brought little comfort. Ando's brown eyes flicked between his guests, and it was clear he could see Kale's spirit as plain as sunshine.

"Loa, Prince Ratama." He nodded politely. "It is a pleasure to see you again. You have grown very powerful and come far along your Way."

Kale bowed low in return, his voice unsteady. "It is a pleasure…to be seen, Teacher. Much has happened since we met."

Ando nodded, as if saddened. "Death is the end of nearly all Ways." His gaze shifted, and lost its luster. "Ruka, from…Tinay. What have you done? What evils have your people taught you?"

The shift in tone clenched Ruka's jaw—as if even by this thing he was to be judged more harshly from the start. Ruka assumed Ando was like Kale, just more powerful. If so, Bukayag should resist his magic, however briefly. All that mattered was saving the ships.

We must assume a spirit or even a god can die.

He wavered as if dizzy from the flight, dropping to a knee in the sand.

"You speak of evils?" He spit as if resisting the urge to vomit. "As you try to kill women and children?"

The 'spirit' sighed. "Not all life is of equal value, Ruka. A harsh truth, I know, but do you not destroy a nest of termites when it moves too close to your home? They cannot be allowed to land."

"The Tong will accept them," Ruka snapped. "The Pyu king has agreed. And who are you to decide who is or isn't welcome? What difference is it to you?"

Ando looked away with a tired expression, as if to explain himself was an exhausting burden. "Your people breed too quickly," he shrugged. "Their heads are misshapen, their skin too light, their blood too corrupt. I'm sorry, Ruka, truly, but you belong to a failed breed. I had thought you dealt with but some must have escaped. Your people will never produce the children of the gods."

Ruka blinked, stunned by the harsh words spoken so plainly. He turned to meet the prince's eyes, but Kale avoided his gaze as he floated forward.

"Teacher—surely, they can just be sent back. We can discuss your reasons, and you can…"

"Already you have made it harder," Ando shook his head. "I'm sorry. I know you don't understand. I am the last of my kind, older than you can imagine. I have tried for so long and failed to renew what was lost, to give birth to new gods to replace the old. I am close now. A few more generations with the island breeds." He shook his head, and looked to Ruka. "The God-seed ruined your race; your people were unsuitable. I had thought you dealt with. If you had but just stayed far away and left things alone…" he shook his head, and sighed. "I had not realized so many found another land. The mistake is mine."

Ruka looked at the 'spirit' of the sorcerer-prince somehow bound to him, then to this…thing, that was maybe immortal. One was little more than a boy, the other a monster—both with the power to alter the heavens, the most powerful things perhaps in the world. He couldn't help it, he laughed. In such a reality, life became comedy or tragedy. There was no other way.

The sound seemed to disturb Ando. His eyes narrowed and his feet shifted in the water, as if he could see no good reason for such amusement.

"Your ignorance is irrelevant," he snapped, then cooled. "It is their Ojas, and this is mine. I'm sorry but that is the truth."

"Truth?" Ruka yelled through his laughter. "Tell me, wise spirit, what is the sun? How far from this world to its surface?"

Ando frowned. "The sun is a gift from the ancient god of light, formed in the birthing of this world. The distance is not a number, it is an idea, conceived from..."

Ruka looked at Kale, and howled.

"I am older than your race," Ando snapped. "That you fail to comprehend the subtlety of creation makes no…"

"How many years have you wasted, I wonder?" Ruka glanced idly at the clouds. "How many good minds lost on your altar of false perfection?" He found himself disgusted by the thought. "You think you're a god. I see a thing with endless power and little wisdom, and prefer my deities the other way around."

Ando said more meaningless things, but Ruka didn't listen.

"Please, teacher," Kale floated forward. "Let us sit and talk and meditate as we once did at the Lancona."

The spirit spoke more words that changed nothing. Ruka felt Ando's eyes still boring into him, but it didn't matter. He swayed and used every moment in his Grove, knowing he would have to be quick, and deadly.

Most living things perished in a moment of surprise—a failed glance to spot a predator, one poor decision or inattention. With a single throw of a spear, perhaps, Ruka could end it. Ando might just be a man, born to some extreme, his heart vulnerable to a moment's work.

Or he could be a god. The spear might bounce away or fly through him, but there was little choice, and less reason to delay. Ruka planned for both success and failure and what to do with the time he had. As had been true since the moment of his birth, to complain of unfairness made no difference. Man or god, madness or brilliance, the result was the same.

"I told you," Bukayag hissed. "Life is power and nothing else."

No, brother. There is truth, and honor. Kale was going to help the ships.

"For a price, brother—only for a price."

Ruka looked on the young prince trying to save his people even now, and smiled. No, he thought, filled with pride for the boy and regret for himself. I don't think so.

In his Grove, Ruka knelt in the same position as he did in life, throwing ten javelins in succession at targets the same distance as Ando. When he was ready he took the final spear—razor sharp and light, to be thrown with a single motion up from Ruka's knees.

We have had our disagreements, brother. But have we not both desired to kill a god?

Bukayag nodded, hands flexing, chest heaving with eager breaths.

"Enough," Ando's eyes were wild now as the mask seemed to slip. "I do not ask permission. It must be done. And not just these ships, which will alter a thousand years of breeding, but this lost continent as well. I'm sorry but that's the end of it. When I return, I can extract you from your host, and accept you again as my student."

"You can…release me?" Kale's tone changed, as if he'd forgotten the words before. "You can release my spirit from this…"

"I have seen it. The flesh may be different, the process unpleasant, but…"

Ruka channeled his power into both hands, then rose to one foot. He leveraged all his strength, arm raised in an overhand throw, spear flaming into existence mid swing. As he released he knew it was perfect—the power and craft of a lifetime of violence.

Ando jerked as the steel soared. The air around him shimmered, a circle of heat that sprung to life as sudden as Ruka's spear. The weapon reached him, and steam sprayed with a hissing sound like a blade doused in water.

Ruka did not wait to see the result. With his other fist still buried, he summoned the final links of the chain he'd been growing forward to Ando's feet through the sand—at the end, a large and vicious bear trap with six steel teeth. Ruka pulled, and the trap triggered.

He saw his spear deflected the same moment he heard the snap of the metal, and learned a boy-god could scream.

Bukayag surged forward, chain held in one hand, flame trailing behind as a sword formed in his other.

Ando launched upwards as if with a great leap, his arms outstretched. Water from the beach burst around him like a whale leapt from the shallow surface. Droplets of blood fell with the shower, the metal teeth snapped deep into Ando's leg. Ruka released his sword, and with a cry held onto the chain with both hands.

He didn't bother to try and hold back Ando's flight. It took all his strength to support his own weight and grip the chain as he was pulled from his feet. In moments he felt himself rising higher and higher, but didn't look down. He reached out, pushing through the wind, hand over hand, and climbed.

Dark clouds and blazing light formed Ando's silhouette. His ascent ceased as suddenly as it began, and for a moment his downcast eyes met Ruka's. The sphere of heat that deflected the spear still rung Ando's body, and already the chain hissed and reddened from its effects. Bukayag smiled, because with the steel in his hands it held, flickering with shadow as the magic assaulted it.

The sky swirled as the spirit's eyes turned black as brittle iron. A hum of power raised hairs on Ruka's arms, and he cried out as he tried and failed to climb, struggling just to hold on through the gale. In the land of the living, lightning struck him, over and over in flashes of blinding light. In his Grove, the world burned.

Kale's power had seemed a powerful storm in their duel—destroying buildings and collapsing the toil of many lifetimes. Ando's was a great wave. A jagged streak of light cut through the very fabric of Ruka's Grove, cutting away the earth, spraying darkness in its wake. Dead men fell into the abyss with terrified eyes, falling into a void of silence.

"Run!" Ruka screamed. "To the palace, and the mines! Anywhere there's cover!"

The earth shook. Cracks split along the river, through the garden, the foundry, and through the craftsmen's quarter.

"I can take it!" Bukayag roared in the land of the living, reaching for another handful of chain. Ruka wasn't sure, but it made no difference. They climbed. So little distance now between them and their prey, a few grips before a length of steel could decide.

Wave after wave of impossible strength crashed into Ruka's Grove. The library cracked, the palace fell away and vanished in chunks of ragged stone. The fog burned, the gentle music filled with screams.

Ando's face contorted in a mask of hate, the sky around him filling with inky tendrils and limbs as a mass of living darkness, a shadow with red eyes that burnt like a forge's fire, its maw jagged teeth bared in rage. Long claws raked Ruka's flesh, coming away with bits of dark blood.

And for the first time, Ruka saw his brother.

A shadowy form sprang from his body, fighting the tendrils with jagged hands, howling into the storm. Bits and pieces of his brother shredded and spattered away, and Ruka seized a spear, sparking it to life as he reached to jab it through his enemy's shield. As he thrust, his four-fingered grip lost its purchase on the chain.

He watched the dark sky and the shadow framing the bloody-legged god above, moving further and further out of reach. Like all other wingless things rejected by the heavens, Ruka fell.

Chapter 42

Kale rose through the swirling fury, avoiding the tangle of threads pulled to the island spirit, a spider in a web of power. He saw Ruka fall, and did not catch him.

"Teacher, please! You've beaten him! Let us sit, and talk, and think together, as we once did!"

The voice that answered was no longer Ando's, but deep and lifeless. "You see what he is? What they are? This is my burden—to lift mankind to enlightenment, and help him reach the divine. You are another step on that path. Perhaps your descendants will succeed."

"Teacher!" Even Kale's voice was now sucked into the vortex of Ando's power. He cried out in frustration and tried to move closer, to think of something else he might say just to stop the moment and think.

"Why?" he finally shouted, thinking of Old Lo and the wall. "Why must men be gods, Ando? Why must we be perfect? Do we have no choice?"

But his words faded to nothing. He looked on the ships below and knew Ruka was telling the truth—that they were filled with families and farm tools, their axes for lumber, their few bows for hunting. They cowered from the storm and prayed as the sailors fought the wind.

Kale looked on the boy-god swirling with chaos, and knew to kill so casually and indiscriminately had to be wrong. Ando was like the great hands of stone beneath the earth, or the monsoon that stretched beyond the horizon. He was a source of power, like the sea.

There were so many threads he couldn't keep track, nevermind control, and for the first time he understood his father's fear—the responsibility, the weight. He knew he could be cowed by ignorance and uncertainty and do nothing. Or he could try, and maybe fail.

Strands of power tightened around Ando like the steel cords of Ruka's Grove. Such things could not be stopped. That was impossible. You could only give such power what it wanted—what every force seemed to want—it's opposite. Like Rupi, like the sea and the monsoon, he could only turn one force against the other.

Kale ignored the spirit and reached lower. He dipped his fingers into the earth, beyond the rock and foaming waves to the jostling giants, taking every pathway as he sought the buried primordial power—fountains of heat so vast even Ando seemed an insect in comparison.

They stretched before him, almost constructed, weak cords spanning things that seemed unnatural in a state of order—as if their very nature was chaos, and sooner or later they would return. Kale plucked his fingers along the trembling threads.

"Please be gentle," he whispered to whatever other gods or spirits might be listening. "And spare the monks, if you can."

He centered himself between the volcanoes of Bato and Ando's power, tangling the eager threads together in knots, and let go.

* * *

Ruka lay broken on the packed sand. Pain surged up and down his body as his brother tried and failed to take it all. They had landed on their feet—one leg now shattered at the knee, both feet broken, along with ribs and who knew what else. But, for now, they could still breathe.

He looked up at the swirling mist and fog hiding his enemy above, blinking with blurred eyes. Lightning flashed, and for a moment the light revealed Ando with arms raised, beside him, floating like Kale's silver spirit, the huge, bestial shadow. Raindrops made Ruka close his lids, and the image was gone, but he could still see it with perfect clarity in his mind.

The dead were bringing supplies—a metal rod and leather straps for a splint. Ruka examined the image of his enemy, dead Naranian sappers helping determine the distance. It seemed the spirit had stopped rising. No doubt the power that had protected him from Ruka's spear would do so again, but he had tried to destroy the metal lodged in his foot and failed. As before, Bukayag's power had protected it if held. They had to reach him together.

"We are injured, brother," Bukayag hissed more in rage than concern.

Ruka lashed the splint to the ruined joint, leaving it room to bend because he could not be slowed too much. His broken feet throbbed but it was only pain and wouldn't stop him. The damaged organs would likely mean his death, but he still had time.

Already Ando turned his wrath on Ruka's people, and he knew he must rise. The sand-filled wind swirled. He forced his body to obey, crying out as weight touched his limbs, eyes dripping with tears in the howling storm. But still, Ruka stood.

The dead scrambled with wood and iron in carts. Using half-broken tools they cobbled steps to iron rods they'd buried in the earth. On it went as Ruka watched, plank after plank, higher and higher as if to scale some endless fortress.

He looked on the builders, so useful, so purposeful. All around him the victorious dead toiled, collected from many peoples, united to protect a future that was no longer theirs, nameless yet undaunted before the ending of their world.

When the stairs had risen high enough, Ruka reached out, knowing he need hold nothing in reserve, that he could sacrifice all he had left. It brought him the closest to freedom he had ever known.

Wood and iron grew from the white beach, sparking with flame, step after step ascending from their base of metal rods until they disappeared into the storm of ash and sand. Air hissed slowly through Ruka's lungs, and he knew death was close.

Let it come.

All that remained lay before him—a rickety staircase to greatness, the only path for those born with nothing but shame. He was not some hero from the book, not a prophet nor a prince. He was only a man, hidden and buried beneath the shadows and deeds of the dead. Their corpses stared at him now with sunken eyes, and the faintest glimmer of hope.

Redemption, they would have cried, if they could. For us. For you.

Ruka lifted a bent and ravaged sword. He gripped the rail as he set one broken foot before the other, wheezing with a laugh because he knew the truth, as he always had—there was only one way Ruka, son of Beyla, was ever going to reach heaven. He would just have to climb.

Bukayag growled and forced the steps. He dragged his shattered leg but picked up speed as the earth rumbled and shook the stairs, tremors running through the iron in a high-pitched metallic hum. Lightning flared, over and over, and Ruka only wished it would strike him because that would mean it did not strike his people.

"Higher!" he shouted in his Grove, racing now to help the dead build their final structure.

The shadow above whirled in the sky, a maw of inky teeth snarling as a voice boomed with rage.

"You cannot save them, boy. No force on this earth can contend with me."

Ruka kept climbing, knowing the words were not for him. He was too low, too broken—beneath the notice of the gods.

He saw Kale's spirit flash silver in the clouds, wrapped in threads of darkness but slipping the traps like a fish through holes in a fisherman's net. Ruka watched and wished someone else could see—a witness like Egil as the prince weaved through the storm, a hero from the book, magnificent and true.

The stairs swayed further and further in the harsh wind until Ruka feared they'd fall. He imagined the iron rods plunged in the sand being pulled from their makeshift holes, then the bravest farmers and their kin burning alive on the sea, in sight of their new life.

Ruka climbed. He had survived deformity and banishment. He had survived the sea, new lands and kings and the so-called son of heaven. He had sacrificed all, given all, become a monster and abandoned love and even life in a dark woods or an open plain, or exploring the mysteries of the world. He had not done all this to fail.

The fog thinned. As Ruka emerged he found Ando near the swaying top of his stairs, his bloody leg now free of the chain. Ruka tried not to cry out as he picked up speed, forcing his shattered leg to bear his weight. He lifted his sword, knowing the height was still not enough. He would have to jump.

The huge shadow found him first. Wary, hateful eyes turned on Ruka, so familiar—as if they'd suspected, as if they'd known, ready all along to cry out 'of course he's there, this is what life is'.

Ando turned a moment later, face contorted, unmoving as he stared at a thing he did not understand. Ruka leapt from the final stair. He lunged with sword raised as Ando's power surged.

His Grove rocked with an explosion, sound and heat consuming all. Bukayag entered the shield that had deflected his spears, and Ruka felt the heat burning his eyes and nostrils, blinding him and searing his flesh. He closed his eyes, using only memory to see the world as it was, and where to strike.

The iron pierced with an audible gasp. The world seemed to freeze as Ruka hung in the air with a sword through the chest of a stricken god.

He forced burnt eyes open to gaze into Ando's, putting a hand to the thing's shoulder. He pulled himself level, hoping in that moment he understood what killed him was not the blade, not a man nor even a monster, but his own ignorant pride.

With a swift motion, Ruka ripped out the sword. Ando spit blood, his small hands trembling over the wound.

With a backhand stroke, Bukayag hacked off his head.

They fell with the corpse through howling wind, and despite their ruined lungs, his brother laughed the whole way down.

* * *

Kale watched the men fall, too busy to interfere.

The sky pulsed and the clouds pulled towards him, as if he were left holding the rope of some titanic game of tug-of-war. The volcanoes Ando had been holding back began to erupt.

Huge channels of heat sluiced between the rock below the earth, racing for release. Kale knew instantly they were beyond his control, like a ship's hull pierced as the water sprayed. A man couldn't control the ocean, but he could maybe plug the hole.

Kale captured every thread as he raced down, trying to contain Ando's collected power. He couldn't hold it for long, but he needed all of it, and more. Ando had used every thread from the world in every direction, drawing it to him like rivers to the sea.

Kale held the chaos in his hands knowing it would rip him apart unless used. He looked in panic for anything, eyes at first skimming across Ruka's broken body on the sand and moving on. But he looked again. The man's 'shadow' writhed beside him, as if trying to escape, a hole of dark in the world. Kale floated towards him, thinking of their first encounter—trying to send power into the thing to destroy it.

After seeing Ando now, he recognized his mistake. It was almost obvious. Kale was living inside it, fueled by it—they who go, he remembered the spirit's words, and they who stay. Two paths. One of the world, one outside of it. Two opposites, two sides of some elemental coin.

Kale reached for Ruka's struggling shadow. It growled and clawed the air, howling at the golden chain that bound it to the dying man. The threads disappeared inside as if they belonged, like the sky and sea eager to unite. Kale almost smiled imagining the carnage he was about to cause. A petty thought, perhaps, but a dead man had to enjoy the little things.

"Round two," he whispered, reaching deep into the man as he had once feared to do with Amit, looking for the colors and threads that made him what he was. He imagined a fire and a pleasant beach with his brothers, and braced his feet, feeling for a moment again alive and young, powerful and free.

"I forgive you, Ruka," he whispered, and found it was true. "But I'll be honest, I hope this hurts."

Kale pulled with no concern for gentler things, for this wasn't one of those. He wasn't sure if the man or the shadow screamed first.

Chapter 43

Ruka returned to the world in agony. One of his eyes had sealed shut, blood foamed on his lips. His broken limbs spasmed and it felt as if knives dissected him—as if someone lifted his organs just to see what lay beneath.

In the land of the dead, things were worse. Already pieces of his Grove had been ripped away by Ando. Now the grass seemed to burn like oil. The remaining dead ran in every direction, and Ruka felt the same terror as he had as an outcast, listening to the howls of the wolves that would eat his corpse if he died.

"I'll take it, brother," Bukayag cried through clenched teeth. "I'll take it!"

Ruka didn't think so. He blinked and saw fragments of a god, a man standing before him holding the world in his hands—the image of the island prince bathed in starlight, a grin on his face, concentration on his brow.

"Stop," Ruka tried to gasp, then in his Grove: "Islander! What are you doing?"

"Saving this island," whispered the wind. "And maybe you, too."

Ruka watched as his great library collapsed beneath its foundations. He screamed as the earth itself tore, the building and the librarians falling into endless shadow. He turned and ran towards his mother's house.

"You're destroying it!" he cried, tightness in his chest. The sky in Ruka's Grove cracked with power as Kale descended through the mist, body flickering with light. He held out his hand.

"It's time."

Ruka reached the doorway of his mother's house and recoiled. He looked out at all the dead, and the many lifetimes of work. "It's not too late," he whispered. "I can save it."

The prince said nothing, and Ruka held back his tears.

"So much knowledge. It must be preserved, there is still…"

"Re-build it." The prince's voice was gentle, but firm. "It was never this place. It was always you. Now take my hand."

The wetness dripped down Ruka's cheeks. All around him the earth crumbled and fell into nothing, trees, statues and pathways collapsing into the void. It had always been there, he knew, hiding beneath the surface.

"I can't."

The prince stepped forward with a snarl. "All your words. All your talk of courage. And this is what you are?"

Ruka shook, knowing it was wrong. It wasn't death he feared. Not even nothingness.

"She'll be lost," he whispered, hand still holding the wooden frame he had carved with runes. "Beyla. She said go to a place only she and I would know. She hasn't found me. She'll be lost forever in the dark."

Kale's face softened, but not much.

"If Beyla were here, what would she tell you?"

Ruka closed his eyes, unable to stop his shaking. Damn you, he thought. The bastard had probably read every word in his library.

"Just let me die. Have I not done enough? Just let me die!"

"No," growled the prince. "I saved your precious ships, so your life belongs to me. You die when I say. Now take my god cursed hand, you coward!"

Wood splintered as Beyla's house began to break beneath its twisted foundations. Ruka watched as Girl From Trung's Pit fell from the last patch of Beyla's garden, terror writ large in her panicked eyes. He screamed, and leapt from the doorway. Kale caught him.

In the world of the living, his breath wheezed through gasping lungs, and his numb heart beat its last.

"I'll…take it," Bukayag hissed, breath failing as the sky faded and dimmed through blood crusted eyes.

Ruka clung to the prince. He drew his last seax from the scabbard at his hip, the metal glowing like blue flame in the embers of Ruka's dying world. He howled in challenge at the hungry red eyes lurking in the darkness, creatures trapped at the limits of his Grove, looking for weakness, always, always, for invitation.

With his other arm he held Kale's shoulder, waving his steel at the creatures howling for their blood. Together they flew into the dark.

* * *

"Can you hear me?"

A woman's voice mingled with the sound of waves. Though his eyes were closed, Ruka thought he could feel the heat and light of the mid-day sun. He tried to move, and felt aching limbs twitch. He felt his heart beat, and tasted moist, salty air before it entered his lungs.

For a long moment, Ruka wondered if he had found an afterlife. He forced himself to wake, eyes opening in rushed excitement as he reached for the sound of the voice. Above him a shadow loomed, golden hair mixing with the light of the sun. Ruka gasped and blinked, trying to see his mother's face in the brightness.

"The great shaman lives," Dala smiled above him. She wore the robes of her station, though they were wet and stained with sand. She looked behind her and called for water.

Ruka groaned as he rose to sit. He could see half a dozen ships beached on the island, many families coming out gratefully to the shore. A cluster of monks had crested the rocky hill, and on seeing them—with some panic—he scanned but found no sign of Ando's corpse.

He sat and listened to the waves, feeling his breath in and out without difficulty. His legs, face and feet hurt, but compared to the agony he remembered, they seemed hardly damaged.

"Are you in much pain, shaman?" Dala's eyes and hands were assessing him, and Ruka touched his face to find tender flesh, still burnt but already healing.

"It's a good thing you were never pretty," said a familiar voice. Arun stood with the other monks, hands in his cuffs.

Ruka tried to picture his Grove, but found nothing. Instead he found an orderly list of memories, waiting to be plucked at will before his senses. The feel of the sand beneath him was just as urgent, the warm breeze stirring his wounds with an almost glorious pain. He heard no voices, felt nothing but his own will. There was only this place, this reality.

"Islander?" he called and rose through waves of pain, Dala struggling to help him until Arun stepped in to take his weight.

There was no answer on the wind, or anywhere else.

"Are you alright, shaman? What happened here? We saw…well, the truth is, I don't have a clue what we saw."

Ruka shrugged, unable to find the words, a profound sadness at the loss of Kale's presence.

"He saved me. The prince. I don't know why."

"What prince? Who saved you? What was that storm?"

Ruka pictured the prince's flight through the chaos, impossible and true, a great hero with only Ruka to know his deed.

"It doesn't matter now."

Dala was still inspecting his wounds, pulling back torn and bloody clothes to reveal the crust of charred flesh, scraped away to show pink, tender skin. The matriarch shook her head.

"You are truly God's favored son, shaman. I don't know what happened, but by your clothes you look…very harmed. Yet your wounds, they're already healing."

Ruka smiled politely, and turned away. He looked on all the people staring, and was struck again by the desire to live alone in the woods, with nothing but birds and forest creatures.

"Come," Dala tried to pull him towards the ships. "Whatever has happened, come with us to the Tong. We'll make a new life for our people. It's time to reap the fruits of your many labors."

Ruka resisted, and met her eyes. He watched her deeds through the years, first saving him at Alverel—twice—then her reign as matriarch for over a decade. He smiled.

"There would be no paradise without Dala. You have been the will of Nanot, mighty matriarch—the clay that held our world together. Gone is the farm girl who lay discarded in a field."

Dala returned his smile, still trying to move him forward. "As I told you, we share a god. We always have."

Ruka held his ground more firmly now. He patted her hand, a part of him wanting to say nothing more, to ignore it as he always had—but this was a new life. With the prince's grace he lived, and in this new world he would not lie, or live falsely. Never again.

"Would your god forgive our sins?" he asked.

Her beautiful face crinkled in a frown. "What sins, shaman? Bringing our people to paradise?"

"No," Ruka smiled sadly. "For this we should be praised." He waited until she met his eyes. "But I have killed children, Dala. I have tortured and maimed and lived monstrous lies. How will your god see justice done?"

Dala shook her head as if annoyed. "God forgives. You have saved these people. More than once. You have transformed the Ascom for the better. Does this not transcend your…shortcomings?"

Ruka considered this, and shook his head. He hoped that both men and gods truly forgave, instead of forgot, but he could still see the deeds of Kunla, and Kikay, and King Trung, and forgave none of them.

"No, Matriarch. I'm sorry. My god knows both heaven and hell, and that the way between must be hard. Goodbye, Dala. May Galdra keep you."

He walked away and stood on his own, still unsure where he would go. His mind grasped for choices, not as chains to bind him, but at his command. There on the shores of a foreign island, for the first time in his life, he felt the master of his own future, lord of his own mind.

"Bukayag." Dala's voice seemed somewhere between anger and panic. "Our people need you. There is much yet to be done, so much struggle between us and this new land."

Ruka turned towards the monastery. "That's not my name," he said quietly. "And they need only themselves."

The white sand beneath him flit with shadows, and he looked up to see the reds and greens of paradise birds, their plumage more vivid than it had been in a decade. He closed his eyes and let the sun warm his skin, the breeze bring him the salt of the sea.

Thank you, Kale, he thought, thank you for my life. I will never shame you with my deeds.

As one of many choices now that he was free, he turned to the monks of Bato. Arun waited and there were words to say. Ruka realized the ex-spymaster held a letter in his hands, old enough the parchment had frayed and yellowed.

"What's that, pirate?" he gestured, and the killer and monk and king's servant shrugged.

"Doesn't matter." He crumpled it in his pocket and stepped away from the monks, closer to Ruka's side. "What will you do now?"

Ruka still wasn't sure. The piece of him that was Bukayag was not gone, but perhaps tamed—a servant instead of an equal. Already it offered plans, imagining a great fortress on an open plain, every scrap of human knowledge contained in unbreachable walls. But it could wait.

"Go West, I think." He met the Batonian's eyes and smiled. "I could use a pirate."

The monk vanished, replaced by the shrewd old sailor, expression wrapped in a scowl.

"We're in the isles, savage. There's thousands of pirates, most of them out of work."

Ruka felt warmth creep from long dead tissue, a cold organ frozen with a lifetime of practice.

"Good. We could use a crew."

Arun's eyes narrowed yet further, but his feet brought him closer.

"Crew expect payment, and reasonable goals. Not some madman captain raving at the helm. And don't say 'we'."

Ruka laughed, ignoring the pain. "You'll be the captain, pirate, I merely the pilot. And I expect both the kings of Pyu and Tong will be happy to invest in us, with the right persuasion."

"Don't say 'us'." Arun stopped and his brow curved. "You'd follow my commands? You expect me to believe that?"

Ruka walked towards the Lancona, an irresistible urge to dip his feet into the waters. In his mind a true map of the world began to unfold, spherical and huge, covered in unexplored grey. He decided he would color them one ri at a time, the open waters challenge enough for his wits and courage.

"There will be no kings or wars, pirate, only us and the stars and the uncaring sea. We might find a new world, or drown like motes of meaningless dust. Either way, we will be free."

Arun rolled his eyes. "Better if I do the recruiting."

Ruka ignored the stares of the monks and his mother's people, seeing a fear in their eyes that perhaps their world was changing, but they did not yet know how. He walked on, picturing the ship he would build, sleeker than his kingmakers, with even wider and taller sails. He would wade out beyond the world of men, but this time, he would not be running away.

He looked out over the heated waters of the hotsprings, vapor rising like mist on clear ponds. It made him picture Farahi on his balcony in the morning sun, looking out at the sea. Goodbye, he thought, for the first time with closure. I don't know how, old friend, but I suspect you've won, as always.

"Come along, pirate."

Ruka picked his way through the rocks to sit at the edge of the water. He stared into the cloudy pool, lost in the beauty and heat, distracted entirely by his senses.

"A monk for decades," he heard Arun mutter, "a sailor for a few years. Yet ever the pirate."

Paper rustled as the ex-spymaster removed the letter from his pocket, his other hand disappearing into his cuff. From the corner of his eye, Ruka saw him remove his old blue-steel blade. Ruka raised a questioning brow as Arun took a deep breath, then tossed it into the lake.

"Guess I won't be needing it." He sighed, or maybe breathed in relief, then settled down beside Ruka and jammed his feet into the salty spring. "Alright, Savage. But at least tell me about the damn ship."

Ruka did, and in exhaustive detail.

THE END

Epilogue

From the memoirs of Royal Scholar Weng Zhungshu, Ex-First Chancellor, Ex-Steward of the Mint, Official Biographer of the False Son of Heaven.

Some considered it strange that the barbarian heretic should select me to write of his death.

I was, after all, handpicked by the previous emperor, and later removed from office by the now defunct First Chancellor Magda. But the truth is I had never desired a life in court, and the removal had been at my request. While my record and writings should and can be examined elsewhere, I mean only to say this: I had no personal ill will towards the usurper—beyond what honor demands—and this was well known.

There is a common legend regarding the death of the Ashman shaman Bukayag, or 'Ruka', as he preferred to be called, which proceeds thus:

In the final days of his life, wasting of an illness he named 'creeping tumors', the academy elite of Naran and the scholars of Nanzu came to his death bed. All hoped for one last piece of invention—or divine revelation, depending on who you ask. He had been lucid enough, if barely tolerant, and is said to have worked on a final mathematical calculation with the famous (and I daresay overrated) Royal Scholar Zhang II. In his final moments, so the legend goes, he gestured weakly for Zhang to approach, which he did eagerly and without hesitation, leaning with document and quill ready to hear the faintest whisper. Ruka turned, and spit a wad of blood onto the page, grinning as he expired.

Of course this is entirely untrue, save for the illness—I was there when Ruka died—but I don't often refute the legend. It does capture something of the essence of the man.

For posterity's sake, however, I find it important to document those strange days in the final months of his life, and my time with him. The conclusions and other documentation can be found in the official attachments of mathematical formulae, inventions, collected words, and the many 'gifts' given to various parties. For those interested in these official records, they can be found in the Naranian archive—this was demanded of the son of heaven, who reluctantly agreed, though what future emperors will do I cannot say.

What follows here is instead a personal accounting of my time with the False Son—at his invitation— in the months preceding his death in the month of the rat, Year of the Sun 3425, at the approximate age of seventy-six (or 'at least twenty-seven thousand, eight hundred and fifty days from birth', according to him!), and of course, the ostensible reason for my summons in the first place: the instructions in his will.

At the beginning of that same year, I was summoned to the now infamous Great Tower resting between the border of Tong and Naran, to 'take notes'. Ruka was familiar with my work. He had read the biographies of both Yiren Luwei, and Amit 'the fox' Huang , which he called, and I quote: 'the least blathering, most tolerable tripe, from that awful heap of Naranian scholarship'.

Ruka's many inventions had already invaded academic circles: a specific formula to create superior iron alloy; incredible new looms and furnaces, pipes and wells; a complete star chart with yearly patterns that often disagreed with our own, and many, many others. Such things were at first considered court secrets, until we learned he had sent copies of all his ideas and blueprints of his inventions to nearly every royal family, town hall, or temple in the world.

Still, his ideas outside the practical were seen then as mostly madness, heresy, or some other dire form of subversion. Even now, though several mathematical theorems have proven useful, most academics are wary of his conclusions. Indeed, so am I, though perhaps for slightly different reasons.

What the man was like previously I can only surmise. I speak only to the stooped scholar I met in my time at the tower—a giant in size by any standards, strange and obsessive, the now famous eyes sharp and bright as written elsewhere. His body was bent and suffering from inflammation, old wounds dogging his every motion. But his mind was clear. He remained surrounded by servants and students, ambassadors and princes, from across the empire and around the world.

I can confirm for certain that Ruka was a heretic. Whether he was a madman, as most claim, I fear I cannot say. In this I beg forgiveness: but who can tell what part of genius lies beyond mortal reckoning, and which has gazed too long into the abyss?

Our meetings were frequent but inconsistent. Often one of Ruka's messengers would wake me for several sticks of frantic writing, then again in the morning, too early for their master, or myself, to have truly slept much. Usually I found him in his beautiful gardens, staring at tables covered in drawings and scribblings, sometimes in Naranian characters, but just as often in the island letters.

"Finally", was his typical greeting. He would move to papers stacked carefully on his almost endless shelves, but never with bluster or confusion. Ruka never searched for anything. He seemed to know exactly what he meant to find and where, though often needing help with the paper due to his huge and failing hands. I would fetch them, and read aloud while he worked so he could 'ensure I understood.'

Some of what he provided was history. Most was instruction. These are listed in their entirety in the archives, but I will include a few examples here.

In return for assistance in fulfilling most of his wishes, he promised the Naranian state a plethora of secrets. He understood by asking me specifically, he was making me one of the most powerful men in Naran. I pointed this out, at which he rounded rather harshly to say, in his usual manner: "Yes, and if you disappoint me, there are other, far more dangerous men with instructions to destroy you."

This sounds harsh, but did not feel unusually threatening. Many times during the three months in his company I was reminded he had murdered kings, created great walls and machines of death, and indeed, that he could raise the dead. But I never saw such things. He seemed to abhor violence, and in truth not once did I feel afraid for my person, if occasionally for my soul.

His instructions largely regarded the maintenance of his tower, which might more aptly be described as 'a school and library, lodged in the mightiest fortress in the world'.

From the Battle of the False Sons of year 3405, we know this fortress of granite and iron has walls too high for standard war machines, dug and placed so deep in the earth a thousand sappers gave up and fled their doomed master in the night. There are several wells inside. More water flows from underground pipes, and though Ruka never answered, when I inquired if tunnels led from his fortress to elsewhere, his eyes sparkled with condescending pleasure. I accepted this as 'yes'.

Such condescension was the norm. Among his many gifts to the young emperor, Ruka included a strange metal box with no latch or key. When the academy failed to pry it open, and at last through intermediaries a sheepish request was sent to receive the answer, Ruka replied only: 'when a son of heaven can open it, he'll deserve to'. The item remains for now in the royal treasury.

Regardless, Ruka obtained imperial consent to fund the maintenance of half his tower. The other half, he was quick and pleased to remind me, would be maintained by the Tong and her allies.

"No doubt you'll kill each other," he once growled, "but if you could wait a generation, I'd be obliged."

All the servants are employed with the official patronage of several kings, as well as the empire, yet work for the tower. They come from all over the world—it isn't clear exactly how—and can be found studying any number of arcane or practical pursuits. They operated the library, which had such strict instructions that even the most fastidious librarian would swoon. They managed 'attendees', who were given access to the books, and allowed to study as long as they could provision themselves, with no cost to this access—a practice required to continue by Ruka's instruction. "If numbers increase too high," he'd shrugged, "I suggest expansion. But the living rarely heed the dead."

Death was often on the heretic's mind. Many times our sessions would be interrupted by his illness. He would swat at his guts as if annoyed by the buzzing of a fly, then later all but collapse shaking, his ever-present bodyguard at his side before a man could blink. I never learned the identity of this man, though it was clear he was a South islander, perhaps in his late forties. In such moments he would show great concern and tenderness, whispering "rest now," as a man might with a skittish animal.

Answers were often abrupt—the False Son referred to this islander only as 'pirate', often with a string of epithets—but in other moments could be quite personal, and to hear it felt like an intrusion. On one such occasion, sunk into the smaller man's arms, he had gone shaking into one of his many (apparently personally-made) beautiful chairs, his servant soothing him like a child, "Rest awhile. Sleep, and work tomorrow." The shaman had looked to the man's eyes as he spoke, choked, as if close to weeping:

"There's more," he had pointed a gnarled finger to his head. "Wasted soon. Just a little more."

"You've done enough. Sleep."

"No," he'd mumbled, eyes glazed. "It's not mine. I must get it out. There is only deed."

His lithe servant had soothed him and held him with surprisingly strong arms, and carried him to his bed, banishing me until the morning.

* * *

Over the years my colleagues have had many questions of those days. They wanted to know where Ruka came from, who were his parents, and how had he produced his miracles. I admit my own curiosity, but he ignored such questions. The only moments he refrained from discussing our business was when forced to eat, which he did in surprising amounts for a sick old man. At such times he would appear ravenous, as if he hadn't eaten in days. I suspected he hadn't.

His guard watched like a nursemaid until he'd finished, but I found him amiable, so I would sit and ask my questions.

"Do you have any children?" bothered him. He'd looked away and spoken with some finality.

"If I had a daughter, I would have named her Beyla, and made her strong."

"Why did you choose the Mesanite Osco Magda as your First Chancellor, and entrust him with so much power?"

"I made a list of names, and chose one at random."

When I'd stared long enough he'd rolled his eyes and shrugged, but gave no further clue.

As an aside it should be noted the ex-chancellor served his brief two years with something approaching wisdom, given the circumstances. He killed and displaced far less people and land than any son of heaven, and when the Writ of False Proclamation was finally delivered concerning the heretic's rule, he retired peacefully to his homeland. The vassalage of Mesan remains—with a few provisions—but otherwise the foreigner did little enough with his powers, save for a bizarre move to desecrate his own people's tombs, apparently disarming all the corpses. One can never truly understand the behavior of barbarians.

"Why is there such a large graveyard next to your fortress?" I also asked the heretic. "What are all the names? The keepers tell me most have no corpses, or even ashes."

He shook his head, spooning in a mouthful of rice before he met my eyes.

"If the empire kept the dead closer to the living, perhaps they would wage fewer wars."

I didn't bother to explain, of course, that it is well known the empire wages no wars, save to protect its allies. And of course I asked many more questions, a full list of which is provided in the archives. Most answers were equally brief, cryptic, or replaced with questions of his own. Despite his many flaws and heresies, I must admit to a certain enjoyment in the process. You might even say we became friendly, though never 'friends', as my many critics have accused.

Their skepticism isn't entirely unreasonable. It is common knowledge now in the public, but I can say officially here, that I received considerable wealth in gold, ore, and silver from the barbarian, both for my services, and to pay various parties on his behalf. Often these were families from the isles, but also the empire—sometimes noble, but usually common men, who Ruka said he had personally 'wronged' in some way. A comically brief letter of sorts always accompanied it, which read thusly:

There are no words in any tongue to make good my darkest deeds, and you are too late for retribution. Now as ever the greatest vengeance is to forget your tormentors, to grow strong and wise, and succeed wherever they failed. Goodbye.

When I could find no surviving recipient or family member, I was to pay an artist—preferably a sculptor—to create a work in their name, and leave it wherever they lived. This I did to the best of my ability, long after the heretic's death.

Even in his final moments, it must be said, Ruka did not seem a man near death. He maintained a list of things to be explored, and made me promise to take all to the academy. He was, for example, convinced a world existed beyond men's eyes, covering everything like dust.

"It is the only answer to many illnesses," he explained. "Corruption we cannot see, touch or taste—substance or creatures smaller than a grain of salt. You must discover a way to find them."

I never bothered to challenge such things, instead agreeing to all his demands regardless of their insanity. Other future realms of 'inquiry' included his belief that humans could fly (modeled on bird wings), or see with enhanced vision (based on various animal eyes), as well as produce books in great abundance using a 'loom designed to make words'. I'm sure the Royal Scribery is most terrified!

Other ideas were even more outlandish. In his final days, I will never forget his far-away stare, speaking less in his usual gruff manner and more like a poet, or even a priest.

"One day," he'd smiled, staring at the clouds, "man will light fires that never end; you will see what makes the stars, and search the seas and the mountain's heart. Teach your children. Show them the way. Let your deeds ring like bells in the halls of the gods, and the sound will echo as music in the heavens."

I smiled politely, not knowing it would be our final meeting.

He collapsed that afternoon, then lingered for two days and nights. A hundred or more came to see him, most leaving with messages or notebooks I would have paid a ransom to read. The 'pirate' never left his side, and he called for no priest or kin. Near his final moments I was allowed to visit, and it seemed to me he had found a kind of peace.

"Shall we burn or bury you?" asked his servant, and the heretic laughed.

"Leave me in a field," he said. "Give me to the birds."

It was the one wish his servant disobeyed.

The funeral of 'Bukayag' lasted for a full moon as men and women came from the empire to the isles. Princes and warlords, kings and priests—some came in thanks and to celebrate his life, others his death. The queen of the isles came personally, along with a large host of Tong guards and several of her children. That one or two of these are quite pale and tall did little to banish the rumors of a tryst with the heretic two or three decades prior. But there's little evidence and less chance of this being true, so I beg your indulgence of a little gossip.

At the end of the pageantry and chaos, a small army of ashmen from the colonies took his body and left without a word. I would know nothing of this were it not for one of the barbarians—a woman named Zaya, who said she was a skald, and later wrote me (in Naranian!), 'for the continental archives'. She said his body was taken across the sea, far to the South past the mountain they call Turgen-Sar, and a small village called Hulbron, where he was buried in a field.

The False Son has been called many things, both in life and death. To my colleagues and patrons, he will rightfully bear the harshest titles, none needing further elaboration here. In the isles they call him 'The Butcher', in Tong 'The Unbroken', in his own lands 'The Godtongue', and I suspect all had a bit of truth.

In the end, or at least so Zaya told me, his grave was simple and unadorned save for a single line, said to be carved in runes personally by the ashmen's 'matriarch', or queen, which reads thus:

'Here lies Ruka, son of Beyla, who could see in darkness, yet sought the light.'

No doubt my colleagues will find any honor distasteful for a heretic who falsely claimed the throne of heaven. I do not speak to the goodness or evilness of his deeds, which are myriad and unnecessary to repeat here. As a historian, I offer only this—Naranian scholars now describe the world in one of two ways: before Ruka, and after him. I fear it may be so for a thousand years.

But to the man I met in a fortress of knowledge, his great mind turned to the secrets of existence, I suspect it made no difference.

Where to Find More…

1. Check out my flintlock fantasy, starting with The God King Chronicles, available on Amazon.

2. Remember choose your own adventure books? I have a scifi/fantasy 'playbook' story you can check out on your phone or tablet in an app called 'The Living Library' (on Google and Apple).

2. Sign up to my newsletter for news, and the occasional freebie, at www.richardnell.com.

Get in touch…

Email: email@richardnell.com

Twitter: @rnell2

Goodreads: just search for my name

On Reddit: you can find me on r/fantasy (as richnell2)

Acknowledgements

And so it ends. Six years of imagination lashed and bound into a physical thing. Life changed in the process, as it always does; from office meetings and downtown living, to a house basement filled with children's toys; an abandoned career, a lost parent, the immeasurable gain of two daughters. Outside my comfortable life on a neglected prairie there's a new virus and ancient turmoil, but nevermind, we do the only thing we mortals can: we carry on, and renew what we have for the next fortunate things.

I suppose I hate acknowledgment sections. I'll never adequately express the thanks required, leaving those who should be uplifted with at best a half-satisfied grin, or at worst, temporarily abandoned. In either case, accept my humble apologies in advance.

Many of the same stalwart souls thanked in books one and two require further praise. To Rebekah and Jesse Teller, Charles Phipps, ML Spencer, AM Justice, and the many other 'Grimdarklings' who welcomed me into their shadowy hovel for advice, collaboration, and nonsense - thank you. To the many bloggers and reviewers who spend countless hours curating messy art and promoting strangers, as a group - thank you.

In my case specifically I must thank Lukasz Przywoski, Lynn Kempner, Jon Adams, Brittany Hay, Petros Triantafyllou, Petrik Leo, Cameron Scaggs, and Chris Hazen, and I leave many others out. In particular I must thank Mihir Wanchoo, for the many chats and gentle whippings, and his never ending enthusiasm for literature, as well as Adam Weller for his beta reading/editing work, and his terrible, terrible dad jokes.

As ever, thanks to my family for their support and love, and my friends for the free beer and constantly asking where that last book is. Thanks to my readers for making this all possible, particularly to those who reach out or leave reviews or recommend my work - without you, I'm just an idiot talking to myself.

Finally (and perhaps at long last), thank you to my wife, Cherissa, who tolerates this impractical thing. Those years ago she agreed to date a young man in a suit with a promising career, but even so, she married the unemployed writer without complaint. I was probably too busy spewing nonsense to hear those complaints, but still - mahal na mahal kita.

Until next time, dear readers. Look after yourselves, your loved ones and your neighbors, and dream crazy dreams.

-Richard Nell

About the Author

Richard Nell concerned family and friends by quitting his real job in 2014 to 'write full-time'. Now he is an award-winning Canadian author of fantasy, living in one of the flattest, coldest places on earth with his begrudging wife, who makes sure he (and their daughters) eat.

He writes fantasy because all fiction is fantasy, and at least this genre is honest. He doesn't preach because he doesn't have any answers. But he'd like to find them. You are most welcome to come along.

Visit his website here: http://www.richardnell.com

Or contact him at: email@richardnell.com

Table of Contents

Contents

Copyright

Praise for Ash and Sand

Map of the Ascom

Map of Pyu

Summary of Book Two: Kings of Ash

Prologue

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31

Chapter 32

Chapter 33

Chapter 34

Chapter 35

Chapter 36

Chapter 37

Chapter 38

Chapter 39

Chapter 40

Chapter 41

Chapter 42

Chapter 43

Epilogue

Where to find more

Acknowledgements

About the Author